i
OB-
11
i °
CD
, D
; m
UNITED STATES COMMISSION OP FISH AND FISHERIES
SPBISrCER, F. BA.IRD, COIMMISSIONER,
THE FISHERIES
FISHERY INDUSTRIES
UNITED STATES
PREPARED THROUGH THE CO-OPERATION OF THE COMMISSIONER OF FISHERIES
AND THE SUPERINTENDENT OF THE TENTH CENSUS
GEORGE BROWN GOODE
ASSISTANT SECEETAEY OF THE SSIITHGOXIAN INSTITUTION
AND A STAFF OF ASSOCIATES
SECTION III
THE FISHING GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA
^VITH FORTY-XINE CHARTS
EDITBD BV RICHARD RATHBUX
WASHINGTON
GOVKENMENT PRINTING OFFICE
•] 887
ASSOCIATE AUTHOES.
Joel A. Ali.ex : Museum of Comparativo Zoology, Cambridge.
Taeleton H. Bean U. S. Xatioual Museum, Wasbiugton.
James Temple. Brown U.S. National Museum, Wasbingtou.
A. Howard Clark U. S. National Museum, Washiugton.
Captain Joseph W. Collins Gloucester, Massachusetts.
E. Edward Eai'.ll U. S. Fish Commission, Wasbingtou.
Henry W. Elliott Cleveland, Ohio.
Ernest Ixgersoll New Haveu, Connecticut.
David S. Jordan Indiana University, Bloom iugton, Indiana.
LUDWIG KUMLIEN Milwaukee, Wiscousiu.
Marshall MacDcnald U. S. Fish Commission, Washington.
Frederick JIatiier N. Y. Fish Commission, Cold Spring, New York.
Barstet Phillips Brooklyn, New York.
Ricilvrd Ratiibun U.S. National Museum, Washington.
John A. Ryder U. S. Fish Commission, Washington.
CbaRLES W. S.miley U. S. Fish Commission, Washington.
Silas Stearns Pensacola, Florida.
Frederick W. True U.S. National Museum, Washington.
William A. Wilcox .> Boston, MassachuBetts.
II
So^ij
V
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL.
United States National Museum,
, Washiiigtoti, July IS, 1882.
Sir: I have the liouor to transmit herewith, for approval and for publication, Section III of a
general work upon The Fisheries and Fishery Industries of the United States, consisting
of a description of the fishing grounds of Korth America, prepared by Capt. J. W. Collins, Mr.
Eichard Eathbuu, Mr. Silas Stearns, Prof. D. S. Jordan, Dr. T. H. Beau, Mr. F. W. True, and Mr.
Ludwig Kumlien. The work is edited by Mr. Richard Eathbun. It is the ouly report of the
kind ever written. It describes the locations, the characteristics, and the productiveness of the
numerous grounds resorted to by the fishermen of the United States, extending from Greenland to
Mexico, from Lower California to Alaska, and including the fishing grounds of the Great Lakes.
The accompauying charts illustrate the fishing grounds and the surface ocean temperatures of the
eastern coast of North America.
I have the honor to be, very resjiectfully, your obedient servant,
G. BROWN GOODE.
Prof Spencer F. Baird,
United States Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries,
m
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
INTKODUGTIOX. By Kichard Rathbun vii
LIST AND EXPLANATION OF CHARTS xiii
A.— The SEA FISHING GROUNDS of the Eastbkn Coast of NORTH AMERICA
FROM GREENLAND to MEXICO. By Joseph W. Collins ami Richard
Rathbux.
1. Davis Strait 5
2. Tlie Atlantic Coast of Labrador S
3. The Eastern and Sontheru Coasts of Newfoundland l:>
4. The Gulf of Saint Lawrence 10
5. The Outer Coasts of Cai>e Breton and Xova Scotia, iucludiug the Bay of Fundy 23
(5. The Coast of Maine 26
7. The Coasts of Now Hampshire and Massachusetts south to Nantucket 39
8. The Gulf of Maine 42
i). The Southern Coast of New England 46
10. New York to Southern Florida .' 49
11. The Gulf of Mexico, by Silas Stearns 55
12. The Ofl'shore Banks, including the Grand Banks , 61
13. The mackerel and menhadeu fishing grounds of the eastern coast of the United St.itcs T.'>
B.— The SEA FISHING GROUNDS op the PACIFIC COAST of the UNITED
STATES FROM the STRAITS OF FUCA to LOWER CALIFORNIA. By
Davib S. Jordan.
14. The Pacific Coast from the Straits of Fiica to Lower California 79
C— The FISHERY RESOURCES and FISHING GROUNDS of ALASKxV. By
Tarleton H. Bean.
15. The fishery resources of Alaska 81
16. A review of the Alaskan fishing grounds by districts 86
17. Statistics of the Alaskan fisheries in 1880 112
18. Table showing the geograi>hical range of food-fishes in Alaska 113
1).— The FISHING GROUNDS of the GREAT LAKES. By Lvdavig Kumlien and
Frederick W, True.
19. Lake Superior 117
20. Lake Michigau and the Straits of Mackinac 119
Y
VI TABLE OF CONTENTS.
rase.
D.— The FISHING GEOUNDS of the GKEAT LAKES— Continued.
21. Lake Hurou 126
22. Lake Erie 128
23. Lake Outario 131
E.— The GEOGRAPHICAL DISTKIBUTION of FEESH-WATER FOOD-FISHES
IN THE SEVERAL HYDROGRAPHIC BASINS of the UNITED STATES.
By David S. Jordan.
24. The Great L.akes 133
25. The Lakes of Maine 134
26. The Connecticut Eiver Basin 134
27. The Hudson River Basin 134
23. The Delaware River Basin 134
29. The Susquehanna River Basin 135
30. The Potomac River Basin 135
3L TheNeuse River Basin 135
32. The Santee River Basin 136
33. The Savannah River Basin 136
34. The Saint John's River Basin 136
35. The Chattahoochee River Basin 137
36. The Alabama River Basin 137
37. The Mississippi River Basin 137
a. The Lower Mississippi 137
fc. The Upper Mississippi 138
c. The Ohio 139
d. The Missouri 140
38. The Rio Grande Basin 140
39. The Colorado River Bcisin 141
40. The Sacramento River Basin 141
41. The Columbia River Basin 141
42. The S.altLake Basin •- 141
43. Table showing the geographical distribution of the river food- fishes 141
— . ALPmusETic AL Index 145
APPENDIX :
Ocean ti-nipcraturos of the eastern coast of the United States, with (liirty-two chiirts 155
INTRODUCTION.
By Richard Eathbun.
The term "flsliiug ground" is commonly applied to any area in which fishing is carried on,
whether the fish are taken at the surface or at the bottom, whether near the coast or at a consider-
able distance from it. The regions traversed by the mackerel and menhaden, in their periodical
migrations, during the spring, summer, and fall, are classed as the mackerel and menhaden grounds,
and, in the popular mind, belong in the same category with those well defined elevations and
depressions of the sea bottom which are the constant resort of cod and halibut and other bottom-
feeding species. We also speak of the fishing grounds for herring, lobsters, shrimps, oysters, and
sponges, although those species are taken mostly near the shores, while the cod and halibut grounds
are sometimes distant from them several hundred miles.
The main purpose in preparing this section of the Fisheries Eeport has been to describe that
class of North American fishing grounds to which the term more properly belongs, or those areas
of the sea bottom which are known to be the feeding or spawning grounds of one or more species
of edible fishes, and which afford fisheries of greater or less extent. The most important grounds
of this character are located off the eastern coast of North America, between Nantucket and Lab-
rador, this region furnishing by far the most important cod and halil)ut fisheries of the world,
and including the large and well known offshore banks, extending from George's, at the south-
west, to the Flemish Oap, off the eastern coast of Newfoundland. These banks form an almost con-
tinuous series of broad, submarine elevations, stretching a distance of 1,100 geogi-aphical miles,
and with a varying width of 50 to 250 miles. They attracted the attention of early navigators,
and in the period of the first-attempted settlements on the adjacent shores of North America, now
included in the British coast Provinces, were regarded as one of the greatest sources of wealth
then known to the world. The principal maritime nations of Europe soon became interested in
developing the newly-discovered fisheries, France apparently taking the most active part, and every
year large fleets of vessels were sent to fish upon the banks. Colonies were established in con-
nection with the enterprise, and the influence of the Great Banks upon the early settlement of some
portions of our northeastern coast has probably never been estimated at its true value by historians.
It is now nearly four hundred years since these grounds were first fished upon by Europeans,
and their resources are still unfailing ; but the fishing interests have been mainly transferred to
the New World, France alone of European countries having continued to send fishing vessels
across the Atlantic down to 1880. Since then, however, the Portuguese have begun to exhibit
some activity in connection with the cod fishery of the Grand Bank, and in the spring and sum-
mer of 1885 bought several New England fishing schooners and fitted out others from home ports.
Their voyages proving generally successful, they have added more vessels to their fishing fleet
during the latter part of this year, and it is quite possible that, in the course of a few seasons,
they will have firmly re-established themselves in the fisheries of the Western Atlantic. The
Mil INTRODUCTIOX.
FreiicL lishcimeu visit principally the Graud Bank, Saint rierro, liauiiuereau, ami certain portions
of the coast of Newfoundland, on which they have long possessed the right to fish by treaty with
Great Britain. Much English capital is invested in the Provincial fisheries, aud vessels of
other nations than the French and Portuguese come to this country to load witli fish for foreign
markets, but few, if any, ever engage in fishing.
Tiie great oflshore banks are now chiefly resorted to by the fishermen of New England and
the British maritime Provinces, the latter including Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Prince
Edward's Islaiul, Lower Canada, and Newfoundland, but the Provincial fishermen seldom venture
as far south as George's Bank, which is frequented mostly by Gloucester vessels, and a few hali-
but catchers from Southern New England.
Tiie most distant grounds visited by the fishermen of the United States, at the time this
report was prepared, are located in Davis Strait, in the vicinity of Holsteinborg, on the west
coast of Greenland, about C7° north latitude. They consist mainly of rocky banks, with patches
of saiul aud nuid, the depths of water ranging from 20 to 50 fathoms, and abound in halibut,
but cod are scarce, and are taken only in small quantities. In 1884, acting upou information fur-
nished by the United States Fish Commissiou, three Gloucester vessels made excellent halibut
trips to the fishing banks of Iceland, and in the summer of 1885 four vessels from the same port
obtained full fares on the Iceland grounds. Fishing is reported to be mor,c profitable than in
Davis Strait, and this region will probably prove very attractive in the future. Very few United
States vessels now go either to the coasts of Labrador or Newfoundland, or to the Gulf of Saint
Lawrence. No fares of halibut have been taken in those regions since 1881, and during the six
years preceding that date the amount obtained was very small. About 12 or 15 cod fishermen
still resort to the Gulf of Saint Lawrence every summer, but the mackerel fishery has been mostly
transferred to the open waters on our own coast. The mackerel fleet iu the Gulf of Saint Lawrence
from United States ports has, during the past 8 or 10 years, seldom numbered more than 40 or 50
vessels, and during the same period the catch in those waters has probably not exceeded 3 per
cent, of the total catch of the United States lieet.
The fishing grounds indicated on the charts representing the Gulf of Maine, aud the coast-lines
of Maine, New Hampshire, and Massachusetts, are mostly small banks, ledges, and shoals, with
rocky, stony, gravelly, and sandy bottoms, separated by tracts of mud and sand. Upon the eleva-
tions, cod, haddock, i)ollock, and cusk abound, while the muddy areas between constitute the
best known localities for the capture of hake. Although individually of relatively small size, com-
pared with the oifshore banks, these grounds form in the aggregate a very extensive and valuable
fishing region, of much importance to the smaller class of fishing vessels and the boat-fishermen.
From Nantucket westward and southward, to the Gulf of Mexico, the fishing grounds of the same
class are much less numerous than at the north, more widely separated, and often entirely want-
ing over long distances; they are also generally less defined, especiallj" as regards diflerences in
the depth of water, and bottom fishing is not carried on to nearly as great au extent.
At the southern extremity of Florida good bottom fishing is obtained on the edge of the Gulf
Stream, and among the coral reefs, by the Key West market lieet. In the Gulf of Mexico there
is a broad belt of fishing ground, following the general contour of the coast and extending from
the Tortugas Keys nearly to the mouth of the Mississippi Eiver. It has a greatly diversified bot-
tom, consisting in some places of ledges, iu others of sandy, shelly, muddy, aud rocky bottoms,
traversed by gullies, and living corals are said to be abundant on many portions. Fisiiing is con-
ducted in depths of 5 to 40 fathoms, the principal species taken being the red and black groupers
and the red snapper.
INTKODUCTION. IX
Ou the racific coast the sea tisheiies have as yet beeu but little developed, aud such as exist
arc mainly carried ou along shore. No attempts are made to discover oft'shorc grounds, probably
because of the scarcity of markets for the sale of fish. The principal fisheries between the Straits
of Fuca aud Lower California are in the neighborhood of San Francisco, but the grounds resorted
to do not extend seaward beyond the Farallone Islands. In Alaskan waters sea fishing is pursued
mostly by the natives, but rich cod and halibut grounds exist in that region.
Of special sea fisheries, the mackerel, menhaden, and sponging grounds have beeu briefly
treated, and accounts of the fishing grounds of the Great Lakes have also beeu admitted iuto this
section. The mackerel aud menhaden grounds furnish ocean fisheries of great magnitude, in the
same general region iu which are located many of the more important inshore fishing banks and
ledges of the northeastern coast of the United States, and are frequented by large fleets of vessels
built and equipped expressly fcr the purpose. The lake grounds are all situated comparatively
near shore, but often extend into considerable depths of water; they are seldom characterized by
any peculiarities iu the uatuie of the bottom, but are generally favorable localities for the setting
of nets, or passage- ways used by the fish in moving from place to place. The principal kinds of
fish taken are the lake-trout and whitcflsh, the appliances used being chiefly pound-nets, gill-nets,
and seines. In seme places, as at the Sanlt de Ste. Marie, dip-nets are employed from canoes in
the capture of whitefish, and. some hook-aud-line fishing is also done.
In locating aud defining the various fishing grounds, the writers have resorted both to brief
descriptive accounts aud to sketch maps or charts, the latter being employed only where the
grounds are sufficiently well known to permit of their being plotted with at least approximate
accuracy. This has beeu possible for almost the entire eastern coast of North America, but that
region alone has been thus graphically represented.
The information upon which the report is based was derived from many sources. The fishing
grounds of Davis Strait were visited in 1879 by Mr. K. P. Scudder, then an assistant on the
United States Fish Commission ; and he has prepared a full account of his trip, from which we
extract that portion bearing upon the cod aud halibut banks, adding a few notes made by other
observers. The map of the same region was also furnished by Mr. Scudder. As to the inshore
grounds of the British coast Provinces and the grounds of the Gulf of Saint Lawrence, we have
relied in part on Canadian fishery reports, in pait ou accounts received from United States fisher-
men, who have repeatedly visited that region.
The outlines and principal contours of the offshore banks, from the Flemish Cap to, aud
including, Brown's Bank, have been taken mainly from the British Admiralty charts, and those of
George's Bank from the charts of the United States Coast Survey. The data respecting the char-
acteristics of those banks, their productiveness and their history, were almost entirely brought
together by Capt. Joseph W. Collius, whose personal experiences for many years iu the fisheries
ef every part of that extensive region entitle his statements and opinions to our fullest confidence.
The same author is also to be credited with obtaining most of the information concerning the fish-
ing grounds of the Girlf of Maine and the New England coast north of Cape Cod, many of these
grounds having likewise come within his personal observation. The account for Southern New
England, New York, and New Jersey was prepared from inforuiation procured by Mr. E. Path-
bun directly from reliable authorities, and that for the Southern Atlantic coast maiuly from the
observations of Mr. P. E. Earll. The report upon the fishing grounds of the Gulf of Mexico was
furnished complete by Mr. Silas Stearns, of Pensacol:i,Fla., one of the best iufoimed authorities on
the sea fisheries of our southern coast. Prof D. S. Jordan, who repoi ts upon the western coast of the
United States, aud Messrs. Kumlieu aiul True, who prepared the account lor the Great Lakes,
X INTRODUCTION.
based their descriptions on observations made while investigating the fisheries of those regions, on
behalf of the fishery census of 1880. Dr. T. n. Bean's report upon Alaskan resources and
fishing grounds is the result of studies made upon numerous collections of fishes received from
that Territory, from time to time, during many years, supplemented by personal observations
in the field during a trip to Alaska in 1880.
With respect to the fishing grounds of Eastern North America, a few additional words of
explanation are necessary. The outlines of a fishing ground seldom conform to the contour lines
used on hydrographic charts to define the limits of a bank, ledge, or other inequality of the sea
bottom, as the fishes are not always influenced so much by differences in the depth of water (within
certain limits) as by the abundance of food or other essential conditions, among which temperature
probably enters as an Important factor. A fishing ground may, on oue side, have a less depth than
25 or 30 fathoms, and on the other descend to depths of 50, 60, or even, in some cases, several hun-
dred fathoms, the same siiecies of fish sometimes occurring at both extremes. Many of the data
furnished by the ordinary class of hydrographic work are, therefore, entirely unsuited to fishery
jiurposes, and it is of the greatest importance that special surveys be undertaken in the immediate
interest of the fisheries, and with the object of ascertaining the full extent and character of all the
larger grounds that may be profitably resorted to by our fishermen. Fishing' grounds are con-
stantly changing in iiroductivcness, and any survey bearing upon them should be made contin-
uous, in order that the changes may be noted and their causes explained, if possible.
Such a work as this belongs within the province of the now existing United States Commission
of Fish and Fisheries, and so far as the means at its disposal have permitted, its researches in this
particular have been carried on with thoroughness and precision. Until within a very few years,
however, this Commission was provided only with small A'essels, with which it was impossible to
extend the explorations much beyond those areas commonly entitled the inshore grounds, or beyond
the boundaries of the United States. In 1883, the Commission was, for the first time, supplied with
a thoroughly reliable sea-going steamer, capable of visiting any part of the oceanic grounds, and
it has already collected many important data bearing upon the great banks of the northeastern
coast, the mackerel and menhaden grounds, and the fishing areas of the Gulf of Mexico. New
fishing grounds of great value have already been discovered, and new species of edible fishes have
been introduced to the markets; but this work, so far as the steamer Albatross is concerned, has
only just begun, and in the near future may be expected to add greatly to our knowledge of the
fishery resources of our country. The series of investigations by the Albatross being entirely
subsequent to the preparation of this volume, no account of it will be found on the following
pages.
The above remarks will serve to indicate how diflicult it is to locate, and especially to plot with
distinct outlines, many of the fishing grounds along our coast, particularly as very few of the in-
shore grounds are in any way indicated on the Coast Survey charts. For those that have been
previously marked out, as in the case of defined banks and ledges, we have relied in part on pub-
lished charts, in part on information furnished by fishermen, by means of which latter it has often
been possible to greatly perfect the outlines, The work of plotting nearly all the inshore grounds
has been first attempted in connection with this volume, the data having been mostly obtained
directly from the fishermen who are constantly resorting to them, and some of whom have drawn
the outlines themselves. Every precaution has been taken to procure such information only from
reliable persons, and to verify the same by other means wheiever possible; and although it is not
expected that absolute accuracy has been reached in all cases, especially as regards distances, the
fishermen having to rely mainly on their judgment in this matter, it is probable iliat the positions
INTRODUCTION. XI
aud outlines assigned to the grouuds are, in the main, correct. In resorting to offshore grounds,
the fishermen make use of a patent log for determining distances, aud also ascertain their position?
by observations for latitude aud longitude, and their statements respecting localities at a distance
from shore are as reliable as could be obtained from any source.
The limited time available for the preparation of the account of the fishing grounds of Eastern
North America jirevented the iucoriioratiou of materials bearing upon their temperature, currents,
aud general natural history characteristics — subjects that cannot be ignored in the study of the
fishery resources of any region. Many data of this character have been obtained by the United
States Fish Commission, and, although some of them have been already published in brief reports,
the greater portion are still in process of elaboration, aud will be issued at a future date in such
form as to conveniently supiilement this report.
The text composing this section was finished and seut to the priater in 1882. Delays in print-
ing and in the preparation and engraving of the charts have enabled the writers, in connection with
the latter, to add much information obtained since 1880, especially respecting the cod and halibut
fisheries of the large offsLore banks. This new material is contributed by Captain Collins, and is
the result of studies continued through many years, and based mainly upon his own observations
and those of the Gloucester fishermen directly concerned in the facts recorded. It brings the his-
tory of the more important cod and halibut fisheries down to the spring of 1885, and notes the
principal changes that have taken place in recent years in the character and richness of the dif-
ferent parts of the ofifsbore banks.
The charts have been drawn by Mr. C. E. Gorham, assistant on the United States Pish Com-
mission, and engraved by the Photo-Engraving Company of New York. All distances recorded
with respect to the eastern coast of North America are in nautical miles.
Washington, December 30, 1885.
[Note. — Since this introduction was put in type it has been found possible to add to this
report a brief discussion of the surface ocean temperatures along the Atlantic coast, with a series
of thirty-two graphic charts, which are given at the end of this section.]
LIST AND EXPLANATION OF THE CHARTS REPRESENTING THE SEA FISHING GROUNDS
OF THE EASTERN COAST OF NORTH AMERICA.
1. List of Charts.
Page. "
CnAiiT Jso. 1.— The i'isbiiig Gi'i>uik1s uf Uavis Straits •'''
Chaut No. 2.— TUe Flemish Cap ''1
Chart No. 3.— The Banks of Newfounillaud *j'-
Chart No. 4. — The Banks off the coast of Nova Scotia <'"
Chart No. 5.— The Fishiug Gioimds of the Gulf of Saint La-nrence Ki
Chart No. G. — Fishing Grounds iu the vicinity of East port, Maine -4
Chart No. 7.— Fishing Grounds from Nova Scotia to Penobscot Bay, Maine ii*)
Chart No. 8. — Fishing Grounds from Penobscot Bay, Maine, to Cape Ann, Massachusetts i'f)
Chart No. 9. — Fishing Grounds near Monhegan Islaud, Maine 33
Chart No. 10. — Fishing Grounds from Cape Ann to Buzzard's Bay, Massacliusetts 30, 4.">
Chart No. 11. — George's Bank '1
Chart No. 12. — Fishing Groimds from Gay Heqd, Massachusetts, to Cape Henlopcu, Delaware 47
Chart No. 13. — Fishing Grounds from Capo May, New Jersey, to Cape Hatteras, North Carolina fd
Chart No. 14. — Fishing Grounds from Cape Hatteras, North Carolina, to Cape Komaiu, South Carolina y>i
Chart No. 15.— Fishing Grounds from Cape Eomain, South Carolina, to Saint Augustine, Florida ■'i:'>
Chart No. 16.— Fishing Grounds of the Gulf Coast of the United States. Prepared by Mr. Silas Stearns So
Chart No. 17. — Sponging Grounds of the Coast of Florida. Prepared by Mr. Silas Stearns ■'>!?'
2. Explanations of Charts 3, 4, and 5.
The following notes are based on data mainly obtained previous to 1880, but, unfortunately, not available at
that time for insertion in the body of the test, to which they now serve as an appendix. They have reference, for the
most part, to the extensive halibut and cod fisheries of the important banks lying off the coasts of the British mari-
time Provinces, and arc intended more especially to call attention to certain localities in which good iishing had been
obtained down to the close of 1879, or the early part of 1860, the year in which the investigations respecting tbcni
were mostly made. A few facts of more recent date have also been added. The years in which good fares were
obtained are generally mentioned, and these explanations, iu connection with the charts to which they relate, furnish,
therefore, imjiortant data of historical interest, as well as regarding the relative value of different parts of the several
fl^hing grounds in past years.
Changes are constantly takiug place in the abundance of fish on all the lai-ge fishing banks. In many instances
these changes are of only a temporary nature, and if fish are scarce one year, Ihcy may be abundant agaiu the next.
The halibut apparcntl.y furnish an exception to this rule, and good grounds, once depleted, have seldom been known
to regain their former status. A few instances are, however, on record, where old and seemingly worn-out grounds
have again afforded a good halibut fishery, but such cases are said to be rare, and the facts are regarded as favoring
* Refer to the pages of the text where the grounds are described.
XIV EXPLANATION OF CHARTS.
the presuiuptiou lliat schools of halibut whidi have been thiuueil out and scattered by incessant lishiu^ require ai
least many years to recover their former size, or even to show a iierceptible increase. The history of the halibut
fishery of tho Great Banks covers a comparatively short period, and future observations may correct some of the i)ro-
vailing opinions respecting that fishery. These remarks do not apply to the regular migrations of the halibut, which
have been elsewhere discussed.
Fewer references are made to the localities of cod than to those of halibut fishing, and the former relate mainly
to certain areas on the Grand Bank which arc deserving of special notice. They also furnish an idea of the prin-
cipal localities where fishing is carried on in the different seasons, and the character of the bait used indifferent
places.
Special localities are designated by Roman numerals to facilitate reference. All of the fishing schooners meu-
tioned by name belonged to ports in the United States and most of them hailed from Gloucester, Mass.
CuAiiT No. 3. — TnE Banks of Newfoundland.
Bank of Saiui Pierre. — Cod and halibut, although once abundant on this bank, were scarce during the few years
immediately preceding 1880, and during that period not a single fare of halibut was taken in depths of less than
70 to 100 fathoms, and no good cod fishing was obtained there by American vessels. Since 1880, however, cod have
apparently returned to Saint Pierre in as great abundance as ever, and we understand that several vessels from New
England secured good fares there in a short time, during 1883 and 1884. Halibut were still scarce up to the last-
mentioned date. From 18G5 to 1872 this bank was much resorted to for halibut. The spots inclosed by the dotted
lines marked I on this chart, and XIV on the chart of the Gulf of Saint Lawrence, were formerly good halibut grounds,
but these are not the only localities where this species was taken on the bank.
I. The space inclosed by the dotted line is the so-called " Southern Shoal Water" of the Bank of Saint Pierre,
and was formerly the most important halibut ground on the bank.
II. In this position, in a depth of 140 to 170 fathoms, halibut were abundant in 1878, and from May to Septem-
ber of that year the schooner Gwendolen took four or five good fares on a small area of hard bottom, surrounded by
mud. Halibut have occasionally been taken since then, but are less common than when the place was fir.st discovered.
Green Bank. — The gullies separating Green Bank from Saint Pierre and the Grand Bank, and the extensive deep
plateau that extends from Saint Pierre to the Grand Bank, along the southern borderof Green Bank, constitute together
one of the mest important halibut grounds that has been recently discovered. In their spring migratious, the halibut
follow nearly along the course indicated by the dotted lino running along the edge of the Grand Bank to the Bank of
Saint Pierre. Since the deep-water halibut fishery was begun, in 1875, halibut have been abundant along the edge of
the slope south of Green Bank, and have generally been most numerous from February to May. In some years they
have been plentiful all summer and oven in the fall. In the fall of 1882 one or more good fares of cod were obtained
just south of this bank, in 65 fathoms of water.
III. The schoouer Nathaniel Webster caught a fare of 8O,0C0 pounds of halibut in this position, in JIarcli, 1879,
and many other large fares have been taken in the same locality.
IV. Excellent fishing ground for halibut, in depths of 90 to 140 fathoms, from May to October, 1875. In April,
1870, halibut were again very abundant in 80 to 'JO fal bonis, and were noticed to be moving slowly westward along
the edge of the ground. In the position marked, the schooner Howard took a fare of 95,000 pounds of halibut in a
few days, and eight or ten other vessels obtained fares at the same time, ranging from 75,000 to 115,000 pounds each.
Halibut were found here again, March 25, 1877, March 15, 1878, and February, 1879. In the years succeeding 1675,
halibut, though abundant in tiie late winter and spring, were generally scarce in the summer and fall. In 1882, how-
ever, they were exceedingly plentiful during the entire summer and a part of the fall.
V. Halibut abundant in October, 1875.
VI. Large catches of halibut made in April, 1877.
The Grand Bank or Great Bank of Neiefoundliind. — VII. (iood halibut fishing found by the schooner Ocean IJello
at this place, in .52 fathoms, in April, 1877.
VIII. First fishing for fresh halibut on the Grand Banks in upwards of ICO fathoms at this place, in April, 1875.
The fish wore very abundant in depths of 100 to KiO fathoms.
IX. Very good halibut fishing, February, 1379.
X. The schooner G. G. Kidder found halibut abundant here in the .spring of 1874 in 90 fathoms, and obtained the
first fare of fresh halibut taken in deep water on the Grand Banks.
XI. The area inclosed by the dotted line afforded excellent halibut fishing during several years, the season lasting
from February until May. Since 1877 the fish have been scarce here.
EXPLANATION OF CHARTS. XV
XII. In March, 1877, tlio schooner Howard caught 25,000 i)oiinds of halibut at this place in one day, iu 00 fathoms.
XIII. Good halibut fishing, January and February, 1879.
XIV. Halibut very abiindaut March, 187G, and ujauy good fares obtained. In Way, 1S79, (ho schooner Mary F.
Chi.sbolm secured a faio of 40,000 pounds.
XV. In the iuclosed area many barge farts of halibut were caught in Februaiy and March, 1S(:G and 1667. At the
spot marked with the cross the schoouer Centeuuial obtaiued 100,000 pounds in one trip.
XVI. The crosses iudicate the position of the halibut fleet iu January, 1878, where good fares were obtained in
depths of IGO to 200 fathoms. Halibut were scarce hero in 1879.
XVII. Halibut were very abundant iu the positions iudicated by the crosses in the springs of 1876 and 1877, and
fine fares were obtained iu 150 to 300 fathoms. The edge of the Grand Bank ou this side, from its southern end to 44°
north latitude, has been one of the best halibut grounds iu the Western Atlantic ever siuce the discovery of the deep-
water lishery, and many large fares have been taken at all seasons. The halibut are, however, somewhat erratic iu
their movements, and are not equally abundant at all times. Those found to the southward of latitude 44° north
appear to be moving oil" from the bank into water too deep for the fishermen to follow them, and all trace of them i.*
lost. North of latitude 44° north they seem to be working along the edge of the bank, and often it is not difKcult to
trace their summer migrations in the early part of the season.
XVIII. In this position the schooner Stirling, on a "salt trip," made a large catch of halibut in 130 fathoms in
April, 1873. This is the first recorded instance of deep-water halibut fishing on the Grand Banks.
XIX. The area iuclosed by the dotted line was a favorite halibut ground iu the wiuter and spring for several
years previous to the beginning of the deep-water fishery. The schools of halibut were generally migrating towards
the west and northwest. This area also furnishes excellent cod-fishing, and is much resorted to by fishermen from the
United States, the British Provinces, and France. In the space iuclosed at its southern end, and marked "Good
Cod Grounds" — cod were very abundant in June, 1877. Good cod-fishing is still found here almost every summer, but
halibut are no longer taken in any considerable numbers.
XX. In the position indicated by the cross many fine fares of halibut were caught prior to 1875. This locality
is noted for the exceedingly large faro obtaiued by the schooner Mary Carlisle, in April, 1871, which paid the crew
shares of $236 each, the largest ever realized from a fresh halibut trip.
XXI. Halibut abundant iu January, 1876.
XXII. This ground, known as the "Eastern Shoal Water," was chiefly resorted to for halibut from 18G4 to 1871.
After 1869, however, but few halibut were caught here except in the fall. Good fall trips were made as late as 1874.
The dotted cross in the western part of the inclosed area indicates where the schooner Mary G. Dennis took a large
fare iu the spring of 1868, and that in the southeastern part where the schooner N. H. Phillips, iu October, 1871,
obtaiued a fare that realized one of the largest stocks ever made on a fresh halibut trip up to that date. Up to
withiu a few years of 1860, the Eastern Shoal Water was also a favorite place for cod in the fall, and sometimes at
other seasons. Of late it has not been as much resorted to asformerly. It was ou thisgrouud that the " giant squid"'
were found in snch large numbers in the fall of 1875.
XXIII. Halibut were abundant along this edge of the bank in 1881 and 1882, between 43° 30' and 44° 10' nortfi
latitude, and in depths of 125 to 300 fathoms. The prevalence of icebergs aud the strength of the Arctic currcut
render fishing here very difficult aud dangerous.
XXIX. Halibut were abundant on and near the Virgin Rocks during the summers from 1868 to 1S70, inclusive,
and several large fares were obtaiued. Since 1871 no catches of importance have been made. The Virgin Rocks
have been for many years a favorite locality for hand-Iiuo dory fishermen engaged in the cod fishery, and in the
summer a fleet of vessels lies near the shoals, each one sending out from 10 to 20 dories. The cod average somewhat
smaller than on other parts of the Grand Banks, being such as are called "mixed fish" iu New England.
XXX. Good cod fishing obtaiued ou trawls with salt clam bait and "shack," April, 1879.
XXXI. Good catches of cod made with capelin bait in June and July, 1877 and 1878.
XXXII. Cod fishing with shack bait good in June aud July, 1874 and 1878.
XXXIIL This grouud nearly always affords good cod fishing from May to July, with herring, capelin, andsqnid
bait. The fish were very abundant in June, 1879.
XXXIV. Cod very abundant iu June, 1875.
XXXV. Good cod fishing with herriug bait. May, 1879.
XXXVI. Good catches of cod with squid bait were made iu August, 1879.
XXXVII. Good cod fishing with squid bait, July, 1879.
SEC III r-II
XVI EXPLANATION OF CHAET
XXXVIII. XXXIX. Good cod fishing with fu]K!lin bait, June, lb79.
XL. Good cod fishing with squid bait iu August and September, 1879. The inclosed area iioitli of tliis ground
furnished an abundance of cod iu July, 1678, when squid bait was used.
Barren ground. — Good fares of cod have been occasionally reported from this area, but we have not been able to
obtain any reliable information respecting them.
Chart No. 4.— The FisniNC. Uanks off the Coast of Nova Scotia.
Seal Island Ground.— This ground is now chiefly valued for the cod fishery which it affords from the first of May
to October of each year. It is mostly resorted to by a large fleet of vessels hailing from ports in the vicinity of Cape
Sable, Nova Scotia, and commonly called the " Cape Fishermen." These vessels spend most of the season fishing on
this ground. A few United States vessels, fishing with hand-lines, frequently resort to It, and it was formerly a
favorite locality for h.ilibnt, but is not at present.
I. Halibut were found iu abundance at this place for a few days in June, 1878.
II. In this position, off the northwestern part of George's Bank, in depths of 110 to 160 fathoms, many good fares
of halibut were obtained by hand-line fishermen iu 1876 and 1877.
III. The schooner Alice G. Wouson made good fares of halibut in this vicinity, in depths of 160 to 200 fathoms,
during several snccessive years preceding 1880. The prevalence of strong tides and the frequent parting and loss of
trawl-lines by their becoming entangled iu the large tree corals, Paragorgia arbona and Primvoa reseda, which are
numerous on the bottom, have deterred others from fishing here, and no satisfactory results have been obtained by
•other vessels.
IV. In the fall of 1877, halibut were abundant along the region indicated by this dotted line, to the westward of
Le Have Bank, but since then they have been scarce. The crosses at the eastern end of the line indicate positions
where large fares of halibut were obtained from 1877 to 1879. At the easternmost position, the schooner Julia Wood
caught 80,000 pounds of halibut in December, 1877. The depths fished in vary from 100 to 400 fathoms.
Sable Island Bank. — The Pot Ground, also called the " Tongue Ground," from its fancied resemblance to a tongue,
is frequently an excellent locality for cod fishing in April and May. Since 1880, good fares of cod have been caught in
■depths of 60 to 90 fathoms on the edge of the bank, SE. by S. to ESE. from the eastern light of Sable Island. From
1852 to 1873 certain localities on Sable Island Bank, in depthsof 30 to 60 fathoms, were much resorted toby the halibut
fishermen, and since the discovery of the deep-water fisheries, in 1875-'76, many excellent fares have been obtained on
the "fall off" of the bank along its southern and eastern edges.
V. This locality, on the eastern part of Sable Island B.auk, was a favorite winter halibut ground from 1853 to
1873. It was fished on in the winter as lato as 1877, but good fares have seldom, if ever, been taken since 1873.
VI. Several good fares of halibut taken between 1853 and 1868.
VII. Good halibut ground in 1852.
VIII. Good fares of halibut obtained between 1853 and 1873.
IX. Good halibut fishing ,at intervals from 1853 to 1870. The schooner William T. Merchant obtained a large fare
liere in February, 1868.
X. One faro of halibut has been taken on this steep incline, which slopes rapidly from 150 to 400 fathoms.
XI. The cross indicates a locality where many excellent fares of halibut were taken from 1877 to 1879, inclusive,
iu depths of 150 to 300 fathoms.
XII. One of the best deep-water halibut grounds on Sable Islaud Bank. Many good fares have been obtaintd;
the bottom is covered with bush and tree corals.
XIII. The schooner Howard caught 45,000 pounds of halibut ;.t this pl.icc in eight days, iu August, 1877.
XIV. Good fares of halibut taken in 60 fathoms, in 1853.
XV. In this position, in July, 1877, the schooner William Thotupsou obtained a fare of 100,roO pounds of halibut,
and the schooner Howard, fishing only six days, a fare of 82,000 pounds, in depths of 125 to 200 fathoms. Many other
good fares have been taken iu this vicinity at differeut seasons, and the edge of flio bank, over a distance of more
than 60 miles, was a favorite locality for halibut up to the close of 1879.
XVI. Position where the type specimen of the gold-banded bush coral, Ceratoisi.'i ornala. was taken in 1S78. This
is one of the most rare and beautiful of the several species of corals obtained on the fishing grounds by the Gloucester
fishing schooners.
XVII. Good fares of halibut obtained by the schooner Gertie E. Foster, in 1875-76.
XVIII. Good fares of halibut taken in deptlis of 40 to 50 fathoms, from 1853 to 1855, inclusive.
EXPLANATION OF CHARTS. XVII
XIX. The Gully is a celebrated Iialibut region. It extends from 08° 58' to ^0° 57' west longitude, .and from
44° 04' to 44° 27' north latitude. In its southern vart, between 44° 04' and 44° 10' north latitude, there is
located a small but important bank, described below. The crosses in the western part of the Gully, numbered XIX,
indicate localities where halibut were found in abundance from 1874 to 1876, inclusive. The other crosses all refer to
large catches of halibut made from 1877 to 1879, inclusive. In the three years last mentioned, enormous quantities
of halibut were taken from this region, and to such an extent were its resources exhausted thereby that
in the three or four years immediately following 1879 halibut were exceedingly scarce in the Gully, and during
some seasons the fishing was quite unprotitable. In 1884-1885, however, a few good fares were obtained. The
small bank in the southern part of the Gully, above mentioned, is separated from Banquereau and Sable Island
Bank by narrow gullies, about 150 fathoms deep, the average depth of water upon the ^ank itself being about
100 fathoms, and the bottom consisting of coarse pebbles, gravel, and stones. Toward the northward the watei
deepens to 150 fathoms, and toward the south the bottom rapidly falls otf to depths of 500 or 600 fathoms. Fishing
was carried on in the Gully some years before the bank was discovered, and as it had never been surveyed or
plotted on the charts, the fishermen supposed its position was occupied by deep water. It was probably first noticed
.about 1877, and during a few subsequent years exceedingly good halibut fishing was obtained along its southern
edge; but the fish are much less abundant now than they were in the beginning.
Banquereau. — The cod obtained on this bank are, as a rule, small, and it is not as mucli resorted to now as formerly
by fishermen from the United States. A limited number of hand-line dory fishermen and a few trawlers comprise the
American fleet of cod fishermen. French vessels, using trawls, fish extensively on the bank north of 44° 30' north
latitude, bat are seldom seen farther south. This bank is celebrated for its valuable halibut fisheries, which occur in
the deeper water along the edges. The most noted of these are the "Southwest Prong" and the deep plateau off the
eastern end.
XX. The first deep-water halibut caught on the Southwest Prong were taken iu this position in 1876. The other
crosses indicate where large catches were made from 1876 to 1679, inclusive.
XXI. Nearly 500,000 pounds of halibut were taken iu this position, on a spot not more than one mile square, in
the summer of 1879.
XXII. This locality, called the "Stone Fence" by the fishermen, is noted for the great abundance of corals grow-
ing on the bottom. On the Stone Fence and immediately to the north of it, m.any large fares of halibut have been
caught in depths of 150 to 230 fathoms. This locality has shown less figns of becoming depleted than any other
lying to the west of it.
XXIII. Halibut were abundant at this i)lace in April, 1879, and several good fares were obtained.
Misaine Bank. — Scarcely anything has been known respecting the fisheries of this bank, and it has generally been
regarded by the fishermen as comparatively barren ground. In the summer of 1885, the U. S. Fish Commission
steamer Albatross, while engaged in explorations in this region, made a series of trials with hand-lines across the bank
from its eastern to its western edge, and found cod fully as abundant as on auy of the adjacent fishing grounds, and
of as large size and good quality as are taken on Banquereau.
Chakt No. 5.— The Fishing Grounds of thk Gulf of Saint Lawrence.
I. The first halibut taken on the coast of Anticosti Island were caught in this vicinity in 1869.
II. On this coast, between 61° and 62° west longitude, halibut were sometimes moderately abundant, close in
shore, in the summer season prior to 1875. Since then no important catches have been made.
III. In the immediate vicinity of Red Isl.and the fishing schooner Ocean Belle made a, fare of 80,000 pounds of
halibut iu the summer of 1870. As explained in the test, however, this region is controlled by the French, and is not
now resorted to by United States vessels.
IV. Moderately large fares of halibut were obtained at the Bay of Islands by American vessels in 1872 and 1874,
but nothing of importance has been done since then.
V. The first catch of halibut at Green Point was made in June, 1871, by the schooner William T. Merchant, and
in June and July of 1878 and 1879 several very large fares were obtained at the same iilace.
VI. Afewsmallfaresof halibut were obtained in the summer season about Bryon Island and on the shoal between
the island and Bird Rocks. This region, however, has never been an important one for any of the Gulf fisheries.
VII. The area inclosed in the dotted line is the so-called "FUnt Island Halibut Ground," on which fares of hali-
but were obtained from 1861 to 1875, especially during the months of May and June. Since the latter date, however,
this ground has been practically abandoned by the halibut fishermen.
VIII. In 1861 the schooner Centre Point obtained a fare of 60,000 pounds of halibut in the narrow strait between
Scatari Island and Cape Breton. This is supposed to be the first fare of halibut taken in this vicinity.
XVIII EXPLANATION OF CHARTS.
IX. In this locality the Rcliooucr Carl Schurz secured a fare of 90,000 pounds of halibut in April and May, 1879.
Many other good fares have been taken in the .same place, and also a short distance to the northwestward, in tho
winter and spring.
X. A fare of halibut was taken at this place by tho schooner C'eutenuial in May, 1878.
XI. A fare of 100,000 jjounds of halibut by the schooner M. H. Perkins in May, 1879.
XII. Miinielon Beach halibut grounds. Halibut were very abundant here in the summer from 18G8 to 1870, but
have been scarce since then.
XIII. Pass Island halibut grounds. Fish were very abundant for two or three seasons, from 1870 to 1872, over
an area not exceeding three miles across, and with a depth of about 160 fathoms. Many good fares were obtaiued,
but the iish have been scarce since 1872.
XIV. Between 18G5 and 1870 many halibut were caught on tho northern part of Bank St. Pierre, within and
ne;ir the dotted line. .
I
Fishery Imlastrios of the rnileil Stntes, Sect. HI.
THE FISHERIES AND FISHING INDUSTRIES OF THE UNITED
STATES.
FISHIN^a-GKOUNDS
A.— THE SEA FISHING-GEOUNDS OF THE EASTERN COAST
OF NORTH AMERICA FROM GREENLAND TO MEXICO.
By Captain Joseph W. Collins and Kichakd Eathbun.
1. THE FISHING-BANKS OF DAVIS STRAIT.
The most distant fishing-banks resorted to by the American fishermen on the Atlantic coast
are those of Davis Strait, off the coast of Greenland, which abound in halibut and also furnish
some cod. They are not much visited by fishermen, on account of the short duration of the fishing
season, the possibility of being detained by ice in the passage out, the uncertainty of obtaining a
full fare, and the great distance of the grounds from the fishing ports. Notwithstanding all this
however, quite a number of successful trips by Gloucester halibut vessels are on record, and were
the localities better known and better mapped out, they might develop into very profitable
fishing grounds. During the summer of 1879, Mr. N. P. Scudder, assistant on the United States
Fish Commission, made a trip to this region on the Gloucester schooner " Bunker Hill," and from
his re])ort of the cruise we extract the following account of the fishing-banks and their chief
characteristics.
From the want of proper surveys it is impossible to mark out, with any degree of accui-acy,
the exact position and entire extent of these fishing-banks. The Danish charts indicate a line
of soundings just off the coast of Greenland, extending from near Disco Bay in the north (about
latitude 08=' 15' north) to near Lichtenfels in the south (latitude 63° 20' north), and ranging in
depth from fourteen to seventy-five fathoms and more. Over very extended areas, however, the
depths are not greater than thirty fathoms. It is more than likely that these soundings continue
ftirther along the coast toward Cape Farewell, for the reason that icebergs become stranded there,
but there is no indication of them on the charts. The distance of the center of this line of soundings
from the Greenland coast is about twenty miles, and the fishing-grounds have been stated to lie
from twenty to forty miles from land. Immediately outside of the banks, and on the inner side
also, there is much deeper water, the slopes being often very abrupt. Only a small area of these
fishing-banks have been visited by American fishermen — that portion lying between Holsteiuborg
and Sukkertoppen, and off Cape Amalia.
6 FISUIKG-GROUNDS OF NOKTH AMERICA.
That halibut arc to be fouud throughout their entire extent is more than probabh', for the
species is identical with that taken on the Grand Banks, and we should naturally infer that these
fish would be found in all favorable situations within the limits uf their distribution. It is also
reported that Capt. Easmus Madison, who has made several trips to Greenland, set his trawls for
halibut farther to the south (probably off Godthaab) and found them verj' abundant, but was
unable to secure manj' on account of the numerous ground sharks, which destroyed his trawls.
The depth of water on the banks ranges from twenty to fifty fathoms, and this makes fishing
easier than on the Grand Banks, where halibut can be fouud abundantly only along the outer
slopes in much deeper water. The inner edges of the banks slope abruptly, so as to form between
the banks and the mainland a long and narrow submarine valley, whose depth has not been de-
termined. The surface is of a varied character, though generally rocky, with sandy and muddy
spots scattered here and there.
The fauna of the banks, as determined at the locality to which the Gloucester fishermen
resort, by specimens brought up on their hooks, varies considerably in different localities, and
often abruptly. Halibut would take the hook readily in certain places, and very seldom in others
close at hand. The former areas wei'e generally fouud to be covered with immense quantities
of an Ascidian, called sea lemon, and the latter with miniature forests of tree corals (Gorgonia).
When the fishermen struck the latter kind of bottom they were generally certain not to obtain
many fish. While this coincidence may hold good for this one region, it cannot be considered of
any importance alone, and the differences probably depend on some other unexplained causes.
On the more southern fishing-banks, the presence of Gorgonian corals in no way interferes with the
abundance of fish. An examination of the stomachs of the halibut captured in some jdaces
disclosed mostly crustaceans and in others mostly small fish. Halibut were the only edible fish
caught in sufiicient numbers to prepare for market. Some cod were taken, but not enough to
pay for salting, and they were eaten on board.
According to Dr. Henry Eink,^ cod do not spawn ou the coast of Greenland. At any rate
spawners are very rarely taken, and during the winter cod are wholly absent from the coast.
" Sometimes in siiring a great many quite young ones arrive at the inlets between 60° and 61° north
latitude, which would seem to suggest that their breeding places were not far oflF, but they generally
make their appearance after June 20 on the fishing-grounds, which are situated between 64° and
08° north latitude, at a distance of sixteen miles from the shore, and in July and August resort to
the inlets up to about 70° north latitude. With regard to numbers, the occurrence of codfish on
Greenland shores is peculiarly variable. Some years, or certain periods of few years, may jjrove
extremely favorable as regards the catch ; whereas others turn out a total failure. The number
annually caught by the natives may be estimated at somewhat about two hundred thousand fish
on an average." According to the same author, " the larger halibut {Hippoglossus vulr/oris) occurs
on the banks, as well as in dift'erent places outside the islands, up to 70° north latitude, in depths
of from thirty to fifty fathoms. Of late the capture of this fish has become an object of com-
mercial speculation, and foreign shii)s, chiefly American, have been engaged in it, apparently with
bettvu- success than that of the codtishing. A halibut of this species weighs from twenty to one
hundred pounds, and its flesh is fat and much valued. Superior in taste as well as fatness is the
smaller halibut or 'Kaleralik' {11. pinguis"), which is angled for in the ice fiords at depths of about
two hundred fathoms." The other edible fish mentioned by Dr. Eink as inhabiting these fishing-
banks are as follows: The lumpQsh {Cycloptcrus huiqyus), perhaps the fattest of the Greenland
species, which goes inshore in Ajjril and May for the purpose of spawning, and forms at this season,
' Danish Greenland, its people and its products. Eusli<^li version. London, 1877.
' Platusomatichthys hippoijlossoitles.
DAVIS STRAIT. 7
diiriug ii couple of weeks, the ebief food in certain places. "The Norway haddock (Sebastes
Norvegkus) is found only in certain though pretty numerous grounds south of 80° north latitude.
The capeliu {Malloius villosus) has from times of old yielded the most juofitable fishery to the
Greeulanders, and may, in a dry state, in winter time, frequently be said to have constituted
the daily bread of the natives. They are shoveled on shore by means of small nets, by women
and children, and spread over the rocks to dry during four weeks of May and June, when they
crowd to the shores of inlets south of 70° north latitude to spawn. This fishery has now
considerably decreased, but may still be considered to yield one and a half million pounds
weight or more of uudried fish yearly."
The best harbors for the fishermen resorting to these banks, in the regions now visited by
American vessels, are those of Holsteiuborg and Sukkertoppen. Both are good places of shelter.
Holsteiuborg, the only one visited by Mr. Scudder, is surrounded by the high mainland on three
sides, and is shut in on the outer side by several islands. It is thus completely protected from
rough water, and the only wind that can enter must come from the side toward the strait, from
which direction there are seldom any severe blows. The depth of water is ten to twenty-five
fathoms. Holsteiuborg and Sukkertoppen are ninety miles apart, and, as the best fishing was
found midway between them, there was a good opportunity for running into shelter whichever
way the wind might blow. On most of the trips that have been made it has been necessary to
make a harbor three, or even more, times a month, on account of severe southwest and northeast
winds, which, combined with the strong tides in such shallow water, soon produce a heavy sea.
The best season for fishing on these Greenland Banks is during July and August, although
August is preferable to July. ' This is due to the character of the weather, temperature, etc., at
that time, as well as to the greater abundance of fish then on the passage to and from the banks.
Mr. Scudder found the temperature during July to vary from 30° F. to 49° F., and during August
from 38° F. to 52° F. The mean and maximum temperatures of the surface waters during these
months were 382° F. and 43^° F. The climate at this season is, therefore, very fiivorable for
work. The harbor of Holsteiuborg is usually open by the middle of May, and fishing might begin
by the first of June if vessels were stationed at this place ; but the ice coming down the east
coast of Greenland blocks up the more southern harbors, and interferes with the passage of
vessels north until at least the middle of June. Then, agaiu, winter begins to set in during the last
part of August, putting a stop to all operations until the next year. The only icebergs seen by
Mr. Scudder came from the south.
The tidal currents are not regular, and near the edges of the banks are very complex. In tliis
locality the tide runs up the strait much longer and with greater velocity than in the other direc-
tion. In fact, some days there was no tidal current at all down the strait, but during the time
when this current should have been running the water remained slack for seven or eight hours j
also, instead of changing every six hours it would do so only twice a day. The greater velocity
of the tide running north compared with that running south is probably due to the existence of a
regular current on the east side of the strait running up the coast of Greenland. This strong
northern flow renders fishiug impossible for five or six hours at a time; but as the period of slack
is usually equally long, there need not be any great loss of time, as the fishermen can arrange to
sleep during the flow and fish during slack water. The nights arc light enough in this latitude in
July to permit of fishing being carried on at all hours during the twenty-four. The tides and
currents are not, however, as simple as the above account would seem to imply; often in changing
the position of the vessel only a few miles, an entirely difiereut combination of currents would
be met with. The tides running out of the many fiords along the coast of Greenland make
8
FISHINGGEOUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
tliemsclves felt a long distauce from the shore. The fish seem to take the hook best about the
close of the strong tide, and then it is that both hand-lines and trawls are most sncccssfully used.
Temperature observations of the air and water, on the Greenland Fishing-Banks, by Mr. Scuddcr.
[ Latitude about 60° north. 1
Bate.
Time of day.
Depth.
Tempera-
ture.
1879.
July 6
July 7
Aug. 2
Aug. 5
Aug. 8
Aug. 20
3 to 4 p. m
Air
°F.
38
38J
37J
36i
35i
35i
40J
38i
m
3Gi
35i
3.->i
44
42i
39i
38i
38
37i
4CJ
41i
37
45i
43i
37i
44
Surface
lOfatl'Oms
20 fatbom.s
Air
10 fathoms
40 fathoms (bottom)
Air
Surface
7 to 7.30a, ni
10 fathoms
37 fathoms (bottom)
Air
6 p. m
Surface
35 fathoms (bottom)
Air
8to8.30pm
24 fathoms (bottom) ...
Air
Surface
25 fathoms (bottom)
43
38J
The last set of observations was taken about forty miles west-southwest from Holsteiuborg.
2. THE ATLANTIC COAST OF LABEADOR.
The existence has been known, for a great many years, of very extensive fishing-grounds
along the northeastern coast of Labrador, between latitudes 53° and 56° north. As early as 1758,
these grounds were visited by American fishermen, and from the collection of the Massachusetts
Historical Society for 1792 wo extract the following brief description of that region, as obtained
from Captain Atkins, who visited it in the former year (1758) :
" The coast is very full of islands, many of them very large, capable of great improvement
as they have more or less Due harbors, abounding in fish and seal, water and land fowls, good
land, covered with woods, in which are great numbers of fur beasts of the best kind. Along the
coast are many excellent harbors, very safe from storms ; in some are islands, with suCBcicnt depths
of water for the largest sliips to ride between, full of codfish, and rivers with plenty of salmon,
trout, and other fish. The entrance of Hancock's Inlet in 55° 50' latitude; a very fair inlet;
very little tide sets in or out ; from fifteen to twenty fathoms of water going in ; five hundred sail of
ships may ride conveniently in this harbor secure from any storms. On the east side the harbor
is a natural quay or wharf, composed of large square stones, some of prodigious bulk. . . .
The harbor abounds in codfish, very large, that a considerable number of ships might load there
without going outside, which may be cured on tlie shore and the quay, excejjt in very high tides."
Not very much, however, was ever made known regarding the North Labrador fi.sliiiiggrounds
until 187(1. Prof. II. Y. Hind, who had explored them in tlic interest of tlie Newfoundland
THE ATLANTIC COAST OF LABRADOR. 9
Goveniuient, published a report of cousiderable length on their extent and character. From this
report we have extracted the following more important facts concerning the region :
" The tishinggrounds on the Atlantic coast of Labrador as far north as Sandwich Bay have
been occnpied to a greater or less extent for one hundred and twenty years. Those extending from
Sandwich Bay to Cape Harrison (Webeck) have also been visited by fishing craft for a generation
or more ; but north of Aillik, about forty miles from Cape Harrison, the coast has only been
frequented by Newfoundland codfishiug craft during the last fifteen years. . . .
" The leading characteristics of the coast northwest of Aillik are as follows :
" 1. The shore line is deeply serrated by a constant succession of profound and narrow fiords,
stretching from thirty to fifty miles into the interior.
" 2. It is fringed with a vast multitude of islands, forming a continuous archipelago from Cape
Hillete to Cape Mugford, averaging twenty miles in depth from the mouths of the fiords seaward,
" 3. Outside of the islands, anu about fifteen miles seaward from shore, are numerous banks
and shoals, which form the great autumnal, spring, and summer feeding grounds of the cod; while
outside the shoals there appears to be a second range of banks, which are probably their winter
feeding ground.
"4. The island-studded area forms an immense codfishiug ground, which covers between
Cape Harrison (Webeck) and Cape Mugford a boat fishing-ground (exclusive of the banks or
shoals outside) nearly as large as the combined area of the English and French boat fishing-
grounds on the chart of Newfoundland.
"For the sake of distinction, I have styled the area under review 'The Northern Labrador
fishing-grounds,' beginning at Cape Harrison (Webeck), and, for the present at least, terminating
at Cape Mugford."
The following table by Professor Hind shows approximately the area of the boat fishing-grounds
about the island of Newfoundland, as compared with those of N( rthern Labrador. From this
table it will be seen that the area of the Northern Labrador fishing-grounds alone, exclusive of
the banks, is equal to about five-sixths the entire area of the British and French boat fishing-
grounds on the coast of Newfoundland. The area of the inner range of banks cannot be even
approximately stated.
Comparative table of the Nortliern Labrador and Newfoundland FisJiing-Gronnd areas.
[lu geographical square miles.]
Cape Harrison to Mugford, 2fi0 luik's, average 20 miles deep 5, 200
NEWFOUNDLAjy) BOAT FISHERY.
Frencli shore, Cape Saiut Jolin via Cape Bauld to Cape Ray, 696 miles, by •! miles deep,
shore hoat fishing 2, OyS
South shore of Newfoundland boat fishery. Cape Ray to Cape Race, 573 miles, by 3 miles
deep, shore fishery 1, 719
East shore of Newfoundland boat fishery, Cape Race to Cape Bouavista, 294 miles, 3 miles
deep, shore fishery 882
Northeast sliore of Newfoundland boat fishery, Cape Bonavista to Cape Saint John, 225
miles, 3 miles deep, shore fishery . .» G75
Northeast shore of Newfoundland boat fishery, among islands in Bonavista Bay and Bay of
Notre Dame, 120 miles, 7 miles deep 840
Area of British Newfoundland boat fishery 4, 116
Area of French Newfoundland boat fishery 2, 088
Total area of Newfoundland boat fishery 6, 204
Area of Northern Labrador boat fishery. Cape Harrison to Mugford 5,200
10 FISHING-GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
rrofessor Hiud attributes the formation of the inner banks to ancient glaciers, -which once
occupied the fiords along the coast. Regarding this subject he wrote as follows :
" But the glaciers of Labrador have probably left even more valuable records in the form of
moraines of their early existence here than deep fiords or innumerable islands. These are the
shoals or banks which lie souie fifteen miles outside of the islands, and ou which icebergs strand
in long lines and in groups. I have styled them the inner range of banks, to distinguish them
from a supposed outer range in deeper water, and where larger icebergs also sometimes take the
ground. The inner banks, as far as they are known, are stated by fishermen to have twenty to
forty fathoms of water on them.
"Commauder Maxwell's soundings, between Cape Harrison and Gull Island, near. Hopedale,
and just outside of the island zone, rarely show depths greater than forty fathoms. In one
instance only, in a distance of about one hundred and ten nautical miles, is a depth of fifty-nine
fathoms recorded."
The character of the southernmost portion of the outer or Atlantic coast of Labrador is
described as follows by Professor Hiud:
"The admiralty chart i^ortrays a very important conformation of the Labrador coast line from
Saint Lewis Sound to Spotted Island. The trend between the Battle Islands south of Saint Lewis
Sound aud the Spotted Islands (Domino River), a distance of sixty-five miles, is due north, and,
with very few exceptions, there are no islands throughout this distance off the coast; but as soon
as the coast line begius to turn northwest islands are numerous, and continually increase in
number as far as Cape Mugford, and even toward Cape Chudleigh. Between Capes Harrison and
Mugford the i.slaud zoue may be estimated as having a depth of twenty miles from the mouths of
the fiords seaward. The causes of the general absence of islands south of Spotted Islands
probably can be traced to the never-ceasing action of northern ice driven on the coast line, when
it suddenly makes its southern bend by the influence of the rotation of the earth upon the Arctic
current. This current sweeps past the Labrador with a velocity of from one and a half to two
miles per hour, aud a westerly pressure due to the earth's rotation estimated at about eleven
'nches; that is to say, the mean level of the sea, on the coast of Labrador, is about eleven inches
above the level it would assume if uninfluenced by the earth's rotation. As soon as the ice-laden
current reaches the Spotted Islands, it is in part relieved from this pressure by the trend of the
coast from southeast to due south. Hence the current changes its course southerly and on to the
laud. But the eflect of this sudden change in the direction of the current near the shore is to
throw the icebergs ou to the coast from Spotted Islands to Cape Saint Lewis, where they may be
seen stranded each year in great numbers. The«islands, which doubtless ever existed here, have
been removed by constant attrition acting uninterruptedly for ages, and with the islands the
moraines lying seaward. We may then trace the cause of the vast difference between the
distribution of stranded icebergs south of Spotted Islands aud northwest of them. In some
cases they are stranded on and near the coast line, wearing it away and deepening the water near
it, assisted by the undertow; in other cases they are stranded some fifteen miles away from the
island fringe, and are continually adding to the bauks *Iie (Ivbris they may bring in the form of
mud streaks from the glacier which gave them birth in the far north and northeast.
" It is more than probable that this distribution of icebergs has a very important bearing upon
the food and feeding grounds of the cod, which justifies me for referring here in so much detail to
the action of glacial ice."
THE ATLANTIC COAST OF LABRADOR. 11
TLe following additional accounts of the Northern Labrador fisliing-grouuds, their faunae, etc.,
are also extracted from the report of Pi'ofessor Hind :
Relation of the Codfish to stranded Icebeegs. — "Upon what forms of life do the
codfish feed on the Northern Labrador coast, where the summers are so short, the capelin, the
herring, the squid, and even lance comparatively scarce, and where icebergs continually abound?
The answer maj- be expressed in one word — crustaceans. These are infinite in number, from the
minute sea lice of the fishermen to a large crustacean resembling a ])rawn. Crabs, too, are very
numerous, as well as mollusks. Although the capelin ceases to appear on the coast in large shoals
above the latitude of Nain, the herring is not numerous beyond Wkkasiksalik, the squid is not
found beyond Domino River, and the lance is the only known Southern Labrador fish which visits
the northern coast in great numbers, yet crabs, jirawns, and ' herring bait,' with medusfe, occur
iu vast nuuibers, and form, with mollusks, the chief food of the cod. The officer in charge of the
Hudson's Bay Company's post of Wkkasiksalik informed me that at the more remote northern
Hudson's Bay post, if seals were left in the fall of the year for a single night in the nets, the head
was sure to be cleaned to the bone by the prawns. He also stated that in the northern water,
opposite Hebron, Lampson, and Mactiwack, the cod feed on a small fish bearing a great resem-
blance to the ordinary tommy cod, but the crustaceans were their chief food. The connection
existing between ice and the food of the cod is not apparent at the first glance, but when it is
borne in mind that infusorial forms abound in sea water in the immediate vicinity of Arctic ice, and
that on these minute creatures larger forms of life find sustenance, which again become the food of
crustaceans and different species of fish upon which the cod are nourished, the chain is complete,
and the relation of stranded icebergs to fish life on the Labrador coast becomes apparent. It has
been shown by the labors of the United States Fishery Commission that the cod, which once
existed to a large extent on the New England coast, has been starved out by the destruction of
its food, and valuable fisheries ruined, but not beyond the power of restoration if the remedial
measures suggested are faithfully carried out and sufficient time allowed. But on the Labrador,
particularly the northern portion, through the unfailing advent of Arctic ice, a perennial supply
of food is indirectlj' supplied to the cod, forbidding the idea of starvation on these coasts.
The inner Range of Banks. — " The foundations of the inner range of banks consist very
probably, as stated, of glacial moraines. In their present state they may reasonably be assumed
to be formed iu great part of remodeled debris, brought down by the same glaciers which excavated
the deep fiords. The absence of dejiosits of sand iu the form of modern beaches on every part of
the Labrador coast visited this season (except one) was very marked. The exceptional area
observed lies between Sandwich Bay and Hamilton Inlet, Cape Porcupine being the center. It is
protected from the northern swell of the ocean by the Indian Harbor Islands and promontory.
Here larger deposits of sand are seen, covering many square miles in area. The reason why
sandy beaches are not in general found on this coast, notwithstanding that enormous quantities
of rock are annu;dly ground up by the coast ice and ice pans driven on the shore, arises from
the undertow carrying the sand seaward and depositing it on the shoals or banks outside of the
islands. The undertow on this coast is remarkably strong, and it aids the formation and exten-
sion of the inner range of banks, and consequently of the feeding and spawning grounds of the
cod to a very great degree.
" It may be advisable here to advert to a popular error, which assumes that the depth of
water in which an iceberg grounds is indicated by the height of the berg above the level of the sea.
It is commonly stated that while there is one-ninth above there will be eight-ninths below the sea
12
FISniNG-GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
level. This is aiii^roxiinately true only with regard to the balance of a mass of the berg, not with
regard to height and dei)th. A berg may show an elevation of one hundred feet above water and
yet its depth below may not exceed double that amount ; but its volume or mass will be about
eight times the mass over the surface. Hence, while icebergs ground in thirty and forty fathoms
of water they may expose a front of one hundred feet or three hundred and fifty feet, the broad
massive base supporting a mass about one-ninth of its volume above the sea level."
As to the movements of cod, Professor Hind frames the following, table :
Table shoicing the approximate mean date of arrival of cod, mean date of departure, a7id mean length
of the fishing season for cod in Northeastern Neicfoundland, Southern and Northern Labrador ,
NEWFOUNDLAND.
[Over 4 degrees of latitude. Mean length of fisbiug season, 143<laya.]
Lati-
tude.
47 30
48 20
48 30
50 00
49 30
51 00
61 30
54 30
54 54
Locality.
Conception Bay
Bouavista Bay
Notre Datne Bay
Cape Saint John to Partridge Point
White Bay
Cape Ronge Harbor
Cape Bauld to Cape Onion
Mean date
of arrival.
June 1
June 10
June 20
June 20
June 10
June 10
June 20
Mean date
of close of
fishery.
Nov. 20
Nov. 10
Nov. 10
Nov. 1
Nov. 1
Nov. 1
Oct. 20
SOtTTHEEN LABRADOR (ATLANTIC COAST).
[Over 3 degrees of latitude. Mean length of fishing season, 87 days.]
Chateau Bay .
Batteaux
Indian Harbor
Cape Harrison
June 20
July 12
July 15
July 18
Oct 1
Oct. 1
Oct 1
Oct 1
NOKTHEEN LABRABOE.
[Over 3^ degrees of latitude. Mean length of fishing season, 52 days. J
55 09
55 12
55 27
53 30
56 00
50 30
57 30
58 30
58 48
Aillik
Kypokok
Hopedale
Double Island Harbor
Wkkasiksalik
Nain
Okak
Hebron
Lampsou
July 20
July 20
July 20
July 22
July 28
July 28
July 28
Aug. 15
Aug. 15
Oct.
Oct
Oct.
Oct
Oct.
Oct
Oct.
Sept 25
Sept 25
From this table the following hiw is deduced :
"Over an area extending northerly from Conception Bay for seven hundred miles the cod
'approach the shore about one week later for everj' degree of latitude we advance to the north.
These tables show also that for a period of about forty days the codfishing goes on simultane-
ously during August and September, throughout the length of a coast line extending from lati-
tude 47° to latitude 58° 30' in one continuous line, or more than seven hundred statute miles;
hence it appears that the migrations of the shoals of this fish are merely from deep-water winter
fishing-grounds to the nearest coast spawning-grounds, and from the coast to the nearest deep-
THE EASTERN COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND. 13
water feodiDg-giouiids again. The coast luigratious duriug tlie summer months appear to be of
equally limited extent, and shoals of cod frequenting any particular coast may be said to be
indigenous to it. On the Labrador, ^nd especially in such known deep bays as Hamilton Inlet,
the coast movements of the fish appear to be very regular, and determined to a large degree by
the tidal currents. The capelin generally precede the cod by a few days, and these fish are known
to approach the coast and enter the sandy coves for the purpose of spawning. The same law
which guides the movement of the cod afiects also the spawning of the capelin. I saw numerous
shoals of this fish spawning in Trinity on the 27th of June. A month later they siiawn in
Kyi^okok Bay, and still later further to the north."
Presknt Status of the Noutuern Labrador Fishery.— "About four hundred fishing
craft, from eighteen to ninety tons burden, are supposed to have passed Cape Harrison this
season (187G). Taking the average of the entire fleet, they carried each eight men, three fishing-
boats and one shore boat. Out of the thirty-two hundred hands we may assume that twenty-four
hundred were actually engnged in fishing. The estimated catch was sixty quintals per man, or
in the aggregate one hundred and forty-four thousand quintals. This work was accomplished in
an average aggregate of twenty-four fishing days, and to a large extent with the jigger, that is,
without the use of bait. The average weight of the fish is about three pounds fresh. Allowing
one hundred and thirty fish to the quintal, the number taken would be about eighteen millions;
the number wounded and lost about four million five hundred thousand, although some
fishermen consider that one fish out of three is wounded by the jigger and lost when the fish are
very numerous."
We have quoted this report of the Labrador fi.shing-bauks so much in detail mainly for its
many valuable suggestions bearing upon several of the more southern fishing regions, which have
not yet been so carefully studied. It is not probable, however, that American vessels will resort
to these distant grounds for some time to come, or until forced to do so by the scarcity of cod in
regions nearer home. The size of the Labrador cod is also below the standard recognized in
United States markets.
Herring occur at various points along the coasts of Labrador, between the Straits of Belle Isle
and Cape Harrison, and are principally taken in the vicinity of the bays and harbors resorted to
by the vessels engaged in the cod fisheries of that region. This fishery is in season duriug the
summer, but has at no time been very extensive.
3. THE EASTERN AND SOUTHERN COASTS OF NEWFOUNDLAND.
THE eastern coast.
The eastern coast of Newfoundland furnishes a vast area of boat fishing-ground for cod,
extending from Cape Eace to the Straits of Belle Isle. Along the same side of the island, squid,
capelin, and herring abound to a greater or less extent, and are taken for use as bait principally.
There are no fishing-banks off this coast excepting at the southeast corner, just oS which the
Grand Banks are located. According to Prof Henry Y. Hind, the extent of the shore codfishing-
grounds on the eastern side of this island is as follows:
[In geographical square miles.]
Cape Eace to Cape Boiiuvista, 294 miles, 3 miles deep 882
Cape Bouavista to Cape Saint John, 225 miles, 3 miles deep 675
Among the islands in Bunavista Bay and Bay of Notre Dame, 120 miles, 7 miles deep 840
Capo Saint John to Cape Bauld, French shore, 300 miles, 3 miles deep 900
Total 3,297
14
FISHING-GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
The first three estimates given in the above table are exactly as Professor Hind states them ;
but the fourth estimate has been extracted from his enumeration of the entire French shore, Cape
Saint John to Cape Bay, via Cape Bauld, which lies at the outer entrance to the Straits of Belle
Isle, on the Newfoundland side. The table given in his report on this region includes the entire
French shore in a single item. According to the same authority, the length of the fishing season
along the different portions of this coast and the mean date of arrival and departure of the cod
for the same are as follows :
Table showing the approximate mean date of arrival of cod, mean date of departure, and mean length
of the fishing season for cod on the eastern side of Neicfovndland.
Lati-
tude.
47 30
48 20
48 30
50 00
49 30
51 00
51 30
LocalitJ".
Conception Bay
Bonaviata Bay
Notre Dame Bay
Cape Saint John to Partridge Point
WliiteBay
Cape Rogae Harbor
Cape Bauld to Cape Onion
Mean date „¥®!;°„^**®f '^^fVw^
of arrival. "^ •'".^o "^ "^ ^^^"^^S
I nsuing.
June 1
June 10
Juno 20
June 20
June 10
June 10
June 20
Nov. 20
Nov. 10
Nov. 10
Nov. 1
Nov. 1
Nov. 1
Oct. 20
143 days.
With reference to the construction of this table Professor Hind says : " In framing these
tables I have been careful to eliminate extreme seasons, for the cod have been known to approach
the shore during an exceptionally early season a fortnight or three weeks sooner than during the
average of years. Although squid are abundant along the entire eastern coast, they are prin-
cipally taken as bait to sell to the United States bank fishermen, toward the southeastern extremity
of the island, in Conception, Trinity, and Bonavista Bays. Within the past few years this region
has also been resorted to by a few American ves.sels, who obtain cargoes of squid, principally by
purchase, to sell to the French fishermen at Saint Pierre. This trafiBc has also been ijarticipated
in to some extent by the provincials, and small steamers have occasionally been employed to
collect cargoes at Conception and Trinity Bays, and, perhaps, farther north. Capelin also abound
between Saint Johns and Cape Race, and are taken by the natives for the same purpose as the
squid. The principal localities furnishing this bait are Saint John's, Broyle Harbor, and Bay of
Bulls. The United States fishermen visit this coast only to obtain bait."
Notwithstanding the privileges granted by the Washington treaty, and the award made by
the Halifax Commission in payment for the right to fish in these, as well as in the other, provincial
coast waters. United States fishermen have been frequently interfered with in the matter of fishing
for bait along the southeastern shores of Newfoundland, and the natives have even gone so far as
to refuse to sell bait to them, while at the same time they have threatened armed resistance to any
persons who should attempt to fish for bait in waters adjacent to the shores. This direct violation
of existing treaties has often resulted in the loss of much time to the fishermen, who have been
obliged to go elsewhere in search of bait.
TnE SOUTHERN COAST.
Tlie fisheries carried on on the southern coast of Newfoundland are for cod, herring, capelin,
and squid, and to some extent also for halibut. Herring are taken by the natives to supply the
winter trade in frozen fish and to sell to the bank fishermen as bait, and for the latter i)urpose
capelin are also taken in large numbers. The shore fishing-grounds for cod extend along the entire
THE SOUTHERN COAST OF NEWFOUNDLAND. 15
southern coast of Newfoundland from Cape Eace to Cape Eay. Fishing is mostly done from small,
open boats, but also, to some extent, by vessels which go as far out as five to ten miles from shore,
where the water is of a suitable depth. They seldom fish, however, in deeper water than from fifty
to seventy-five fathoms. The fishing-grounds are so continuous that the natives can generally
obtain fair fishing without going far from home. The fishing season for cod is from April to
October. When in pursuit of capelin and squid, the cod approach so near the shore that they
can often be taken in seines and in traps, which do not in many cases extend more than
fifty fathoms from shore. The latter mode of fishing has been introduced since 1878, and has
been more efficient than the former methods of using seines and lines. The boat fishermen
depend jirincipally on hand-lines and trawls, but in the spring, when bait cannot be obtained,
they often use a jigger, which is also employed on other parts of the coast.
Off Pass Island, there is a small tract in about one hundred and sixty fathoms, not over five to
eight square miles in extent, where halibut were found in considerable abundance for two or three
years, from 1870 to 1873. During those years a considerable number of United States vessels
resorted to this region, but the grounds soon became exhausted, and little or no fishing has been
done since. More recently halibut have been taken oft' Burgeo Island. The best halibut fishing
near this coast has been obtained about thirty miles from the main-land, longitude 58° west and
latitude 47° 8' to 47° 10' north, over an area about ten or twelve miles square, in depths of one
hundred and forty to two hundred and fifty fathoms. This region is now much resorted to for a
short period in the spring and sometimes even in winter. Famous halibut grounds once existed
oft" the beach between the larger and smaller Miquelon Islands, in four to eight fathoms, and
also in the channel between Saint Pierre and Miquelon. The presence of the halibut there was
due to their following the capelin to the shore. The capelin usually remain about a month, and
the halibut seldom stay longer, if as long. Halibut are rarely taken now at Miquelon beach in
large numbers. Fortune Bay has been the great resort for vessels engaged in the frozen-herring
trade since 18G5, but this trade is not so extensive now with Newfoundland as it has been in former
years, having been largely transferred to New Brunswick. The many long and deep arms of the
sea which indent the southern coast of Newfoundland are frequented by immense schools of her-
ring during the winter and spring months. Cargoes can frequently be taken at numerous points
along this shore, but, as above stated. Fortune Bay constitutes the principal fishing-ground. This
bay is sixty-five miles long and thirty-five miles wide at the mouth, but it gradually narrows
toward the center, where it varies in width from ten to twenty miles. The southern coast,
although quite rugged and bold, is less so than the northern, and has several sloping shores with
sand beaches. The northern coast is cut into by numerous deep and narrow bays or fiords,
which are favorite spawning grounds of the heri'ing. Long Bay, the principal fishing point, is
usually covered with ice in the winter through much of its extent, but the lower portion remains
open and permits of the seining and netting of fish. Among other harbors formerly and now
resorted to are Saint -lacques. Bay the North, and Eencontre. The numerous deep coves and
harbors on the north side of Fortune Bay, as well as the sandy shores of the south side, afford
seining grounds for herring during the spring and early summer. Many herring from these places
are sold in the spring to the United States bankers and to the French fishing fleet at Saint Pierre.
The capelin are caught with seines on the beaches of Fortune and Placentia Bays, and taken in
small vessels to Saint Pierre by the Newfoundlanders, who sell them there fresh to the French.
They come in June and remain from four to six weeks. The fishing is done entirely by natives, as
in the case of herring, and the catch is sold to the same fishing fleets. Asa rule, the French salt
1(3 FISEING GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
both tLeir lierriug aud capeliu bait, but the Americans preserve theirs iu ice. The herriug remain
on this coast more or less through the capelin season and generally all summer; but while the
latter fish are on the herring fisheries of Fortune and Placentia Bays are more or less neglected,
many of the fishermen of those regions limiting themselves chiefly to supplying the French
fishermeu with capeliu.
The American vessels generally obtain their supplies of capelin north of Cape Race, where
the method of capture and preservation is the same as at the south. Placentia Bay is resorted
to by American vessels for both herring and capelin bait, but is visited for this purpose much
less than Fortune Bay aud other localities. Squid are taken for bait in Placentia Bay and other
places along the south coast, but, as a rule, the American vessels obtain their squid bait from the
bays and harbors on the east side of the island. A species of turbot was formerly taken in
considerable numbers in Fortune Bay and vicinity during the winter season from ISou to 1875.
They were generally frozen and sold to the captains of American vessels, who in turn sold them
at New York and Boston. Since the decline of the frozen-herring trade in this region,
comparatively few American vessels visit it iu the winter season, and the turbot industry has
ceased, for a time at least, although the fish are probably as abundant now as at any previous time.
4. THE GULF OF SAINT LAWRENCE.
General Account.— Fully one-half of the area of the Gulf of Saint Lawrence, including the
bays and channels leading into it, has a depth of water less than sixty fathoms. This shallow
portion, which borders the northern and eastern shores of the Gulf to a distance of from six to
ten miles (roui laud, but which comprises all the southwestern third at least, forms a more or less
continuous fishing-ground of great value and importance. Of late years, as the fisheries of the
outer banks and the Gulf of Maine have been more and more developed, United States vessels
have resorted to the Gulf of Saint Lawrence much less than in times past, aud we are now
rapidly becoming independent of this ouce much coveted fishing-ground.
The western coast fishing-grounds of Newfoundland, from Cape Bauld to Cape Ray, according
to Prof. H. Y. Hind, constitute a boat-fishing area for cod nearly four hundred miles long by about
three miles deep. The rights of this fishery belong to the French by treaty, a privilege also
enjoyed throughout most of its extent by citizens of the United States. A similar fishing-ground,
though of less importance, borders the northern coast of the gulf and the island of Anticosti.
Places worthy of note along this shore are the Natashquan cod-bank and the Mingan Islands.
This group of very small islands lies between the western end of Anticosti and the north shore,
and between the meridians of G;P and C4o west longitude. About sixteen islets, the largest not
over five miles long, ^Yitll a number of small rocky spots, are marked out on the admiralty chart
as composing the Mingan Islands. Their distance from land varies from two to seven miles, the
depth of water among and about them varying from four to forty-seven fathoms. They are scat-
tered iriegularly, the bottom between them consisting of sand, gravel, rocks, and shells.
The southwestern portion of the Gulf furnishes by far the most extensive and important
fishing-grounds. The area within the limits of the sixty-fathom line reaches about one hundred
and eighty miles eastward from the coast of New Brunswick and about one hundred and forty
miles northward of Nova Scotia, and includes the well-known Magdalen Islands and I'>radelle
Bank.
There is great uniformity in the depth of water aud the character of the bottom nearly
everywhere, the bottom being generally rocky and diversified with areas of greater or less extent
of sand, gravel, or mud.
I
rit'HMt mi- I imi'ii relates, ^t-ii
THE GULF OF SAINT LAWRENCE. 17
Orphan Bank, which lies thirty five miles a little north of east of Miscou Islaud, at the
mouth of Clialeur Bay, is of very limited extent. The shallowest sounding upon it, as indicated
ou the admiralty chart, is twenty-five fathoms, and this appears in only one spot, while about
it and within a radius of eight miles are marked from thirty-five to fifty-three fathoms. The
character of the bank and its fauna are thus described by Mr. J. G. F. Whiteaves:
" The Orphan Bank, which is situated off the eutrauce to the Bay des Chaleurs, is a stony
patch, as are most of the inshore fishing-banks, many of which are not indicated or defined ou the
charts. The masses of rock are usually large pieces of reddish sandstone (often perforated by two
species of boriug bivalves, the Saxicava ritgosa and Zirphcea crispata), with a small proportion of
pieces of Laurentiau gneiss, etc. Animal life is profusely abundant here, which is undoubtedly
the reason why cod, mackerel, etc., frequent this and similar banks in such enormous numbers.
Soft-bodied organisms of various kinds give a special facies to this particular one. These are
iucrusting sponges; tunicates of many genera and species, some of unusual size; an Actinia
{Meiricliiim) ,■ the common iwvthevn Alcyonium (rubiforme) j Alcyonidium f/elatinosum ; Hydrozoa
and Polyzoa, in great profusion, etc. Among the harder forms are an abundance of the com-
moner Echinoderms, with a few scarce species; large calcareous Polyzoa, and a large number of
fine Crustacea. Shells are tolerably numerous, though not nearly so much so as on the Bradelle-
Bank, and Annelids were relatively scarce."
The character of the bottom on " Miscou Flat " and about the Magdalens is very similar to
that of Orphan Bank, while it is probable that the Pigeon Hill Ground more nearly resembles
Bradelle Bank.
Bradelle Bank.— The Bradelle Bank is of much greater extent thi-.n the Orphan Bank.
Its center lies about fifty miles west by north of Grindstone Islaud, Magdalen Islands, and, as
laid down on the charts, it covers an area of about thirty miles long from north to south,
by about twenty miles broad from east to west. The deepest sounding near the edge is about
thirty fathoms aud the shallowest twenty fathoms; the soundings mostly range from tweuty-oue
to twenty-five fathoms. The distance from the center of Bradelle Bank to Orphan Bank is about
forty miles, the greatest depth between being fifty fathoms. The greatest depth between Bradelle-
Bank and the Magdalen Islands is from thirty-six to forty-two fathoms. The bottom and fauna?
characters of Bradelle Bank are described by Mr. Whiteaves as follows :
" The Bradelle Bank is also a stony patch, but the pieces of rock are usually smaH, aud there
is a greater admixture of gravel, sand, and mud on this bank than upon the Orphan. Soft-bodied
animals appear to be scarce upon the former, and shells occur in unusual abundance. The assem-
blage of Hydrozoa, Echinoderms, Polyzoa, and Crustacea is much the same on both banks, thougki
a few peculiar species were found on each. The rarer forms found at these two places will be
catalogued in the second part of this report. While the animal life of the shores of Cape Breton
(except In deep water), of those of the Magdalen group and of Prince Edward's Island, as well as,
that of the whole of Northumberland Strait up to the southern entrance to the Baie des Chaleurs,
is of an Acadian or Southern type, the fauna of the Orphan and Bradelle Banks has a decidedly
Arctic or Northeru character. The Bradelle Bank, in particular, presents the phenomenon of a
small patch tenanted by an assemblage of marine animals which usually inhabit very cold watei",
and almost entirely surrounded by another series, which are for the most part prevalent where the
bottom is warmer and more affected by surface couditions of temperature."
Miscou Flat is a stretch of rocky shoal ground tliat makes out from Point Miscou in an
east-southeast direction a distance of nearly twenty miles. There is depths of water upon it of
ten to twenty-two fathoms, the bottom gradually falling off to the outer part.
SEC III 2
18 FISHING GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
Pigeon-Hill cod ground consists of the shore soundings (four to seventeen fathoms) that
lie from ten to twenty miles southeasterly from Shippegan Island, New Brunswick, and extends
southward along the coast about eighteen to twenty miles.
Codfishiug is pursued on all of these grounds — Bradelle Bank, Orphan Bank, Miscou Flat,
and Pigeon-Hill Ground — only during the warm seasons of the j^ear (May to October).
The abundance of cod, especially of large fish, varies somewhat with the different seasons,
their presence in greater or less numbers being governed to a large extent by the amount of food
(herring, mackerel, etc.) on the ground. Miscou Flat and Orphan Bank are noted for large
codfish. There are sometimes what appear to be two schools of codfish at the same time on these
banks, one of which is caught in the day-time and the other only at night. The first is of small
size, but the second is extraordinarily large, being larger than are found at any other locality.
The fishing is mostly carried on by residents of the vicinity in small boats, although some
Nova Scotia vessels and a limited number from the United States sometimes engage in it.
Magdalen Islands. — The Magdalen Islands, which lie about fifty to sixty miles northwest
of Cape Saint Lawrence, Cape Breton Island, form an elongate chain trending in a northeast and
southwest direction. The total length of the chain with its outlying rocks is in the neighborhood
of fifty to fifty-five miles.
The main group consists of five or six small islands, separated by narrow channels varying
in width from a few rods to half a mile. Its greatest length is thirty-six miles and its greatest
breadth about five or six miles. The shores of these islands are quite irregular, being very bold
and rocky in-some portions and in others formed of stretches of sand.
The entire group lies toward the eastern edge of the sixty-fathom limit, but is wholly included
within it. The surrounding area, within a distance of five or seven miles of the islands, ranges in
depth from four to eighteen fathoms, and contains many small scattered rocky spots or reefs reach-
ing to near the surface of the water. The bottom, as indicated on the charts, is made up of sand,
shells, stones, and rocks. A reddish sandstone predominates in the shoal water about the islands.
Between the shallower soundings of the islands and Cape Breton Island the depth ranges from
twenty-four to seventy-five fathoms, the deepest water extending close along the Cape Breton
Island coast. Formerly, when hand-lines alone were used, codfishing was carried on to a
considerable extent around the entire group of islands; but since the introduction of trawls
United States fishermen have found it more profitable to resort elsewhere. The so called "sharp
bottom " of the region, due to the many rocks and stones scattered about, unsuits it for trawl
fishing. Now the codfishing is almost wholly carried on in the open boats of the resident
fishermen and by the small vessels belonging to the British Provinces and the French Islands
of Saint Pierre and Miquelou. A few catches of halibut have been taken on the shoals about
Byron Island, but the appearance of these fisli in that locality is so uncertain that the halibut
catchers rarely go there.
Cape North Fishing-Ground. — Around the northern end of Cape Breton Island is located
a codfishingground which is of considerable importance for a few weeks in the spring and early
.summer. It lies between Cape North and Saint Paul's Island, at a distance of four to fifteen
miles from land ; thence it extends westerly about fifteen miles, and southwesterly, along the
coast of Cape Breton Island, as far as Limbo Cove. The shore here is high and steep, so that,
notwithstanding the (ilose proximity of the fishing-ground, the depth of water upon the latter is
from sixty-five to one hundred fathoms. The bottom is mostly tough clay, but ten to fifteen
miles from land some rocky ridges exist. The current sels out from the Gnlf of Saint Lawrence
toward the southeast, over a portion of the ground, although the direction changes more or less
with tlu> trend of the shore.
THE GULF OF SAINT LAWllEKCE. 19
Sti'oug westerly wiud.s iucrease the streugth of tbe ouirt'ut, wliicU after a long contiuuation
of tbem sometimes ruus at the rate of two to three miles au hour. As a rule, however, the tides
run slowly. Fishiug is often hindered by floating field ice, which sometimes prevents the vessels
from reaching the grounds until late in the season. About ISGO and 18G1, cod and halibut were
found abundantly on these grounds j but later the halibut almost wholly disappeared, and for
several years they have been taken only occasionally. Cod are still quite plentiful in May and
June, at which time they are moving slowly in by the head-land, on their way to the sboaler
grounds of the Bay of Saint Lawrence.
This fishing-ground is resorted to by both i)roviucial and United States vessels, but, owing to
the difficulties alluded to above, the fleet is usually small.
Cod and Halibut Grounds. — Vessels from the United States used to frequent the Gulf of
Saint Lawrence both for cod and halibut, but mainly for tlie former species, until the trips became
unprofitable from the scarcity and small size of the fish obtained, and until the introduction of
trawls, witli which better results could be obtained on the outer fishing-banks. Yessels on their
way to Northern Labrador would sometimes harbor along the shores of the Straits of Belle Isle,
and fish from small boats to make up a portion of their catcli. Several attemjits were also made
for cod by Gloucester vessels on the Natashquan cod-banks. Southern Labrador, but the trips
never paid, and the grounds have since been neglected.
From 1S6S to about 1875, Gloucester vessels resorted to the southern coast of Labrador,
between the parallels of 00° and 00° west longitude, and the coast of Anticosti in search of
halibut. These fish approach quite close to the shores in pursuit of capelin or other small fish,
and were caught in considerable numbers within two or three miles of the coast, in five to twelve
fathoms of water. As a rule, the halibut were of medium size and fine quality, but they were not
nearly so plentiful as in the more recently worked "deep water" of the outer banks. The principal
disadvantage of carrying on this fishery was that the bait (herring) had to be obtained in the
southern part of the Gulf, and would often become old and unfit for use before a school of halibut
could be found, as it sometimes happened that a long stretch of shore would have to be skirted in
search of the fish; the distance from market was great, and head winds were usually encountered
on the passage, at least as far as Causo, and, finallj', the fish decreased so much in numbers that
the trips would no longer pay. Vessels have visited this region within three years, but none of
them have secured good catches. The halibut grounds of Anticosti were mainly on the northern
side of the island, with the same depths of water as on the Labrador coast.
The western coast of Newfoundland likewise furnished cod and halibut grounds in former years
for United States vessels, but they have also been nearly deserted for the outer banks. The iniu-
cipal localities where halibut were taken were Saint George's Bay, Eed Island, Port au Port Bay,
Bay of Islands, and Green Point; but no important catches have been made in any of these places
excepting Green Point for a number of years. Green Point was given up at the same time as the
others, but fishing began there again in 1878, and more or less fish have been taken nearly every year
since. At Eed Island, a French fishing station, foreign vessels are not permitted to fish, but in a
few instances the Gloucester vessels were allowed to carry away all the halibut they could secure by
giving over to the French fishermen whatever cod were taken on their hooks. This practice has
since been abandoned, however, and United States vessels have never resorted extensively to this
region for cod. Several trials for cod were made in the winter of 1801 and 1862, but such small
fares were obtained as to discourage the fishermen. Similar attempts have been occasionally made
since tlien, but always with the same results, due perhaps more to the severity of the weather than
to the scarcity of fish. It should be remembered, however, that all these attempts were made in
20 FISHING GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
winter, while the provincials and French fish here for cod only in the sinnnier. Much better cod-
grounds, however, lie nearer the coasts of the States.
Mackeeel Grounds. — No positive rules can be laid down as to the appearance of mackerel
on the several grounds of the Gulf of Saint Lawrence. Formerly, when these grounds were largely
resorted to by vessels from New England, the fishing was principally carried on in the early part
of the season (June and July) north of Prince Edward's Island and between there and Cape Gasp6.
This section embraced the " West Shore" from Escuminac to Point Miscou, the Bay of Chaleur,
Bradelle Bank, Orphan Bank, and the adjacent waters. Later in the season, August and Septem-
ber, the vessels generally visited the waters along the north side of Prince Edward's Island and
about the Magdalen Islands. During some years, however, the fishing was continued on the first-
mentioned ground throughout the entire summer. As the sea.son advanced, mackerel were generally
found in the greatest abundance in the extreme southern parts of the Gulf, especially about
the eastern'iioint of Prince Edward's Island, the north side of Cape Breton Island, in Saint George's
Bay, and also about the Magdalen Islands. The principal points where good catches were usually
obtained on the coast of Cape Breton were in the vicinity of Sea Wolf Island and Cheticamp Island.
These places were generally the last visited in the fall. As a rule, when the mackerel were found
here at all they occurred in great abundance; but when the schools left this region they were rarely
seen again the same season. Mackerel have also been taken in great numbers along the east coast
of Caije Breton Island, between the entrance to Great Bras d'Or Lake and Flint Island, and good
catches have been obtained there from July until late in October. Their appearance in this region
has not always been regular, however, and a season of great abundance is often followed by one
of extreme scarcity.
Although the movements of mackerel in the Gulf of Saint Lawrence during the summer and
fall months are about as has been described above, they are subject to certain variations at
different periods, and it occasionally hapi^ens that good fares are obtained about the north shore
of Prince Edward's Island early in the season. Again, this locality may furnish the best fishing
during August and September one year, and the next year mackerel may be scarce there though
very abundant in other portionsof the Gulf. The appearance of large bodies of mackerel in the
different localities is doubtless much influenced by the a]^ndance of food, the direction and sti;ength
of the prevailing winds, and by other causes not so well understood.
In exceptional instances, fares of mackerel have been obtained at the" Seven Islands, arid
Mingan Islands, on the southern coist of Labrador, and also at the mouth of the Saint Lawrence
River, from Cape Chatte to Cape Gaspd. On one occasion, at least, a fare was also obtained at Port
an Port, on (he west coast of Newfoundland. These catches, with the exception of the last named,
were obtained chiefly by the crews in boats, either with hooks and lines or with seines, while the
vessels lay at anchor in the harbors.
The vessels visiting Ihe northern fishing-grounds were usually provided with a number of
dories, and, after the schooners were securely moored, the men would start out at daylight in the
boats, trying for mackerel in the coves and along the shores where the vessels could not be taken.
As the mackerel were secured they were carried on board the schooners, dressed and salted.
The fishing grounds of the Gulf of Saint Lawrence, though a favorite resort for mackerel
catchers when this fishery was carried on exclusively with hook and line, are not well adapted
to the use of purse-seines, which are the principal apparatus now employed in the capture of
mackerel. The localities to which they usually resort are too shallow for purse-seines, and, again,
the mackerel appear less frequently at the surface in the Gulf of Saint Lawrence than oiV the
coast of the United States, and though tlicy iniiy occur at the former ]ilace in large numbers,
THE GULF OF ^AINT LAWRENCE. 21
tLeir incseuce is not generally as readily detected. Another Liuderauce to seiuiug in the Gulf is
the greater prevalence there of stormy weather, after the mouth of July, than ou the coast of the
United States.
HEI:EI^'G Grounds. — The princiital fishiug-gTOund for herring in the Gulf of Saint Lawrence
is Pleasant Bay, situated at the southern end ofthc Magdalen Islands, and opening broadly toward
the east. The shores of the bay are bold and rocky iu some phices towards the north, but are low
and sandy elsewhere. Its depth varies from three to eight fathoms, the bottom being composed
of white sand. The herring arrive about the last of April and continue in great numbers throughout
the spawning season, entirely disappearing about the first of August.
Herring also resort to various portions of the coast of the island of Auticosti, situated iu the
northern portiou of the Gulf, about ninety miles from the Magdalens ; but the principal herriug
grounds are about the N^orth Cape, the eastern extremity of the island. Fishing is at its height
here during the month of June, and cod vessels failing to load at the Magdalens can reach the
island iu time to secure a fare. Until the past few years vessels have rarely, if ever, visited this
region, as there has been an abundance of fish in more easily accessible places.
Herring visit many localities on the coast of Newfoundland, aud are taken to a greater or less
extent in all the bays and harbors. The principal fishing-grounds are in Fortune Bay, on the
southern side, and in Bonne Bay aud Bay of Islands, ou the western side of the island. Boune
Bay, which is situated about midway between the Straits of Belle Isle and Cape Eay, is a small,
deep-water bay, with two arms, of which the southern one is more frequented by herriug, which
enter in large numbers. Bay of Islands, about tweuty-flve miles farther south, is of larger size
than the above, and constitutes a more important flshioggrouud. Of its several deep-water arms,
extending from fifteen to twenty miles inland, the most southern one, locally known as the
" Sou'west arm," furnishes the principal fishing-ground. The fish are found iu this region during
the greater part of the year. They visit it in the early spring to spawn, and remain through the
season to feed upon the small crustaceans, which are very abundant in these waters. These fish
are mostly captured by the natives, who sell them to the provincial aud United States vessels.
The herring when they arrive iu the spring are quite poor, but fatten rapidly, and those
caugh* in the fall are considered equal, if not superior, to any others taken on the American coast.
Vessels occasionally visit Bonne Bay and Bay of Islands iu the spring, when they have failed
to secure a catch at the Magdalens. The principal season, however, is during the fall, the vessels
generally arriving iu October aiul leaving before the last of December. They frequently leave
earlier than this to prevent being fi'ozen in by the ice, but a number of vessels have been detained
by this cause nearly all winter.
A school of herriug enters Saint George's Bay, between Nova Scotia aud Cape Breton Island,
in June, and remains there one or two weeks, during which time the fish are usually very
abundant. At this season, the locality is visited by the United States bank fishermen iu search of
bait. The principal points where herriug are taken on the gulf side of Cape Breton Island and
Nova Scotia to sell as bait to the bank fishermen are Port Hood, the Judique shore, and Havre
Bouche or Knight Inlet.
Tidal Currents. — Prof. H. Y. Hind, iu his account ' of " the relation of the movements of
mackerel in the Gulf of Saint Lawrence to tidal currents," describes those currents as follows :
" There is, perhaps, no part of the world where the tidal waves and resulting currents ai e
distributed in such a remarkable manner as in the Gulf and estuary of the Saint Lawrence.
' The Effect of Fisliery Clauses of the Treaty of "Washington, etc. Halifax, 1877.
22 FISHING GKOUNDS OF NOETH AMERICA.
" The meeting ami overlapping of tidal waves of different ages, that is to say, the tide of
to-day meeting the tide of twelve hours ago, and producing a double overlapping tide, is of rare
occurrence, and is due to the configuration of the sea bottom conjointly with the relative position
of islands and neighboring coast lines.
"Northumberland Straits and the north shore of Prince Edward's Island afford the most
remarkable instances on the American continent of tlie meeting of tides of different ages, and it
can scarcely be doubted that the long and continuous line of inshore eddies, produced in a large
measure by this singular confluence, conjointly with the low temperature resulting from the
mixing of cold underlying with warm surface sea-strata, is the chief cause why mackerel fishing-
grounds should be there so close inshore with such undcviating constancy.
"rt. The Prince Udicard's Island double tide. — The tidal wave, entering the Gulf of Saint
Lawrence between Cape Breton and Newfoundland, rushes with great rapidity along the edge
of the bank forming the boundary of the sixty-fathom line of soundings. It sends off lateral
waves toward the Straits of Belle Isle and toward Prince Edward's Island, while the main wave,
following the deep water at the edge of the sixty-fathom line of soundings, pursues a rapid
course toward aud up the Lawrence estuary, and reaches Caj e Chatte and Point de Monts
preciselj' at noon on the days of full and change of the moon.
" Regarding for the present the lateral wave wliicli strikes off toward the southwestern
portion of the Gulf, we find it split into two portions by the Magdalen Islands; one-half,
namely, the eastern part, sweeps past the shores of Cape Breton and reaches the east peint of
Prince Edward's Island at eight hours thirty minutes, Cai)e Bear at nine hours, and the middle
of the straits ojiposite Hillsborough Bay at ten hours. Here it meets a flood tidal wave coming
down Northumberland Strait from the northwest, but this wave is not the other half of the
wave which was split by the Magdalen Islands two hours before; it is the tidal wave twelve
hours old, which has been delayed in its detour round the noi'th part of the Magdalens and
over the shallows of the Bradelle and Orphan Banks. A line drawn through the Magdalen
Islands, Eoche's Point, and the mouth of Hillsborough Eiver, in Prince Edward's Island, and
Wallace Harbor, in Nova Scotia, will pass through the places where the overlapping of the
confluent tidal waves takes place, at the full and change of the moon, near the shores of Prince
Edward's Island. ...
"Admiral Bayfield is of opinion that these waves of ditterent ages, one being twelve hours
younger than the other, meet on the north side of the great bight of Prince Edward's Island,
between Traca,die Harbor and Savage Harbor. On the Admiralty charts this locality is desig-
nated by the words "Tides Meet." The current is inshore toward this point, both from North
Point and East Point, and the effect of the indraft is to determine toward the coast line the
floating or free-swinnning food of the herring and the mackerel. The great bight formed by
the concave northern coast line of Prince Edward's Island is the result of ages of action on the
part of these confluent tidal waves dragging along the sloping beaches, and washing away the
resulting debris from the sandstone rocks, of which a large part of this coast line is composed.
The ceaseless operation of these forces is thus manifested in the wearing away of the shores
most subject to their influences.
"&. Tlie eddy flood tide in the estuary of the Saint Laiorence. — According to Admiral Bayfield,
the flood tide in the estuary of the Saint Lawrence, beginning at Auticosti and proceeding some
miles above Bic, rushes up the broad midchannel as far as Eed Islet and Green Island, where
part of it, being obstructed by the islands, turns round and, as an eddy flood tide, sweeps along
COASTS OF CAPE BKETOX AND XOVA SCOTIA. 23
ami dowirtlie scnUlieru coast as far as Gaspe Basiu, uul.y a tbiu aud uanow baud of flood tide
running ujiward between the eddy flood and the coast line.
" On the days of full and change of the moon it is high water at noon both at Point de Monts
and Cape Chatte, and high water later and later down the coast, so that at Cap-e Ptozier it is one
hour thirty minutes before it is high tide there.
"In other words, the flood tide rushing uj) the deep niidchannel between Cape Eozier aud
Anticosti Island iiassed up more than an hour and a half before the eddy flood tide returned
coastwise to Cape Eoziei-.
"Bayfield states that there is a very narrow flood tide close inshore running westerly along
the Gaspe coast inside of the eddy flood. These currents moving so constantly in opposite direc-
tions, and close inshore, tend to produce the continuous- line of eddies which cause the free-
swimming food of the mackerel to be found near to the land, aud make that ]iortion of the estuary
a mackerel ground.
'• On the north shore of the estuary, between Mingan and Point de Monts, the periods of high
water at full change of the moon are altogether different. The tidal wave reaches Mingan Island
at 1.30, Seven Islands at 1.40, Cawee Island at 1.50, English Point at 2, and a few miles farther
on it meets the ebb tide two hours old sweeping past Point de Monts.
" The flood tide on the north shore is only about three leagues broad. The strength of the
stream is greatest inshore, aud beyond three leagues from the coast it becomes insensible.'
" The eddies produced in the bays between Moisie and Point de Monts by this inshore flood
tide throw in and keep the food near the coast line.
" Hence it is that the flood tide on the north shore flowiug westerly and the eddy flood on
the south shore flowing easterly, with a thin belt of westerly flowing flood between it and the
land, produce inshore eddies, which concentrate the free-swimming food of the mackerel, hereafter
described, on these coasts.
" The strength of the current in deep water off shore, on the south coast of the estuary of the
Saint Lawrence, is stated to be sufficient to prevent lishiug oi)eratious there, thus oflcriug a
practical difficulty, which is repeated on some parts of the northern shore during high tides.
"In the Bay of Chaleurs, where the tides are regular, the mackerel ground of the day depends
npon the wind. A southerly wind converts the south side of the bay into a lee shore, and the
fish are found chiefly on that side, especially toward Xepissiguit Bay. When the wind is north-
erly the Gasp6 becomes a lee shore, and the fish are chiefly found between Bonaventure Island
and Paspebiac, and on toward Cascapedia Bay. It has already been observed that mackerel
and surface feeders generally swim with open mouths against the wind and tide. The cause
which brings the mackerel from the south shore to the north shore arises from the fact that in
the natural pursuit of their surface food against the wind they are brought up by the land,
and finding food in the tidal eddies there, they pursue their course inshore against the tidal
currents, until a change in the wind induces them to cross again to the opposite shore, where
similar conditions prevail. On the gulf coast of Cape Breton the set of the currents is oftentimes
inshore."
5. THE OUTER COASTS OF CAPE BRETON ISLAND AND NOVA SCOTIA, INCLUDING THE BAY
OF FUNDY.
Outer coast of Cape Beeton Island and ]!fovA Scotia.— Shore fishing-grounds for cod
exist along the entire outer coast of this region. They are located on the so-called shore soundings,
which range in depth from about ten to fifty fathoms, the average width of this coast belt being
' Sailius Uirectious for the Saint Lawrence.
24 FISniNG GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
about eighteen miles. Fishing is mostly carried on beyond three miles from shore, though some
boats fish much farther in, and begins about the first of May and lasts until October; it is mainly
in the hands of the provincials, although a few vessels from the United States re.-^ort to the region
occasionally. Saint Ann's Bank is a cod-fishing ground on the shore soundings off the east end
of Cape Breton Island, which is mainly fished upon by the people living on the adjacent shores.
For a number of years several American vessels were in the habit of visiting the halibut
grounds in the vicinity of Flint Island and Scatari Island, Cape Breton, and a number of good
fares of halibut were obtained there. The grounds were of small extent, however, and soon became
exhausted. No important trips have been made to that region since 1875. Ualibut have rarely
been taken in large quantities on the coast of Nova Scotia.
Herring are abundant at numerous points along this coast, and are mainly taken to supply the
United States and provincial vessels with bait. The Peninsula of Halifax, especially about Pros-
pect, is a great baiting station, and other similar stations occur all along shore betweenCape Sable
and Canso. Mackerel make their appearance about the western part of Nova Scotia in May, and
follow eastward along the coast until they arrive at C^pe Canso, where they turn northward,
entering Chedabucto Bay and passing through the Strait of Canso into the Gulf of Saint Lawrence.
They come from the south and southwest, and appear to strike the entire coast at very nearly the
same time, arriving at the eastern end, however, a little later than at the western, the schools
gradually working eastwardlJ^ At the same time large quantities of mackerel pass around the
east end of Cape Breton Island and thus reach the Gulf of Saint Lawrence. In the fall they return
by the same route, and continue to pass up the coast until about the last of November; but some
seasons they remain later and others they are earlier in their migrations toward the south. As a
rule, no mackerel of any account are on this coast from the 1st of July to the 15th or 20th of
September; some schools of small fish remain the entire summer. They are ca^jtured in gill-nets,
seines, pounds, and traps ; but during their fall migrations it is not always safe to set the nets
far from land on account of the severity of the weather. The mackerel fishery of the coast of
Nova Scotia and Southern Cape Breton is of slight importance compared with that of the Gulf of
Saint Lawrence, as the fish remaiu in the first-mentioned localities for a much shorter time, and
are taken only by the natives along the coast.
Bay op Fltkdt. — The only important fishery at present in the Bay of Fundy is that for
herring. ^Mackerel occasionally enter Saint Mary's Bay and other places at the mouth of the Bay
of Fundy, and from 1835 to 1850 this region was considered a famous mackerel ground. During
the last tiiirty years, however, it has been but rarely visited by United States vessels. Fair
catches of halibut were formerly obtained at the mouth of the bay, in from thirty to sixty fiithoms,
and even farther in than Bryer's Island, but for the past fifteen years this fishing, like that for
mackerel, has not been jirofitable. Codfishing is carried on near the mouth of the bay, but not to any
great extent, mainly because of the strong tides, which are not favorable to it. The Grand Manan
Rips were formerly the most celebrated herring-grounds on the northern coast, and were much
resorted to by American vessels. The fishery has, however, been gradually transferred to the coast
of the main-land about the mouth of the Bay of Fundy, especially on the north side, although
herring are also taken in considerable quantities in and about Saint Mary's Bay, on the southern
coast. The herring approach Grand Manan in July, and remain there until the middle of September
Toward the last of October other schools arrive upon the shores of the mainland about Canii)o-
bello Island, and later, dui'ing midwinter, the waters between Easti)ort, Maine, and Point Le Preau.
New Brunswick, become crowded with them. They enter Saint Andiew's Bay and remain luiiil
late in the spring. The fishery begins to the westward, commencing first about Grand ^lanaii :nid
FieTipnr TDfln^tH- a of tlip TToited Stat*«. Sect. TTI.
THE BAY OF FUNDI". 25
Campobello, and coutiiuies later about Toiiit Le Preau and iu Saint Andrew's Bay. These fisli are
taken to supply the frozeuherring and sardine trade, and to sell to the bank fishermen as bait.
There are a few distinct grounds for hook aud line fishing at the mouth of the Bay of Fundy,
located aud characterized as follows :
The Wolves Haddock Grounds.— Around the group of islands called the \Yolves, which
lie off the southwest coast of New Brunswick, the bottom is composed of rocks and gravel for a
distance averaging about three quarters of a mile from the shore. This narrow strip is a favorite
haddock-ground, aud is much resorted to by the small boat fishermen of the vicinity, aud also by
others from Eastport and Lubec, Maine. The depths vary from eighteen to thirty-four fathoms,
aud the bottom is somewhat broken aud irregular.
Small haddock-grounds also exist close inshore to the westward of the northeru end of Grand
Mauan. The outer edge lies about half a mile off shore, tjie* length of the ground being about two
miles aud the depth of water from fifteen to forty fathoms.
The Mud is a broad area of muddy bottom, forming the channel to the eastward of Campo-
bello Island, beginning in the north to the westward of the Wolves aud extending southward to
between West Quoddy Head aud Grand Mauan. The westefu edge of this ground lies about two
miles off Campobello, aud its width averages about three and a half miles. The depths vary
from thirty-nine to sixty fathoms, the bottom cousistiug of soft mud. This is the best ground for
bake in this vicinity, and is resorted to by small vessels and open boats from Western Kew
Brunswick and Eastern Maine.
Pollock Grounds. — Two pollock grouuds occur iu this vicinity, both lying to the westward
of the uorthern part of Cam]iobello Island. One lies just to the eastward of, and very near to,
Indian Island, aud is formed of strong tidal eddies. Auother lies at the mouth of the channel
between Campobello aud Casco Bay Island, being close to the easteru shore of the latter islaud,
aud likewise is an area of strong tidal eddies. Both of these grounds are of limited extent aud
of less importance now than formerly, but they are still much resorted to by the small boats of
the vicinity.
Temperatures in the Bay of Fundy. — The following observations, made during August,
1872, by the United States Fish Commission, will serve to indicate the summer temperatures of
the surface aud bottom waters at the mouth of the Bay of Fundy. They are too few in number,
however, and extend over too short a period, to be of much value in making comparisons with the
temperatures of other regions which have been more fully worked up.
The surface tempei'ature to the east of Grand Mauau, at distances varying from two aud a
half to ten miles from the islaud, during August 23 and 24, 1872, ranged from 48° F. to 53° F.
Within the same area the bottom temperatures, taken at the same time, were as follows: Two
miles from the islaud, depth twenty-uiue fathoms, 44° F.; two aud one-half miles from the island,
depth twenty-eight to fifty-two fathoms, 39^° F. ; eight to ten miles from the island, depth from
ninety to one hundred aud five fathoms, 373° F. to 38° F.
To the westward of Grand Manan, at distances of three to six miles from laud, the surface
temperatures on August 28, 1872, ranged from 47° F. to 48° F. The bottom temperatures of the
same area, at depths of forty to fifty-five fathoms, varied from 40° F. to 45° F.
Just east of Campobello Island, ou the fishing-ground called the "Mud," the surface
temperatures from August 2 to 10, 1872, varied from 4S.Jo F. to 57^° F. The bottom temperature
at twenty-five fathoms was 47° F. ; at sixty fathoms 43° F. ; at eighty fathoms 39.^° F.
Iu Passamaquoddy Bay, between Deer Islaud aud the coast of Maine, iu depths of water
ranging from thirty to seveuty fathoms, the surface temperature was 48° F., and the bottom
temperatures from 45^ F. to 40° F.
26 FISHING-GEOUNDS OF >'011TH AMERICA.
6. THE COAST OF MAINE.
General Account. — Witliiu tLc limits of the sixty-iathoni liuc, whicli lies at an average
distauce of twelve to filteeu miles from the coast, there occur a very large number of rocky or
gravelly patches, which are the ftivorite resorts for cod, haddock, aud pollock, while on the muddy
bottoms between hake are generally found in greater or less abundance during the summer. In
addition to these grounds, of which special descriptions are given on the following pages, there are
many other banks, mostly of small size, situated in the bays and among the numerous islands
dotting the coast line, on which the different species of the cod family can be taken. These
banks, with the intervening valleys, form a more or less continuous and rich fishing-ground,
bordering the entire coast of Maine. During a part of the summer, when the dogfish have driven
away nearly all of the fish from the outer grounds lying off the coast, good fishing can generally
be obtained near land. Herring and mackerel are also very abundant in their season along the
entire coast. The former species is caught in large numbers in weirs aud gill-nets, placed for their
capture around the outer islands and in the numerous bays and harbors which indent the coast.
From June to November immense quantities of mackerel visit the coast of Maine; they are often
so abundant as to enter the bays, large schools being met with some distance inside of the coast
line, as far inland, in fact, as the saltness of the water will permit. -The deeper water off this
coast is, however, better suited to their capture, as described elsewhere.
Lobsters are more abundant on the coast of Maine than elsewhere w ithiu the territory of
the United States. In some localities they are captured throughout the year, aud doubtless the
season might be as continuous nearly everywhere were the demands sufficient to warrant their
being taken at all times. In the summer they enter all the bays and estuaries, and some generally
ascend as far as the water is sufficiently salt for them.
The soft clam {Mya arenaria) also abounds on the shores of the Maine coast. It is extensively
used as food and as bait for cod and other fish. Large quantities are salted annually to sell as bait
to the bank fleet.
On the following pages, brief descriptions are given of the principal inshore fishing-banks,
the majority of which lie within the sixty-fathom line. Some of those lying just without this
limit, in part or wholly, are, however, also included here, as belonging to the same series of
grounds, and as being visited by the same class of fishing boats. This list, although it cannot
be considered as complete, probably contains nearly all the fishing-grounds of any size that
can be distinctively mark( d off from the general fishing area of the coast.
GROUNDS OFF MOOS-A-BEC LIGHT.
Luke's Eock bears south by east from Moos-a-bec light ; distance, three miles. It is
nearly circular in outline, about one mile in diameter, with depths of twenty -five to thirty-five
fathoms, and a bottom of rocks, gravel, and mud. Hake, cod, and pollock, together with a few
haddock, are taken on this rock by the small-boat fishermen.
Xewfound Ground. — This is a small rocky si)ot, not more than one-fourth of a mile in
diameter, having in the center an automatic buoy, placed there by the Government as a guide to
^•essels bound to or from the Bay of Fundy. It bears south by west from Moos-a-bec light-house,
from which the buoy is distant about three miles. The depth is eighteen fathoms. This ground
is resorted to by a few small-boat fishermen, using hand-lines.
Henry's Eock lies five miles southwest by south from Moos-a-bec liglit-honse. It is
one-fourth of a mile iu diameter, with a depth of thirty fathoms, the bottom being quite level.
It is resorted to by small boats, hand-lines only being used.
l.i,l,.rv Indn»tri« of the Tnitpd Stal*., Sfct IH.
I
68
Chart No. ?•
FISHING GROUNDS
FROM NOVA SCOTIA
TO PENOBSCOT BAY, MAINE.
Soxuiding^s in ijatlioms.
1^1 i\
.^y'
j^ .-^'Bdhtrs Is.
EnocfiUs Shocu
CXO-
>.;. .. V "-' pi 0^'BanKs li
ffsleHaut
S.W.Groimel »
Sarley HiUGcC:
' " %HatcheViad.
ff Shell Grouru t
Si
?i 50
MatinicusL
D
ff
/I GUkey Get, i6 ^ CoUimJbto\Ledffe
M
!;i! BaldRicl^es
M
Old Egg 45 ' ^ LulurisRock
Rock / ''Henry's Rocky
" , ^esternEggRoc/c
Beris Ground, /^'j
■■ Handspike 59
Grourul R ID GES
SautKEastBock,
7IJ
70 "» dC
»''-S- itffi Desert
^^' Inner Ridge
eof- -.
80
'.% INNSR
} SCOOniC BUJOE
" Crayvleys fOock. 83 '
"°V£>'' ML Desert • |
„2 Outer Ridge ^ , /;
■ BO
^
56
76
uo
Mt.Des ;rt Rook
-«~
r;^
y OUTER ,
/ SCOODIC R\ )GE_
jy;.' . ■ 30 .^i
73
^GRAND MANAN
„BANK
'¥'
UARBLEHEAD
Bank. Comfort
B
sc
BANK
a 77
as
i GERMAN
1
?
/
73
f.
\ SANK
80
fi.
^ /
76
M
104
' 16 73
^^: ■ '^^
66
0
4
4
^
^
\3
^
1)
m\(
GHOUi^D
*•■■
J
Seal I
60 00
THE COAST OF MAINE. 27
Handspike Gkound. — This is a small rocky sboal, lying eight miles southwest by south
from Moos-a-bec lighthouse. It is nearly circular in outline, about half a mile in diameter, and
with depths of thirty-five to forty tathoms.
"Westeen Egg Rock lies eight- miles southwest from Moosa-bec light-house. Its length,
in a northeast and southwest direction, is three oiiles and its breadth one mile. The depths
range from twenty to thirty-flvo fathoms, and the bottom is irregular, sharp, and rocky, being
too rough forti-awls; hand-lines arc, therefore, almost wholly used by the boat-fishenuen, who
resort to it in summer for cod and pollock.
Old Egg Eock bears west southwest from Moosa-bec liglit-house ; distance, six miles.
It extends three miles in a southwest and northeast direction, aud is one mile wide. The
bottom is rocky, with depths ranging from twenty-five to thirty-five fathoms. It is prin-
cipally resorted to by small boats in pursuit of cod and pollock, which are mainly taken with
hand-lines, though trawls are occasionally used.
Middle Eidge lies three miles west by south from Moosa-bec light-house, and extends
one mile northeast and southwest, the width being one-half mile. The depth varies from eighteen
to tweuty-five fathoms, the bottom being rocky and rough. It is occasionally resorted to by
small-boat fishermen, using hand-lines only, but only a few fish are taken.
Broken Geotjnd is a large piece of broken bottom, the eastern end of which bears south
by east fifteen miles from Moos a-bec light, whence the ground extends west-southwest to within
four miles of Mount Desert Eock; its average width is about one mile. The depths vary from
fifteen to one hundred fathoms, the shoaler portions being sharp and rocky, and the deep places
consisting of clay aud gravel. Some of the spots are half a mile long, and others from one to
three miles in diameter, with an average depth of seventy fathoms. Cod are taken on the outside
of the grounds, pollock and small cod on the shoals, and hake ou the inside. By some this is
considered the best fishiug-grouiid on the coast. Several of the spots have special names, as
" Crawley's Eock," "Puzzling Eock," "Lenke's Eock," and " The Eidges." Fishing continues four
months — from June 1 to September 30. Herring are abundant here in their season and are used
in large quantities for bait.
The Eidges, which form a part of the "Broken Ground," bear south from Moos a bee;
distance to the center, nine miles. They are seven miles long, southwest aud northeast; two
miles wide, and have a depth of from thirty to thirty-five fathoms. The bottom consists of rocks
and gravel, on which cod and pollock are abundant.
CratrJcy's RncJc bears soutli seventeen miles from Moos-a-bec light, and has a shoal of about
fifteen acres iu extent, with a depth of fifteen fathoms and a bottom of sharp rocks.
Pvzzlimj Rocli bears south fourteen miles from Moosa-bec light, and has a shoal about half a
mile in diameter, on which the depth of water is fifteen fathoms, and the bottom .sharp and rocky.
grounds off petit manan.
Tibbett's Ledge bears about east from Petit Manan ; distance, four to five miles. (Marks:
Schoodic Island, over the green island of Petit Manan, and the Ladle, over Nash's Island.) This
ledge consists of two rocky shoals, \^ ith a depth of three to three and a half fathoms. The shoals
are only about one acre in extent and a quarter of a mile apart, bearing northwest and southeast
from each other. To the westward of these shoals the ground is broken nearly to Petit Alauau,
and this section is a favorite resort for small boats. To the eastward, however, the ledge drops
off suddenly into mud. In May, large cod are caught over the muddy bottom, just to the eastward
I
28 FISniNG-GROUNDS OF KORTH AMERICA.
of the ledge, in a de])tb of twenty-seven to thirtyfoiir fathoms. In the spring of ISSO, three men,
vrith hand-lines, caught three hundred cod here in a single day.
Ben's Ground bears east-southeast from Petit Manan ; distance, four to five miles. (Marks :
Petit Manan light, to the northward of the high or mid(tle hill of IMount Desert, and Humpback
Mountain, on the west side of Trafton's Island, or Pond Island light-house, to the eastward of
Jordan's Delight.) This ground is circular in shape, with a diameter of abont three-fourths of a
mile, and has a very irregular bottom of rocks and mud. The depths range from fourteen to
thirty fathoms. This ground is at present of but little importance, but is occasionally vLsited by
the boat-fishermen in summer for cod and haddock: on muddy bottom, in the immediate vicinity,
hake grouudsoccur.
Southeast Rock. — This is a ledge which becomes nearly uncovered at low water on its
shoalest part. It bears south-southeast from Petit Manan; distance, four and one half miles.
From the shoaler portion of the ledge the bottom slopes off towards the northeast a distance
of four miles, with an in-egular bottom, the depth increasing from seventeen to thirty fathoms.
The shoal ]iortions are rocky, while the deeper places between are generally muddy. Cod and
haddock are taken on this ground by the boat fishermen in May and June, but from July to
September hake are the most common fish.
Broken Ridges, " Job Ray Ground." — This ground bears south-southeast from Petit
Manan, from which the center is seven miles distant. It is two miles long in a southwest and
northeast direction, and one mile wide, the depths ranging from twenty-seven to thirty-three
fathoms. The bottom is very uneven, and consists of rocks and mud. The shoalest pait of the
ground is near tlie center. The depths vary so greatly over short distances that a boat at anchor,
swinging with the tide, may find a difference In depth of from five to six fathoms. This ground
is considered very good for cod and haddock. It is resorted to by small vessels in the spring
and by open boats during the summer.
Black Ledges Ground.— This is an excellent fishing-ground for haddock, situated between
"Jordan's Delight" and the " Halibut" or " Black Ledges." The fish strike in very plentifully
in summer, probably in pursuit of herring. One day, in the first part of July, 1879, three persons
in one boat, with a trawl of seven hundred hooks, took eleven hundred haddock by under-running
on this ground, and more than five thousand haddock were probably taken there tl:at day by
all of the small boats fishing there. The haddock do not usually remain long.
GROUNDS OFF MOUNT DESERT ISLAND.
Baker'.s Island Ridge. — This is a narrow ridge making out from Baker's Island in an east
by north direction. The eastern part beai's south by east from Schoodic Island, from which it is
distant three-fourths of a mile. The ridge is much broken, with an average width of one-half
mile, and depths varying from twenty to twenty-five fathoms. The bottom is rocky in some
places and gi'avclly in others. As a rule, but little fishing is done on the shoaler portions of the ■
ridge, but where the bottom slopes off to depths of thirty to thirty-five fathoms, with a bottom
of mud, hake are generally quite abundant from July to October inclusive. During that season
the ground is resorted to by small vessels and o]K'u boats.
Martin's Ground. — Tiie center of this ground bears west southwest from Schoodic Point,
from which it is distant about three miles. It is a I'ocky patch, with depths of fifteen to
twenty-five fathoms. Its extent does not exceed four or five acres. This is not an important
fishing-ground, but is sometimes resorted to by the boat-fishermen in the fall, wlieii n limited
amount of end are taKen witli hand-lines.
THE COAST OF MAINE. 2d
Egg Eock Broken Geound. — This is si rocky ridge which makes out iu a south by west
clirectiou from Egg Eock ledges a distance of about two miles, and has a width of about half
a mile. The bottom is irregular, and the depth of water ranges from nine to tifteen fathoms.
This ridge, together with Martin's and Seavey's Grounds, divide the western or Baker's Island
mud channel from the Schoodic mud channel, both of which are good hake grounds, with depths
varying from thirty to forty fathoms. The bottom consists of mud. Mr. ^Sathan Hammond,
of Winter Harbor, Gouldsborough, Maine, states that from 1S.30 to 1840 thirty to forty vessels
■were frequently seen at anchor in Baker's Island Channel at one time, all of them being engaged
in catching hake. These fish are much less abundant now upon these grounds than formerly,
but nevertheless they are more or less resorted to at present by open boats and vessels during
the summer, and large catches are still taken by the local fishermen.
Innek Schoodic Eidge bears southeast by south from Baker's Island, from which the
center of the ground is twelve miles distant. It is nearly circuhrr iu shape, with a diameter
of about four miles, the depths ranging from eighteen to sixty fathoms. The bottom is composed
of rocks, gravel, and mud ; the shoaler portions are sharp and rocky.
Outer Schoodic Eidge. — The northwest part of this ridge bears southeast from Baker's
Island, from which it is distant twenty-two miles. It is about eight miles long in a southwest and
noitheast direction, being nearly parallel with the neighboring coast. In the widest part its
breadth is about six miles. The bottom, which is composed of rocks and gravel in the shoaler
parts and of mud in the deeper portions, is quite broken and irregular, the depths of water
varying from twenty-two to eighty fathoms. This ridge lies seven miles outside of the Inner
Schoodic Eidge, and is considereiVone of the best shore fishing-grounds on the coast of Maine.
Mount Desert Inner Eidge. — The center of this ground bears southeast one-quarter east
from Schoodic Island, about fifteen miles distant. It extends four miles in a west by south
and east by north direction, and has a width of half a mile, the depths ranging from thirty to
forty-five fathoms. On the shoaler parts the bottom is rocky, but elsewhere it consists of sand
and gravel. It is considered a good fishing-ground for several species of the cod family during
April, at which time both trawls and hand-lines are used.
Mount Desert Outer Eidge bears southeast by east from the big hill of Mount
Desert Island. The distance from Schoodic Island to the center of this ground is twenty-five
miles. It is two miles long, east by north and west by south, and about three-fourths of a mile
wide. The depths vary from forty-five to sixty fathoms. On the shoal part the bottom is rocky,
but towartl the sides sand and clay predominate. Although of small size, this is considered a
good fishing-ground for cod, etc., from April to Jnly. Fishing is done principally with trawls.
Enoch's Shoal bears east-northeast from Great Duck Island; distance, three miles. This
is a small hummock on the outer part of a ridge that extends out to it from Big Duck Island. It
has a sharp, rocky bottom, and an average depth of eighteen fathoms.
Bank's Ground. — The center bears southeast by south fiom Great Duck Island, from which
it is distant five miles. This is a small patch of ground, about one and one-half miles long, in a
southwest and northeast direction, by one-fourth of a mile wide, and has depths varying from
thirty-five to fifty fathoms ; the bottom is muddy. It is principally resorted to by the small-
boat hake fishermen.
Shell Ground bears southeast from Long Island Head, from which the center of the
ground is distant about six miles. It extends two miles in a southwest and northeast direction,
and is about half a mile wide. It has a shoal of twenty-five fathoms in the middle portion, the
bottom of which is composed of sharp rocks. On all sides of this shoal the bottom is quite
30 FISniNG-GEOUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
in-egular, consisting of pebbles and niml. The greatest depth near the edge of the bank is abont
fifty fathoms. This ground is especially good for haddock in July and August, during which
months it is resorted to by the small boats of the region, the fishing being carried on principally
by means of trawls.
Abner Gkoukd bears south-southeast from Gott's Island ; distance, eight miles. It
extends one and one-half miles iu a northeast and southwest direction, and is one- fourth of a mile
wide. The bottom, which is composed of rocks and mud, is broken, the depth of water ranging
from twenty-five to fifty fathoms. This is a good haddock ground in July and August, and is
A-isitcd by the same class of fishermen that resort to "Shell Ground" and other similar places
in that vicinity.
GROUNDS OFF ISLE AU HAUTE.
Grumpy. — The Grumpy bears southeast from the western head of Isle au Haute; distance,
ten miles. This ground is two and one-half miles long, northeast and southwest, by three-fourths
of a mile wide, and has a small shoal of fifteen fathoms on the northeast part. The general
depth varies from thirty-five to forty fathoms, the bottom being gravellj*. It is considered one
of the best inshore grounds for cod the entire year, for haddock in the winter, and hake, just off
the edge, iu the summer. Both trawls and hand-lines are used.
Hatchell Ground bears southeast by east three-quarters east, about nine and one-half
miles, from the western head of Isle au Haute, the marks being as follows : Eastern Mount
Desert Hill in the middle saddle of Long Island, and Little Spoon Islaud iu the great or center
saddle of Isle au Haute. This ground is but little more than ^ mile in diameter, and is said to
have a shoal of fifteen fathoms, which is so small, however, as to be difficult to find. The general
depth varies from twenty-five to forty fathoms, the shoalest part being in the middle of the
ground, whence the bottom slopes off gradually on all sides. The character of the bottom is sharp
and rocky on the shoal, but gravelly and pebbly toward the sides ; at the edge of the ground the
bottom consists of soft mud. Various low forms of animal life, the most of which serve as food
for fishes, are constantly brought up on the hooks of the trawlers. This ground, next to the
"Grumpy," is considered the best one inside of Mount Desert Rock ; cod and a few pollock are
caught here in the spring; Lake are taken on the mud near the edge of the ground in summer,
and haddock are abundant in winter. Both hand-lines and trawls are used.
Blue Hill Ground bears east by south three-quarters south (approximate) from the
western head of Isle au Haute; distance, about seven miles. The marks for determining the
locality of this ground are as follows : Brimstone Island, out by the western head of Isle au
Haute, and Blue Hill, on the west side of Marshall's Island. These marks lead to a depth of
twenty-five fathoms on the northeast part of the ground, from which the bottom drops off
gradually to the southwest, iu which direction a depth of forty fathoms is reached a mile from
the shoaler portion, which is about half a mile wide. The bottom consists of gravel and pebbles.
This is a good locality for cod during the spring and fall, but is best for haddock during the
entire winter. Both trawls and hand-lines are used.
Inner Horse Eeef bears southeast three-quarters east, one and a half miles, from the
eastern ear of Isle au Haute. It contains a shoal of twenty-five fathoms, about one-eighth of a
mile in diameter. From this shoal the water gradually deei>cns toward the northeast for a
distance of a half mile, when it drops off into mud. The depth of the northeast portion is about
thirty-five fathoms. The bottom consists of i)ebbles and gravel. This is a good ground for cod
iu the spring and fall, and for hake, close to flie edge, in the summer. Trawls and hand lines are
used.
flBburj lodiwinp* of Ihe ToiliJ SUU*. S«l. III.
no
Z(JI
pi.
BscsaafiizaBBBH
oe pi
.^^■
■3Z. 6S
8S ,i' ■
uuv^adTBO
ot
59
ss
4"<^ : .^
V se-.:^""
IS
GS
SS
i ^\^
(
0;.
• i9 :
J.
~^
s^r
S9 N Z^
AVnO "37578" .^''H 29
=1 01
8^
69 1 ee
S9
C8
89
a-ij(
w
>•"■
0^'
^/M-aai
THE COAST OP MAINE. 31
Outer Hokse Eeep Kes but a short distauce to tlie southwest of the luuer Horse Reef,
there beiug only a uaiTOW gully between the two. The shoal, which is small, aud falls off rapidly
ou all sides, has a depth of thirty fathoms. Over a space a quarter of a mile iu diameter the
bottom is gravelly. This grouud is resorted to for the same fish, aud at the same seasons, as the
inner ridge.
Southwest Gkound lies two miles southwest from the western head of Isle an Haute; is
circular iu shape, one-half mile iu diameter, and has a gravelly bottom, with depths of from
thirty-five to forty fathoms. This is a good locality for large cod from April to June and from
September to November. A few haddock aud pollock are taken with the cod. Hand-lines are
principally used, with clam and herring bait.
Babley Hill Ground bears north-northeast from Seal Island aud southsouthwest from
the western head of Isle au Haute, being directly in a line between the two, and very nearly
equidistant from each, the distance being three and one-half miles. This is a small ground, not
over half a mile in diameter, circular in shape, with depths of from twenty-eight to thirty
fathoms, aud with a mixed bottom of rocks and mud. It is a good fishing-ground for cod in the
fall and spring, and a few halibut are also occasionally taken upon it. Both trawls and hand-
lines are used.
GiLKEY Ground bears south from the westeru head of Isle au Haute; distance, four miles.
It extends in an east-uorlheast aud west-southwest direction, aud is aboitt one and one-half miles
long by one-third of a mile wide. It has a rocky bottom on the shoaler portion, where the depth
is tweuty-three fathoms, but it slopes off gradually to a depth of thirty-five fathoms ou the
southwest part, where the bottom is gravelly. The bottom is comparatively smooth, and both
trawls aud hand-lines are used upon it. This is a good ground for cod during the spring and
fall, for haddock during the winter, and for hake, near the edge, iu the summer.
EocK-CoD Ledge. — This ledge lies about one mile northeast of Seal Island (off Isle au
Haute), and has a depth of only three and one-half fathoms on the shoalcst part. Ou all sides it
sloiies off giadually for quite a distance. The bottom consists of sharp rocks, and is brokeu
iu places. This is a very fair ground for rock-cod during the spring and fixll, and has always
been considered an excellent locality for hooking mackerel when these fish are iu this vicinity.
Southeast Ground and Gravel Bottom. — This is au extensive piece of flat ground lying
to the southward of Seal Island, the western part bearing a little east of south, and the eastern
part aboitt east-southeast from the island. It is five or six miles iu diameter, and although
forming a single stretch of ground, the eastern portion has received the name of Southeast
Grouud, while the western part is called the Gravel Bottom. The latter name is derived froiu the
character of the bottom, which is pebbly aud gravelly on the western part, and muddy, with
patches of gravel, ou the eastern part. The westeru portion has dei:)ths of from thirty-five to
forty-five fathoms, while the eastern part varies in depth from forty to sixty fathoms. This is a
good ground for cod iu the spring, for hake iu the summer, and for haddock iu the winter.
Fishing is done mostly with trawls.
Laisdell's Ground. — This is a small rocky spot outside of the Brandy Ledges, and is not
more than a fourth of an acre in extent. It has a depth of twenty fathoms, with a sharp, rocky
bottom. It is considered the best fishing-ground for cod aud haddock in Isle au Haute Bay.
Saddle-Back Eeep bears about south from Saddle-Back Ledge, from which the inner
part is distant three-fourths of a mile. It is two-thirds of a mile long, north aud south, aud
quite narrow, being not more than one-fourth of a mile iu width. The depths vary from fifteen
O'
2 FISHING-GROUNDS OF NOETH AMERICA.
to tliirty-fivc fathoms, and the bottom is broken and rocky. Cod are caught during May and
June with band-lines.
Ottek Island Reef, Snipper Shin, and Western Reef. — These names are appHed to
different sections of an IrregnUir, broken piece of rocky ground, that lies about halfway between
Viual Haven and Seal Island. Otter Island Reef, by which name the eastern section is known,
lies about four miles west by south one-quarter south from the western head of Isle au Haute,
and has depths of from ten to twenty-five fathoms, with a rocky and broken bottom, on which
trawls can seldom be used. It is a favorite ground for cod and haddock during all the seasons
when these fish are in shoal Water, but is best for cod in the spring and for haddock in the fall.
Snipper Shin is only a westerlj' continuation of the Otter Island Reef, and lies between it and
the Western Reef. The general direction of this ground is about iiorthwest until it joins the
Western Reef, which trends more to the southwest. It contains a shoal of seven fathoms, about
which the water is twenty-five fathoms deep in places. The general characteristics of the ground
are similar to those of Otter Island Reef, but small halibut are occasionally taken in addition to
cod and haddock. The Western Reef has the same depth and character of bottom as the other
two pieces of ground.
GROUNDS OFF AND ABOUT MATINICUS ISLAND.
Bald Ridges. — These ridges begin just outside of Wooden Ball Island, and run off in a
nearly direct line for Matinicus Rock. They are almost parallel with one another, and quite close
together, the distance between them not being over half a mile. They are from a fourth of a mile to
half a mile in width each, and have depths of from fifteen to tiiirty fathoms, with a broken, rocky
bottom. The shoalest part is distant about a mile from Wooden Ball Island, and from there
the depth increases toward the southern end. This is a good ground for cod at all seasons when
they are on the coast, the shoal being a favorite resort of the rock-cod.
Harry Marshall's Ground bears south by west from Matinicus Rock, distance, about
three miles, and has an area of not more than two acres. The shoaler portion has a depth of
thirty-five fathoms, with gravelly bottom ; on the edge the depth is forty-five fathoms, and the
bottom consists of rocks andjiiud. A good ground for cod in spring and for hake in summer.
The Bounties bears southeast by south half-south, distant six miles, from Wooden Ball
Island. It is about four miles in diameter, and nearly circular in shape, with depths of forty to
sixty fathoms. The bottom consists of gravel and rocks, and is somewhat broken. It is a good
ground for cod and cusk in the spring and fall and for haddock in the winter.
Minerva Hub.— This is a small gravelly spot, not more than a fourth of a mile in diameter,
with a depth of thirty-five fathoms, and abounds in cod during the spring and fall. It bears
soutlisoutheast from Matinicus Rock ; distance, nearly six miles.
Skate Bank bears south-southeast, distant twelve miles, from Matinicus Rock ; is about
two miles in diameter, and nearly circular in shape, with depths of thirty-five to sixty fathoms.
The bottom is gravelly, but quite uneven. The best season for fishing on this ground for cod
and cusk is from April to July.
Matinicus Sou'Sou'west Ground. — This ground bears south-southwest from Matinicus
Rock, from which the inner edge is distant about six miles. It extends about nine miles north
and south, and has about the same width, being nearly triangular in shape, and broadest at the
northern end. On the northern part there is a shoal of about thirty fathoms, two miles long east
and west, and one mile wide. Sharp rocks cover the shoal, but the ground is not broken and
drops off gradually to depths of fifty and fifty-five fathoms, and even to sixty fathoms on the
I'ishtrv Iii.liistries of tlio T'nitiMl St!itf>H. Sect. TTT.
3
o
o
n
" «3^
^^
!i;<S.:.:V^-:--.- ,A
V w '■■'■■■'"
<0
V)
■»*■-.;.■
s
^
<;>^
i 5
§
/
n
« "^3 f. -^ V""
^
^
\'^ -m
0)
05 'd -rj
■^1
1
X
^:^^:i^•
^5
Ai /si
«9
to
THE COAST OF MAINE. 33
southern part. Outside of the shoal the bottom is pebbly aud gravelly. This is oue of the best
fishing-grounds for cod and haddock in this vicinity. Both trawls and hand-lines are used.
Innek Beeakek lies two miles west of the southwest point of Matinicus Island, and is ii
rocky shoal about an aero in extest, with seven fathoms of water. From the shoal the ground
slopes gradually to depths of twenty-five aud thirty fathoms, aud this slope offers good tishing
for cod iu May and June. The bottom is rocky aud much broken, being too sharp for trawls.
Tow-Head Geotjnd bears north by east one-half east from Matinicus Islaud, from which it
is distaut two and oue-half miles. It has a depth of from twelve to thirty fathoms; is somewhat
irregular iu shape, with a very rocky and broken bottom. The ground designated by this name
is from two and one-half to three miles long, and from one-half <to one and one-half miles wide.
It extends in an east by south and west by north directiou, and is considered one of the best
inside shoal grounds for cod and haddock iu the bay. Iland-lines only are used.
The entile bay, between Vinal Ilaveu and Matinicus and the Green Islands, is full of broken,
rocky patches of flshing-grouud, certain portious of which have received local names from the
fishermen of the vicinity.
Western or Green Island Kidge. — The northern portion of this ridge lies six and one-
half miles northwest by west from Matiuicus Rock, from which place it extends about seven miles
in a soulhsouthwcst direction. Its greatest width is not over oue mile ; the depths vary from
fifteen to thirty fathoms, the bottom being broken aud rocky. This is a good ground for cod iu
the spring and fall.
GROUNDS OFF MATINIC ISLAND.
Matinic Bank is an extension of the shore soundings which make out to the southward
and eastward of Matinic, a distance of two or three miles, with depths, outside of one and a
half miles, of twenty-three to thirty fathoms. The bottom is quite level, consisting of rocks,
pebbles, and gravel, and abounds in cod from March until June. Just off the edge the bottom
is soft and muddj-, with depths of forty to Hfty fathoms.
Matinic Ooze. — This is a flat bottom composed of ooze aud shells that makes ofil' to thc^
eastward of the Haddock Ledge and Shoal, and bears about south from Matinic. Haddock Shoal
and the Ooze are reallj' parts of one ground, though knowu to the fishermen under different names.
The Haddock Shoal is now considered poor ground and is little resorted to. The Ooze falls off
gradually, reaching a depth of fifty fathoms on the outer part. It is considered fair fishing-
ground for cod and haddock in the spring, and for cod and hake iu the summer aud fall.
Freeman's Ground lies about six aud ouehalf miles east from Monhegau Island, between
Orue's Ground and Matinicus VVestern Ground. It is about three miles long, iu a northeast
aud soutliwest directiou, aud one mile wide. It includes a shoal of twenty fathoms on the
southwest part, having a sharp, rocky bottom, the rest of the ground being from twenty-five to
forty fathoms deep, with a boitom of rocks, gravel, and broken shells, quite uueveu iu some
places and smooth in others. This is a good ground for cod in the spring and for hake, cod,
and pollock in the summer and fall.
grounds in the immediatk vicinity of monhegan island.
Middle Suoal, Pollock Eif, Allen's Shoal, and Decker's Shoal are small locky
patches lying to the eastward of Monhegan and northerly from the Outer Shoal. They have
depths varying from six to thirty fathoms, and generally a sharp, rocky, and bioken bottom.
They are fished on with hand-lines for cod aud pollock.
sec III :i
34 FISHING-GEOUNDS OP NORTH AMERICA.
Auother lot of small patches lie westerly from the Outer SLoal and close to Mouhegan Island.
Tbese are, the Ciisk Ground, with depths of from twenty to thirty-five fathoms; Gull Rock Ledge,
a shoal of three and three-fourths fathoms; Lobster Point Ground, with depths of fifteen to thirty
fathoms; Inner Spring Ground, fifteen to thirty fiithoms; and Outer Spring Ground, twenty-
five to thirty-five fathoms. All of these are fished on for cod, haddock, and pollock by small
boats, principally in the early spring and late fall. Not mach distinction can be made between
these grounds, as a boat may fish on several of them in the course of a single day. The Spring
Grounds, however, are so near the harbor that they are generally the first visited in the spring;
hence the name.
aHOUNDS NORTH, NORTHEAST, AND EAST OF MONHEGAN ISLAND.
Hake Ground or Mud Channel. — This is a soft, muddy channel, extending from just
outside of White Head to abreast of Monhegan Island, on the northern side. The depth varies
from twenty to forty-five fathoms, and it was formerly one of the best hake grounds along the
shore. It is now of less importance.
Black Island Ground bears east-northeast from Mouhegan Island, from which the inner
edge Is distant about one mile. It is about one mile in diameter, and has a small shoal of ten
fathoms, with a sharp, rocky bottoui in the center. From this shoal the depth increases gradually
to the edge of the ground, where it reaches forty fathoms. Beyond the depth of twenty-eight
to thirty fathoms the bottom is gravelly and smoother. Monhegan Island boats fish on this
ground all the season, from spring until fall, cod being caught in the sjiring, pollock on the
shoal in the summer, and cod and hake on the edge in summer and fall.
Burnt Island Inner Ridge bears northeast by east from Monhegan Island, from which
the inner edge is distant about three miles. This is a broken piece of ground, with depths
varying from fifteen to twenty fathoms, the bottom being generally rocky and gravelly, with
occasional mud holes. It extends in a northeast direction about four miles, reaching nearly to
the Roaring Bull Ledge, and is about half a mile wide. Cod are taken here in the spring, from
April to June, and cod and hake in the fall, from September to November.
Burnt Island Outer Ridge. — This runs parallel with the Inner Ridge, at a distance from
it of about three-fourths of a mile. It has depths varying from five to twenty-five fiithoms, the
bottom being somewhat less brokeu than on the Inner Ridge. This ground is fished on for the
same species as are taken on the Inner Ridge.
Orne's Ground bears east, distant four and one-half miles, from Monhegan light to the
center. It is about a mile and a half long, east and west, and about a mile wide, with depths
varying from thirty to forty-five fathoms. On the shoal part the bottom consists of sharj) rocks
and is broken, but on other portions of the ground it is gravelly and pebbly and quite level.
The shoal lies toward the eastern part of the ground. This is a good locality for cod.
GROUNDS southeast OF MONHEGAN ISLAND.
Outer Shoal lies about three mites southeast from Monhegan light-house. It is circular in
shape, one and one-half miles in diameter, and has depths ranging from ten to thirty-eight
fathoms. A small rocky shoal of ten fathoms is located near the center of the ground, the
remainder having a gravelly bottom. Cod occur here from spring nntil fall, and the shoal is also
a good locality for pollock.
Monhegan Inner Sou'-Southeast Ground. — This shoal bears south-southeast from
Monhegan light-house, from which the center is distant about five miles. It is nearly circular in
THE COAST OF MAINE. 35
sliape, aud about a mile and a quarter in diameter. It has depths of thirty to fifty fathoms and
is shoalcst on the eastern part. This shoal is broken and rocky, but on the other parts of the
ground the bottom is gravelly, with spots of mud. Cod and cusk are the principal fish taken
here, although a few haddock, pollock, and hake are also caught. June is considered the best
month on this ground for small boats, which usually fish until they are driven away by dogfish.
MoMiEGAN Outer Sou'-Southeast Ground is about three miles outside of the Inner
Sou'-Southeast, on the same bearing, and is similar in size and shape to the Outer Sou'-Sou'-west
Ground. The bottom is rocky and muddy, or composed of hard clay, and the depths range from
thirty-five to fifty-five fathoms. This ground is resorted to by the same kinds of fish that are
caught on the inner shoal.
MONHEGAN Southeast Ground bears southeast from Mouhegan Island, from which the
center is distant twelve miles. It is nearl.y three miles in diameter, and ciicular in shape, but
the bottom is so broken, the depths within very short distances varying from thirty five to
seventy-five fathoms, that it is somewhat difficult to find. The bottom consists of rocks, gravel,
and mud. Tliis is considered a good locality for cod from April to July; both trawls and hand-
lines are used.
Hill Ground bears nearly south-southwest nine miles from Matinic, and is between three
and four miles long, southwest and northeast, and about two miles wide. The shoalest portion
has a depth of thirty-five fathoms, with rocky bottom ; but from here it slopes off gradually to a
depth of fifty fathoms, with a mixed bottom of gravel, rocks, and mud. The best fishing it offers
is for hake. Both trawls and hand-lines are used.
grounds southwest of MONHEGAN ISLAND.
Monhegan Inner Sou'-Sou'west Ground. — This piece of ground derives its name from
its bearings, lying as it does to the south-southwest of Monhegan lighthouse, at a distance of
about five miles ; its length in a south-southwest and north-northeast direction is about one and
one-half miles, and its width one and one-fourth miles. It has a sharp, broken, rocky bottom, and
includes a very small shoal of twenty fathoms and several other hummocks with somewhat greater
depths. The deepest water is fifty fathoms. This ground is fished on mostly by the Monhegan
boats in the spring, from May until July, for cod and pollock.
Monhegan Outer Sou'Sou'west Ground. — This ground bears the same as the last, the
center being nine miles distant from Monhegan light-house. It is four miles long, south-southwest
and north-northeast, and about two miles wide. The depths range from sixty to eighty fathoms,
the bottom being generally pebbly and quite level. This is considered a good ground for cod in
the spring aud fall, and is resorted to by the small boats from Monhegan and by small fishing-
vessels, ranging in size from fifteen to twenty tons, and owned between Portland and Isle an
Haute, which visit these shoal spots during the spring and summer.
grounds west of monhegan island.
Old Jeffrey's. — This is an exceedingly good ground for fish, and it is said that better fishing
may be obtained here than on any other ground of its size in the vicinity. In the spring, cod are
most abundant, while hake, together with cod and pollock, are taken in the late summer and fall.
This ground bears southeast from Pumpkin Eock from which the center is distant about six miles.
It is about three miles long, southwest aud northeast, and about a mile wide. The depth varies
from twenty-five to fifty fatlioras, the bottom being broken and consisting of rocks, gravel, and
mud.
36 FISUING GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
MoNHEGAN Western Guound. — This giound, which is of considerable exteut, lies about
four and one half miles west-southwest from Monhegau Island. It ha,s depths of twenty-two
to forty-live fathoms, the bottom being rocky and gravelly, and considerably broken in i>laces. It
is considered a good feeding-ground for fish, cod being abundant in the spring and hake in the
summer, when dogfish are not too plentiful. The length of the ground is about four or five miles,
and it is nearly two miles wide on the eastern or widest portion, gradually narrowing toward the
western end, where the breadth does not exceed one mile.
Broken Ground. — The center of this ground bears nearly south from Pumpkin Islam!
(entrance to Boothbay Harbor) ; distance, seven miles. It extends four miles in an east northeast
and west-southwest direction, and has au average width of one and tlireefourths miles. The
depths range from thirty-five to fifty fathoms, the bottom being composed of rocks and mml.
Cod occur here the year round, and hake are taken from June to September.
Great Ledge bears south by east, distant twelve miles, from Cape Newagen ; it is about
four miles long, southsouiUwcst and north-northeast, and from one to two miles wide. It is said
to have a shoal of fourteen fathoms on the northern edge, and another of twenty-two fathoms
near the centei'. These shoals are broken and rocky, but the main portion of the ground, having
depths of thirty to forty-five fathoms, is mostly comiiosed of sand, and is quite level, sloping
gradually toward the edge. This is a good ground for haddock and cod in the winter and for
cod in the spring; a few pollock are also taken at times.
GROUNDS between MONHEGAN ISLAND AND PEMAQUID.
MiDDt^E Ground. — This jiiece of shoal ground lies about in midchauuel between Monhegau
Island and Pemaquid, and has a shoal of three fathoms on the eastern part, where the water
breaks in heavy weather. This shoal is called Moser's Ledge, and is broken and rocky, but the
ground slopes off gradually to the southwest, reaching a depth of forty-eight fathoms, with a
bottom of gravel and mud on the deepest part. The ground is about two miles long, southwest
and northeast, and about a mile wide. Boats fish here for cod and haddock in the spring.
Joun's Head Ground lies about four miles south-southeast from Pemaquid Point. It has
dei)ths of twenty-five to thirty-five fathoms, with a sandy bottom, and is a good locality for cod
during April and May, when it is much resorted to by small boats from Bristol. This ground is
circular in shape and about one mile in diameter.
WuiTE Island Ground bears east-southeast from the White Islands, from which the inner
edge is distant about half a mile and the outer edge about four miles. In outline this ground
is triangular and somewhat resembles a harrow, being widest at the outer end. It is very broken
and uneven, the depths ranging from six to thirty fathoms. In some places the bottom is
gravelly, but ou the shoals it consists of sharp, broken rocks. These small, rocky spots are
known by other names, for instance. Brown's Head Ground, on which the fishermen catch a
few rockcod, nn<l a number of others which are resorted to by small boats.
grounds OI'K SEGUIN ISLAND.
Hill GroUiND bears south southwest from Seguin Island, distance about three miles. It is
three miles long, southwest and northeast, and about three-fourths of a mile wide. The depths
range from twelve to twenty-three fathoms, and the bottom is uneven. Tiie northeast part is
very rough, with several shoal spots, having dei)ths of twelve to fourteen fathoms, while between
them the dei)ths vary from twenty to twenty-three tathoms. The southern ])art, tiiough rocky, is
THE COAST OF MAINE. 37
more even tLaii tUe iioitLern. Cod, hake, and ]>()llock are the principal fish found liere. Both
trawls and Laud lines are used.
Seguin Sou'Sou'west Geound bears south-southwest from the western part of Seguin
Island, from wliieli the center is distant four miles. It is a rocty shoal, about one-half mile
long by two hundred yards in width, with a shoaler portion in the center about one-half acre in
extent. The marks are Elwell's Eock, touching the west side of Seguin, and Fuller's Rock,
touching the southern lutrt of Bald Tlcad. The dc))ths range from seven to fourteen fathoms.
This ground is resorted to by boat fisliermen in .September for rock-cod, fishing wholly with
hand-lines. It is evidently a south-southwest continuation of the Hill Ground.
Seguin Eidge bears about southwest by south from Seguin Island; distance, a little more
than three miles. It is about one mile long in an east-s(mtheast and west-northwest direction,
and one-fonrth of a mile broad. It consists of a number of small, rocky hummocks, with depths
of nine to fourteen fathoms, on which cod are taken by the small-boat fishermen in the fall.
Seguin Gkound bears ;^onthwest by south Jiom Seguin Island, from which the center is
distant about seven miles. It is about four miles long, southwest and northeast, and a little more
than two miles broad in the widest part. There is a small hummock, called Bumper's Island
Ground, on the northern end, with a depth of thirteen fathoms. The northern part is mostly
rocky, but toward the south the bottom is gravelly and sloping, so that on the middle and
southern portions there are depths of thirty-five to forty five fathoms. Cod, hake, haddock, and
])ollock are taken on these grounds, which are consideied to furnish the best fishing in the
vicinity of Seguin Island. Both trawls and hand-lines are used.
MclNTiEE Eeef bears south-southwest from Bald Head (Cape Small Point) ; distance to the
center, four and one-half miles. It is two miles long, northeast and southwest, by one-half mile
wide. This reef is very broken and hummocky, with a rocky bottom, and depths of water ranging
from fourteen to twenty fathoms. It is resorted to by the small boat fishermen of Casco Bay,
who fihh for cod with hand-lines. Just to the eastward of this is a piece of bottom comiiosed of
hard mud and shells, where hajvc are usually quite abundant in the summer.
Cow Ground bears nearly southwest from Bald Head, from which the center is distant six
and one half miles. This ground is nearly four miles long, in a northeast and southwest direction,
and about one and one-half miles wide. The northeast portion is rocky and rough, with depths
varying from sixteen to eighteen fathoms, while on the southwest part gravel and pebbles
predominate, and the bottom slopes to depths of twenty to thirty fathoms. Cod and j>ollock are
the principal fish occurring here.
Murk Hub bears south by west one-quarter west from Small Point, from which the center
is distant ten and three-fourths miles. This ground is three miles long, north and south, and has
an average width of one and one-half miles. The depths vary from thirty-four to forty-five
fathoms. The inner part of the Hub is shoalest, and there the bottom consists of sharp, broken
rocks. From this shoal the ground slopes gradually to the south, where it is composed of sand
and gravel. Large quantities of marine invertebrates, affording food for the fishes, are brought
up on the fishermen's hooks here as elsewhere. Cod occur from spring until October, hake from
June to October, and haddock during the winter. Trawls only are used.
Tag Ground lies between the Broken Ground and Seguin Island, bearing east-southeast
from the latter; distance, five miles. This is a narrow, rocky ridge, about two miles long in a
north northeast and south-southwest direction, with an uneven bottom and witli depths varying
from fourteen to thirty fathoms. It is principally frequented by small fishing boats.
38 FISHING-GEOUNDS OF NORTH AMElilCA.
Kettle Bottom. — The center bears south from Seguin Island, from which the inner edge
of the ground is distant ten miles. Its length is twelve miles in a north and south direction,
and its width about ten miles, the shape of the ground being nearly circular. This is an uneven
piece of bottom, consisting of rocks, gravel, and mud, the depths ranging from twenty-five to
seventy-five fathoms. This is considered one of the best, if not the best, fishing-ground on this
part of the coast. Cod are the most abundant fish and are taken the year round. Haddock
abound in the winter. More fish are taken from this bottom than from any other single ground
in the vicinity of Seguin. Harpswell and Portland boats fish here.
GROUNDS OFF CASCO BAT.
West Cod Ledge consists of a succession of rocky patches, extending about four and
one-half miles in an cast-northeast and west-southwest direction, with a width of about half a mile,
the southwestern end of which bears southeast three-quarters south from Portland Head light ;
distance, four and three-fourths miles. The northeastern extremity lies from six to seven miles
east-southeast from Portland Head hght. The shoalest portion of this ledge has a depth of
fourteen to eighteen feet ; on other parts the depths vary from five to twenty-two fathoms. The
bottom is irregular and composed of rocks and gravel. This is a favorite ground for small-boat
market fishermen from Portland, cod and haddock being the fish principally taken.
GROUNDS OFF CAPE PORPOISE.
Lying off Cape Porpoise, between the bearings of southeast and south-southwest, and at
distances varying from six to eight miles, are a number of small, rocky or pebbly patches of
ground, having depths ranging from eighteen to twenty-five fathoms. During certain seasons
they abound in cod and haddock and are visited by the fishermeil of the vicinity.
Tanter bears south from Cape Elizabeth, from which the center is distant eight miles.
It is from two to three miles in diameter, with a depth of about forty fathoms, and a bottom
of rocks and gravel. An excellent fishing-ground for cod in the spring.
Outer and Inner Bumbo. — These are two small, rocky patches (large enough for only
a single vessel to lie upon) bearing northwest from the Tracadia Ground, from which they are
distant two and one-half and three miles, respectively, the Outer Bumbo being the nearest.
Nubble Eidgks consist of four or five nan-ow, rocky ridges, bearing southeast from the
Nubble, and extending in the direction of Boone Island ; they begin near the main shore and
extend nearly to the island. The depths of water upon them vary from eleven to twenty fathoms.
These ridges arc much resorted to by small vessels and open boats, and good catches of cod and
haddock are made in the spring and fall, but especially in the latter season, when both trawls and
hand-lines are used.
Cape Porpoise Peaks are a number of small, rocky patches, bearing about southeast from
Cape Porpoise, from which they are distant four to five miles. These spots are in depths of
twenty to forty fathoms, are considered good grounds for cod, haddock, and cusk, and are much
resorted to by the boats and small vessels of the viciuity.
Tracadia bears northeast from Boone Island, from which it is distant five miles. It is
one-half mile in diameter; has a depth of fifty fathoms, and a bottom of rocks and gravel. A
good haddock ground the entire year.
Blue Clay bears south-southeast from Boone Island, from which it is distant eight miles.
This ground is nearly square, and four to five miles across, with depths ranging from forty-eight
op.
■/nous U'J)lllJ\^e
•7 wi v' ''
9>iO,£ 3<lvO
Fitilicr.r iDcluslli
e riiil.-.I St;it.», Srct. III.
42
3u
"'^1-,
Xv
Rilloch,J>'ip Ground-
"\
■^
ft
Groufift'
THE COASTS OF NEW HAMPSHIEE AND MASSACHITSEITS. 39
to sixty fathoms, aud a bottom of toiigli blue clay. This is the best wiuter haddock grouud in
the viciuity, aud is much resorted to at that season by the haddock trawlers.
Duck Island Kidges. — These are two narrow, rocky ridges rimuing out from Duck Islaud
(oue of the Isles of Shoals) in the direction of Boone Island, reaching to within a mile of the
latter. The depths range from twenty-five to thirty fathoms. A good ground for haddock and
cusk in the winter aud spring, and resorted to by open boats, aud also by many large vessels.
Boone Island Eock Geound begins one-half mile to the eastward of Boone Island Ledge,
and runs in an east-southeast direction for a distance of two to three miles from the ledge, having
a bottom of sharp rocks and clay, and depths ranging from forty to sixty fathoms. It is considered
an excellent fishing-ground for cod, haddock, and cusk, and one of the best winter haddock
grounds in the vicinity, at which season it is resorted to by the trawlers.
Ten Acres bears south from Boone Islaud and east from the Isles of Shoals, these cross
bearings meeting near the center of the grouud, which is about five miles in diameter, with a
small, rocky shoal (one-fourth mile wide) iu the middle ; on this shoal there is a depth of eighteen
to twenty fathoms. The bottom around the shoal consists of clay and mud, and slopes gradually
to depths of fifty to sixty fathoms near the edge. This is a good fishing-ground for cod,"
haddock, cusk, and pollock, while on the muddy bottom surrounding it large quantities of hake
are taken.
In addition to the above-described grounds, there are in Well's Bay several small, rocky
patches of less importance which are chiefly resorted to by small-boat fishermen.
7. THE COASTS OF NEW HAMPSHIEE AND MASSACHUSETTS TO NANTUCKET.
Ipswich Bay. — Ipswich Bay, from the north side of Cape Anu to about Portsmouth, is
resorted to during the winter season by large schools of cod, which visit this region to spawn.
The shore soundings of the bay gradually deepen outwards from the land, reaching depths of
thirty -five to forty fathoms at a distance of six to seven miles from shore. Within this limit,
the bottom is maiuly composed of sand, although there are numerous rocky jjatches betweeu
Newburyport and Cape Ann. Beyond a depth of forty fathoms, liowever, the bottom consists
mostly of mud. The principal codfishing-grouuds of Ipswich Bay He off the northern shore, from
Newburyport to the entrance of Portsmouth Harbor, at a distance of oue aud a half to five miles
from the land, where the water is from twelve to twenty-five fathoms deep. Cod are also taken
abundantly on the ledges at the south. A large fleet of vessels engage in this fishery iu winter.
Prior to ISSO, trawls aud hand-lines were uuiversally used by the shore fleet, but in that year
gill-nets were introduced with good results.
The area of muddy bottom outside is generally a favorite fishing-ground for hake iu the lute
summer and fall. This fishery is participatell iu by the open-boat fishermen of eastern Cape Ann
and the Isles of Shoals, and by small vessels coming from more distant places.
Massachusetts Bay. — The larger part of this bay, inside of Stellwagen's Bank, has a
muddy bottom, ou which large quantities of fish are rarely taken. Farther in, however, on the
shore soundings, especially between the entrance to Boston Harbor aud Plymouth, exist numerous
rocky ledges, which are favorite feeding-grounds for cod in the fall and winter. This region is
frequented by the Swampscott fleet and by other vessels sujiplying the Boston market. jSTear
the center of Cape Cod Bay there is a rocky elevation, on which cod are taken, and numerous
other ledges of larger aud smaller size lie off the south side of Cape Anu.
Herring make their appearance about Cai)e Ann in the month of September. They come iu
large numbers, and remain about two weeks, the best fishing, however, continuing only about
40 FISHING GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
one week. The scliool then moves .'slowly inward toward the head of the bay, the la.st fi.sh being
taUen usually in the vicinity of Miuot's Ledge, off Boston.
The mackerel, in the course of their autumn migrations after leaving the coast of Maine, pass
in by Cape Ann and enter Massachusetts Bay, where they are generally taken in large quantities
during October and November, by vessels of the regular mackerel fleet, using purse-seines.
Grounds in the vicinity or Eastern Foint, Cape Ann. — Old Man's Fasttire bears
southeast, distant five miles, from Eastern Foint light. It is about three-fourths of a mile long,
north-northeast and south-southwest, by one-third of a mile wide, the average depth of water
being twenty-four fathoms; the bottom is rough and rocky. Cod occur here the entire year.
Weatcrn Part Ekhje bears south by cast half east from Eastern Foint light ; distance, about
nine and one-fourth miles. The length, northeast and southwest, is one and one-half miles, and
the average width three-fourths of a mile. The average depth is twenty-nine fathoms, the bottom
being broken and rocky. Small vessels and open boats visit this ridge for cod and haddock in the
summer.
Harfs Ground bears south half east from Eastern Point light; distance, five and one-half
miles. Its length, in an east-northeast and west-southwest direction, is three-fourths of a mile,
and its width one-fourth of a mile. This is a rocky patch with a depth of water of about thirty
fathoms, and is visited by boat fishermen for haddock in the summer.
HagJe Eidge lies seven and two-thirds miles south by west from Eastern Foint light, and is
one mile long, soufheast and northwest, by one-third of a mile wide. It has an average depth of
twenty-five fathoms and an uneven rocky bottom, and is a favorite winter ground for cod.
Inside of the above- described grounds, at an average distance of two and one-half miles
from Eastern Foint light, and between the bearings of south half east and southwest, are a
number of small rocky patches, Avith depths ranging from ten to twenty-five fathoms, designated
as follows: Broicnh Ledge, Sjwt ofEoclcs, Stoneicallj Saturday NigWs Ledge, and Burnhain's Eocks.
Still farther in are two other shoal spots, bearing nearly west from Eastern Point, one of which is
distant about three fourths of a mile, the other a little more than two miles. Each of these has a
depth of about eleven fathoms, the former being called FAcvcnfathom Grovnd, and the latter,
which lies only half a mile southeast of Kettle Island, Kettle Island Ledge. Both of these patches
are fished on by the boat and dory fishermen, using hand-lines, for cod in winter and for haddock
in summer.
Numerous other rocky hummocks, of very limited extent, are located easterly of the grounds
already described and within a few miles of them. They bear local names, and are less frequented
than the larger areas, and the fishermen only reach them by means of cross-bearings from objects
on land. The chief winter-grounds for cod in the vicinity of Eastern Foint are Old Blaii's
Pasture, Eagle Ledge, and Brown's Ledge.
Stellwagen's Bank or Middle Bank separates Massachusetts Bay from the Gulf of
Maine, and extends from near Cape Ann to near Cape Cod. The center of the bank bears about
.south by cast half east from Thatcher's Island, and north by west half west from Highland light.
Cape Cod. The southern point of the bank is distant about five and one-half miles from Race Point,
Cape Cod, and the northwest prong reaches to within about twelve to fifteen miles of Ea.steru
Point, Capo Ann. The shoaler portion, with depths of from nine and one-half to nineteen
fathoms, is seventeen and one-half miles long, in a north by west and south by east direction, and
has an average width of four miles. This part of the bank is sandy, but on the eastern slope, in
depths of twenty-five to fifty-five fathoms, it consists of coarse sand, gravel, and pebbles. On this
THE COASTS OF XEW HAMPSDIRE AND MASSACHUSETTS. 41
gravelly slojie, for a number of years, luiddock and cod were taken in abundance, the former in
winter, the latter in fall and spring. The fishery was continued on a large scale until as late as
1S75, and is even now carried on to a greater or less extent by the smaller vessels composing the
coast fleet. The grounds off the southern end of the bank, and between it and Eace Point,
abound in cod in the fall and winter.
East side of Cape Cod. — The sea bottom off the east side of Cape Cod is sandy, and slopes
oil' gradually from the beach, reaching depths of thirtj' to forty fathoms at distances of tive
to seven miles from land ; below Chatham the slope is even more gradual. 'Within the.se limits
good catches of cod are occasionally obtained, and the same is true of haddock, tliotigh to a
less extent. Farther from shore, in depths of forty to eighty fathoms, and from a point eight
to ten miles off the highlands of Cape Cod to another point lying twenty miles or n. ore east-
southeast of the Chatham lights, there is one continuous stretch of excellent winter haddock
grounds, which were first generally fi.shed upon about 1870. From that time until about four or
five years ago, these grounds w^ere much resorted to during the most of the winter months, and
they still afford abundant catches to the vessels of the shore fleet.
MoEEis Ledge, lying to the eastward of Chatham, is a favorite locality for certain codfisher-
men during the spring and early summer.
Two very excellent fishing-grounds for cod lie off the southeastern x>art of Cape Cod ; one of
these is situated close inshore ; the other is an off-shore ledge. They are described as follows :
Outer Ceajb Ledge. — The center of this ledge lies about fourteen miles east- southeast of
Chatham lights; it extends about five or six miles in a north and south direction, and is about
one mile broad. The depth of water ranges from nineteen to twenty-three fathoms; tlie bottom
is rocky. Cod are more or less plentiful on this ledge during the entire year, but are fished
for during the fall, winter, and spring, the same fishermen engaging mainly in bluefishing
during the summer. The boats used arc large cat-rigs, of twenty^ to thirty-five feet in length,
and belong mostly to Chatham ; a few also hail from Harwich. From seventy to eighty boats of
this character may often be seen about this ledge at the same time. In former years, this ledge
was frequented by large well smacks, of thirty to fifty tons burden, belonging to the south shore
of Cape Cod. It is now occasionally resorted to by large Gloucester schooners.
Pollock Kip Grounds lie between Pollock Eip light-ship and Shovelful light-ship, and
extend northward to Pollock Eip Shoal. The extent of these grounds is about three miles east
and west and two miles north and south, the depths of water ranging from four to twelve fathoms.
They are fished upon during the spring and fall by cat-rigged boats from Monomoy. In stormy
weather Chatham boats also frequently resort to them, instead of going to Crab Ledge. Late in
the spiing and early in the fall, the cod move in nearer shore, and may be caught between Brush's
shoal and Monomoy light. In the winter, however, the cod entirely leave Pollock Rip Grounds,
and move into deeper water.
Nantucket Shoals. — There are three principal codflshing-grounds included in these shoals.
Thejf are as follows :
Great Rip lies about thirteen miles east by south one-half south from Sankaty Head, Nan-
tucket, and is about five miles long north and south, and three miles broad. Over this area the
depths are only nine to eighteen feet, but fishing is mainly carried on around the edge of the
shoal, in depths of six to twelve fiithoms, where the bottom consists of gravel and shells, covered
with sponges, kelp, etc. This region is visited mostly by well smacks from the ports of Long
Lsland Sound, which fish more or less during the entire year, and carry their catch alive to New
York. More fishing is done here during the winter and spring than at other seasons.
42 nSHING-GEOUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
Fishing liij) is an elongate bank, situated about twenty-nine miles southeast from Sankaty
Head light. It extends about ten miles in a northeast and southwest direction, and is about one
and one-half miles broad; the depths of water upon it vary from four and three-quarters fathoms
to eight and three-quarters fiithoms. The character of the bottom is the same as upon Great Rip,
and it is visited by the saiiu^ licet of fishing-vessels, and also occasionally by smacks from
Nantucket.
P/ic/jJs' Banic lies about thirty-eight miles southeast one-half south of Saukaty Head light,
and agrees more or less in size, shape, trend, and character of bottom with Fishing Rip. The
depths of water range from ten to seventeen fathoms. It is resorted to occasionally by the same
fleet of smacks that visit the two preceding banks.
Strong tidal currents flow over these three banks, the flood tide running northeast and the
ebb southwest.
8. THE GULF OF MAINE.
The Gulf of Maine constitutes one of the most important fishing areas of the eastern coast of
North America, both from the abundance of fish which resort to it and its close proximity to
numerous large and enterprising fishing ports. It is nearly rectangular in shape, being bordered
on the north and west by Maine, New Hampshire, and Massachusetts ; on the south by George's
Bank; and on the east by Nova Scotia, Brown's Bank, etc. Its greatest length is from Cape Cod
to Cape Sable, the distance between these two points being about two hundred and fifteen miles.
The average breadth at right angles to this line is about eightj' miles. The area of the Gulf is,
therefore, more than seventeen thousand square miles, all of which is more or less available for
fishing of one kind or another. From the sixty -fathom line, which lies from twelve to twenty-five
miles off the coast, the bottom descends rapidly in some parts, in others more gradually, to depths
of one hundred to one hundred and sixty fathoms, nearly all the deeper tracts having a bottom
of mud, on portions of which hake are sometimes abundant. To the north of the center of the Gulf,
along a line running more or less directly from Cape Ann to the mouth of the Bay of Fundy, are
distributed a number of elevated, gravelly, rocky patches of greater or less size, which are
described below, and on which cod and haddock feed in immense numbers. These grounds are
mainly visited by vessels of from fifteen to fifty tons, belonging to the New England fishing
fleet. The mackerel fisheries of the Gulf of Maine are now the most important in the world.
From the first of June to November, this species of fish is more abundant here than elsewhere
along the coast, and the schools are distributed over the whole extent of the Gulf from the shores
outward, irrespective of the depth of water. The shallow-water fishery is described elsewhere,
but it is in the deeper waters, where the immense purse-seines can be freely used, that the large
catches are made. Formerly, the Gulf of Saint Lawrence was most resorted to by the mackerel
catchers of our ports, but since the introduction of purse-seines for the capture of this fish, the
shallow waters of the Saint Lawrence have been largely deserted by the vessels of our fleet,
which have been able to obtain much more profitable fares nearer liome.
Herring also abound in the Gulf of Maine, where they used to be taken in gill-nets for use as
bait by the fishermen at anchor on the cod grounds. This was at one time the principal method
resorted to by the fishermen of the Gulf of Maine for securing bait, but now almost all the herring
so used are obtained from the harbors and islands along the shore.
Gkand Manan Bank. — Grand Manan Bank lies at the entrance to the Bay of Fundy, and
bears southwest one-half south from the southwest head of Grand Manan Island, from which the
northern part of the bank is fifteen miles distant. It is ten miles long and five miles wide, and
THE GULP OF MAINE. 43
extends iu a southwest aud uortlieast diiectiou. llie bottom is mostly composed of stones and
gravel, aud the dejiths of water vary from twenty-four to forty-five fathoms. The tides are quite
strong over this bank, but not sufficiently so to prevent trawling. Cod aud pollock are the
principal fish occurring here, cusk, hake, haddock, and halibut being less plentiful. The
fishing season is from April to October, during which time the fish come on the bank to feed.
In the spring, the fish are usually most abundant on the southwest portion, but later in the season
the best fishing is generally obtained ou the other end of the ground. This bank is a favorite
fishing-ground for that class of small vessels known as the shore fishermen.
Geeman Bank. — Although this bank is not usually laid down on the charts, it is one of the
most importaut iu the Bay of Fuudy. It bears southeast from Baker's Island light, Mount
Desert, from which the northwest part is about fifty-two miles distant. The lengtli is about
fifteen miles aud the width nine to ten miles. It lies between 43° 38' and 43° 53' north latitude,
and 00° 58' and 07° 15' west longitude. There are from sixty-five to one hundred fathoms of water.
The bottom is mostly a tough red clay, but with spots of mud, sand, gravel, and pebbles on some
parts. The tides set out and in over the bank, to and from the Bay of Fuudy, the ebb running
about southwest and the flood northeast, but the currents are not so strong as might be expected.
Cod, hake, cusk, and haddock are the fish chiefly taken, but a few halibut and pollock are
occasionally caught. The fishing season is from April to October, although fish are usually most
abundant in the spring. This bank is mainly resorted to by vessels from the coast of Maine,
but is sometimes visited by the Massachusetts fishermen.
Marblehead Bank. — This fishing-ground, which is quite an important one for the shore
codfishermen, is not laid down on the published charts, and the fishermen who visit it are,
therefore, probably the only persons familiar with its location and extent. The ground, which
they call Marblehead Bank, is situated between Grand Manan aud German Banks, the shoal water
bearing south-southeast from Moos-a-Bec light, and being distant thirty-two miles. It is about
twelve to fifteen miles long and seven or eight miles wide, and lies between 44° 00' and 44° 10'
north latitude, and 00° 58' aud 67° 13' west longitude. There are from thirty-five to seventy
fathoms of water over it, and the bottom is mostly clay and gravel. The fish which occur iu
the greatest numbers are cod, pollock, and haddock, but with these are also found more or less
hake and cusk. The best fishing is generally in the spring and early summer. . The same class of
vessels, the shore fishermen, which frequent Grand Manan and German Banks also resort to this
bank, but occasionally those of a larger size make one or more trips to it during the summer season.
Jones' Ground — This is quite an important fishing-ground for cod, and, though of compara-
tively small size, is much resorted to by many of the same vessels that also visit the other banks
in the Gulf of Maine. The western part bears southeast from Baker's Island, from which it is
distant thirty-two miles. The entire ground is about ten to twelve miles long, northeast and
southwest, and five miles wide. The depths range from fifty to one hundred fathoms, and the
bottom, which is quite broken, consists of rocks, gravel, and mud. Ou the northeast part of the
ground, where the depths vary fi'om fifty to seventy fathoms, the bottom is rocky and rough.
This part bears southeast by east, one-half east, from Baker's Island light, from which it is
di.stant about thirty-five miles. The entire ground furnishes good trawl fishing from the first of
May to the last of September. The principal fish taken are cod of large size ; a smaller amount
of hake, cusk, pollock, and haddock are also secured.
Clay Bank bears southwest by west from Mount Desert Eock, from which the center is
distant seven miles. It is four miles long, west-southwest and east-northeast, by two miles broad.
44 FISBING-GEODNDS OF NORTH AMEEICA.
The depths are fifty to eighty fathoms, and the bottom consists of hard chiy. The principal fish
taken here are cod.
Bank Comfort, which is a comparatively little known fishing-ground, bears southeast by
south from ISIonnt Desert Itock ; distant thirteen miles. It is said to be about five miles long,
southwest and uortlicast, by three miles wide; has a hard gravelly bottom, and depths ranging
from seventy-five to eighty fathoms. It is considered an excellent fishing-ground for cod in the
spring and summer, but is less frequented than some other localities, since its small size renders
it difiicult for the fishermen to find it, except under the most favorable circumstances.
Jeffeey's Bank. — This bank, which lies east of Cashe's Ledge, is of comparatively little
importance as a fishing-ground. It is about twenty miles long, southwest and northeast, and ten
miles wide, the northern and southern limits being 43^ 30' and 43° 15' north latitude. The
eastern edge is in 08^ 25' and the western in 08° 45' west longitude. The bottom, which is
somewhat broken, is composed of mud, sand, gravel, and pebbles, the depths of water ranging from
thirty-five to seventy fathoms. Cod, haddock, hake, and cask are the most abundant fish; some
pollock are caught, but halibut are rarely taken. The host season is late in the spring and early
in the summer, before the schools of dogfish strike in, after which but few fish can be obtained.
This bank is resorted to by the smaller-sized vessels, from fifteen to fifty tons.
Kewfoxjnd and Monhegan Fall Grounds are evidently parts of Jeffrey's Bank, according
to the statements of intelligent fishermen who have visited them. Newfound Ground is on the
eastern part of the bank, and has a very irregular and broken bottom. Monhegan Fall Ground
lies westerly from Newfound. Both of tliese grounds used to furnish excellent fishing, but are
not now resorted to as much as formerly.
Cashe's Ledge. — This is not now a very important fishing-ground except for a brief period
in the spring, although it is resorted to somewhat by the shore fishermen in summer and fall,
when good trips are usually obtained. It bears east from Cape Ann, from which the shoaler
portions are seventy-six miles distant. The bank is about twenty-two miles long, from 42° 49' to
43° 11' north latitude, and about seventeen miles wide, from 08° 40' to 69° 03' west longitude.
There are three small shoals on the western part of the bank, the southern one with a dej)th of
seven fathoms of water, the middle one with four fathoms, and the northern one with eleven
fathoms. The position of the middle shoal is 42° 5G' north latitude and 08° 52' west longitude.
From this the south shoal bears south by east, and the north shoal north-northeast, each being
three and one-half miles distant from it. The water breaks on these in rough weather, and
though of small extent they are dangerous to passing vessels, especially as they lie almost
directly in the track of vessels bound from Cape Sable to ports in Massachusetts Bay. With the
exception of the shoals the depth of water ranges from fifteen to sixty fiithoms. The ground is
more or less broken, with a bottom of sand, pebbles, and rocks. The greater part of the fish
caught here are cod, hake, and cusk. Halibut are rarely seen, and haddock and pollock are less
plentiful than the other kinds. Good fares are often secured on the edge of the ground in May
and June, but the dogfish, which appear about the last of June or .n July, usually drive every-
thing before them, and, for a time, stop the fishing. The vessels fishing on Cashe's Ledge range
from fifteen to forty -five tons, and are classed as shore-trawlers.
FippENiES Bank bears east one-quarter south from Thatcher's Island ; distance, sixty-one
miles. It is nearly ten miles long north and south, and has an average width of four and one-half
OQiles. The bottom consists of gravel, pebbles, and clay, the depths ranging from thirty-six to
sixty fathoms. Resorted to by the shore fleet in the spring and early summer.
TUE GULF OF MAINE. ^ 45"
Platt's Bank, or New Ledge, bears cast by north ouchalf north from Thatcher's Island,
from which the shoal portion of the ledge is distant fifiy-three miles. This bank is twelve miles
long, southwest and northeast, and eight miles wide. The shoal, which is rocky and of small
extent, is situated near the center, and has a depth of twenty-nine fathoms. Over a large extent
of the bank the depths range from thirty to thirty-five fathoms, w ith a bottom of rocks and gravel.
From the edge of this area the bottom slopes gradually to a depth of fifty to sixty fathoms;
beyond which it drops suddenly to eighty or ninety fathoms with a muddy bottom. This is con-
sidered one of the very best fishing-grounds for cod and haddock in the Gulf of Maine, and hake
are generally abundant during the summer on the muddy bottom near its edge. Trawl-lines
are used. Resorted to by the shore fishing-vessels from all along the coast, from Cape Cod to
Maine.
Mistaken Ledge bears north from the center of New Ledge, from which it is distant about
ten miles. This ground is about eight miles long in an east and west direction, and five miles
wide. The depths range from thirty-five to sixty fathoms, and the bottom consists of rocks and
gravel. In projjortion to its size this ground is nearly as important as New Ledge, being resorted
to by the same species of fish and visited by the same class of fishing vessels.
Jeffrey's Ledge. — This may be considered one of the best shore fishing grounds in the Gulf
of Maine, although it is of comparatively small size. It appears to be an extension of the shoal
ground that makes off in a northeasterly direction from Cape Ann ; it is about twenty miles long,
nortjieast and southwest, and from two to four miles wide. Its southern limit is 42° 54' and its
northern 43° II' north latitude, and the eastern and western boundaries may be placed at 69° 58'
iind 70° 18' west longitude. The bottom is rocky on the shoalest parts, with gravel and pebbles
along the edges. The depths of water range from twenty-seven to thirty-five fathoms on the
bank, and fall oft" to forty and fifty fathoms at the edges. There is usually little or no tide,
although an occasional current sets toward the southwest. Cod, cusk, and haddock aie taken in
the fall, winter, spring, and early summer, with a greater or less quantity of hake or pollock.
For a number of years Jeffrey's Ledge was a favorite winter fishing-ground for haddock, which
were very abundant there, and even at the present time many vessels resort to it in pursuit of
that species; but since the haddock fishermen have extended their cruises to the outer banks,
a less number now visit Jeffrey's Ledge. Besides the haddock catchers, other vessels engaged
in the shore fisheries come to this ground in the spring and fall.
Eastern shoal water of Cape Ann. — This ground extends off in an east-northeast
dixection from Cape Ann, a distance of fifteen to eighteen miles. It is, in reality, a southwest
continuation of Jeffrey's Ledge, the two forming a nearly continuous ridge, running northeast
from Cape Ann, a distance of about forty-two miles. The depths of water on the so-called
"Eastern Shoal Water" vary from twenty to forty five fathoms, the bottom consisting of rocks,
pebbles, and coarse gravel over the most of its extent. On the edges sand and mud occur. The
eastern part of this ground is resorted to by the haddock fleet during the fall and early winter,
and the other parts are visited more or less the entire year, for cod, haddock, and pollock, by
the vessels composing the shore fleet, and by the boat fishermen of Cape Ann.
Tillie's Bank bears east by south one-half south from Thatcher's Island, Cape Ann, from
which the shoal (located near the center of the ground) is distant eighteen miles. A small, rocky
shoal, with a depth of twenty-eight fathoms (some fishermen claim a less depth), is situated near
the center, outside of which the water deepens to forty fathoms, this depth occupying quite an
tixteuded area. The length of the entiiie ground is ten miles, in an east and west direction, and
46 FISHING GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
the width abont five miles. At the edge it falls off rapidly to depths of fifty to sixty fathoms,
before reaching the mud at a still greater depth. The bottom is rough and rocky over the
greater part. Tillie's was formerly regarded as one of the best fishing-grouuds off Cape Ann,
aud is still resorted to for cod and in the fall for haddock. Trawls are the principal kinds of
fishing gear in use.
9. THE SOUTHERN COAST OF NEW ENGLAND
THE SHORE GROUNDS OF NANTUCKET.
There are two princii)al shore grounds for cod ou the coast of Nantucket ; one lies off the
eastern side of the island, the other off the southern. The eastern ground extends from off
Siasconsett (north of Old Man's Shoal) northward to off Sankaty Head light, a distance of two
miles, and off shore from three-fourths of a mile to two miles, with depths of four and one-half to
eleven fathoms. The bottom is gravelly, with mussels and kelp. These grounds are fished on by
about seventy dories during the spring and fall. The southern grounds extend westward from
Tom Never's Head to Weedweeder Shoal, a distance of four miles, and off shore a distanciB of
about one mile. Fishing is carried on in dejiths of eight to ten fathoms, on sandy and shelly
bottoms, by about thirty dories belonging to Nantucket towii, but quartering at the South Shore
Life-Saving Station. Both cod and haddock are taken in the spring and fall. In the summer
this is a good blueflshing-ground, and the fishery is carried on by means of gill-nets and hooks
and lines.
NANTUCKET SOUND.
Bishop and Clark's Ledge, near Hyannis, is a very rough bottom, with some exposed
rocks, and is about one and three-fourths miles long and five-eighths of a mile wide. Fishing for
tautog is carried ou here, in depths of three to six fathoms, during the entire summer, or from
June to October or November. This ledge is visited by large cat-rigged boats from Hyannis,
which fish with hook and line. It is also a good ground for lobsters.
Southwest Ground, Hyannis, extends from the breakwater, off Hyannis, out to Bell
Buoy, a distance of about two miles, and westward to Collier's Ledge, a distance of two and
one-half miles, with depths of ten feet to four fathoms ; the bottom consists of sand, gravel, and
rocks, covered with algae and eel-grass. During June this is considered the best sea-bass
ground on the Massachusetts coast. Tautog, soup, and bluefish are also taken from June to
October. This ground is frequented by cat-rigged boats from Hyannis, Centreville, and Cotuit.
Off Cotuit, over an area about two miles square, and with an average depth of three
fathoms, gill-net fishing for bluefish is extensively carried on during June and July. As many
as three hundred or four hundred gill-nets are often set there at a time.
Mutton Shoal Ground lies in the outer or southwestern part of Muskeget Channel, and
extends about one mile south from Mutton Shoal, with a width of about the same. The depths
range from three and three-fourths to four fathoms. Cod and haddock are taken in the spring
and fall, and bluefish iu the summer, the latter being fished for mainly in the rips at the side of
the channel, with hooks and lines. This region is frequented by the so-called " Vineyard-fishing
boats" hailing from Edgartown, Martha's Vineyard.
vineyard sound.
Vineyard Sound, from Hedge Fence Shoal, off East Chop, Martha's Vineyard, to east of Gay
Head, constitutes one of the most extensive sea-bass grounds of the New England coast. Fishing
is carried on everywhere throughout this region in depths of six to twelve fathoms, where the
I'isliorv iuiluMii-3^'1 til. I . .hUOtan-
^.
_ E C '^ "^
C IT T
/?c^ l^
.TiidHh
Browns \/^
naccoonWooi
UiLrre Ridge ^^
"JiilUjci -n ' Ground.
)\Si3iidvIl(ic>k
-o . Snnh
JFisri?7ff§ ^J Xochy Spots '^
'^iSluxrfi, River- Ground,
10
^Abseciun. Gioiaixl,
CMav '^^•^■i^-^ f(JLi/u)rrtSaji/c
JZ. Ilenlopen
,-2^
4^- Sgimn Grounds
ift E.of Earneqat Light
hirirdcock.
J^ GivuruL
fs.vrlcdgc^
u. w ." f-Mije i- rod m J
0 Blochl-JSonhOa b -.<>,' aruuT, i
tK "* ,„ NoMansLaDdT
^8 AElocka. ■' *'*.•« '^, -It
Moninni* PI. ■ ., ^"^ Sharks led^c tt-
■as~ •
tjruuad.
—tit —
^■.■'■r.;}$,/'
'■'■ '.-^^i^ 0fr share
<^^!^-Fire IslaruL Grounds
-^
>
0
c
c
V
<^
',ggHart>ur \
Ground \
^,
\
Ik I
^
.<^
/
V
Chart No. 12.
FISHING GROUNDS
FROM GAY HEAD, MASS.
TO CAPE HENLOPEN, DEL.
THE SOUTHERN COAST OF NEW ENGLAND. 47
bottom is rockj', gravelly, or sbelly. The fisbiiig fleet consists of cat-rigged boats from Martha's
Vineyard, Wood's Holl, and Falmouth, and well-smacks from New London and Noank,
Connecticut, there being about fifty of the former class and thirty of the latter class regularly
employed in this fishery. The season extends from the middle of June to the first of October;
the boats shifting from place to place as the supply of fish becomes exhausted in each locality,
and returning to the same ground at a later period. The well-smacks carry their catch directly to
New York, but the fish taken by the smaller boats are shipped in barrels with ice.
Tautog are caught in small quantities along the western shore from Wood's Holl to Job's
Keck, Naushon, a distance of about two miles, by the shore fishermen. They are also taken about
Cuttyhunk through September and October, and likewise in November if the weather is moderate.
The latter locality is considered to furnish the best tautog fishing of this region.
Lobster pots are set along both sides of the sound, from West Chop and Wood's Holl to Gay
Head and Cuttyhunk, in depths of eight to fifteen fathoms. This was, in former times, a very
valuable lobster region, and still remains so in its outer portions; but lobsters have become more
and more scarce every year in the upper part of the sound, while they have apparently increased
in abundance about Gay Head, Cuttyhunk, and No Man's Land. This fishery has, therefore,
been mostly transferred to the outer grounds. The number of pots set in the sound during the
past few years has varied from about 700 to 2,000 annually. Around Cuttyhunk about 900 pots
are now in use. Very many pots are set just to the west and north of Gay Head, by parties
residing temporarily at Menemsha Bight. Lobstering in the sound is confined to rocky and
gravelly bottoms.
buzzard's bay.
The principal fishery of Buzzard's Bay is for tautog during the summer. Tautog appear at
the head of the bay about May, and work into the shallow water farther out about a month later.
The fishery is conducted on both sides of the bay, on rocky bottoms, in average depths of three
fathoms, by a fleet of about twenty smacks from New Bedford and Westport, Massachusetts.
Sea bass and scup are also taken during the summer months, but are not as abundant here as in
Vineyard Sound.
OFF TINEYABD SOUND.
No Man's Land. — Cod are taken on all the rocky bottoms about this island during the fall
and spring, and lobsters on all kinds of bottom during the spring and summer. The fall cod-
fishery begins about the first of October, and continues until very stormy weather prevents the men
from venturing out in their boats. About the first of April they begin to fish again for cod, and
stop about the middle of May. The lobster season extends from the middle of May until about
the twentieth of September. The bottom to the east and south of the island is sandy and gravelly;
while to the west and north it is more or less the same, with numerous rocky patches. Codfishing
is carried on from one-half to one and one-half miles from shore, in depths of four to ten fathoms,
by about thirty boats using hand-lines only. The lobster jjots are set from one-half to two miles
from shore, in depths of ten to thirteen fathoms. There are from fifteen to twenty lobstermen
fishing from here during the summer, usiug about one thousand pots. The catch for 1882
amounted to about one hundred thousand marketable lobsters. The fishermen of No Man's Land
belong entirely to Martha's Vineyard, and live on the former island only during the fishing season;
they use the " Vineyard fishing-boats." In addition to these, there are several well-smacks from
New London and Noank, Connecticut, which visit this region more or less constantly during both
the cod and lobster seasons, carrying their catch to New York.
48 FISHING GROUNDS OF NOllTH AMERICA.
SouTiiWKST IjKDGE Hc'S about Ibirtcou miles southwest by south from Gay Head, Martha's
Vineyaiil. It is oval iu outliue, exteudiug about two miles east and west aud ouc and one-fourth
miles north and south. The depth of water is about fourteen or fifteen iathoms, and the bottom
is rocky acd gravelly. This is a very good cod ground, and is resorted to by New York smacks
in the summer, and by schooners from New England iu the si)ring, the former using hand-lines and
the latter trawls.
Cox's Ledge is a cod ground, the center of which lies about twenty-three miles southwest
one-half west from Gay Head, Martha's Vine^aM. ' It Is elongate in shape, being four or tire
miles long, east and west, and about two miles wide. The depths of water range from fifteen to
twenty-two fathoms. The bottom consists of rocks and gravel. Cod are found the entire year,
and some haddock are also taken. This ground is frequented by eight or ten smacks from New
Bedford and New Loudon, and three large schooners from Fair Haven, Massachusetts, the former
using hand-lines, the latter trawls. The smacks fish principally through the summer and the
schooners through the early spring.
Several interesting small areas or "spots" about Cox's Ledge are known to the fishermen.
They are of very limited extent, but are noted as furnishing excellent fishing. They are described
as follows :
"Southwest Spot" lies about two miles southwest of the ledge. It has a hard bottom, and
a depth of twenty fathoms. "West Spot" is about one-half mile west of the ledge, with the same
character of bottom, and a depth of twenty-two fathoms. "Southeast Spot," situated about
seven miles southeast of the ledge, has also the same bottom and a depth of eighteen fathoms.
Other smaller and less defined spots occur iu the same vicinity.
Brown's Ledge lies six miles southwest by west from Sow aud Pigs (Vineyard Sound)
light-ship. It is about two miles square, aud has a locky bottom, with depths of seven to ten
fathoms. Cod are taken here in the spring and fall, and tautog in the fall. This ground furnishes
the last tautog of the season for this part of the coast. Fishing is- carried on by smacks from
New Bedford and Westpoit, Massachusetts. Some lobsters are caught on this ledge by Noank,
Connecticut, smacks.
THE COAST OF RHODE ISLAND.
Shark's Ledge bears southeast by south from Block Island light, nine miles to the center.
Its length, east and west, is about five miles. This is a rocky ground, with about twenty fathoms
of water, and is fished upon for cod and haddock during the winter, or from November to May or
June, by New York smacks and Block Island l)oats using hand-lines. Fish are generally abundant.
There are numerous small, rocky patches, without names, but furnishing good cod and
haddock fishing, situated to the south aud southeast of Block Island, aud between that island
and Shark's Ledge. The season is the same as for the ledge. Fishing is carried on mainly by
Block Island boats.
Southwest Ledge of Block Island. — The center of this ledgo lies about three miles
southwest by west one-half west from the southwest head of Block Island. It is about two
miles long iu a northeast and southwest direction, the inner edge being about two miles off' the
southwest head. The width of the ledge is about one-half mile; depth of water, five to nine
fathoms; character of bottom, rocky. This is a good ground for cod aud haddock from November
to June. It is visited by New York smacks and Block Island boats.
North Ground of Block Island lies about one and one half miles north-northwest of the
nun buoy, off the northern end of Block Island, and extends about one mile north and south, and
one-half mile east and west. Tlie bottom is rocky and broken. This is a good ground for cod in
the spring, and is visited by the same class of boats that resort to Southwest Ledge.
JNliVV YOKK TO SOUTHERN FLOEIDA. 49
0. NEW YORK TO SOUTHERN FLORIDA.
LONG ISLAND SOUND.
Good sea-bass grounds occur at uuaierons iutervals aloug tlic uortheru side of Long Island,
close inshore. Off the eastern side of Gardiner's Island there are many small, rocky spots, which
abound in sea bass, and which the fishermen find by means of ranges on shore. Again, from off
Brown's Hill, near Orient, to Hortou's Point light, in Southold, there are a series of rocky spots,
situated at irregular intervals close to the shore, where good sea-bass fishing is found. These
spats are mostly eddies on either side of points or small headlands, and have depths of nine to
twelve feet. They are of slight extent, seldom more than ten rods in diameter, and are resorted
to by small boats from the neighboring shores, principally for pleasure, though to some extent as
a regular business. The fishermen go one in a boat. Fleets of ten to fifteen of these boats often
collect together on one of these grounds at a time. The most western sea-bass grounds of Long
Island Sound are situated off Eaton's Point, near Huntington Bay, in twelve feet of water, with
rocky bottom. Blackfish are also found here. Fishing is cai'ried on in the same manner as to
the east. The seabass season in Long Island Sound is from the middle of June to the last of
September.
Scup and small bluefish, called " snappers," are caught in most of the bays and harbors
of Long Island Sound. The latter fish are most abundant in tide-ways. Both species are taken
mainly in depths of one to three fathoms, on sandy bottoms, by pleasure parties, but are seldom
sought after by professional fishermen.
THE OUTER SIDE OF LONG ISLAND.
MONTAUK Point Ground lies between Montauk Point, Long Island, and Great Eastern
Eock, with depths of four to seven fathoms and a rocky bottom. This is a cod ground from
April 1 to June 1, and is resorted to in the summer for sea bass. Fishing is done with hand-lines
only.
Napeague Beach Ground is an inshore cod ground, extending from south of Montauk
Point along Kapeague Beach, a distance of about ten miles. Fishing is carried on from one-half
to one and one-half miles off the beach, on sandy bottoms, in depths of three to eight fathoms, by
New Toi-k smacks using trawls. The season lasts from the middle of April until the first of
June.
East Hampton Ground begins off East Hampton, at a distance of three to five miles from
shore, and extends westward, parallel with the shore, a distance of eight miles. The bottom
consists of sand ; the depths range from fourteen to seventeen fathoms. The season and fishing
boats are the same as for the last ground.
Shinnicock Bay Ground begins off Shinnicock light, at distances of seven to fifteen miles
from shore, and extends parallel with the shore, a distance of about ten miles, to off Moriche's
Bay. The bottom is sandy and broken, with depths of sixteen to twenty-four fathoms. This
is a winter cod ground, the season' lasting from the first of January to May. Fishing is carried
on by Kew York and New England smacks using trawls.
Raccoon Woods Ground lies close off Fire Island Beach, about one-fourth of a mile from
land, and extends from off Raccoon Woods to Fire Island light, a distance of about seventeen
miles. The bottom is sandy; depths, two to five fathoms. This is a spring and fall cod ground,
and is visited by New York market smacks using trawls.
sec III 4
60 FISHING-GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
FiKE Island OffShoee Ground. — The center of this giouud bears about southeast from
Fire Island light ; distance, fifteen to eighteen miles. It is about five miles wide aud from fifteen
to eighteen miles long, extending nearly parallel with the neighboring Long Island shore. The
depths range from sixteen to twenty-three fathoms; the bottom consists of sand and gravel, with
sea weeds and sea clams. This is a winter cod ground for New York market smacks using trawls.
Cholera Bank lies about twelve miles south of Jones Inlet, and is about one mile long,
east aud west^ and one-half mile wide. The bottom is rocky ; depth, twelve fathoms. Fall
ground for cod ; visited by New York market smacks.
Mussel Eidge is situated southeast of Jones Inlet, about one and one-half miles olf the
beach, and has depths of eight to ten fathoms, with a bottom of sand, mussels, and clams. This
is a cod ground in the fall and spring; visited by New York market smacks and small sloops from
Jones Inlet.
DiLLBEKRY GROUND extends westwai'd, i)arallel with the shore, from three to five miles oft'
Jones Inlet, to off Rockaway Inlet, a distance of fourteen to fifteen miles. The depths of water
range from four to ten fathoms; the bottom is sandy, with some rocks. This is a boat
fishing-ground for cod in the spring and fall, and some fishing is also done in the winter.
THE COAST OF NEAV JERSEY.
RocKY' Ground lies from twelve to fifteen miles southeast of Highland light, New Jersej".
and is about three miles long, southeast and northwest, and one mile wide. Cod are occasionally
taken here in the winter, but the iiriucipal fishery is for bhiefish in the summer. This region is
visited by the New York market smacks.
Rocky Spots in the Channel are located about eight miles south-southeast from Sandy
Hook light-ship, in depths of twenty fathoms. Tliis area is about three miles square, aud is
mainlj" valued as a bluefish ground.
Fishing Bank begins southea.st of Highland light, about three miles from land, and extends
south a distance of about eight miles. Depths, eight to twelve fathoms; bottom, sandy and
rockj'. This is a good ground for bluefish and sea bass in the summer.
Shark River Ground. — The center of this ground bears southeast from Long Branch ;
distance, six miles. It is about three miles square, with depths of twelve to sixteen fathoms.
Cod are found here in the winter and bluefish in the summer.
Squan Ground begins about fifteen miles southeast of Squau, and runs to within five miles
northeast of Barnegat light. It is located on the so-called twelve-fathom ridge, where the bottom
consists mainly of sand, stones, and mussels. This is a winter ground for cod.
East of Barnegat Light. — The center of this ground lies from twelve to fifteen miles
east of Barnegat light. It extends about seven or eight miles north and south, and is about
three miles broad. The depths of water range from twelve to sixteen fathoms. The bottom is
sandy and gravelij', with sea clams. A winter cod ground ; visited by New York market smacks.
Egg Harbor Ground. — The center of this ground lies fifteen miles southeast of Egg
Harbor light. The ground is about fifteen miles long and three miles broad, and extends
parallel with the neighboring coast. Depths, twelve to fifteen fiithoms ; bottom, sandy, with
alga», sea clams, and mussels. A winter cod ground ; resorted to by New York market smacks.
Absecum Ground bears .south of Absecum light fifteen to eighteen miles to the center of
the ground. It extends about seven miles parallel with the coast, and is about four miles broad.
Ftsli'^rv '^Ti 1m- tii'^'* of th** FnUod Ptfttes. Srrt. Til
NEW YORK TO SOUTHEFJSr FLORIDA. 51
Depths, seven to fifteen fathoms ; bottom, saudy aud gravelly, with clams. A cod ground ; visited
by Xew York market smacks and sloops from Atlantic City using trawls.
TowNSEND Geotjnd is a very small clay bank, situated about ten miles east-southeast of
Townsend Inlet. It is about ten rods square, with a depth of ten fathoms. This is a good sea-
bass ground in the summer; visited by New York market smacks.
Heeefoed Geound lies about uine miles east of Hereford light. It is about four miles
square, with sandy and rocky bottom, and depths of uine to ten fathoms. Seabass grouiKl, of
the same character as the last.
Five-Fathom Bank lies mostly to the north aud east of the buoy, located liortli of the Five-
Fathom Bank light-ship. It extends five or six miles east of the buoy, and one or two miles west
of it, aud has a width of about three miles. This bank is a series of gullies, the depths ranging
from three to ten fathoms, and the bottom consisting of sand, with many mussels. It is a winter
cod ground ; visited by the New Y'ork market smacks.
THE COAST OF DELAWAEE.
Old Ground. — The cross-bearings to the center of this ground are given as follows : Gape
Henlopen, bearing northwest, distant fifteen miles ; Indian Eiver, bearing west, distant ten miles.
This ground is about eight miles long, north and south, and three miles broad ; depths of water,
nine to fourteen fathoms ; bottom, rocky. It is one of the largest and oldest known grounds of
this part of the coast, and the most extensive rocky bottom south of Montauk Point. Cod are
taken here in the winter and sea bass in the summer by New York market smacks, and sea bass
in the summer by Philadelphia pungies.
Sand-Ditch Bar bears northeast from Kit's Hammock Beach, from which the center is four
miles distant, and is two miles long in an east and west dii'ection by one-half mile wide. This
is really an oyster-bed, having a depth of eight feet only at low tide, and is visited by local
fishermen in summer, for weakfish and other species which frequent these waters.
Southeast Bank, which is similar to the last in character and in the varieties of fish taken,
bears south-southeast from Kit's Hammock Beach ; distance, five miles. It is eight miles long in
a direction corresponding with the trend of the bay, and half a mile wide. The depth of water
at low tide is twelve feet, and the bottom consists of blue clay.
THE coast of MARYLAND FROM ISLE OF WIGHT TO CHINCOTEAGUE INLET.
Along this stretch of coast no outside fishing-grounds, j)roperly speaking, occur at anj-
distance from the land; but menhaden, bluefish, and sea mullet are taken on the outer beaches
with seines, and drumflsh are caught in the same localities with hooks and lines. In the inner
waters of Assateague, Sinepuxent, and Isle of Wight Bays quite an extensive seine and gill-net
fishery is carried on for striped bass, perch, and various other species of fish.
THE EASTERN COAST OF VIRGINIA FROM CHINCOTEAGUE INLET TO HOG ISLAND.
This coast is low and sandy, with a very gradual slope out under the water, an average depth
of seven to eight fathoms only being reached at a distance of five miles from the land. Over this
section, however, within seven or eight miles of the land, there are quite a number of shoals,
with depths of three and one-half to six fathoms, on which cod are said to occur in the winter.
Hook aud line fishing, in a small way for home supplies, is carried on in the creeks and inlets
of this coast, where fish are plentiful enough to supply a much larger demand. This region also
furnishes a good ground for seining menhaden in their season.
52 FISHING-GEOUNDS OF :N0RTH AMERICA.
THE COAST FEOM CAPE CHART.ES, VIRGINIA, TO SOUTHERN FLORIDA.
The shores of this coast consist almost entirely of long, sandy beaclies and a great nnmber
of low, marshy islands, separated by diffusely branching tide channels. These channels some-
times have a considerable width at high tide, but at low water are usually narrow, leaving broad
flats exposed. Good fishing-grounds exist along almost the entire coast, but fish are now mostly
taken on the sandy shores near the deeper holes an<l in the various inlets only in the vicinity
of the larger towns and cities, as iu such localities only can a market be found for the catch.
Fish are more abundant in the inlets than on the outer shores. Mullet' are taken along the outer
and inner shores of both North and South Carolina by fishing crews, who build temporary camps
to last only during the fishing season. Bluefish are found along the entire coast, from Cape Cod
to Southern Florida, and constitute one of the most important species south of Chesapeake
Bay. There are two principal localities where bluefish are taken in gill-nets in the late fiill and
winter. One of these is situated off Cape May, in the vicinity of Five Fathom Bank. The other
is on the coast of North Carolina, beginning a few miles below Cape Henry and extending to
Cape Hatteras Inlet.
Vicinity of Cape Lookout. — On the south side of Cape Lookout, and within a short
distance of the beach, mullet, Spanish mackerel, drum, and sheep's-head abound, and toward the
end of the cape large quantities of menhaden. are seined. In this vicinity, a fishery for porpoises
and whales is also carried on, usually at a short distance from the shore, by means of small boats.
In the sound, inside of the outer beach, mullet and several other species of small fish are common
in their season.
Beaufort Harbor, North Carolina. — At and off the entrance to this harbor there are
good bluefishing-grounds in summer. To the eastward of the entrance, along the beach of
Shackleford Banks, "sea trout" are seined for in the spring and fall, and drum and mackerel are
caught in the fall. Inside of these banks sea trout, sheep's head, hogfish, and spots are also taken
in the fall. West of the entrance, along the outer shore of Bogue's Banks, for a distance of
' The scientific names of the several species of fish referred to on pages 52 to 55 are as follows :
Bass Sciwnops ocelJatus.
Bastard Snapper IihomhopHtes aurorubens.
Black Grunt Hcmmdon formosum.
Blackfish or Sea Bass Cetitroprintis atrarius.
Bluefish ...Pomalomus aallatrix.
Butter-fish SIromatvus alepidotus.
Coljia Elacate aUaiitica.
Drum I'ogonias cliromiK.
Grunts ."1 IJwmvlon (various spotMcs).
Hogfish Fomodasys fulroninciilatus.
Jack Caranx hippos, and other carangoids ; the name is also ap-
plied to the Ponip.ano.
Menhaden Brevoortia ti/rannus.
Mullet Mngil brasiliensis and .\f. albitla.
Porgees Stcnotomiis acidcatuSjtfc.
Red Snapper .1.. Lutjaiius Illackfoi-dii.
Sailor's-Choico Lajodon rlioiiibohles.
Sea-trout CijnoHvion maciilaliiin.
Sheep's-head Archosanjus probaiocephulus.
Spanish Mackcnl Scombirtmorus macitlalits.
Spot lAostonuis ohUqum.
Spotted Bass. (5feBass.)
Squirrel-fish Diplevtrum fasdculare.
Tautog Tauloga onilis.
Tom-cou or Kingfish Aleiiticirrtis nebulosiia.
Kislicrv Industries of the tTnitoil States. Sect. 111.
•D
H
0
•15
O
^
C/3
O
n
X
>
>
2:
13
T3
n
W
M
0
70
I
0
>
0
Z
2
H
7^
0
p
>
-S^
4
?o
C
cn
>
00
2:
p
2:
p
a
C/5
Fishery Imliistiics of the United States, Sect. III.
I
NEW YORK TU SOUTHBEN FLOEIDA. 53
two miles or more from Fort Macon, sea trout are taken iu seines iu the sirring and summer.
Inside of Fort Macon tbey are talicu iu the fall. Farther west, off the beach, whale-fishing is
carried on by small boats from the shore.
Vicinity or Cape Fear, North Carolina. — At the entrance to Wilmington River, near
Fort Caswell, and along the beach south of the fort, a distance of twelve to fifteen miles,
mullet are taken in the fall in haul-seines. North of Cape Fear, along the outer beach and in the
waters inside, mullet, sea tioiit, and si'voral other siiecies of fish abound in their season and are
fished for with gill-nets and seines.
Vicinity of Charleston, South Carolina. — All along the shore, a distance of ten to
fifteen miles on both sides of the entrance to Charleston Harbor, mullet seining is extensively car-
ried on in the fall.
THE OFF-SnORE FISHING-GROUNDS OF SOUTH CAROLINA AND GEORGIA.'
Cape Romain Bank. — This is a small, rocky patch, about half a mile square, situated eight
miles south-southeast from Cape Romain light, and four miles south by west from the outer shoal
buoy. It has a depth of eight fathoms, the bottom consisting of lime rock and gravel with
willow corals (Gorgonians) growing upon it. Fish are caught on this ground from June to
October, the following varieties being taken, namely : Sea bass, porgees, grunts, bluefish, sharks,
a few sailor's-choice, and in October spotted bass which often weigh fiom thirty to forty pounds
each.
Inner. East Bank bears southeast by east from Charleston light-ship; distance, eighf miles.
It extends one mile east and west and one-half mile north and south, and has a depth of seven
and one-half fathoms. It is frequented by smacks and small boats, the smacks going there from
June to December, and the small boats only from June to September. The fishing is done with
liooks and lines, and the following kinds of fish are caught: blackfish, porgees, jacks (abundant),
and flounders. •
Outer East Bank bears southeast by east from Charleston light-ship ; distance, eleven
miles. It extends one mile east and west and one-half mile north and south, and has eight and
one-half to ten fathoms of water upon it, the bottom consisting of coral rock, and yellow sand.
The same smacks and boats fish on this bank that visit the Inner East Bank, the season being the
same and also the species of fish taken.
Eastern Hole bears southeast by east fifteen miles from Charleston light. It is about
a mile in diameter, with a depth of twelve fathoms, and a bottom of lime rock, sand, and willow
corals. It is fished on by smacks only, from October to Ai>ril. Sea bass are the fish chiefly
caught in the day-time, but at night tom-cod, butterfish, tautog, and a few flounders are also
taken.
Outer Southeast Ground bears southeast twenty-seven and one-half miles from Charleston
light, and extends five miles east and west and two miles north and south. The bottom is mostly
coral rock, with many purple willow corals (Gorgonians). The south side of the ground is covered
with large red shells, the east side with bright white sand and white sand mixed with black
specks, the west side with shells and sand. The smacks fish here from November to April and
May, the catch consisting of sea bass, bastard snappers, red snappers, and jacks.
Inner Southeast Bank bears southeast ten miles from Charleston light, and extends two
and one-half miles east and west and one and one half miles north and south. It has about ten
' Frequented by the smack and boat fishermen running to the Charleston markets and elsewhere on that coast.
54 FISHI^'G-GKOUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
fatlioms of water and a coral bottom. This is a summer fisliing-grouud, aud small boats and
smacks visit it from May until August. Porgees, blackfisli, redmoutli grunts, black gruuts, tautog.
sailor's-cboice, aud cobias are taken. Porgees school here abundantly in August, and about
three hundred is considered a fair day's catch; these weigh from three-fourths of a pound to one
pound each, and are tied in bunches of five each for sale. The average daily catch of blackfish
is two hundred and fifty; of grunts three hundred; but only a few tautog, black grunts, and
sailor's-choice are taken. Cobias come in May and remain until July; they drive ail other fish
away from these grounds. The average daily catch of this species to a man is three.
Coffin Land Ground or Inner Ground bears south-southeast eight miles from Charleston
light, and is three miles long east and west by two and one-half miles wide north and south.
The bottom is of coral rock and the depth seven to nine fathoms. Smacks and boats fish on this
ground with hooks and lines (the only method pursued on these grounds) principally from April
to December. Jacks are caught from April to August, porgees from July to October, and black-
fish and sea bass from the first of October to the first of December. The average daily catch to
a man of all kinds is about four hundred fish.
Old Farms Ground bears south southeast eighteen miles from Charleston light, is five
miles long east and west by three miles wide north and south, and has a depth of twelve to
seventeen fathoms, with a bottom of coral and broken shells. This is a winter fishing-ground
and only smacks resort to it. Sea bass, red snappers, and bastard sna])pers are the principal
fish t^ken from October to April, but, besides these, a few tautog, black grunts, and red-mouthed
grunts are caught. The bait used on this and other grounds in the vicinity is blackfish, shark,
and squid. The former is the best. The daily catch of fish to a man is about three hundred.
Outer Old Farms Ground bears south-southeast twenty-five miles from Charleston light,
and is three miles long east and west by one and one-half miles wide north aud south. The bottom
is of coral rock with "willows," and the depth seventeen fathoms. This is also a winter ground
for the same kinds of fish that are caught on the Old Farms, and fishing is carried on from
October to April.
Inner South Ground bears south one-half east from Charleston light ; distance, fifteen
miles. Its length is one and one-half miles east and west, and its widtli one-half mile north and
south. It has twelve fathoms of water, and an uneven bottom of coral rock and yellow " willoArs."
This is a winter ground, resorted to by smacks only, from December until April. Blackfish,
bastard snappers, red snappers, black gruuts, porgees, i'ud occasionally sharks, uursefish, and
squirrel fish are taken. Bastard snappers are the most plentiful, while the other kinds are
generally scarce.
Outer South Ground bears south one-half east, twenty-seven and one-half miles, from
Charleston light, and extends two miles east and west and three-fourths of a mile north and south.
The depth of water is fourteen and one-h£|,lf fathoms, aud the bottom consists of coral rocks,
yellow " willows," and sponges. It is a winter ground, fished on from December to Ai^ril. Tlie
same kinds offish occur upon it as upon the Inner South Ground.
Edisto Bank bears southeast by south eleven miles from Edisto Harbor. It is one mile
long east and west by one-fourth of a mile wide, and has a depth of eight to ten fathoms. The
bottom consi.sts of rocks and shells aud on the north side of red sand. Smacks fish hero from
April to October. The fish taken are sea bass, porgees, red-mouthed grunts, a few jacks, aud
occasionally a cobia. Sliarks (puppy sharks) are so plentiful in June as to stop fishing.
Blank Ground bears southwest one-half south eight or nine miles from Outer South
Ground, and extends four or five miles east and west and two miles north and south. It has
Fishery Iniliistries of tie TJnitfrt StatM. Sect. III.
28
^.i^ILSsHSSs^^
(L Ashing a .;^ji
'V; (|'.'.« Feiv smat
^35 tA ^■^■■■•^M, /
2C
r;^ u
M
E
3 ■••., 7! ■•■f,;.' 7^
o
X.
I
A
24
Limits ofilwReklSier and GTOiiper
ffslwig growidJi • sf ty' r/oftea dnes.
Wliere Oroi{ oer found u f i^qiif^i-
orffreale/' juu)h')eK<^ri/'riine
TJie dofst7lons/io/r impciif'
fJKLocaUoji (4-ksn. Naml'rArerer/othc/.cxL
\ OF THE UNITED STATES. / Soundiiyp mvi in Irdlm
Chart No. 1 6.
FISHING GROUNDS
OF TKE
GULF COAST
or
8!8'
THE GULF OF MEXICO. 55
foiutecu fatlioms of water; tiud tlic bottom consists mostly of "willows," with some other corals.
Fishing is best in January.
Tybee Ground bears east one-half north twelve to fourteen miles from Martin's Industry
light-ship. It is one anil oue-half miles long southeast and northwest, and one-half mile wide.
The bottom consists of shells and corals, the depth being nine to nine and one-half fathoms.
This ground is resorted to by the smacks, from August to January, for blackfish and trout, which
are takeu to the Charleston market, fifty miles distant.
Tybee Deep Water Ground bears southeast forty miles from Tybee light-house, aud is
three miles long northwest and southeast by two miles wide. The bottom consists of corals,
" willows," fine sand, and shells, and the depths range from fifteen to eighteen fathoms. Smacks
flsh here from January to March for blackfish and snappers.
Sapelo Ground bears east by uorth fi'om Wolf Island, from which it is ten miles distant.
It is four miles long north and south and one mile wide. The bottom consists of corals and
shells, and the depth is nine to ten fathoms. Smacks fish here for blackfish aud snappers for
the Charleston aud Savaunah markets, from June to January.
Fernandina Ground bears from east-southeast to east by north from Fernandina light-
house ; distance, fifteeu miles. This is a ueai'ly circular ground from seven to ten miles in
diameter. The bottom is of corals and is generally broken, the average depth being seventeen
fathoms. It is fished on in the winter season for blackfish and other species.
II. THE GULF OF MEXICO.
tbe fishixg-giiounds of the gulf of mexico belonging to the united states.
By Silas Stearns.
The southern and easternmost of the fishing-grounds of the Gulf coast are those of the Florida
Reefs, which are mainly visited by the Key West market fleet.
These reefs, as a natural consequence of their coral formation and the i^rotectiou afforded by
their uneven surfaces, are exceedingly well populated with all the forms of invertebrate animals
common to this latitude, and, therefore, we find about them an abundance of fishes, attracted
by the vast stores of food. On the Gulf Stream side of the keys all forms of animal life exist in
greater abundance than on the opposite side, owing probably to the greater depth, clearness, and
warmth of the water. In the narrow channels through the reefs, and about solitar3- rocks and
clusters of rocks the best fishiug-grouuds usually exist, but the kind of fish sought for has much
to do with this, for some kinds swim in open water in search of prey, and others along the
bottoms of channels, while others again obtain their food from the sides of high-standing rocks
and in shoal water.
During warm weather fish abound both outside and inside of the Eeef to the south shore of
the keys, but during cold "northers," when much of the cold water from Florida Bay is driven
through between, and to the south of, the keys, the majority of the fish retreat to the outer side
of the Ileef, where they can be in the warm water of the Gulf Stream. This movement is
particularly noticeable with the kingfish [Scomheromorus regalis), and it is during such cold spells
that the largest catches of this species are made, for they are then congregated within narrow
limits. The kinds of fish commonly taken on these grounds are as follows :
Carangus hippos. Jackfish. Enneacentrus punctatus. Coney.
Paratractus pisquefus. Horse-eye Jack. Sarothrodus bimaculatus. White Angel-fish.
Decapterus punctatus. Holacantlms ciliarh. Yellow Angel-fish.
56 FISHING-GEOUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
Seriola pnnct(tt}is. Amber-fish. Holacanthus tricolor. Black Aiifiel-fish.
Hwmnhn j)M»ic<af)(s. White Grunt, Yellow Spartis j)agrus. Porgee, Margate fish, Goat's-
Gruut, Black Gruut. head Porgee, Sheep's-head Porgee.
Lutjanvs caxis. Gray Suapper. Scomheromorus regalis. Kingfish or Cere.
Luljanus BlacJcfordii. Red Snapper. Scomberomorns mnculatns. Spanish Mackerel.
Lntjanus Stcarnsii. Mangrove. Snapper. Scomheromorus caballa. Kingfish or Cero.
Mesoprionuninotatus{^). Schoolmaster Snapper. Spliyrana piouda (1). Barracuda.
Ocynrus chrysiiriis. Yellow-tail Snapper. Lagodon rhomhoides. Sailor's-Ghoice.
Trisotropis hriinneus. Black Grouper. Lachnolmmis falcatus. Hogfish.
Trisotropis falcatiiH. Grouper. Scioenops ocellafus. Channel Bass.
Trisotropis nndulosits. Rockfish. CentroprisHs atrarhis. Sea Bass.
Epinephelus morio. Red Grouper. Balistes capriscus. Turbot.
Epinepheliis striatus. Nassau Grouper. Pomatomus saltatrix. Bluefish.
Epincpliehis mgriius. Jew-fish. Menticirrus alburmis. Whiting.
Epinephelus Drvmmond-Hayi. Deer Grouper, Cyphos2(s Boscii. Brim.
Hind.
Proceeding northward in the Gulf from the Florida Reefs fishing-grounds, we find innumerable
places for sea-fishing, which follow one another so continuously from the Tortugas Keys to the
mouth of the Mississippi River, that the entire region can be best described as an extensive
fishing-ground in the form of a broad belt following the general contour of the coast.
The character of the southern portion of these grounds, from about the latitude of Anclote
Keys southward, is different from that of the northern portion in some respects. The bottom at
the sonth seems to consist of a more recent formation than at the north ; there is less sand and
mud, and fish occur near to and among the ledges which stand up from the deposit of sand and
shells.
Along the coast from Anclote Keys to Charlotte Harbor there exist extensive and continuous
lines of ledges, upon which, as well as iu the gullies between, fish abound. The same kind of bottom
is again found just north of the Florida Reefs, but between the two regions there is an almost
barren waste of sand.
The fishing-grounds on the off-shore limit of this section are, so far as known, in the gullies
between the rocks where there are living corals, or else in gullies in sandy and shelly bottoms
also containing living corals and a soft rock formation.
The grounds of the northern portion, embracing the region between Anclote Keys and the
mouth of the Mississippi River, are wholly in gullies. The bottom off to a depth of about twenty
fathoms generally consists of sand with an admixture of broken shells, but in the gullies, which
varj' from one hundred to one thousand yards in width and from one-fourth of a mile to several
miles in length, the bottom is covered with living and dead corals or hard rock. Outside of
about twenty fathoms, rocky and coral bottom predominates, and the soundings show it to be
very uneven. At some places in this northern portion the small gullies or gulches are found
quite near to the coast, as, for instance, off Appalachee Bay, Dog Island, and Crooked Island, off the
coast between Saint Andrew's and Choctawhatchec Bays, and off Pensacola, where they occur iu
from five to ten fathoms of water.
The deepest waters in which fi^^hing is carried on in the Gulf of Mexico are off Pensacola, in a
southeast direction and in a depth of nearly fifty fathoms.
Just east of the Mississippi River and off Mississippi Sound there are a few small gulches
inshore, which were formerly resorted to, but are not fished on now.
The general character of the bottom in this section is muddy, and it is possible that the
THE GULF OF MEXICO. 57
sediment from the Mississippi Eiver is filling up the fishing-holes near by. West of the
Mississippi, off the coasts of Louisiana and Texas, the bottom is also muddy. Several fishing
schooners from Pensacola have carefully explored this region and have found but two or three
small patches of hard bottom. These yielded a few fares of red snappers and were left for the time
as almost barren. Since they are in shoal water (10 to 20 fathoms) it is probable that they are
inhabited only in summer when the water is warm, and even then only to a slight extent.
On the grounds of the southern jiortion or district, as I have classed it, the majority of the
edible fish taken are groupers, chiefly the red and black groupers {Epinephehis morio and
Trisotro2ns hrunneris) while the red snappers are much less abundant. On the northern grounds it is
just the opposite, red snappers being more numerous and groupers much less common. Other kinds
of fish are often caught, many of which are not salable. The most common of these are as follows,
those marked with an asterisk not being eaten :
Balistes capriscus. Leather Jacket or Turbot.*
Epinephelus Drummond-Hayi. Hind.
Epineplielus nigritus. Jew-fish, "Warsaw.
Echeneis nancrateoides. Suckerfish.*
Lutjanus Stcarnsii. Mangrove Snapper.
Spams pagrus. Porgee.
Ceniropristis atrarius. Sea Bass.
Rhomhoplites aurorubens. Bastard Snapper.
Lagoceplialns hevigaftts. Bottle-fish.*
Scicenops ocellatus. Channel Bass, Eedfish.
Batrachiis taupardns. Sea Eobin.*
Seriola honariensis. Eock Salmon.
Seriola Stearnsii. Amber-fish.
Trisotropis falcatus. Scamp.
Several species of sharks.*
The off-shore fishing-grounds, off Cedar Keys, where red-snappers, groupers, and such fishes
can be caught, lie over thirty miles in a westerly direction from Cedar Keys. From there, by
following the deepest water on a southeast or a northwest course, fish are found in abundance,
until shoal water is reached, either off Tampa Bay or off Cape Saint Geoi'ge. On these banks
groupers, especially the red grouper, are found in greater abundance than to the westward, any
where between Cape Saint George and the Mississippi Eiver ; and, on an average, two-thirds of
the catch will be groupers and one-third snappers. On the bottom there is a greater deposit of
lime rocks, and probably more living corals, etc., than in the Pensacola Bight, w Inch explains the
causes of their abundance.
Along the entire coast there is a tendency among these fishes to move from the shoaler water
to off-shore grounds at the approach of cold weather. During mild winters they remain inshore,
but during severe seasons they are not to be found there.
The fishermen prefer to take fish from shoal water, as it is less laborious than deep-water
fishing, and the fish taken there are much hardier and better able to bear transportation alive in
vessels' wells than those from very deep water. The consequence is that the grounds of the
deep-water regions are not much explored, and it is probable that the most important store of
food-fishes of the GuJf has not yet been drawn upon.
The seining flats are smooth sand-bars lying in the thoroughfares of schooling fishes, and con-
veniently located for drawing the seines ashore. Such places are not common along the coasts of
58 FISHIKG-GEOUNDS OF ifORTH AMERICA.
south western Florida, and of Louisiana and Texas, where the shores are mainly uneven and marshy,
but where they do occur fishing establishments are formed each season. In the regions most cou-
Tenient to markets nearly all the favorable seining flats have been secured by fishermen or fishing
firms, who build permanent houses and wharves for the prosecution of their business.
At other and more remote iioints, temporary shanties, generally constructed from palmetto
leaves, are built, which are occupied one j^ear by one crew and the next year by auothei', according
to whichever reaches the locality first. Those nearest the markets are the most used and have the
most elaborate and complete outfits. Probably in the course of a few years all suitable sites will
have been secured. Usually they occur near the entrances to bays or rivers, or on islands or pro-
jecting points of land — places where schools of fishes coming from, or going to the sea, must
approach near the shore.
The region from Appalachee Bay to the mouth of the Mississippi River has an almost unbroken
shore that is suitable for seining. As a result, there are few permanent stations, and the fishing is
carried on from small vessels and boats that accommodate the crew and their catch while on short
trips from the nearest markets.
THE FLORIDA SPONGE GROUNDS.
The Florida sponging-grouuds form three separate and elongate stretches along the
southern and western coasts of the State. The first includes nearly all the Florida Reefs ; the
second extends from Anclote Keys to Cedar Keys, and the third from just north of Cedar Keys to
Saint Mark's, in Appalachee Bay. The Florida Reef grounds have a linear extent of about one
hundred and twenty miles, beginniug near Key Biscayne, in the northeast, and ending in the
south, at Northwest Chauutl, just west of Key West. The northeastern half of the grounds are
very narrow, having an average width of only about five miles, and being limited to the outer
side of the reefs. At about the Matacumbe Keys the grounds broaden out so as to cover
the entire width of the reefs, which are much broader here than at the north. The entire
southern half of the grounds have more or less the same breadth, which is about thirteen or
fourteen miles. The second sponge-ground begins just south of Anclote Keys, with a breadth of
seven or eight miles, but rapidly broadens out toward the north to a width of fifteen miles, which
it maintains from a point about opposite Bay Port to Sea Horse Reef, just south of Cedar Keys.
The total length of this sponging-ground is about sixty geographical miles. Its distance from the
shore varies somewhat ; at the south the inner edge approaches within four or five miles of the
mainland, and comes close upon Anclote Keys; but throughout the remainder of its extent it is
distant from six to eight miles from the shore, until it touches the shallow bottom and reefs of
Cedar Keys. The depth of water on these grounds, as indicated on the Coast Survey charts,
ranges from three to six fathoms, but many portions are undoubtedly shallower than this. The
northern sponging-ground, which maintains a nearly uniform width throughout, is about seventy
miles long by about fifteen miles broad. It approaches to within about five miles of the shore,
and terminates just off the mouth of Saint Mark's River. The depth of the water upon these
grounds is the same as upon the next one to the south — from three to five fathoms.
The total area of the Florida sponging-grounds, which are now being worked upon, including
also those which were formerly fished but have since been more or less abandoned, may be
roughly stated at about three thousand square geographical miles. This does not, however,
probably indicate the entire extent of the sponginggi-ounds of the Florida waters, for the ftict
that new grounds are being constantly discovered would indicate that there might still be more
to find, and it is certain that no veiy strenuous efforts have yet been made to extend the already
known grounds, the discovery of new sections generally having been made by accident.
Fishery Iiiiliistrips of tlie VmU-i\ States. S.Tt. III.
24
Chart No. 17.
SPONGING GROUNDS
! OF THE
COAST OY FLORIDA
^ ioo'
%.
•St
24
TBE GULF OF MEXICO. 59
list of the fiseing-statioxs ox the gulf coast of the united states.
By Silas Steakns.
[The uumbers refer to the chart preiiared by Mr. Silas St earns to show the fishiug-groimds of the Gulf coast of the
Uuited States.]
2fo. 1. Captiva Fishery. — Situated upon the north end of Captiva Island, mouth of
Charlotte Harbor. Consists of temporary palmetto shanties, occupied only through the fall for
the purpose of salting mullet for the Cuban markets.
Ko. 2. Spanish Fishery. — Situated at Lacosta Island, near the maiu entrance to Charlotte
Harboi". Includes several buildiugs, mostly permanent, occupied in the fall for the mullet
fishery. Spaniards from Key West carry on this fishery.
Ko. 3. Spanish Fishery*. — Situated near No. 2 and similar to it.
"No. 4. Gasparilla Fishery. — Situated upon Gasparilla Island, mouth of Charlotte
Harbor. Several permanent shanties, owned by the Messrs. Peacons, of Key West, who salt
mullet for the Cuban trade in the fall.
No. 5. Sarasota Fishery. — At the north end of Little Sarasota Island and on the Big
Sarasota Pass. Mullet are salted for Cuban markets at this station in the fall. Temporary
shanties.
No. C. Sarasota Fishery. — Near the last. Occupied in 1879 for salting mullet for the
Florida trade. Temporary shanties.
No. 7. Hunter's Point Fishery. — Situated upon Hunter's Point, the dividing line
between Sarasota and Palmasola Bays. Mullet salted for Cuban markets. Buildings i^ermanent
and the best arranged on the coast. Owned by Sweetzer & Thomson.
No. 8. Paemasola Smael Fishery. — Situated on the back side of Palmasola Bay.
Small permanent shanty, occupied each fall by gillnet and cast-net fishermen, who salt mullet
for home trade.
No. 9. Palmasola Fishery. — Near the last. Occupied by seining-crews every year for
the purpose of salting mullet for home trade. A permanent palmetto shanty.
No. 10. Palm Key Fishery. — On the north end of Palm Key. Occupied sometimes by
Key West fishermen and in 1879 by Appalachicola fishermen. This is a good station for mullet
in the fall. Contains temporary shanties.
No. 11. Pass 1 Grille Fishery. — On Long Key, in Boca Ceiga Bay. A station for
catching and salting mullet during the fall months. Not occupied every year. The catch is
usually sent to Cuba. The shanties are temporary ones.
No. 12. Turtle-Crawl Point Fishery. — At Turtle-Crawl Point, Boca Ceiga Bay. A
mullet fishery, where fish are salted for the Florida trade. Small temporary shanties, not
regularly occupied.
No. 13. Kilgore's Fishery. — On the passage from Boca Ceiga Bay to Clear Water
Harbor. Mr. Kilgore salts fish during the fall for the country trade, and has permanent buildiugs
near his house for the work.
No. 14. Anclote Eiver Fishery.— Situated at the mouth of the Anclote River. Parties
are stationed here in the fall to catch mullet, which are sold in Florida. Appalachicola crews
occupied it in 1879. Permanent shanty.
No. 15. Crystal River Fishery.— At the mouth of Crystal River. A station occupied
each fall by parties from the neighboring country or from Cedar Keys, engaged in the mullet
fishery. Temporary shanties.
No. 16. Chambers Mill Fishery. — On the coast, a few miles north of the mouth of the
60 FISHING-GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
Crystal River. Mullet are caught licre in the fall for Cedar Keys and the country trade. The
buildings used are those of an abandoned saw-mill.
No. 17. Suwannee Rivek FisnERT.— At the mouth of the Suwannee River. Seining
crews fish here for mullet in the fall to supply the country trade and sometimes for that of Cedar
Keys. Temporary shanties.
No. 17a. PiNEY Point Fisheky. — On Piney Point, between Suwannee and SteinhatcLee
Rivers. Similar to the last. One permanent building.
No. 18. Steinhatchee Rivek Fishery.— At the mouth of the Steinhatchee River. A
mullet fishery for country trade. No buildings.
No. 19. Fenholloway River Fishery. — At the montli of the Fenholloway River.
Mullet fishing for country trade. Temporary shanties.
No. 20. OciLLA River Fishery. — At the mouth of the Ocilhi River. Carried on for
mullet in the fall. Catch sold in the country. Temporary shanties.
No. 21. Shell Point Fishery.— A few miles west of the Saint Mark's River. Occupied
in the fall by crews who salt mullet for country trade. Permanent shanties.
No. 22. Oyster Bay Fishery.— Carried on for mullet, which are sold to country
customers. Seines and gill nets are used. Buildings permanent.
No. 23. DiciCERSON Bay Fishery. — Same as the last. Buildings permanent.
No. 24. OCKLOKONY BAY FISHERY. — At the mouth of Ocklokony Bay. Same as Nos. 22
and 23. Permanent buildings.
No. 25. Crooked River or Pickett's Fishery.— Occupied in the fall for mullet fishing.
Catch sold, salted, at Appalachicola. Permanent shanties.
No. 26. Cat Point Fishery. — A station sometimes occupied by Appalachicola parties.
Temporary shanties.
No. 27. Indian Pass Fishery.— A gillnet station, occupied in the fall by Appalachicola
crews. Permanent palmetto shanties.
No. 28. Saint Joseph's Point Fishery.— Occupied in the fall by Saint Andrew's Bay and
Appalachicola crews, while salting mullet and other fishes, and in the spring to catch pompano,
which are salted or sent to Pensacola fresh. They have several permanent palmetto shanties.
No. 29. Crooked Island Fishery. — A station on the north end of Crooked Island, where
Saint Andrew's Bay crews fish in the fall and spring, to catch pompano, mullet, sheep's-head,
redflsh, etc. Temporary shanties or tents.
No. 30. Saint Andrew's Point Fishery.— On the west point at the entrance to the bay,
a station used by people of Saint Andrew's Bay for the same purpose as the last. Temporary
shanties, and one permanent one.
No. 31 . Capt. Len. Destin's Fishery. — At the Choctawhatchee or Santa Rosa Bay Inlet,
Captain Destin has fish-house, ice-house, and very complete arrangements. He fishes nearly all
the year, chiefly for pompano, and sends the catch to Pensacola in ice, also salts a few barrels
annually for country trade. This is the most important pompano fishery in the Gulf.
No. 32. Petit Bois Fishery. — On the island of that name, outside of Mississippi Sound, a
station occupied nearly all the year by Mobile and New Orleans seine and gillnet fishermen.
Fish sold fresh.
No. 33. Horn Island Fishery.- On Horn Island, outside of Mississippi Sound. A station
similar to No. 32. Fish sold fresh. Permanent buildings for habitation.
No. 31. Chandeleur Islands, No. 3o. Grand Gosier Island, and No. 36. Isle Breton,
arc all prominent stations for seine and gillnet crews from New Orleans, who resort to them at
intervals through the year. No fish are salted at tliese places.
1 1-ih rv Inau^liii 3cif tlK- Uint.d Stales, Sect. Ill
=^
--.. ^
n—^-3
^ /^'••••■•■■■~'";;v---p-~^.^s^
S>5 \
:/fl>^
1.II'
How^'
i:ry:A ....■;; -J for^^'''^^.. •■■"'
\
N
-.•^'
6 O
t ^
■^*,
>=s
THE FLEMISH CAP. 61
12. THE OFF-SHORE BANKS, INCLUDING THE GRAND BANKS.
THE FLEMISH CAP.
The Flemish Cap is the outermost of the Great Newfouudlaud Fishing Banks, as it is also the
least perfectly known. The Admiralty chart locates its eastern end by three lines of soundings
extending about northeast and southwest, but of its western limit absolutely nothing is known.
The center of the series of soundings given on the chart lies about one hundred and fifty miles
east-northeast of the northeastern part of the Grand Bank. Less than one-half of the intervening
area between these two banks has yet been sounded, so far as indicated on the published charts,
and the soundings off the northeastern end of the Gi'and Bank show dejiths of sixty to one
hundred and forty-five fiithoms only. There is, therefore, a possibility that the Flemish Cap
extends much nearer to the Grand Bank, and has a much greater area than is indicated on the
charts of the region, and it is even i)robable that this outlying shoal is a direct continuation
northeastward of this same large bank. -Combining the soundings of the Admiralty chart with
information gathered from the Gloucester fishermen, who have visited this region, it would appear
that the known area of the Flemish Cap was irregularly elongate in outline, the longer axis
extending about north and south.
This area lies between the parallels of 40° 50' and 48° north latitude, and the meridians of
44° 06' and 45° 25' west longitude, the greatest length being, therefore, seventy geographical
miles, and the greatest width fifty-six miles. Its extent is about two thousand seven hundred and
fifty square geographical miles. The soundings range from seventy-three to one hundred and
fifty-five fathoms, the least depth being located near the center and the southern parts of the bank,
and the deepest water occurring on the eastern edge. Beyond this, to the eastward, no depths
were reached by the vessels making the survey of this region, but the sounding line tliey used
appears to have had a total length of only about one hundred and sixty tathonis.
The bottom is composed of mud, sand, gravel, pebbles, and rocks, distributed in patches of
variable extent and character. In the localities resorted to by vessels from the United States the
prevailing bottom is often a slaty rock, apparently in situ, and forming a smooth surface, on which
the anchor often fails to take a firm hold.
Cod and halibut are the only fish that have been sought for on the Flemish Cap. Nothing
is known about their abundance in the winter, as the bank can only be visited in the spring and
summer (April to August at the most). But often during the spring the weather is so rough
that fishing can be carried on only a small part of the time, and after June the region is so
much infested with ground-sharks tliat the trawls are rapidly destroyed. Another danger
frequently arises from the presence of icebergs, which are often abundant. All of these causes
combined have deterred fishermen from frequenting this bank, which, so far as known, has only
been visited for cod and halibut by a few vessels from Gloucester during the past few years.
The region thus far resorted to for cod lies mainly within a distance of ten to fifteen miles of
47° north latitude and 45° west longitude. In one or two instances, however, large catches of cod
as well as halibut have been obtained from eighteen to twenty miles west of the forty-fifth
meridian in 47° north latitude. According to the statements of the fishermen most familiar with
these grounds, no trouble is ever experienced in obtaining large quantities of medium-sized cod,
which are, however, below the standard recognized in the United States markets. Larger fish
are less common, although taken in considerable numbers, and very successful fares have
occasionally been made. The general opinion is that while fish are sufficiently abundant, no
62 FISmXG GKOUNDS OF XORTO AMERICA.
great depeudeiicc can be placed on secnring- a profitable tri[), on account of the several Lindrances
alluded to.
The best known lialibut grouuds of the riemish Cap are said to be located near the meridian
of 45° west longitude, between the parallels of 47° 30' and 47° 50' north, where the bottom
consists of rocks, pebbles, and coarse gravel. The only vessels that have visited the Flemish Cap
have been those engaged in the salt halibut and cod fisherj-.
THE GRAND BANK.
This immense fishing-ground, which lies southeasterly from Xewfoundlaud, is of about the
same size as that British province, and equals in extent all of the other offshore fishing-banks of
the eastern coast combined. Its area, within the sixty -fathom limit, is about thirty-seven thousand
square geographical miles. It extends over more than four degrees of latitude from 42° 57' to 47°
04' north, and over nearly six degrees of longitude, from 48° OC to 54° 11' west, and has an
irregularly triangular outline, one side facing north-northwest, another southwest, and the third
about east by south. The northwestern and eastern sides are each about two hundred and
sixty-four miles long in a straight line, and the southern side about two hundred and twenty-five
miles long.
The most i-emarkable shoals tire the Virgin Eocks and Eastern Shoal Water, located near the
center of the northern 'part of the banks. The channel separating the bank from Cape Eace
has a width of about thirty-six miles. Considered both as to its area and the extent of its fisheries,
the Grand Bank is undoubtedly the most important fishing-ground of the world.
In order to describe its somewhat varied characteristics in sufficient detail, we have, for the
sake of convenience, divided the area of the bank into several arbitrary sections suggested by
their importance as fishing grounds.
South of 44° north latitude the depths range from twenty-five to fifty-three fathoms, and the
bottom consists almost entirely of fine sand, varying somewhat in color. Over the east and west
portions of this section there are, however, a few scattered patches of coarse sand and gravel with
an admixture of small pebbles, and occasionally of rocks of larger size. The eastern edge drops
oft' rapidly at a distance of a mile or more from the sixty-fathom limit, but halibut have been
found there abundantly in depths of one to three hundred fathoms. On the western side of the
slope the descent is apparently more gradual, especially north of the parallel of 44° north latitude,
where a depth of one hundred and fifty fathoms is found at a distance of tweutj'-five miles or
more from the edge of the bank. Over the greater part of this area there occur large numbers
of bank quahogs {Cyprina islandica), bank clams {Siliqua costata), periwinkles (Bitcciman), and
small Crustacea, and wherever the bottom is pebbly, sea anemones, sea pumpkins or holothuriaus,
and sea lemons {Boltenia) abound, and crabs are genei-ally plentiful. Owing to the strong currents
that sweep by the eastern edge, and the frequent occurrence there of large icebergs, fishing in
that locality is attended with many difficulties and some danger.
Another section may be laid out between the i)arallels of 44° and 45° 20' north latitude, and
extending the entire width of the bank. The eastern part of this section, in the vicinity of and
to the eastward of the meridian of 50° west, is generally known as the "Eastern Shoal Water."
It has depths of twenty-two to thirty-five fathoms, and the bottom is mainly composed of fine
sand, with an admixture of gravel, pebbles and large stones over certain areas. The eastern
edge descends rapidly into comparatively deep water. The fauna of this section resembles
that of the southern section already described. Between 50° and 51° west longitude lies what
is l;iiown among fishermen as the "pumpkin bottom," from the immense quantities of a large
"isherv Industrica of the Uliitt-a StaUa, Sicl. IIX
47
43
IX
^•
Xlll
"^ .<; Mquelon Is
.■C7 •>>>
..«V5
x
.>*'
^'■^ OF
S- T 1 .^ R RE
^
J&tl"
^
ill
TO
ow
ires
ter
No.3
CHART OF THE
^WT7
"iBA-NJC/
C.S|)«ar
CBi^oj^e
/
\.
s^SXXTV'-'
■X..VJII
V <*•!>■ IX
:]S
^^.
\ a
^^-^;:
BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND
The Sounding's are given infalhoras.
Indicates Halibut Grounds.
CocL "
55
:Note.
\deepI /I
\\
\t
A.-'
^7 Cbo<i Ashing \
it 'i:,Juiv tsra i \
' •: V I ^
1
j * ^.JQj .-^ f
CXXfX. /
r^:..=:
-.^,6««2;,-^:;
/^.-
/ \J ^ <*0Jiru t July \
^ / Good. yN.
I L Jiuw iS^S!
^u^.
« /fi I
(^ J. \ 1 .»
B A /# 11
/
■"^
G.^
^
(V
'«a«a-''
A
Go Oct \
roo<£ ground.^
vter 4 Spring n
— »^w
Cood. cod growi^
^;i •f^~ ,
^r. '^ "^-^ ^^ \ U''
aj
' 73 t^'
/ Good gi(xmct;..p ,u. ./^ / // y
'. .f>,^,tn,/A, '< '. -f-/ I „*
xvn
i Goog. X
'^■-^pr 1379/
a B
^■•-■.„a,, -» — «
7V!<? Raman. KumercUs refer
to ttie explanations Oi'' Plates.
y\
/
/■
XVIII
51"
47
THE GRAND BANK. 63
holotburiau fouutl there. The depths vary from thirty to thirty-eight fathoms, with a bottom
of sand, gravel, pebbles, and smooth, round rocks. In addition to the holothurians, large
numbers of star-fishes, periwinkles, crustaceans, bank quahogs, and bank clams also occur.
West of 51° west longitude and north of 44° 20' north latitude, in this section, the depths
range from thirty-six to fifty-five fathoms, the latter soundings occurring only along the edge
of the bank. The bottom is mostly rocky, the rocks being much perforated with a species of
boring mollusk. The fishermen's hooks frequently catch in these holes and large fragments
of the rock are in this manner often brought to the surface.
Besides many of the lower forms of animal life common to other sections of the Grand
Bank, this area especially abounds in crabs and shrimps, and many specimens of octopus have
been taken from the stomachs of fish captured bere. To the westward of the sixty-fathom line,
the bottom slopes more or less gradually to a depth of two hundred fathoms, which it reaches
at a distance of ten to fifteen miles from that line. Within the area of this slope the bottom
is generally composed of sand or mud ; but along the edge outside of one hundred and fifty
fathoms, there occur numerous rocky patches of considerable size. This section, between 44°
and 45° 20' north latitude, in depths generally less than 55 fathoms, is more commonly resorted
to by the cod fishermen than any other i^art of the Grand Bank.
That portion of the bank lying between 45° 20' and 40° north latitude can be considered as
a third section, concerning which but very little is yet known. In consequence, the greater part
of this region is generally regarded as barren by the fishermen, although, by trial, it is possible
that portions of it might furnish good fishing. It has so far been but very little resorted to.
This section has depths of thirty-two to fifty-seven fathoms, and embraces a great variety of
bottom in its different parts — fine and coarse sand, pebbles, rocks, and broken shells, variously
combined. Good catches of cod have been obtained between 50° and 51° west longitude. The
"whale deep" occurs on the western jiart of the section. It is an irregular, shallow depression
in the bank, extending nearly north and south, with a length of about forty-five miles and a
width of about twenty-three miles. Its southern end lies in about 44° 58', and its northern in 45°
41' north latitude. The extreme eastern part is in about 52° 14' west longitude. It has depths
of fifty-seven to sixty-seven fathoms, the bottom consisting of mud. We are not informed as to
the origin of the name by which this area is known, but it does not seem very appropriate, for
one of its chief characteristics appears to be the absence of whales as well as of fish ; while its
shallowness, as compared with the depths at a short distance off the western edge of the bank,
is quite marked.
The fourth or northern section of the Grand Bank comprises all that portion lying north
of the parallel of 40° north latitude. It has an elongate triangular shape, being one hundred
and eighty miles long on the parallel of 40°, and is about sixty-four miles wide on the eastern
part, where it extends to 47° 04' north latitude. Its width near the middle is about forty-five
miles. This section includes the Virgin Eocks, which lie in 46° 27' north latitude and 50° 54'
west longitude. The area westward of the Virgin Eocks has depths of thirty-seven to fifty-
three fathoms, and a diversified bottom of sand, gravel, pebbles, broken shells, and large rocks.
It is comparatively little resorted to by the fishing-fleet, and for this reason is less known than
most of the other parts of the bank.
The group of small, rocky shoals, known as the Virgin Eocks, lies between 40° 23' and 40°
28' north latitude, and 50° 50' and 50° 58' west longitude. It consists of a large number of
submerged elevations, the principal ones being named and characterized as follows: Main Ledge,
lying in 46° 27' north and 50° 47' west, depths, three to nineteen fathoms; Brier Shoal, just
64 FISHING-GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
east of Main Ludge, thiiteeu to twenty fathoms; Southwest Rock, southwest of Main Ledge,
fourteen fathoms; part of Main Ledge, twenty-nine fathoms; Bucksport Shoal, one ami one-
fourth miles nearly south of Main Ledge, four and three-fourths to eleven fathoms. A short
distance from the latter shoal, on the south and east sides, are three other smaller shoals,
called Sea Patch, Lone Star or Harper Shoal, and Bryant Shoal, with depths varying, from
eleven to nineteen fathoms. South of these again, within a distance of one and three-fourths
miles, are three more shoals, known as the Bull Dog, Old South Shoal, and Cabinet Shoal,
with depths of seventeen to twenty fathoms. About one mile due north from Main Ledge
begins a line of eight small shoals, which extends a distance of about three miles, with depths
of nine to twenty-three fathoms. The nearest ones are called Northwest Shoals, and the
remainder, in the order of their position, are Maloney Ledge, Prairie Shoal, The Hummocks,
and Deep-Water Bank.
Fifteen miles eastward of the Virgin Rocks, between 40° 27' and 40^ 29' north latitude, there
is a group of similar shoals, known collectively as the Eastern Shoals. They extend about four
miles north and south, and have an average width of a little more than two miles. Each shoal is
of slight extent, but few of them exceeding one-fourth of a mile in diameter. There are twenty-five
of these shoals in all, on which the depths of water range from seven to twenty-seven fathoms;
between the shoals the depths vary from twenty-eight to thirty-nine fathoms, and the bottom
is broken and rocky.
Between the Virgin Rocks and Eastern Shoal and about them the depths range from thirty-
three to forty-eight fathoms, and the bottom consists of sand, coarse gravel, rocks, and broken
shells. Bank clams {Siliqua costata), abound here, and squid and capelin are plentiful in
their season, attracting large numbers of cod and making this region a very profitable one for
the fishermen. Halibut also formerly occurred here in large numbers. The cod which fi-equent
these shoals are generally of somewhat smaller size than those taken on other parts of the
Grand Banks; they are caught with hand-lines on the shoaler areas, where the fishermen go
in dories, one man to each boat, while the vessels lie at anchor near by.
The eastern part of the northern section of the Grand Bank, lying eastward of the Eastern
Shoal and westward of 49° west longitude, has depths of thirty- seven to forty- five fathoms. The
bottom consists of sand, coarse gravel, pebbles, rocks, and broken shells, much of this area being-
covered with rocks and supporting a rich assemblage of animal life. This rocky bottom is
composed essentially of smooth round bowlders, distributed over sand, many of them being-
perforated by boring mollusks. Immense numbers of crustaceans, especially crabs, abound
here, together with bank clams and other shell-fish, small star-fish, Holothurians, Ascidians,
etc. This is one of the most favoi-able grounds for cod, principally from Jnly to September.
That portion of the northern section lying east of the forty-ninth meridian is much less
resorted to than the last above described, and is, therefore, less known. The depths of Avater
range from thirty-four to fifty-four fathoms, and the bottom consists of sand, pebbles, and rocks.
North of the northeastern portion of the Grand Bank, the bottom slojies off gradually a
distance of forty to forty-five miles from the edge of the bank, the depths nowhere exceeding
seventy-five fathoms, excepting in a few small areas. The bottom is composed of sand, mud,
and pebbles, the shoaler portions, with depths of fifty -five to sixty-five fathoms, being generally
composed of coarse sand and rocks. Within the past five years good catches of cod have been
made in this region by Gloucester fishing- vessels.
The Fisheries op the Grand Bank.— The most important fishery of the Grand Bank is
that for cod, which is engaged in by vessels from France, the United States, and the British
THE GRAND BANK. 65
provinces. Duriug tbe flsbiug season, which Lists from Ainil first to October, lai'ge tieets of
vessels from these three countries visit the different parts of this bank. In the early i)art of tlio
season, April and May, the southern portion of the bank is principally resorted to, and good
catches are frequently made south of 44° north latitude. As a rule, however, the larger part of
the fleet remain between 44° and 45° north latitude. At this season, sand lant are especially
abundiint on this part of the bank, and large numbers are often found in the stomachs of the cod.
In June, capelin make their appearance on the bank, at which time the cod seem to greatly
increase in numbers. This body of cod, found in connection with the capelin, or in the capeliu
season, has received from the fishermen the name of "capelin school." It is distributed over all
parts of the bank visited by the fishing-fleet. After the beginning of June, many of the vessels
move to the northern part of the bank, fishing in the vicinity of, and to the eastward of, the Virgin
Eocks. Very few vessels now remain south of 44° north latitude, for the best fishing is found
between 44° and 45° 20' north latitude, and to the northward of 40° north latitude.
As a rule, squid make their appearance on the Grand Bank in July, after which time but few
fish can be caught with capelin or herring bait. The body of cod now occurring on the bank
is termed the "squid school" by the fishermen. It is probable that these schools of cod, though
known by different names, are composed mainly of the same fish that come on the bank in the
spring, though with the addition of many others, which appear to be attracted to the region during
the summer by the schools of capeliu and squid. They occupy the same ground, and the fishing
continues through September. Formerly, cod were abundant till December, but, at present, these
fish leave the bank at a comparatively early period in the fall.
The cod fishery of the Grand Bank dates from the earliest settlement of North America and
it probably had much to do with the opening up of our country in those early times.
The halibut fishery began on the Grand Bank about 1865, and has been vigorously
prosecuted there ever since. At first the vessels resorted to Eastern Shoal-water, between 43°
45' and 45° north latitude, where halibut were then found in immense numbers. Though so
abundant at first their numbers soon became greatly reduced, and consequently other grounds
were sought for. For a series of years that section of the bank lying west of 51° west longitude,
and between 43° 40' and 45° north latitude, was the favorite halibut ground, and several large
fares of halibut were also taken in the immediate vicinity of the Virgin Eocks for two suc-
cessive years (1869 and 1870), during the months of July and August. Notwithstanding the great
abundance of halibut on the shoaler parts of the bank (from twenty-two to fifty fathoms), during
the earlier years of the fishery, their capture was followed up so closely that they rapidly became
much less numerous, and the fishermen were forced to seek new fields in the deeper waters (one to
three hundred fathoms) along the southern and western edges of the bank. When first discovered
in these deeper places, they were found in incredible numbers all along the western part of the bank
in the winter and spring, and duriug the entire summer in other localities off the Northwest Prong.
Although even in these places halibut are much less abundant now than formerly, the Grand Bank
is still the great resort for vessels engaged in this fishery, and this region yet remains the most
important halibut fishing-ground of the Western Atlantic.
When the halibut fishery first began on the Grand Bank, large catches could be made in the
shoal waters during the entire year. After two or three years' continuous fishing, how^ever, they
could be found abundantly on the shoal grounds only in the winter and spring. While they were
crossing the bank on their way to more northern localities or to deeper water, to which they were
not known at that time to resort by the fishermen, it was supposed that they came on the bank
from the eastern and southern edges, as they were distinctly seen to move towards the northwest.
SEC in 5
66 FISHING-GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
More recently, since the beginning of the deeper-water fishing, it has been discovered that they
more conunouly migrate toward the northwest, along the edge of the bank on the west side, and
in some cases their course has been traced even beyond the limits of the Grand Bank.
Since the foregoing was written (1880), halibut have been found in abundance in the deep
water off the eastern side of the bank, but owing to the presence of icebergs during the greater
liart of the year, and the strength of the polar current in that region, but few vessels have ven-
tured there.
GKEEN BANK.
Green Bank is for its size one of the least important of the fishing-banks of the Western
Atlantic, but one of the best halibut grounds lies in the deep water near its southern part, and
as this is also called Green Bank by the fishermen, it may not be out of place to consider it in this
connection. This bank has an irregular, elongate pear-shaped outline, the longer axis extending
due north and south. It is situated between Grand and Saint Pierre Banks, being seven miles
distant from the former and fifteen miles from the latter. Its extreme length within the
sixty-fathom line, is sixty-two miles, north and south, from 45° 09' to 40° 11' north latitude, and
its width is thirty-six miles, between the meridians of 54° 08' and 54° 58' west longitude.
The area of the bank is about fourteen hundred and fifty square geographical miles. The depths
range from forty to sixty fathoms, and the bottom is composed of sand, shells, pebbles, and
rocks. The general direction of the polar current, which sets over this bank, is usuallj' from the
north to the southwest, its course, as well as its force, being more or less influenced by the
wind. But little is known of the abundance of cod here, as the fishermen prefer to resort to
grounds with which they are better acquainted and have seldom fished on this one. Within the
past two or three years, however, some good fares of cod have been taken on Green Bank, in the
late summer and the fall, by New England vessels.
Since 1875, halibut have generally been found very abundantly in the winter and spring, and
sometimes even during the summer, in from seventy-five to three hundred fathoms, off the
southern edge of the bank, between the Graud Bank and Saint Pierre Bank.
This locality ajipears to be a feeding-ground in the winter, and during the spring lies in the
direct course taken by the halibut in their migrations fromi the Grand Bank to other places
farther north. At this season it is not uncommon for immense schools to make their appearance
in this region and move leisurely along the edge of the bank. The only vessels fishing for halibut
at this place are from Gloucester, Massachusetts.
BANK OF SAINT PIERRE.
The Bank of Saint Pierre is situated off the center of the southern coast of Newfoundland,
between the parallels of 45° 10' and 40° 54' north latitude, and the meridians 55° 16' and 57° 30'
west longitude. It is irregularly oblong in shape, about twice as long as broad, and extends in a
northwest and southeast direction. At the northwestern extremity it is about half as wide as at
the southeastern, where it rapidly broadens out, and ends abruptly along a nearly straight line
bearing north and south. The longest side of the bank, which measures about one hundred and
twenty-five miles, presents a slight outward curve and faces the southwest. The width of the north-
western end is about thirty-five miles, and that of the southern end sixty-five miles.
The northeastern edge of the bank is distant about twenty-seven miles front the nearest
point on the Newfoundland coast, and from nine to ten miles from the islands of Saint Pierre
and IMiqnelon, The gnlly separating Saint Pierre Bank from Green Bank runs directly
Fislieiy luduslritjs of tlie UniUid Stales, Sect. Ill
C.Bret-on
« ""/ss-
" 4s\ ^^-M.
C.Canso „ ,^M''"l S^A
^ ^- ..■■•" •'iO* «' V (S3- , *9
_„_ ^' '•■'- "a y-<J$.J
^5) 4<J
4 ■■»
■ z^*^^ I.
« i. ^ 73\-3aC BA2VR «o
./oK
52 ...
,,,,,,,,.™-«?55, 1
71 ,' \ "Si
i^ by AmerLccuu^/'-jfs • XXI I
'■'r-lo, 'vAyv »
,^^ ■"■•'^^xx
No. 4.
CHART OF THE
-.irulica^e HalLt GrounOs. BANKS OF NOVA SCOTIA
Co<k \ "
catches. The soundings are given in fathoms.
The Roman Nurmrals reiir
I to l^e explanations or' Platest
5 9
45
43
BANQUEREAU. 67
uortli aud south, lias a minimum ■width of fifteen miles, and depths ranging from sixty-five
to one hundred fathoms. The total area of Saint Pierre Bank is about fort;ysix hundred square
geographical miles. The depths range from twenty-two to fifty fathoms, the bottom being
mostly composed of rocks and pebbles, although in some parts there are considerable areas
of sand aud gravel. Ordinarily, there is not much current over this bank, although at times,
•when driven by strong winds, the jjolar current, -which sweeps around the south coast of Xew-
foundland, becomes quite strong.
Cod and halibut are the only food-fishes found in any considerable numbers on the bank of
Saint Pierre, though a few cusk and haddock are sometimes taken. The general season for both
cod and halibut begins usually about the first of April and continues until jS^ovember. Cod are
most abundant from the first of June to October, during which period they come iu pursuit of
capelin and squid. Halibut were formerly abundant on vai-ious parts of this ground during the
spring and summer, but now they are rarely numerous except in the deeper water along the edges,
or on rocky spots fifteen to twenty miles distant from the bank, in localities where no sound-
ings are indicated on the published charts. Some of the schools of halibut breed on these
rocky patches, but the greater number merelj' pass along the edge during their migrations toward
the north. But few fishing-vessels, beyond the fresh halibut catchers and those owned by the
French, resort at present to the bank of Saint Pierre, as some of the other neighboring banks offer
much greater inducements. Saint Pierre has, therefore, lost a great deal of its former prestige as
a fishing-ground, and assumes but a second rank among our great ocean banks.
The invertebrate fauna of this bank is moderately rich, but much less so than that of many
parts of the Grand Bank, the fauna of the two regions including, however, about the same variety
of forms.
BANQUEEEAU.
Banquereau may be regarded as one of the most important fishiug-banks lying between the
fortieth and forty-eighth parallels of north latitude. Its entire outline is very irregular, but the
main portion of the bank has a somewhat rectangular shape, with an elongate and nearlj" regular
prolongation extending to the west. The length of the bank in an east and west direction is a
little more than one hundred and twenty miles, and its greatest width about forty-seven miles;
its total area is about two thousand eight hundred square miles. The main portion of the
bank lies between 44° 04' and 45° 01' north latitude, aud 57° 10' aud 59° west longitude, and the
western i^rolougation between 44° 24' and 44° 42' north latitude, and 59° and 00° 05' west
longitude. Xorth of Banquereau lie Artimon and Misaine Banks, the former being distant only
about three miles and the latter from two to fifteen miles, the intervening depths ranging from
sixty-one to one hundred and fifty-five fathoms. South of the western part of the bank is the
eastern part of Sable Island Bank, from which it is separated by the "Gully" to be described
further on.
On the eastern part of Banquereau there is an area of shoal ground, called the "Eocky
Bottom," having a depth of about sixteen fathoms; elsewhere the depths range from eighteen to
fifty fathoms, and the bottom is rocky as a rule, but on some parts of the bank there are patches
of sand and gravel.
A current issuing from the Gulf of Saint Lawrence here meets the polar current, but
although this produces some disturbance of the surface waters, the latter current is usually the
stronger, and the tendency of the flow is, therefore, chiefly towards the west. The force as well
as the direction of the current is much influenced by the wind, so that while quite strong tides
may prevail for several days at a time, intervals may follow when there is but little if any current.
(38 FISHING GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
Cod aud Lalibut are about the only fish taken in abundance on Uanquereau, but hake,
haddock, and cusk are sometimes found in small numbers. The Rocky Bottom is principally
resorted to for cod, by the hand-line dory fishermen during the summer, and at times several
hundred dories can be seen fishing there close together. As a rule, cod are most plentiful on the
eastern part of the bank, although good catches are sometimes made toward the west. The best
season for them is from May to November, when the schools gather upon the bank to feed on
the lant, squid, crustaceans, and shell-fish, which are then very abundant.
Halibut are found throughout the entire year off the edges of the bank, where, at depths of
one hundred to four hundred fathoms, large numbers are often taken. These localities are
apparently both feeding and breeding grounds for halibut, and it is not unusual for a school of
these fish to remain several weeks or even months in one locality, although it is very probable that
some of the schools observed on the eastern side of the bank in the spring are migrating toward
the north.
The principal places for halibut are along the southern and eastern borders of the bank ;
the Southwest Prong (in about 44° north latitude, and between 58° 30' and 58° 55' west
longitude); the Middle Prong (44° 14' north latitude and 58° west longitude); and the Eastern
Slope (from 44° 28' to 45° north latitude), in depths of one hundred and fifty to four hundred
fathoms. These deep-water areas are rocky, and support a very rich growth of Gorgonian corals,
sea anemones, etc,
ARTIMON BANK.
Artimon Bank lies north of the eastern part of Banquereau, from which it is separated by a
narrow gully. It is of such limited extent (about one hundred and twenty square miles) that,
compared with the latter, it is of but slight importance as a fishing-ground. The fishermen
generally prefer to fish on the larger bank, and therefore know but little concerning the
abundance of fish here, although it is certain that cod occur in greater or less numbers. This
bank is fourteen miles long and ten miles wide, with depths of thirty-eight to fifty fathoms,
and a bottom of coarse gravel and rocks.
MISAINE BANK.
This bank lies north of the western two-thirds of Banquereau, from which it is mainly sep-
arated by a channel about twenty miles wide. The eastern prolongations of these banks, however,
approach one another quite closely. Misaine Bank has a very irregular outline, its general trend
being about northeast by east and southwest by west. It lies between the parallels of 440 55'
and 450 45' north, and the meridians of 58° 06' and 59° 50' west. Its greatest length is, therefore,
about eighty miles and its greatest width about forty miles, its superficial area amounting to
about seventeen hundred square geographical miles. The depths of water range from forty to
sixty fathoms, and the bottom is generally broken and rocky.
But little is known concerning the abundance of fish on this bank, as it has been very rarely
visited by vessels. It is probable, however, that occasional visits have demonstrated that cod
are less abundant here than elsewhere in this region, aud that this bank does not afford as profitable
fishing as some others not far distant from it. This seems remarkable when we consider its large
size and close proximity to Banquereau, which is an exceedingly valuable ground for both cod and
halibut.
CANSO BANK.
Causo Bank is situated to the southeast of Cape Canso, Nova Scotia, from which it derives
its name. The distance of its western end from the cape is about twelve miles. It is really a
THE GULLY— SABLE ISLAND BANK. 69
western extension of Misaine Bank, with which it is connected by a narrow neck. It is very
elongate, extending in an east and west direction, and lies between about 59° 50' and 00° 50'
west longitude and 45° 01' and 45° IC north latitude. Its length is about forty-five miles, its
greatest width about thirteen miles, and its area not far from four hundred and twenty-live miles.
The depths of water on this bank range from thirty to fifty-six fathoms and the general character
of the bottom is sandy, with spots of gravels and pebbles. It is unimportant as a vessel fishing-
ground, and is too far distant from the land to be much resorted to by small boats.
THE GULLY.
The so-called Gully of the bauk fishermen is the deep passage-way lying between
Banquereau and Sable Island. It extends in a west-northwest and east-southeast direction
north of Sable Island, but turns abruptly toward the south at its eastern end, and continues
down between the eastern end of the Western Bank and the southwest prong of Banquereau.
It constitutes an important lialil)at ground. Its entire length is about sixty miles, and its greatest
width twenty miles. The depths range from sixty-six to one hundred and forty-five fathoms, and
the bottom consists of rocks, gravel, sand, and mud. The rocky and gravelly portions form
several ridges, separated generally by areas of the finer materials, excepting in the eastern section,
where the intervening bottom is mostly composed of pebbles and sharp rocks. The ocean
currents generally set over this area in a westerly direction, but vary much in strength, an
easterly wind often increasing their force, while at other times there may be no perceptible current
at all. Halibut have not been found, at least not in sufiScient numbers to warrant fishing for
them, over the entire extent of the Gully; but the halibut grounds proper are limited to the rocky
and gravelly ridges and slopes of that portion of the Gully included between the meridians of 59°
and G0° west longitude. When this fishery began it was carried on chiefly during the spring,
in the northern and western i)art of the Gully; but in 1877 the fishermen made successful
trials farther out, taking good fares even as late as June and July ; since then good catches have
been obtained in the winter, and it would appear that the halibut come here merely to feed, as
they generally move to other localities just previous to the spawning season. With a few
exceptions, Gloucester halibut vessels are the only ones that have fished on this ground.
Instances are on record of the appearance of cod in the Gully in sixty-five to ninety fathoms of
water, but they are not found regularly in the same places each year. The rocky bottoms of the
Gully are very rich in animal life, affording abundant food for the halibut, and lant and herring
are also frequently plentiful in their season.
SABLE ISLAND BANK OB WESTERN BANK.
Western Bank is one of the most important fishing-grounds of the Western Atlantic,
considered either as to size or the abundance of fish. It lies south of Cape Breton Island and
the eastern part of Nova Scotia, between the parallels of 42° 55' and 44° 4G' north latitude and
the meridians of 59° 04' and 62° 35' west longitude, and has a length of one hundred and fifty-six
miles and a width, including the Middle Grourul, of seventy-six miles. The general contour of
the bank within the sixty five-fathom line, as laid down on the Admiralty chart, approaches
somewhat a very elongated elliiise, with the longer axis running about northeast by east and
southwest by west; but over a broad area to the eastward of the center of the bank soundings of
less than sixty fathoms connect it directly with Middle Ground, which we have here included in
the same bank. The total extent of the bank thus defined is about seven thousand square
geographical miles. Off its eastern end lies Banquereau, with the Gully between, and a short
distance off the western end are the Le Have Eidges.
70 FISHING-GKOUNDS OF NORTH AMEEICA.
The depths off the southern side of the bank rapidly iucrease from sixty to seven hundred,
twelve hundred, and fourteen hundred fathoms.
At the eastern end of Western Bank is Sable Island, a long and narrow crescent-shaped
elevation, entirely formed of sand, which has been blown into innumerable hummocks or dunes.
Off both ends of the island are long- and dangerous sand-bars. The length of the island is about
twenty miles, and its greatest width one and one-half miles. It extends in a nearly east and
west direction. The depth of water on the bars, for a distance of from seven to ten miles, does
not exceed two fathoms, and even ten miles farther out, both to the east and west, the depths are
not greater than ten or eleven fathoms.
As a general rule, the bank slopes gradually from the island toward the south and west, the
deptiis ranging from eighteen to sixty fathoms. The bottom is mostly sandy, with patches of
gravel and pebbles. On the Middle Ground there are several shoal spots, with depths of ten
to nineteen fathoms. The currents are occasionally quite s'roug in the vicinity of Sable Island
and generally very irregular, being much influenced by winds. On the remainder of the bank
there is usually but little current, whatever there is usually tending in a westerly direction.
Cod and halibut are the principal food-fish taken, other species of bottom swimmers occurriug
in less numbers. Cod are generally most abundant in the spring, from the first of March to
June, although good fares are obtained throughout almost the entire year. For more than
twenty-five years the Western Bank has been a favorite resort of the halibut fishermen. At first,
these fish were found very plentiful on different parts of the bank in from forty-five to sixty
fathoms, and since 187G have been caught in great numbers along the edges on the south and east
sides, in one hundred to three hundred fathoms. Like the cod, they are found during the entire
year, the period of greatest abundance, however, being from the first of January to the first of
October. The Western Bank may be considered both as a feeding and spawning ground for the cod
and halibut. It abounds in shell-fish (qtiahogs, mussels, clams, and iieriwiukles), and crustaceans
(crabs, shrimps, etc.), as well as in several species of small fish (lant and herring), upon which the
cod and halibut prey. Although the cod do not gather in such great schools in winter as they
do on George's Bank, it is nevertheless quite evident, that they assemble at that season for the
purpose of reproduction. Usually they are found most abundant on the western part of the
bank in winter, but as spring advances they move into shoaler water in the vicinity of Sable
Island, the "bend" of the island and the region about the bars being favorite grounds during the
late spring and early summer. The fish taken near the island are, as a rule, somewhat smaller than
those caught farther west. Vessels from all along the New England coast and from the British
provinces resort to this bank to pursue the cod fishery, but fishing for halibut is almost
exclusively carried on by the Gloucester fleet. The two bars at the eastern and western ends of
Sable Island, as well as the shoal water off the northei'u side of the island, are favorite localities for
dory hand-line fishing for cod.
THE OWL AND DOUBTFUL BANKS.
The Owl is a very small bank, lying m 43° 57' north latitude, and 61° 55' west longitude. It
is somewhat triangular in outline, being about five miles long by three miles wide at the broadest
end, and having an area of about ten square miles, as laid down on the Admiralty chart. The
only depth of water given is fifty-four fathoms, with sixty to ninety fathoms off the edge.
Doubtful Bank lies about fifteen miles northwest of the Owl, and is of less extent than the
latter, having an area of about six or seven miles only. The depth of water is thirty-two
fathoms, eighty-two fathoms occurriug in tlie immediate vicinity. Both of these small grounds
LE HAVE BANK— LE HAVE EIDGES. 71
Liive iu times past furnished a lew good trips of halibut, but they are uot uow considered of any
importance to that fishery. They are, however, more or less resorted to for cod by American
vessels.
SAMBKO BANK.
8ambro Bank lies between the i)arallels of 43° 30' and 43° 47' north, and the meridians of 02°
40' and 02° 55' west, the greatest length, northeast by north and southwest by south, being twelve
miles and the greatest width seven miles. The area of the bank is about seventy square miles. It
has a depth of fifty-four to sixty fothoms, with depths of one hundred and ten to one hundred and
thirty-three fathoms a short distance oft' its northeastern edge. The bottom consists mostly of
sand, gravel, and pebbles. Sambro Bank, from its small size, is seldom visited by fishing-vessels,
and has, therefore, never attained any importance as a fishing-gronnd.
LE HAVE EAJJK.
Le Have Bank is situated to the eastward of Brown's Bank, and south uud east of Eoseway
Bank. It extends from 42° 34' to 43° 26' north, latitude, a distance of fifty-two miles, and from
63° 50' to C50 07' west longitude, a distance of about fifty four miles. The bank is nearly divided
into two portions, of which the eastern portion (Le Have Bank i)roper) extends north and south
thirty-nine miles, and the western portion nearly east and west about thirty-five miles. The
total area of the bank is about twelve hundred and forty square miles. The bottom is largely
composed of coarse gravel, pebbles, and rocks, Mith smaller areas of sand distributed here
and there. The depths of water range from forty to fifty fathoms. The general set of the
current is to the westward, but this, however, is influenced very much by the direction and
force of the wind, generally running quite strong during easterly winds. The principal fisli
taken on this bank are cod and haddock, although other species of bottom feeders are more
or less plentiful. Cod are found at all seasons of the year, but are, perhaps, more abundant
during the early winter than at any other period, and good trips are frequently obtained by the
Gloucester vessels, which are the only ones that go there at that season. The Gloucester
winter haddock-catchers, which carry their catch fresh to the Boston market, have extended their
trips from George's and Brown's Banks to Le Have, and daring the present winter (18S0-'S1) liave
made some remarkably good fares, several of them being the largest on record. Most of the
lower forms of animal life found on the Western Bank and Le Have Eidges also occur on Le
Have Bank. Le Have was at one time (1855 to 18C5) quite a favorite fishing-ground for halibut,
and considerable quantities are occasionally taken now by the hand-line cod fishermen in winter,
though they do not occur in sufiQcient numbers to warrant trawlers going there.
LE HAVE EIDGES.
The fishing-ground known as Le Have Eidges is simply a continuation of Le Have Bank to
the eastward, iu the direction of the Western Bank, a distance of about forty-five miles. This
places the eastern limit in 62° 50' west longitude, while the northern and southern boundaries are
about the same as those of Le Have Bank. The extent of the ridges is about fifteen hundred
and seventy-five square miles. The bottom is a succession of ridges of gravel and pebbles,
with occasional patches of rocks, the depths varying from fifty-five to eighty-five fathoms. The
current, though occasionally strong, is weaker here than farther west on the bank, and, excepting
during easterly winds, is but little noticed. The general set is westerly. The Eidges were for
a number of years one of the favorite places of resort for the halibut catchers iu the winter, and
many good trips of cod have also been taken th'ere at that season. At present, but few halibut
72 FISrilNG-GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
arc caugbt except in the dct'i) water along the soutberu edge of tbe grouud, wbere tbey bave
.sometimes been found quite plentiful during nearly tbe entire year. Hake are also found in
large numbers in tbe deep water about the edges of the ground, and even on the ridges. As a
general thing, few vessels besides those from Gloucester have made a practice of fishing on Le
Have Ridges, though codfisbermen from other places stop there now and then during the summer.
In the deep water bordering tbe southern side of Le Have Ridges, Gorgouian corals (Prmnoa,
Paragorgia, etc.) occur on the rocky bottoms, while on the ridges themselves sea anemones, star-
fishes, mollnsks, crabs, and other crustaceans abound.
ROSEWAY BANK.
Roseway Bank lies north of the western part of Le Have Bank and southeast of Shelburne
light. Nova Scotia. It is oblong in shape, and of slight extent (about two hundred and seventy
square geographical miles), its greatest length being about twenty-one miles, and its greatest
breadth about fifteen miles. It extends from 43° 12' to 43° 33' north latitude, and from 64° 25'
to 04° 52' west longitude, and at the northwest corner is connected with the shore limit of
sixty fathoms by a narrow neck. The depths on this bank vary from thirty-three to forty-
eight fathoms, and tbe bottom consists of sand, gravel, and rocks.
Tbe currents in this region are not nearly so strong as in the vicinity of Cape Sable and
Brown's Bank. Tbe general direction of the flow is about west-southwest and east-northeast,
the westerly current being usually much tbe stronger, although the force and direction of
both are more or less influenced by tbe winds. The principal fish taken on this bank
are cod, haddock, and cusk, but hake, pollock, and halibut also occur there. Tbe best fishing
season is generally from May to October, during which time the bank is mainly resorted to by
small sized vessels from the western part of Nova Scotia, although a few New England vessels
also occasionally fish there.
brown's bank.
Brown's Bank lies in a northeasterly direction from George's Bank, and is separated from
it by a gully fifteen miles wide, in which tbe depths of water range from one hundred to four
hundred and fifty fathoms. This bank is imperfectly laid down on the published charts now iu
use by the fishermen, and no comprehensive idea of its extent and consequent importance as a
fishing-ground is, therefore, conveyed by them.
The charts publisbed by tbe United States Coast Survey define the boundaries of the bank
much more accurately and afford a better idea of the area visited by the fishing- vessels than
the Admiralty and Eldridge charts. The depths of water range from twenty to seventy-five
fathoms over this area, which embraces within its limits about twenty two hundred and
sevetity-five square miles. Tbe greatest length of the bank, from southeast to northwest, is
sixty-three miles, and the extreme breadth forty-three miles. It is situated between 64° 52' and
€>CP 20' west longitude, and 41° 50' and 43° 02' north latitude. There is a small rocky shoal on
t\w. northern part (the exact location of which seems not to have been definitely determined), on
which, it is said, there is not more than nine to fifteen fathoms of water. The bank slopes away
from the shoal on the south and east, to depths of fifty-five to seventy-five fathoms ; but at a
distance of twelve to fifteen miles off it again rises to depths of thirty to fifty fathoms. This
area of shoal water, within tbe fifty-fathom limit, is fifty miles long with an average width of
fifteen miles. North of tbe shoal tbe bottom drops off suddenly to depths of seventy to eighty
fathoms. The bottom is largely composed of coarse sand, gravel, pebbles, and rocks, and is
rich in animal life.
SEAL-ISLAND GROUND. 73
The tides are quite as strong bere as on tbe eastern side of George's Bank, the ebb having
an average strength of one and one-third miles an hour, while the flood runs somewhat stronger.
The greatest strength of the flood-tide sets nearly northwest, while the ebb flows in nearly an
opposite direction.
Cod, halibut, and haddock are the principal food-fish occurring on this bank, but pollock and
hake are also found in less numbers. Cod are quite plentiful in the winter, and some good fares
are obtained, although comparatively few vessels fish here at that season, most of them going to
George's. At other seasons, however, the cod fishery on Brown's Bank compares favorably with
that of any of the other banks in that vicinity. Quite a number of the so-called Georgesmen fish
here, and a few resort principally to this bank during the entire year. Halibut were formerly
found in abundance, but at present this fishery is limited to an occasional trip to the deej) water
off the southern or western edge. A small quantity of this fish is also caught by the hand-lino
fishermen. The haddock fishermen frequently visit this bank during the winter, and often make
good catches.
SEAL-ISLAND GROUND.
Off the western part of Nova Scotia there is an important fishing locality, to which no name
is given on the charts, but which is called by the fishermen Seal-Island Ground. It is a direct
continuation of the shore soundings, which slope gradually from the land toward the south and
west, and continue in a northerly direction beyond what might be properly regarded as the limit of
the ground. To the south it extends nearly to Brown's Bank, from which it is separated by a
narrow gully ; to the west it reaches thirty-eight miles beyond Seal Island, and to the northwest
about thirty-five miles from the same island. The southern limit of the ground is in 43° and the
northern in 43° 45' north latitude, while the western boundary may be placed at 66° 40' west
longitude. The entire gTOund covers an area, outside of the three-mile line, of twelve hundred
and fifty square miles.
There is a small shoal called Pollock Eip, with a depth of seven fathoms, bearing southwest
from Seal Island, from which it is distant nine and one-half miles, but otherwise the ground
slopes quite gradually, the depths ranging from fifteen to seventy fathoms.
The bottom is mainly composed of coarse gravel and pebbles, with occasional rocky spots of
greater or less extent. The tides sweep out from and in toward the Bay of Fundy with
considerable force, the course varying with the direction of the land, so that while they run
nearly north and south on the northern part of the ground, they swing round to the southward of
Seal Island and there run northwest and southeast. The flood is stronger than the ebb, and the
fishermen estimate that one flood tide will carry a vessel nearly as far in a northerly direction as
two ebb tides will carry it in the opposite way, although this is doubtless an exaggeration.
The principal fish caught on this ground are cod, haddock, and pollock ; but halibut, cusk,
and hake are taken to a limited extent, and occasionally herring and mackerel are netted for bait.
Cod are generally more abundant from spring until fall than during the winter, but haddock
and halibut occur throughout the year. Fishing usually begins in April or May, and continues
until October. Halibut were formerly very plentiful in this region, but are now comparatively
scarce.
This ground may be considered as essentially a feeding-ground for cod, which appear to come
here after the spawning season is over, to fatten upon the crabs and moUusks living on the
bottom and the herring and other species of small fish that swim back and forth in the tide rips.
All parts of the ground are fished on at the same time. This was formerly a favorite fishing
74 FISHING-GKOUNDS OF NOETH AMEKICA.
locality for vessels from the coast of Maiue, but since the almost universal adoption of trawl-
fishing, only a few American vessels beyond Georgcsmeu (haud-liuers) go there. The New
London halibut schooners occasionally visit it in summer. The fleet resorting there now is
principally composed of vessels belonging to the western part of Nova Scotia, which generally
" fish at a drift," moving back and fortli over the ground with the wind and currents.
geokge's bank.
George's Bank is by far the largest and most important fishing-ground near the coast of the
United States, and is second to none in the Western Atlantic except the Grand Bank of
Newfoundland. It lies to the eastward of Cape Cod and Nantucket Shoals, and is apparently an
extension of the latter, since the water is no deeper between the southern part of the shoals and
the western part of the bank than in many places upon it. As laid down on the charts, the
southern limit is in 40° 40' north latitude, although the fifty-fathom line extends seven miles
farther south ; the southern boundary may, therefore, be regarded as in about 40° 30' and the
northern as 42° OS' north latitude. The eastern part is in about 00° ;iud the western iu 09° west
longitude. The greatest length from the northeastern to the southwestern extremity is about one
hundred and fifty miles, and the greatest width north and south ninety-eight miles, according to
the charts of the United States Coast Survey. The depths range from two to fifty fathoms. On
the western part, between the parallels of 41° 10' and 41° 53' north latitude and the meridians
of 67° 20' and 68° 37' west longitude, are a number of shoals, known as the East Shoal, the North
Shoal, the Southwest Shoal, Cultivator Shoal, etc. The Southwest Shoal is the largest, being
fifteen miles in length south-southwest and north-northeast, with an average width of two and
one-half miles. The position of the center of this shoal is 41° 39' north latitude and 07° 48' west
longitude. There are from two to fifteen fathoms of water on the shoals, and between them from
twelve to thirty fathoms. The tides sweep over these with great force, causing strong rips, and,
during rough weather, the sea breaks heavily on them, rendering approach to their vicinity
extremely hazardous. The bottom is chiefly sand, although patches of rough ground — gravel,
pebbles, and rocks — of greater or less extent, are found in some localities. Its position between
the Bay of Fundy and the Gulf Stream causes the tides to run swifter than on the other banks,
and to swirl around instead of passing directly back and forth. They sweep around the compass,
from left to right, attaining the greatest velocity when flowing southeast and northwest and the
least velocity when moving southwest and northeast. The first attempt at fishing on this bank,
of which there is any record, was made in 1821 by three Gloucester vessels. The George's cod
and halibut fishery of later date did not become fully established as a permanent industry until
about 1835, although vessels went there for halibut in 1830. At first the catches consisted mostly
of halibut, but since 1850 they have been chiefly of codfish, although more or less halibut are taken
with them. During the months of February, March, and April large schools of cod make their
appearance on the bank. They are generally found on the "winter fishing-ground," a part of
the bank lying to the eastward of the shoals, between 41° 30' and 42° north latitude and 06°
38' and 07° 30' west longitude. This is essentially a spawning-ground for the cod, which appear
to come on the bank from the southeast, as they almost invariably, after reaching the ground,
move slowly to the north and west as spring approaches. This is in the direction of the shoals,
a.ud, as the pursuit of the fish brings the vessels near the latter, great loss of life and property
sometimes occurs during heavy easterly gales. As soon as the spawning season is over the schools
of cod break up, but more or less fish are caught on different parts of the bank during the entire
year, though rarely, if ever, are they found so plentiful as when the winter school is on the
ground.
i.^lier, rn,lo.tri.«"ftl.et.-=it»dStaU.., SfCl. 111.
7D°
4i
41
Cape Cod
X
X
\..
■■:%.
nay Pt.
25 4& \
10 32
isanloi^Ifcad ;? " ®
-^
/
^^4 " Hi-
27 33
..,' ;»u'U :k JAj>ix2
9} 23
IS
IS
41
2J
.■■■:fi
41
at
M 15 34
18 r:^^\ Phelps' Sanh
30
ez
Sd'ratho"
46
iOOf^.
^ curve
ivm-
15
24
25
" ! 20
3i
27 "■' .3I>
22 16 26 X tV^
3S
32
/
35 'fl 19 23 M -O,
30 J-
29
1<^* ^
90 45 ^ 42
0
-34 «0-
35
» -^ ^ li " s2* " \ *^
)>■ ". \ 34
13. C, 13 \
38 37 ■ 4a .■; • •
40
-:®:-'"^»„
K '■
44
33 V 3"
^
45
SO //
37/
/
./'
48 60 ■#
2i 1
2fi 33
2e 37 3: 4d 44
;'^"
./
-^^'
*9/
47
# /
M^''
,1
No. 11.
CHART OF
GEORGES BANK
Scale of Miles
^
Soundings in fathoms at mfan low trc 'len
llepths If Si Uhan 3 fathoms in. ftet on, a.
shaded surrace..
THE MACKEREL FISHINGGROUNDS. 75
The codfish fleet, which uumbers about oue hundred vessels, is wholly from Gloucester,
Massachusetts. Besides these, there are tweuty-five to thirty vessels from the same port that fish
ou George's for haddock iu the wiuter, aud a few others, from ports iu Long Island Sound, engage
in the halibut and cod fishery to a limited extent iu the spriug and summer.
The area of the "winter fishiug-ground" is about eleven hundred square miles, while that of
the whole bank is eighty-four hundred and uinetyeight square miles. All of this area, with the
exception of the shoals, is available for fishing purposes iu the summer season for cod, halibut,
haddock, and mackerel.
Various kinds of shell fish, such as pectens, mussels, and periwinkles, aud crabs, and other
crustaceans abound over most parts of the bank, and herring aud laut are quite plentiful during
most of the year.
13. THE MACKEREL AND MENHADEN FISHING-GROUNDS OF THE EASTERN COAST OF
THE UNITED STATES.
THE MACKEEEL GJROUNDS.
The most extensive and valuable mackerel fishing-grounds of the world are located off the
eastern coast of the United States, between the parallels of 30° and 45° north latitude, and the
meridians of 60° and 75° 30' west longitude. They extend from a point a short distance north of
Cape Hatteras (about fifty to seventy miles directly off the mouth of Chesapeake Bay) to the east-
ern and northern limit of the Gulf of Maine, comprising the entire extent of the latter region. The
length of these grounds, iu round numbers, is about seven hundred miles, and the average width
may be regarded as at least eighty miles, making a total area of about 56,000 square geographical
miles, all of which is resorted to by the mackerel catchers of the United States. Over this region
the mackexel swarm at certain seasous iu incredible numbers, although the entire region is not
geuerally filled with schools of these fish at the same time.
In their spring migrations the mackerel approach the coast north of Cape Hatteras, and the
first captures are usually made in the latter part of March or the beginning of April, between ihe
parallels of 30° and 38<3 north latitude, at distances of twenty-five to seventy miles from the land.
The following statements of early catches of mackerel, from 1878 to 1881, will give a comprehen-
sive idea of the localities and dates at which the first schools make their appearance.
EAELY CATCHES OF MACKEEEL IN 1878.
March 30. — Off Chincoteague, Virginia; schooner Lilian, of Xoank, Connecticut.
A]}ril 16. — Latitude 36° 10' north, longitude 74° 45' west; schooner Sarah M. Jacobs, of Glou-
cester.
April 18. — Twenty-five miles southeast of Cape May ; schooner Alice, of Swan Island, Maine.
April 25. — Fifty miles southeast of Cape May ; schooner John Somes, of Swan Island, Maine.
EARLY CATCHES OF MACKEREL IN 1879.
April 12.— Latitude 36° .35' north, longitude 74° 50' west; schooner Sarah M. Jacob.s, of Glou-
cester.
April 13. — Latitude 37° 57' north, longitude 74° 23' west; schooner Augusta E. Herrick, of
Swan Island, Maine.
April 13. — Seventy five miles south-southeast of Cape Henlopen ; schooner S. G. Wonson, of
Gloucester.
76 FISHING-GKOUNDS OF NOETH AMERICA,
April 14. — Latitude 38° OS' iiortli, lougitiulc 73° 57' -west; scliooiior Charles Haskell, of Glou-
cester.
April 19. — Latitude 37° 50' north, longitude 74° 03' west; schooner Alice, of Swan Island, Maine.
EARLY CATCHES OF MACKEREL IN 1880.
April 1. — Latitude 35° 30' north, longitude 74° 15' west; schooner Edward E. Webster, of
Gloucester.
EARLY CATCHES OF MACKEREL IN 1881.
March 20. — Latitude 37° 10' north, longitude 74° 05' west; schooner Edward E. Webster, of
Gloucester.
April 18. — Latitude 38° 38' north, longitude 74° west; same schooner.
May 16. — Off Block Island ; schooner Alice, of Swan Island, Maine.
As the season advances the mackerel move northward, the vessels following their mignitions
so far as possible. After a short period, however, the schools appear to strike thcdt'oast in a suc-
cession of waves, if that term may be allowed, and it generally results that, within a few weeks at
most after the first captures have been made in the spring, numerous schools are to be met with
along a considerable extent of coast, and, not unfrequeutly, from near the land to a distance of
sixty to seventy miles off. It is often difficult for the fishermen to determine positively whether
the mackerel that suddenly appear off Sandy Hook or Long Island belong to schools met with
south of the Delaware a day or two previously, or whether they have just approached the coast
for the first time, having come in directly from the Gulf Stream. However that may be, it fre-
quently happens that they are taken at the same time at numerous places all along the coast from
near Montauk Point, Long Islaud (and possibly near Block Island), to the month of the Delaware
River, and even farther southward. It is also not unusual for catches to be made on the same
day both at Cape Cod and off New York, with reports of fish in greater or less abundance at inter-
vening localities, as off Montauk Point, Block Island, No Man's Land, and the south shoal of Nan-
tucket, and in the south channel between George's Bank and Nantucket Shoals.
During the early part of the season, while the spring or southern mackerel fishery is in prog-
ress (usually from March 20 to June 1), a large percentage of the catch is marketed fresh, chiefly
in New Tork. The vessels frequently meet in port, and the fishermen are thus afforded an oppor-
tunity of comparing notes, which, iu consequence of the broad areas traversed In the passage to
and from market, enables them at this season to correctly estimate the area covered by the mack-
erel as well as their abundance.
After the beginning of June, the Gulf of Maine becomes the great mackerel ground. As the
schools of fish pass In the South Channel they appear to separate, a portion moving up by Cape
Cod, usually not far from the land, while other schools take a more easterly course, sweeping off
toward Cashe's Ledge, or even across toward Cape Sable. These various schools, which seldom
have precisely the same movements two years in succession, are followed by different sections of
the mackerel fleet, and at this season the vessels are scattered from Block Island and No ]\Ian's
Land to Cashe's Ledge and Cape Sable. The vicinity of Block Island has frequently remained a
favorite fishing-ground throughout the summer, mackerel of extraordinary size and superior quality
having been taken there during this entire period. George's Bank has also been a more or less
favorite locality at the same season, and, like Block Island, has been quite celebrated for the excel-
lent quality of its fish. Owing, however, to the prevalence of exceedingly strong tides on this
bank, and to the fact that stormy weather is usually of frequent occurrence in the fall, mackerel
fi.shing is not generally carried on there after the middle of September. As the loss of seine boats,
THE MEXUADEX FISHINGGR0U2sDS. 77
aud possibly of seines, may result from the vessels being caught out iu a severe gale, the fishermen
are more cautious at the present time about remaining on George's in the fall than they were
formerly, when hooks and lines were the chief appliances of capture.
Mackerel are occasionally found iu abundance on Brown's Bank, situated northeast of Geoige's
Bank, and on the Seal-Island Ground, but their occurrence in great numbers iu these localities
may be regarded as exceptional rather than as the rule. Although the movements and abundance
of mackerel are subject to yearly variations of greater or less magnitude, it can be safely stated
that during the months of June, July, and August, the following localities furnish the most import-
ant mackerel grounds on onr coast : Cashe's Ledge and vicinity, covering an area about sixty or
seventy miles across, and having Cashe's Shoal as a center ; the vicinity of Monhegan Island, from
near Cape Elizabeth to Matinicus Hock, and from close in shore to a distance of forty miles off
shore; and the vicinity of Mount Desert Eock, from the rock to near the main laud, and outward
from it in all directions for distances of twenty to twenty-five miles.
In the fall, after the mackerel have begun their migrations toward the south and west, the
principal localities resorted to by the fishermen ai'e successively as follows: Off Cape Elizabeth,
and about Boon Island, Maine; ofl' Cape Ann, Massachusetts Bay, Barnstable Bay, and off the
outer side of Cape Cod. Fortunately, at this season, the mackerel usually follow the trend of the
shore, and strike into the larger bays which indent the coast line. This permits of the fishery
being carried on with little risk, at a period when severe gales arc of frequent occurrence on the
New England coast, as the vessels are generally within easy reach of safe harbors.
Efforts have been made from time to time to trace the movements of the schools of mackerel
after they have passed Chatham, Cape Cod, the last locality where they are generally caught iu
the fall, but always without success. The failure of these attempts is chiefly due to two causes,
namely : first, the almost steady prevalence at that season of unfavorable weather for fishing oper-
ations; and, second, the disinclination of the fishermen, at the close of the season, to push with
their accustomed vigor an enterprise which appears to promise but slight money returns at the
most, and exposes them to great personal risk.
THE MENHADEN GROUNDS.
The menhaden fishing-grounds of the eastern coast of the United States extend at the present
time (1883) from Chesapeake Bay to and including Long Island Sound, and, in some seasons, also
include a portion of Vineyard Sound, on the southern coast of Massachusetts. They are of limited
width, the fishery being rarely carried on at greater distances from laud than ten to fifteen miles.
Their total area may be reckoned, iu round numbers, at about 5,350 square geographical miles,
which can be itemized as follows : Long Island Sound and the vicinity of Block Island, 1,200
square miles; off the south side of Long Island, from Moutank Point to Sandy Hook, with an
average width of fifteen miles, 1,575 square miles ; off the Kew Jersey coast, from Sandy Hook to
Cape May, 1,575 square miles; Delaware Bay, 150 square miles; Cape Henlopen to Cape Charles,
with an average width of about two miles, 250 square miles ;i Chesapeake Bay, from the capes to
Tangier Sound, COO square miles.
Formerly the menhaden fishery was cUrried on along a much greater range of coast, extending
from North Carolina to Mount Desert, Maine. Prior to 1879 menhaden occurred in great abund-
ance in the Gulf of Maine, and the bays and estuaries connected with it, from May to October, and
the waters of that region often seemed literally alive with the numerous large schools, many of
'Along this stretch of coast fishing for menhaden is carried on only to a limited extent, chiefly by means of seines
set from the beaches, and the area of the grounds is, therefore, very small considering their great length.
78 FISHDfG-GEOUIsDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
wbicli ascended tbe i-ivers to the limit of salt water. Before tlie introduction of purse .seines tliey
were extensively captured in gill-nets, for use as bait by tbe cod and mackerel tisbermen, and a
large proportion of the fisb taken to sui)ply tbe factories of menhaden oil and fertilizers, during the
early period of that industry, were obtained in the same manner. In the summer of 1879, from
some unexplained cause, but presumably from the prevalence of lower average temperatures in the
surface waters, tbe menhaden failed to make their appearance north of Cape Cod, and since then
they have never returned to their former grounds .in the Gulf of Maine.
Mr. R. Edward Earll, who investigated the coast fisheries of the southern Atlantic States in
1880, states that for several years previous to 187S menhaden fishing was carried on to a limited
extent in Core Sound and about Ocracoke Inlet, on the coast of North Carolina. At Oregon Inlet
some menhaden fishing was also done for two or three years, steamers having been employed for
the purpose during one season. A purse seine was set once from Charleston, South Carolina, but
it was so badly cnt by the sharks that it was never tried again.
Previous to 1878 the above mentioned stations on the coast of North Carolina marked the
southern limit of the menhaden fishing-grounds, but as the catches there proved unremunerative,
the fishery was discontinued, and since that time Chesapeake Bay has been the most southern
region where fishing is conducted. In this locality, according to Mr. Earll, fishing begins in May
and continues until October ; but tbe fishery is neither so important nor profitable as it is fiirther
north, both because of the less abundance of fish and their i)oorer quality as compared with those
taken about Long Island and off the New Jersey coast.
As to the times of arrival and departure of the schools of menhaden in tbe several fishing-
grounds, Mr. G. Brown Goode says : "Tbe first schools appear in Chesapeake Bay in IMarcb and
April, on the coast of New Jersey in April and early May, and on the south coast of New England
in late April and May ; off Cape Ann about the middle of May, and in the Gulf of Maine about the
latter part of. May and the first of June. Returning, they leave Maine in late September and
October, Massachusetts in October, November, and December, Long Island Sound and vicinity
in November and December, and Cape Hatteras in January."
Oft" the coast of New Jersey and tbe southern side of Long Island, fishing usually begins in
April, and by the last of that mouth or early in May it is carried on along the entire coast of Long
Island, although it sometimes happens that no fish are taken in this region until after the first of
May. The schools generally " play " in near the coast, where the fishing steamers lie in wait for
them usually at no great distance from tbe shores ; and whenever tbe schools rise to the surface
they are quickly surrounded by tbe purse seines. During May the fish move around Montauk
Point and into Long Island Sound, which, during the remainder of the season, becomes the most
important fishing-ground for this species on tbe coast. There are periods of greater or less dura-
tion, however, during which the menhaden show little or no inclination to come to tbe surface. At
such times the steamers often cruise on other grounds, going to the New Jersey coast, or even as
far as Delaware Bay. When the schools are moving south in the fall, the steamers frequently fol-
low them as far as the Delaware, but as the factories are mostly located on Long Island Sound,
these long cruises are only made when the scarcity of fish nearer home renders them absolutely
necessary in order to obtain supplies. Large catches of menhaden have seldom been made at a
greater distance from the land than ten miles, and, as a rule, tbe best fishing has been obtained
within two to five miles of the land.
'This statement of the arrival and departure of nienliaden, extracted from "A History of the Menhaden," by G.
Brown Goode, 1877, p. 39, applies to the condition of the fishery prior to 1878, since which time, as above described,
these fisli have not visited the coast of Maine.
B.— THE SEA FISHING-GROUNDS OF THE PACIFIC COAST
OF THE UNITED STATES. FEOM THE STRAITS OF
FUCA TO LOWER CALIFORNIA.
By David S. Joedan.
14. THE PACIFIC COAST FEOM THE STEAITS OF FUCA TO LOWER CALIFORNIA.
Except the salmon fisheries of the Sacramento and the Columbia, and the ocean fisheries in
the immediate neighborhood of San Francisco, the fisheries of the Pacific coast exist only as
pos.sibilities. For the most part only .shore- fishing on the smallest scale is done, and no attempt
is made to discover offshore banks, or to develop them when discovered. The present report
can, therefore, only discuss the places where fishing is now actually carried on.
South of Monterey the entire coast is made up of alternations of rocky headlands (riucones),
usually of sandstone, with long curves of sandy beaches, and is broken by occasional large and
small bays (esteros and lagunas). The immediate neighborhood of the shore has almost always
a sandy bottom, and is not very rich in either animal or vegetable life. Farther out, at varying
distances, is a belt of rocky bottom, thickly covered with the great kelp {Macrocystis pijrifera),
and beyond this there are occasional rocky reefs, usually continuous with the rincones on the
shore and with the rocky islands, which have the same origin.
About these headlands and on the reefs some still-fishing is done, mainly for species of
rockfish (Sebastiehthys), and occasionally a gill-net is put down. The best known of these reefs
are about the islands of Santa Catalina and Anacapa, but they doubtless exist around all of the
islands in this region, which are mostly situated at a distance of about twenty miles from the shore.
The middle parts of the channels between are, in summer, the resorts of the large migratory fish,
which are caught in considerable numbers by trolling. Along the sandy beaches seining is
practiced, and gill-nets of little depth are set to catch the common shore-fishes (largely surf-fish,
roncadors, and flounders). In the bays of sufficient size seining is largely pursued, especially by
the Chinese. In some of the smaller bays the oil-shark (Galeorhinus) breeds, and is taken by
hook and line. Certain fishes (redfish, whitefish) are also taken in large numbers by still-fishing
along the line of the kelp.
From Monterey to the mouth of the Columbia the coast is quite similar, but it is in general
more rocky, with less sand, and presents an additional feature in the existence of rivers of
considerable volume and more deeply indented bays. In all of these rivers there is a greater or
less run of salmon in the fall, and in those fed by snow water, in the spring also; and in many
these fish are taken for market purposes, in nearly every case by the use of gill-nets. The
number of rocky reefs seems to increase to the northward, and the number of species inhabiting
them is greater, so that both in Monterey Bay and about the Farallone Islands baited trawllines
80 FISniNG-GRODNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
are largely u-setl for taking rockfish. lu the bays seines are extensively used. Trolling and
stilllisliing in the kelp arc little practiced, because the fishes caught in this way are mostly
southern in their range. Between the rocky headland of Point Reyes and the entrance to the
Golden Gate is a long stretch of smooth sandy bottom at a considerable depth. The bottom here
swarms with flounders, and a mode of fishing is pursued analogous to the trawl-net fishing of
the x^tlantic — the fishing of the Paranzella. This mode of fishing is doubtless possible outside
the kelp at many places along the coast, but the markets elsewhere are too small to make it
profitable, excepting on a few small reefs in the neighborhood of the Farallones where rock-cod
abound, and at the mouth of Monterey Bay; and, beyond this stretch of deep water now fished by
the Paranzella, we can hardly say that any definite ofi'-shore fishing-grounds exist south of the
Straits of Juan de Fuca. Off the mouth of the Straits of Fuca, about eight miles northwest of
Cape Flattery, there is an extensive halibut bank, where the Indians take halibut in large
numbers, and which may some time become of importance to the white people.
The channels among the islands in Puget Sound and to the northward are resorted to by
dogfish {Squalus), and the bays at certain seasons swarm with herring. In Alaska many banks
frequented by halibut and cod doubtless exist, but thus far the only ones developed to any
considerable extent are about the Shumagin Islands.
C — THE FISHERY RESOURCES AND FISHING-GROUNDS
OF ALASKA.
Uy Taeleton H. Bean.1
15. THE FISHERY RESOURCES OF ALASKA.
Tbe Torritoiy of Alaska Las seventy-five species of food-fishes, seveiieigbtlis of wbicli are
strictly adapted to the use of mau, the balauce being more suitable for bait. More thau ouehalf
of this Dumber arc widely distributed. IMore than two-thirds of the whole number exist in great
abundance where they occur.
The flat-fishes and flounders (Pleuroneclidw) have representatives on all parts of the coast ;
the number of species is, however, smaller north of Uualashka than is found around the shores of
the Gulf of Alaska and its groups of islands.
The codfishes [Gadidw) are equally divided between Southern and Xorthern Alaska, the
southern species excelling the northern in size ; of these the pollock is one of the best baits
known for cod.
There are thirteen species of sculi»ins [Cotlidw), nearly all of which are important as food,
the scaly sculpins [Ilemilcjndotii.s) being especially good.
Although the number of species of Sebastichthys is much smaller thau on the Californiaii
coast, the five that do occur in the waters of Southern Alaska are all excellent, and two of these
are known from as far north as Kodiak.
The so-called "rock-cod" (species oi Hvxuyrammus) rank with the preceding in good qualitie.<,
and they are extremely abundant, some species reaching as far north as Port Clarence ;
Hexagrammus asper of Steller is found all along the coast from Sitka westward to Attn. These
fishes are generally known to the Eussians and largely to the Aleuts as the " tor-poog"'; one-
species [H. ordiiiatus, Cope) is the "green-fish," so called on account of the green color of its flesh,,
which is nevertheless quite palatable; the green color disappears in the process of cooking: the-
"green-fish" is reiuarkable for another pectiliarity in its smoky brown ova. One of the most
important members of this family of Chiridw is the "striped fish," "yellow-fish," or "Atk;^
mackerel," Flcxiragrammits monopieryyins (Pallas) Gill, which, besides its own intrinsic value as an
edible fish, possesses rare worth as a bait for cod.
The f.imily of Trachiiiidce is represented by one species called "cusk" at the Shumagins,
a fish which was too rare in museums for us to try its table qualities, although it forms an
element in the bait-supply for cod.
'The report of Dr. Bean might, with almost equal propriety, be incliuteU in the sectiou devoted to the methods
of the fisheries, hut since it is in the main a discussion of undeveloped resources it is deemed more fitting to inchule
it in the sectiou devoted to the fishing-grounds.— G. Bnowx Goode.
SEC III G 81
82 FISHING-GKOUNDS OF NOKTH AMEKICA.
There is one species of saud lauuce or "laut" (Ammoclytes personatus) which is extremelj'
abuudant iu most parts of Alaska, aud extends uorth to Poiut Belcher, as we certainly know ;
this lauuce is largely useful in the cod fishery and iu general hook-fishing iu Soutberu Alaska as
well ; its abundance is wonderful.
The pike [Esox hicitis, L.) we have from Slave Lake; it is " couimou iu all the lakes aud pouds
of . . . Northern Alaska, but absent from the rivers. It is caught with seines in summer
and early winter. It is principally used for dog-feed, being of little value for the table.'"
The family Microstomatulai as distributed in Alaska includes the smelts (two species), the
capelin, the sarf-sraelts (two species), and the eulaclion. The smelt, which is most abundant aud
important, resembles the common species of the Atlantic seaboard very closely; it may be, too,
that the second form, which is remarkably slender posteriorly, is merely the spent female of the
first. The distribution of these fish is probably northerly, as the National Museum Las no
examples from any poiut south of Saint Michael's; Steindachner, the describer of Osmerus dentex,
had it from De Gastrie's Bay. We obtained, September C, ISSO, from Eskimo, iu Eschscholtz
Bay, dried smelt which they had prepared for food. The capelin [Mallotus viUosus) is universally
and abundantly present throughout the Territory ; it plays a very important part in the salmon
and cod fishery, forming as it does the principal food of these fishes during a part of the summer.
Youug capelin are extremely abundant north of the Arctic circle, but we have uot seen them in
Southern Alaska ; the luimber annually consumed by cod aud salmon must be enormous. I have
taken forty from the stomach of a single cod on Portlock Bank ; salmon may be seen in pursuit
of capelin even in the brackish waters where small streams fall into the bays aud coves. The
species of Hypomesns, though of small size, form a considerable portion of the food-supply; one of
them is known in southern waters [H. pretiosm) ; the other, instead of spawning in the surf like
its southern congener, runs into fresh -water ponds to perfoi'm this function, aud seems to be
confined to Northern Alaska and Northeastern Siberia. A well-knowu representative of the
family of Microstomatidce is the eulachon or candle-fish [Thaleichihys jmdficus), an inhabitant of
the shores of the whole Gulf of Alaska. The uses and the mode of capture by Indians of surf-
smelts and eulachon are so well explained by Mr. Swan iu the ''Proceedings of the National
Museum,"^ that it is unnecessary to add anything to that portion of the subject. Eulachon have
been salted at Katmai on the peninsula of Aliaska and brought to Saint Paul, Kodiak. Mr. B.
G. Mclntyre, who gave me information concerning this industry, and furnished some examples of
the product, speaks highly of the table qualities of salted eulachon. Unfortunately there is no
harbor at Katmai, else it might become the seat of an important trade in this article.
The whitefishes (Coregonidce) form one of the great staples of food iu Northern Alaska (from
the Yukon northward), replacing the salmon almost entirely iu the extreme uorth. There are
five species of Coregonus, the largest of which, as represented in the collections of the National
Museum, was once considered identical with the common diipciformis^ of the Great Lakes; it is the
fish for which Miluer proposed the name Kennicotti, and is quite distinct from the clupeiformis ;
this is the "Broad Whitefish" of Mr. Dall, which he says: "Is the next in size of the Alaska
'Dall, ia lleport of tlio Coimnissioner of Agricviltuic, 1871 (for 1S70}, 3S7.
-Vol. Ill, pp. 43 ami 257.
^Steiiodus MacVenzii is the species lefeired to by Mr. Dall in the "Report of tl)e Commissioner of Agriculture for
1870,'' page 386, as the "Great Whitefish," concerning which he says: "This enormous whiteiish is the finest of its
tribe, both in size ami flavor. It is foumi iu the rivers most of the year, but is most plentifully obtained and is iu
its best condition about the months of June and July. We have seen them four feet long and vieighing about iifty
pounds. It is distinguished by its long nose and slender form, and is of a silvery white, somewhat darker above.
It is full of spawn from Sejiteniber to .lanuary, when it disappears."
THE FISHERY EESOURCES OF ALASKA. 83
wLitetish, and reaches a weigbt of thirty pounds. It is distiuguished by its broad body, short
head, aud large scales. It is usually very fat aud excellent eating. It abounds in both winter
and summer, spawning in September in the small rivers falling into the Yukon.'" The "Round-
fish" of Mr. Ball's paper is Coregomis qvadrilateralis, Rich. "A long, slender, subcylindrical fish,
not very abundant, but of excellent quality. Thej' are caught occasionallj- throughout the
winter on the Y'uljon, and are distinguished by their attenuated muzzle aud peculiar form." The
" Humpback" of Mr. Dall is related to cliqwiformis, from which it is separated by its arched aud
compressed back. The "whitefish" (Russian Morslcoi cUja) is C. Luurettce, Bean. Mr. Dall says of
the Morsloi ciga: "This is the most abundant and best flavored species of Coregonus in most
localities. It is distinguished by its small scales, fins, tail, and head, aud is of symmetrical
proportions and moderate size. It rarely exceeds three pounds in weight, and is the staple article
of food in winter on the Y''ukon."' Coregonus Lauretta; is the pi'evailing species of the far north;
the writer obtained it in Port Clarence while in company with the United States Coast and
Geodetic Survey Expedition to Alaska, in 1880, and Capt. C. L. Hooper, commanding the
Revenue-Marine steamer Corwin, thus records it from Point Barrow in his report to the
Treasury Department of November 1, 1880 :
" The temperature of the water was 40° F. "We bought from the natives some eider ducks,
which were found to have a strong fishy taste, and some fish resembling shad, but smaller and
very fat; they differ also from the shad in having two double [misprint for dorsal] fins. "We saw
the same species in Kotzebue Sound and at other i)laces within the Arctic circle. They are
called by the natives ' tupook.' I preserved some specimens for the Smithsonian Institution."
The "Nulato whitefish" (Russian ^^^^ulotoski ciga") is evidently what I have called in my
list of Alaskan food-fishes Coregonus Merlii, Giinther, variety. This is a small, thin, bony species,
common near Nulato, on the Yukon, and is rarely more than half a pound in weight. It is of
little use as food, and is luincipally abundant in summer. Captain Hooper forwarded to the
Smithsonian Institution many specimens of this whitefish, which he obtained doubtless in
Kotzebue Sound and elsewhere in the Ai-ctic regions. The grayling or blanket fish concludes
the list of Coregonida: Of this Mr. Dall has written as follows:
"Abundant in the small rapid rivers of Alaska. It is the only fish in the Yukon territory
NAhich will take the hook. It is of moderate value only for table use, and is especially abundant
in spring when the whitefish begin to be scarce."
The greatest fish wealth of Alaska lies in its abundance of fine salmon, so far at least as
shore-fishing is concerned. There are five species of Oncorliynchus : chotiicJia, l-eta, nerlca, Tcisutch,
.and gorbuscha — all readily distinguished one from the other by well-marked characters, except the
first two. Three of them may be at once recognized by a single character even ; gorbuscha, for
example, has much smaller scales than any other species; Idsutcli has a much smaller number of
pyloric CiEca than all the rest; nerM has much the largest number of gill-rakers; chomcha is
the giant of the group, and may well be called the "king salmon." This is the largest and finest
of tiie Alaska salmon, reaching a weight of sixty to ninety pounds. Those weighing eighty
pounds are not uncommon, and others weighing a hundredweight have occasionally been taken.
This fish, or a fish called by the same name, ranges from Sitka to Bering Strait, and is found in
all water-courses from the tide-ways of the Alexander Archipelago to the broad current of the
Yukon. It ascends the latter river for at least twelve hundred miles and perhaps farther. It is
a short and broad fish, with a large head, but comparatively small mouth and fins. It reaches
' Dall, Ioc. eit.
84 FISHING-GEOUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
the moutli of the Yukou about the middle of Juue, and runs for six weeks. It ascends the river
slowly, reaching Fort Derabin (about three hundred and sixty miles above the mouth of the river)
about the lirst week in July, and Fort Yukou (about one thousand miles above the mouth) about
the middle of July. It is dried for winter use by the natives. All dry fish is called nlatU by the
Russians. The chowichee iikali are made by cutting the fish in three slices after removing the
head, leaving the backbone in the middle slice, and aM three connected by the tail. Two or three
dry chowichee ukali will weigh at least fifty pounds. One of them is accounted sutEcieut for a
day's food for six men or dogs. They cost, ft'om the natives upon the Yukon, one leaf of tobacco
each, or, when dry, five to eight musket-balls per ukali. The more northern the ground where
the fish are taken, the finer their flavor, and the chowichee of the Yukon were held in such
esteem that several hogsheads were annually salted for the emperor's table by the Russians."
It is now believed that the tamed "chowichee" and the "quiunat" salmon known to
fish-cnlturists and anglers are one and the same species. The maximum size of this '• king
salmon" is so great as to be almost incredible, and yet there is no doubt that individuals weighing
one hundred pounds have sometimes been taken. Mr. B. G. Mclntyre, at Saint Paul, Kodiak,
had one that was smoked by Capt. James Wilson at Fort Kenai in 1879, which weighed sixty-six
pounds in its cured state ; this must have weighed fully ninety pounds in the fresh condition.
Capt. H. R. Bowen states that he brought one down from Kassilov that weighed eighty-four
pounds after smoking, with head, fins, entrails, and half of the backbone removed, ^h: Thomas
Devine told me that a silver salmon five feet long was brought to Pirate Cove, Shumagius, in 1877;
this must have been 0. chouicJia. Rufus Bordukofsky claims that he has seen a chowichee
salmon seven feet long at Iliuliuk, Unalashka. This seems a little too long, but I mention it as
an additional confirmation of the enormous proportions reached by the species. I have been
informed by Capt. E. P. Herendeen and Capt. H. R. Bo\ven, both of whom have caught the "king
salmon," that they do not run in schools, but two or three together, keeping very close to the
banks, perhaps to escape from the beluga. Of Msutch and l-eta (hoikoh) Mr. Dall says :
"These two species have the same range as the king salmon, and are dried for food in the
same way. They are, however, much more common, much smaller, and are held in less esteem.
They form the bulk of the better class of salmon in all the rivers of Alaska. They arrive later
than the king salmon, remain longer, and travel more rapidly. They reach Fort Derabin upon
the Yukon about the tenth of July, and Fort Yukon early in August. They weigh from ten
to thirty pounds, and dry, after cleaning and removing the backbone, to about two or three
pounds. They are more slender than the king salmon, and the males are furnished in the
breeding season with a formidable array of recurved teeth, so that the natives are accustomed
to knock them on the head with a club before attempting to remove them from the nets."
I noticed that the Aleuts almost invariably broke the skull of salmon, which fhey cjirricd
in .bidarkas, near its junction with the vertebrae; this was done to kill them quickly and
prevent their struggling after being stowed away. The " redfish " (0. nerlca) and the " dog fish"
(0. gorhuscJia), Mr. Dall observes, " are principally valued for use as dog-feed. They are placed
in the order of their quality as articles of food. . . . They are . . . exceedingly connnon,
of small size, and iippcar later than the previously mentioned varieties. The redfish, as its name
denotes, is partly of the most brilliant scarlet, but its flesh is not so red as that of the king
salmon or the hoikoh (0. l-eta). They arrive in July and disappear late in August." This
estimate of the redfish agrees perfectly with the opinion of Captain Bowen, who thinks it is the
' Dall, in Keport of Commissioner of Agriculture for 1870, pp. 362 and 383.
FiahiTV fiiiliistric<n nf tlio Fnilocl States, Si;ct. III.
PLATE 1
r)
U!
■3
a
C3
a
1 ^
a
3
w
THE FISHEEY EESOUECES OF ALASKA. 85
poorest saluion salted, though it sells best ou accoiiut of its red color. For my own part I think
the fresh gorlusclia equal to any other salmon, but I prefer the chowichee bellies among the salt
fish. There is nothing on the west coast which exactly corresponds with the Maine salmon. Salmo
Gainhierii is most like it in general ai)pearauce, and sometimes approaches it in size, but its habits
are different, since it is found filled with ripe ova in June. We have this species from Sitka and
Kodiak. It is very diflicult to distinguish Gairdner's trout from the " rainbow trout" (8. irideus),
so well known in the McCloud River, the characters which are supposed to separate them being
unimportant. I found at Sitka one young trout which may be called irideus or Gairdnerii
indilTereutly, and it will puzzle any one to tell which it really is. Clark's trout {8almo purpuratuis)
is very abundant in Soathern Alaska, aud must be rare to the northward. Dall says that it is
not fouud north of Aliaska Peninsula. Captain Hooper had it from Northern Alaska, but the
e.^act locality is not stated. This beautiful species is not known to reach the great size in
Alaska that is claimed for occasional individuals in the Columbia River, but it is very abundant
aud an excellent food-lish. \Ve ibnnd it leediug on sticklebacks {Gastcrostcus microcephalus,
Girard) in Piseco Lake at Sitka. The species known in California as the "Dolly Varden" trout
is everywhere jiresent in Alaska, reaching as much as fifteen pounds in weight, and literally
swarming in the streams aud adjacent tidal waters. The young of this trout were found as far
north as Cape Lisburne, and the species is very abundant in Northeastern Siberia. While it
remains in the streams it is generally dark coloied, but after a sojourn in the sea ujjon re-entering
the brooks and rivers it quickly shows its beautiful red spots. We found that individuals taken
fi'om the salt water showed no trace of red spots, but immediately assumed them upon being
immersed in spring water. This difference of color, varying with the place of residence, has led
to the supposition that they rei)resent two species, the large silvery ones in the coves and bays
being called salmon ti'out while the smaller inland form is known as brook trout. There is good
evidence of the occurrence of one species of Oiicorhynchvs {0. (jorhvscha), the little humpback
salmon, in Colville River. Captain Hooper reports that " the salmon is the only variety of fish
in the Arctic that is of any value. Although smaller than the salmon caught farther south, they
are of fine flavor. They are quite plentiful, and the coast natives cure large quantities of them
by smoking aud drying for winter use.'" Capt. E. E. Smith, who was the Corwiu's ice pilot
ou her cruise of 1880, iu 1875 put up in salt two barrels of little gorhuseha which he bought at the
mouth of Colville River.
The sole representative of the herring family of much importance as a source of food is the
Chipea mirabiUs of Girard, the common sea-herring of the Pacific coast. Widely distributed and
extremely abundant, invaluable as bait and delicious on account of its fatness, it deserves a high
rank among the staples of Alaskan waters. There are no finer herring anywhere than may be
seined at Iliuliuk aud sometimes near Saint Paul. They are as plentiful as menhaden once
were iu Pecouic Bay, so plentiful that a lazy Indian with a stick armed with jioinled nails can
soon impale a canoe load ; vessels have sailed for hours through shoals of them which seemed
unending; acres of grass are sometimes covered with their eggs when a high tide takes them far
ashore and the receding waters suddenly leave them aground. Natives are very prompt to profit
by such accidents. When we came into Chugachik Bay, in Cook's Inlet, we found a sand spit
strewn with recently stranded herring and their wasted eggs, while here and there were groups
of ])oles selected from driftwood on which the fish had been hung up to dry after being split aud
having the head of one passed through the gills and mouth of another. The spawn clinging to
blades of grass after a little sun-drying had a rather pleasant, slightly salt taste.
'Ri'port of ornise of Corwin. November 1, 1880 ClSSl), l). GS.
86 F1SUI>'GGE0UNDS OF KOllTH AMERICA.
The sucker family (Catostomidcc) Iia-s but a single species so far as known, and that is
apparently identical with the long-nosed sucker of the Great Lakes and the Upper Mississipj)!.
This fish is abundant iu the Yukon and other large rivers in Northern Ahiska. It is of
moderately large size, reaching five pounds in weight. It is generally of a reddish color. The
body is so full of bones that it is unfit for food, but the heads, when boiled with the I'oe, make a
very palatable soup. These fish are filled with spawn in April, a period when other fish appear
to be out of season.'
There is one lamprey known to us from Alaska, the Ammocates aureus of Bean. This one is
extremely abundant in the Yukon, according to Mr. L. M. Turner, and is used for food. Mi:
Turner's specimen was taken at Anvik (latitude 63 north, longitude ICO west from Greenwich).
16. A REVIEW OF THE ALASKAN FISHING-GROUNDS BY DISTRICTS.
1 have been thus explicit in naming the food-fishes of the Territory and tracing their
distribution, in order that their importance as a means of subsistence for the inhabitants may be
fully appreciated. All parts of the coast of Alaska are abundantly supplied with fish, and every
male native of suitable age is to be considered a fisherman — one who employs the best expedients
within his reach for the capture of fish, because his very life depends in great measure on that
supply. Even the women and children help to increase the store for winter, tugging away
bravelj' at great strings of salmon or other species caught in the seines by the men. Whenever
there is any pulling of this kind to do, you may see them skirting along the shore, half floating
the burden near the water's edge. The total number of fishermen estimated for Alaska in Ceusu.'^
Bulletin No. 176 is fifty-six hundred and fifty, which is certainly not too high. According
to Petroflf's preliminary report on the population of that Territoiy, there are about thirty
thousand inhabitants, distributed as will be seen iu the following table:
POPULATION OF ALASKA.
[From Pctroff.]
Southeastern Alaska 5, 517
Estimate of Prince William Sound 500
Kenai Mission or Cook's Inlet district 984
Interior division ~, 226
Kadiak Palish 2,t;0G
Belkofsky Parish 669
Unalashka Parish 1,392
Bristol Bay division 4, 340
Prihylov Islands 390
Saint Lawrence Island (estimated) 400
Xuuivak Island (estimated) 500
Kuskoqnim division 3, G54
Yukon d.dta 2,006
Uphoon mouth to Anvik 1,345
Coast of Norton Sound from Saint Michael's upward and as far as Sledge Island 633
King's Island t,) Point Barrow 2,990
30, 152
Dai.i,, in Report of Conimissionor of Agriculture for 1870, p. 388.
THE ALASKAN FISHING-GEOUNDS. 87
Leaving out the interior division, and supposing tliat one-fiftli of tlie whole population are
i.dult male fishermen, we shall have about the number estimated in the Census Bulletin. Bearing
ju mind the great abundance of fish everywhere, and the wasteful habits of a people who neither
profit by the hint of prosperity nor tate warning from the kick of adversity, we may form some
idea of the millions upon millions of fish annually taken in Alaska. There are not fewer than
twenty-eight thousand people in the Territory who live largely upon fish, fresh during half of the
year or less, and in the form of ulali during the balance of the year. lu the absence of records
to show the amounts actually put up for winter use, we must depend upon estimates. Mr.
William eT. Fisher, of Saint Paul, Kodiak, has very carefully inquired iuto the matter, taking
counsel with parties who are in the business of preparing nlcali for consumption, and observing
the quantities put up by natives for their own use. Mr. Fisher has given us the following result
of his investigation :
"The annual supply of dried salmon {iilali) put up by a native family, consisting of two
adults and two children, is estimated at fifteen hundred fish, averaging about five pounds
each before being dried, and, when cured, averaging about one-half pound each. The Creoles
(native whites), in addition to the above, put up about six barrels of salt fish for winter
consumption. These stores are not touched until the beginning of November, when, owing to
inclemency of the Meather, the catching of fresh fi^h has to be suspended. By the first of May,
when the weather permits fishing again, these stores are generally exhausted. The dried fish or
iilaU is used to a great extent in lien of bread. In addition to the above supplies, each family
adds about one-half barrel of salmon spawn, more or less, to their winter stores."
I take this estimate of the quantity of fish consumed on the island of Kodiak as the basis ol
a calculation for the whole Territory, because the supply, as shown on previous pages of this
account, is ample on all portions of the coast; Mr. Fisher's statement, moreover, agrees with all
the information we have concerning the region. On the above basis each one of the population
will consume at least seven hundred and fifty fish annually, the supply of «/.«/« lasting only six
months and being replaced by fresh fish during the rest of the year. At the low average weight
of five pounds we have the equivalent of thirty-seven hundred and fifty pounds of fresh fish per
year for each person, and twenty-eight thousand people at the sail e rate will eat one hundred
and five million pounds of fish. The first cost of fish is about one-half cent per pound, so that
the yearly supply of the Territory represents five hundred and twenty-five thousand dollars.
We will now consider the different divisions adopted by Mr. Petroff, giving an account of
the number of fishermen, the kinds of fish, and the modes of capture and preservation.
SOUTHEASTERN ALASKA.
There are at least as many as eleven hundred adult ladiau fishermen iu this division, who
devote themselves wholly or in large part to the business of fishing for a livelihood while the
season lasts. Our owu observations began at Sitka, continuing there from May 28 to June 16,
1880. During this time the fishes most frequently seen in canoes and offered for sale were the
halibut, several species of rock-fish, sea trout or bass, cultus cod, common cod, Gairdner's trout,
red-spotted trout, Clark's trout, "hoikoh" salmon, and "keezich" salmon. In hook-fishing, which
is the common method, sand launce and herring are generally used for bait. At Sitka abaloucs
are abundant and are eaten raw by Indians. Some Chinamen, belonging to the " Jamestown,'' were
drying large quantities of them for export to China. Delicious clams (a species of Saxidomus)
are extremely plentiful, and form an important part of the Indian diet. The Indian village at
Sitka for our purposes may be taken as the type of such villages throughout the region under
88 PISniXG-GEOUNDS or north AMERICA.
discussion. Tbe solid lug-houses here are built couveuieut to the water's edge. Betwecu the
houses and the water may be seen the dug-out canoes and the fish-drying frames; here and there
are hung the bark fishing-lines for halibut furnished with their clumsy but effective hooks. Some
very good illustrations of the Sitka halibut hooks, furnished by Commander Beardslee, U. S. N.,
appear in Forest and Stream, of 1879. The hook consists essentially of two pieces of wood
fastened together at one end with stri^js of si)ruce roots so as to form an acute angle with
each other, the longer arm of the angle being armed with a bent, pointed piece of iron ; the wood
is generally carved so as to represent some animal whose co-operation thus secured will insure
successful fishing. The bait (usually herring) is tied on so as to cover not only the hook but also
the woodcu shaft in which the hook is fastened ; halibut will gulp down the bait as long as it
hists, opening their jaws wider and wider; the short arm of the hook, being so fixed as to leave
only a narrow space between it and the iron point, will admit of the motion necessary to fasten the
fish, but prevents its escape. A halibut thus held with its mouth wide open will soon be drowned,
and can easily bo taken into a canoe. This Indian style of halibut hook is much more effective
than the common halibut hook of civilization. A very common method of fishing for halibut at Sitka
is by the use of set-lines, each provided with one hook, a stone sinker, an inflated stomach of seal
for a buoy, with a small flag or signal attached to it so as to show when a fish is hooked. It is
usual to see these lines set in ten to twenty fathoms of water off' the numerous inlets of Sitka
Bay. Salmon are caught by trolling with herring bait, by seining, and by spearing. Edgecumbe
trout (Ah shut of the Sitkas), Salmo Gairdnerii Rich., were taken by the spear on their way out (!)
from Lake Edgecumbe to the sea in June. Herring are caught in great quantities by impaling
them on pointed nails fastened into a long, thin strip of wood. The process of collecting herring
eggs, bj' receiving them on spruce boughs, is too well known to need description here. The
prevailing fish on the drying-frames at Sitka was halibut. This was cut in strips and dried
partly in the open air and i^artly by smoking in the dwelling-houses. The fire is made in the
center of the space inclosed by the walls, there being no floor covering this portion, and the
suioke escapes through a wide opening in the roof. A frame of poles supports the strii)S of fish
to be smoked. Very little fire and a great deal of smoke are the requirements. Besides fish, it
is common to see viscera and other portions of j»orpoises hanging on the poles. The price of fresh
fish at Sitka is usually about one-half cent per pound. Halibut ranged from twenty to seventy-
five pounds in weight during our stay ; we were told, however, by Mr. Whitford, that he has seen
two caught in the harbor, one weighing two hundred and fifty-six and the other two hundred and
sixty pounds.
I am indebted to Mr. George Hamilton, of Chacon, for the following information about halibut
at Klawack :
Their average size is about fifty pounds; they are not brought in ])lentifully from November
to March, but tliey are abundant during the rest of the year; Indians do not fish for them much
ill the winter; they are caught with the Sitka style of hook with kelp or bark lines, or sometimes
eastern cod and halibut lines. Squid bait {Octo2Jn.i) is iireferred. The fishing is done in from ten
to twenty fathoms of water. For the caunery, ludians go off in the afternoon and bring in the
fish on the following morning. They will average eight or ten halibut to a canoe, having in
it two persons who use not more than three or four hooks. The price at Klawack in 1878 was
one-half cent per pound, which, unnecessarily and through mistake, was increased in 1879 to one
and one-half cents. The amount canned in 1878 was two hundred or three hundred cases in two-
pound cans, there being two dozen cans in a case. These Avere shipped to Sisson, Wallace & Co.,
San Francisco. Mr. Hamilton has seen more halibut in the vicinitv of "Warren Island than
Fishery Induslries of the Uuilcil States, Sect. Iir.
PLATE 2.
" a
.Sa
^ «
o a
30
'I I ; '
v\M ' nth
4
M
On
a
S -^
O be
^ I
THE ALASKAN FISHING-GEOUXDS. 89
aiiywlicre else. He saw fiftecu Indians fisliiiig there, and between one bundled and one Iiundred
and fifty baUbut of small size lying on the beneb. The women were splitting tbem to dry.
In tbis region of Soutbeastern Alaska arc two salmon canning estabbsbments — one at Klawack,
and tbe otber at Old Sitka or Turner's Point. In 1879 tbe Klawack cannery was said to bave
employed one bundred and sixty Indians and twentj- wbites. Of tbe Indians, tbirty were women,
five or six boys of eigbt to twelve years, and tbe rest men. In 1878 tbe wages for Indian men
were one dollar, and for woman fifty cents per day. In 1870 tbe men received one dollar and
twenty-five cents and tbe women seventj'-five cents per day, altbongb it is claimed tbei'e was no
need of increasing tbe pay. Tbe wages of tbe wbite men ranged from twenty dollars to fifty
dollars per niontb. Tbe season lasts about two montbs bere. I suppose tbe capacity of tbe
cannery is about tbe same as of tbe Old Sitka one, but tbere are no returns to refer to. Tbe Old
Sitka establisbment is situated near tbe moutb of Sitka Eiver; it was not in operation in 1S80, but
in 1879 it shipped seven thousand cases, of four dozen one-pound cans each, to the Cutting Packing-
Company of. San Francisco. Tbe boxes in which these cans are shipped are sent in shooks from
Portland. Tbe cans are made on tbe spot in a separate building. Tbe high price for tin and
solder was given as a reason for tbe inactivity of 1880. The salmon are seined by Indians, the
seines being purchased by them from the cannery owners. Tbe processes employed at Klawack
and Turner's Point are essentially tbe same as in tbe Columbia Eiver canneries. Tbe Old Sitka
establishment, either in 1878 or 1870, put np two hundred cases of halibut, each containing four
dozen one-pound cans.
The eulachon, which we bave from tbe Stickene Eiver, Wrangell, Sitka, and Cbilkat Eiver,
is caught in tbe same way and used for the same purposes, as described by Mr. Swan in bis paper,
in tbe Proceedings of the United States National Museum, vol. 3. The once famous Deep
Lake salmon fishery at tbe Eedoubt on Baranoff Island, which in 18G8 secured two thousand
barrels, is now reaping tbe results of overfishing. A description of the fishery by ]\Ir. Dall is
given in the Eeport of tbe Commissioner of Agriculture for 1870, page 385.
This account may be closed with tbe following list of the principal food-fishes of Soutbeastern
Alaska :
1. Pleuronectes stellatus. • 18. Ophiodon elongatus.
2. Lepidopsetta biliueata. 19. Anoplopoma fimbria.
3. Limanda aspera. 20. Bathymaster signatus.
4. Hippoglossoides elassodon. 21. Ammodytes personatus.
5. Hippoglossus vulgaris. 22. " alascanus.
<5. Pollachius cbalcogrammus. 23. Mallotus villosus.
7. Gadus morrhua. 24. Hypomesus pretiosus.
8. Microgadus proximus. 25. Thaleichtbys pacificus.
9. Hemilepidotus trachurus. 26. Salveliuus malraa.
10. Hemilepidotus Jordanii. ' 27. Salmo purpuratus.
11. Sebasticbthys maliger. 28. " Gairdnerii.
12. " caurinus. 29. " irideus (probably).
13. " nrber. 30. Oncorhyncbus chouicha.
14. " melanops. ("Black bass," 31. " keta.
Sitka.) 32. " nerka.
15. Hexagrammus asper. 33. " kisutch.
16. " superciliosus. 34. " gorbuscha.
17. " decagrammus. 35. Clupea mirabilis.
90 nSHIJSTG-GEOUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
PRINCE WILLIAM SOUND DIVISION.
According to Mr. PetroIT's estimate, there are five hundred Indians in this division, and
among them, if we continue our usual proportion, there are about one hundred adult male
fishermen. We have no information about the fishes or the methods of fishing, but it is safe
to say that the region closely resembles the preceding one just described. They certainly have
flatfishes, flounders, halibut, cod, tom-cod, sculpins, launce, herring, and all the species of salmon,
and doubtless manj^ more ; hair seal, too, are sure to be found just as they are in the inlet.
KENAI OR cook's INLET DISTRICT.
The number of adult male fishermen in this division is near two hundred in a total
population of nine hundred and eighty-four. The most important fishes, as will be seen from
the accompanying list, are halibut, cod, scaled sculpins, launce, capelin, eulachon, trout, salmon,
and herring. The native methods of capture are essentially like those of Southeastern Alaska.
This region is the field of two salmon fisheries operated by Capt. James Wilson, for the Alaska
Commercial Company, and by Capt. n. E. Bowen, for the Western Fur and Trading Company.
Mr. William J. Fisher, United States Coast Survey tidal observer at Saint Paul, Kodiak, has
kindly obtained from these gentlemen most of the inforuuition we possess about those fisheries.
Writing of the " king salmon," Mr. Fisher says:
" The Indians living near these two rivers catch only very small numbers of the fish, partly
owing to their very imperfect implements used for the purpose. The fish being too large they
cannot use their spears efl"ectually. Their usual and most efiicient mode of capture is as follows:
A stage is erected in the river which an Indian mounts, holding a large wicker basket with an
aperture of about five feet square, in the river, patiently waiting, sometimes for weary hours,
before a salmon is so foolish as to enter the basket, while many hundred will go past, over, or
under the basket, ignoring the invitation to enter. The natives smoke and dry their catch, and
when they do sell any they charge at the rate of ten cents per fish."
Mr. Fisher gives the following notes on the " chowichee " or " king salmon" (0. chouieha):
"They are found in the inlet from May 20 to August 20, being more abundant during small
tides; they are only one fifth as plentiful as the silver salmon (0. Jcisutvh), and one-third as
abundant as red salmon {(). nerla); they reach a maximum length of six feet and a weight of forty
pounds ; they appear regularly on the 20th of May, running in pairs and not in schools, following
the shore closely to avoid the beluga; they refuse to take the hook at all times ; they prey upon
eulachon and sticklebacks, not consumin'g very much; they are caught by the whites in weirs and
nets; the nets are (of) eight and one-half inch mesh, twelve feet deep, and one hundred and twentj"
feet long, and are used during the entire season ; the average daily catch is about one hundred
fish; they are caught more plentifully from (the) first (of the ebb) to half-ebb tide; the natives
dry them for winter use, while the whites salt them for shipment to San Francisco; small
quantities are smoked; about three hundred barrels were salted in the season of 1880; one
vessel, emidoying from five to eight men, is engaged in the fishery."
'•The run of salmon in 1880 at Keuai was very light until July 20. Trior to that date the fish
were running largely at Tyonik, about seventy miles up Cook's Inlet from Kenai, and also up
the Sutchitna (Sushetno) River at the head of the inlet. These fish have seldom been known
to go up the latter river during past years, and then only in very small numbers. The Sutchitna
(Sushetno) River Indians, who, owing to scarcity of fish heretofore in their river, always bought
their winter supply of smoked and diied fish from the natives of Tyonik, caught such an
abundant supply in 1880 as to enable them to sell to their former purveyors."
THE ALASKAN" FISHIXG GROUNDS. 91
On the 4th of July, ISSO, we saw two si^ecies of saluiou — ''redtish" or "krasiioi riba
(0. 7icrl{a) aud "hoikoh" (0. Iceta") — banging on the drying-frames at Alexandrovsk iu great
numbers. A lagoon near the village, which receives a small but rai)id stream, is well supplied
with fish. In addition to the ordinary frame of poles on which the spMt and gashed salmon are
hung, the natives frequently fasten small trees in the ground, cut off the limbs to a suitable
length, aud cover them with the blood-red fruits of their labors, making them a kind of Christmas
tree of substantials. The little houses in which dried fish are stored for winter are set on logs
placed endwise to insure protection from dogs. Cod and halibut are reported to be present here
the year round. The halibut-line of these people is made of the stem of bull kelp, which grows
here to an immense size. One of the plants measured aboard the "Yukon" had a stem sixty-seven
and one-half feet long, with eighty-six fronds, two of which measured twenty-five and thirty five
feet, respectively. On this kelp line two hooks are fastened at the ends of a short bar on short
snoods. The stone sinker is fastened to the middle of the bar by a snood longer than those
holding the hooks. The bidarkas are made of the skins of hair seal. At the time of our visit
seven skins of seaotter recently killed were stretched on drying frames. The sea-otter are said
to feed largely on chitons and clams. The abundance of fine clams near Alexandrovsk makes it
a good otter ground. From Alexandrovsk due northward is a settlement called Seldovin,
consisting of sixty-eight Kodiak natives and Creoles, who are devoted to sea-otter hunting. On
the opposite side of Chugachik Gulf, near Anchor Point, is the village of Laida, containing
seventy-eight Kenai people, who are also sea-otter hunters with indiflferent success. Mr. Petrofl
gives a graphic account of the Kenai people, from which I extract the following remarks relating
to the fishing :
"These people build birch-bark canoes with which to navigate the numerous swift and
brawling rivers iu their Territory, and they go down to the seaboard, buy skin canoes of the
Kodiak ])attern, and navigate to some extent on salt water, iu quest of fish, in this manner. In
this connection we wish to call attention to the fact that these people do not make, in any form
whatever, wooden canoes ; for that matter the explorer will find no wooden canoes north of Mount
Saint Elias in this whole region. They are expert fishermen, and they certainly enjoy an
abundance of piscatorial food, salmon of fine size and quality running up their rivers, trout iu
the thousand and one lakes of their country, finding them there all through the winter, fishing
through the ice; and with a certain degree of contempt for the salt water, which is the
treasure-trove and life trust of the Kodiaker and the Aleutian, they spend no time there unless
the steamboat-puffing of an approaching school of white whales attracts their cupidity and
supplies them with a rare feast. These animals (the 'beluga') are found here running up some of
their rivers quite a distance.'"
THE KASSILOV SALilON FISHERY.
The Kassilov fishery, owned by the Western Fur aud Trading Company of San Francisco,
and operated by Capt. H. R. Bowen, is located at the mouth of Kassilov River, Cook's Inlet. It
was established iu 1S79. The gill-nets are twenty-four f\ithoms long, two fathoms deep, with a
mesh of eight and one half inches, and cost ten dollars each. They are made of Barber's
shoe-thread. Gill-nets are used for salmon also. Two buildings, valued at two hundred and iifty
dollars, are in use. There are three sixteen-foot dories. Four natives of Alaska are employed.
The fishery .is active from May 20 to September 1. Tide water makes up the river about seven
miles ; there are no obstructions except rapids. Two weirs are constructed here ; the leaders are
' Prcliuiiiiary Report ou Census of Alasta, 18i~l, p. 36.
92
FISHIXG-GEOU>fDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
seventy-fivo feet loug ; tbe weirs or hearts are fifteen feet square, and are made of stakes and
brush; they are kept down four mouths, beginning in June; "king" (0. chouiclia), "silver"
(0. Idsutch), and "red salmon" (0. ncrVa) are taken in them. Captain Bowen says he is putting
up the "king salmon" in full barrels with Liverpool salt. The first lot sent down brought ten
dollars per barrel; the second lot, seveu dollars. The Hcsh is very red when they first come;
after they have been some time in the river the skin becomes red and the flesh light-colored.
The "redfiah" or "red salmon" sell for seven dollars in two half barrels or six dollars in full
barrels. The " silver salmon " accompanies the red, is larger and every way superior, but is not
nearly so plentiful. Captain Bowen put up fifty barrels of them last fall (1879) and says he could
easily salt eight hundred barrels. These fish are sent to San Francisco by two schooners in August
and October. Captain Bowen salts salmon bellies, also, in small packages. Bellies are worth
twelve dollars by the barrel. Barrels, half-bai-rels, quarters, and kits are sent in shooks from San
Francisco. They are made of Portland spruce. The half-barrel complete costs one dollar and
seven cents, the barrel one dollar and thirty nine cents for the stock alone. Barrel hoops cost
twenty-four dollars per thousand.
Products of the Kassilov Salmon fishery, 1880.
Months.
KinQ of salmon.
Barrels.
K umber of Weight in
flsh. pounds.
July -
100
185
8. 000 320, 000
18, 500 185, 000
KENAI SALMON FISHERY.
The Alaska Commercial Company has established on Kenai River a fishery, which is
managed by Capt. James AViLsou, one of the company's traders. For tbe information concerning
this fishery I am indebted to Jlr. B. G. Mclutyre, an agent of tbe Alaska Commercial Company.
Salmon were first salted by this company in 1878, and bellies were first salted by them in
1879. The "Saint George," a trading schooner of one hundred and twenty tons, takes the barrels
of salmon only incidentally, her regular business being that of a trader. Salmon in Cook's
Inlet are very uncertain — some years the natives cannot get enough for their own use, and other
years they are very abundant; this does not seem to depend on the severity of the winters.
"King salmon" are taken in gill-nets, dip-nets, and weirs. Two weirs, similar to those in use
at Kassilov, are in operation here. "Red salmon" are taken successfully only in seines. Tbe
iiati\os here receive ten cents apiece for salmon. Only the bellies are salted; they are generally
worth twelve dollars per barrel, sometimes fourteen dollars. At Kenai sixty pounds of salt
are used to a barrel of fish. The fish are washed in pure spring water after they have been
dressed, and then they are " struck" in the barrels in brine made of the same water. When the
barrels are filled up after heading the brine added is made of spring water, but it must be
brought to the boiling point and then put in after cooling. The brine does not seem to get strong
enough unless it is boiled. The usual jdan is to strike the fish and then repack, which takes
eighty to cue hundred pounds of s.alt. To put up a barrel of salt "king salmon" costs about
three dollars and fifty cents at Kenai; one dollar for the fish, one dollar and seventy-five cents
for the barrel and cooperage, forty cents for the salt, and thirty-five cents for the labor. The
"red salmon" will not cost much less. Captain Wilson told Mr. Mclntyre that in eleven years
lie lias not seen a "king salmon" that weighed over one hundred i)i)unds. The Alaska
Commercial Coniiiany sells its salmon wlit'rcvor a marker offers. The amount suited in 1880
Fishery ImlusLiii's of the United States, Seet. III-.
PLATE 3
i^!ir
__^^ ^^^i ,,.,.,„,,,
<m^
M.'-'^.
* m
>'\:
vf^^-N;:-:':v':i>u^--.--.- ' vJ'fr^ r:""' V\.^':^ "^
#/ ii'
-3
a
=1
x
w
rt
s
^
-c
^^
t^
w
't:;
C3
-3
c
tc
t^
ii
^
"
%
OJ
M
o
O
C3
T3
a
o
O
TUJB ALASKAX FISHING-GROUNDS.
93
Avas oue buiulred auil tifty banols of bellies. Estiiuatiiig fifty ti.sli to tlie barrel we shall have
seventy-five liuDdred lisb, weij;biiig- about three hiitidred thousand pouuds; of course, only a
small portion of each fish goes to form the finished product.
For the sake of completeness I mention some of the principal ibod fishes of Cook's Inlet:
Pleurouectes stellatus, Pallas.
Lepidopsetta bilineata, (Ayres) Gill.
Hippoglossus vulgaris, Fleming.
PoUachius chalcogrammus, (Walb.) Jor. & Gilb.
Gadus morrhua, Liunajus.
Tilesia gracilis, (Tiles.) Swainsou.
Hemilepidotus tvachuriis, (Pallas) Giinther.
" Jordanii, Bean.
Ilcxagrammus asper, Steller.
j^iTiiuodytes personatus, Girard.
Mallotus villosns, (JIuller) Ciiv.
Thaleichthys pacificus, (Kich.) Girard.
Salvelinus malma, (Walb.) Jor. & Gilb.
Salmo purpuratus, Pallas.
Oncorhyuchus chouiclia, (Walb.) Jor. & Gilb.
" keta, (Walb.) Gill & Jor.
" nerka, (Walb.) Gill & Jor.
" kisutch, (Walb.) Jor. & Gilb.
" gorbuscha, (Walb.) Gill & Jor.
Chipea mirabilis, Girard.
KODIAK PARISH.
The total population of this division is stated to be about twenty-six hundred. Taking
onr usual percentage of this we shall have two hundred and twenty fishermen, most of whom
are, Kodiak Innuits and Creoles. The methods and results of the fishing, particularly on the
island of Kodiak, have been greatly modified by civilization. The people have a wonderful
wejilth of fish in the waters around them, and they have learned how to capture and preserve
fbem to the best advantage. Boats and small vessels of ten to thirty tons replace to a great
extent the bidarka. While we were at Saint Paul a small vessel was being built for Captain
Caton. The settlement on Wood Island has a small shipyard, where vessels of twenty-five or
thirty tons are built for fishing and trade, according to Petroff.' The village of Afognak engages
also in boat-building, at which the men are expert; they have many orders, chiefly for row-boats
for the fishermen. Every settlement in this parish is engaged in sea otter hunting, many of them
iilmost exclusively. From Mitrofania at the southern extreme to Douglas in the north, in the
waters bathing the eastern shore of the peuinsida of Aliasta and the islands of the Kodiak group
natives pursue this valuable quarry, securing, according to Mr. Petrofifs returns, nine hundred
skins in 1879. This number includes the catch to the eastward to Mount Saint Elias, but falls to
the share of Kodiak Parish mainly. The small settlement of Ayakhtalik, on Goose Island, gets
quite a number of sea-lion skins around Sitkhinak Ishiud. The people of Kaguiak obtain a few
sea lion skins, and the Orlovsk men secure a great many annually.
This parish is profusely supplied with cod, haUbut, salmon, herring, capelin, eulachon, clangs,
and mussels. There are many other fishes which are abundant, but those named are the great
staples. On the islands of Kodiak and Afognak alone Mr. Fisher records the following quantities
prepared for home consumption :
Salted salmon. | Salmon spawn.
I j
j Barrels. Barrels.
One hundred and sixty-five families of Creok'.s i>nt np j MO j 82
Three hundred and tbirt;, -four families of Aleuts put up-, .i j 1157
Total MO j 249
1 Preliminary Report on Census of Alaska, 1H81, p. 29.
Ukali.
Pounds.
126, 700
250, 500
250
94
FISHING-GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICxV.
It must be kept in iiiiiid tlmt one pound of vlali represents ten pounds of fresh lisL. .Mi-.
Fisher's estimates of the supplies of the settlements ou Cook's Inlet and part of Aliaska Peninsula
is as follows :
Salted salmon. Salmon spawn. Ukali.
Sai-reU. Barrels. Pounds.
170 17 25, 500
155 230,000
"jQtal
170 1 172 1 255,500 '
The average retail price of fresh fish at Saint Paul is one-half cent per pound, while the
averao-e price of fresh beef is ten cents per pound, and of salt pork fifteen cents. Cooked oysters
are brought up from San Francisco and sell at forty cents per can. Canned lobsters from the
same city are retailed at the same price. Clams from the vicinity sell for twenty cents a pail,
fresh. Small quantities of salmon are smoked by the natives. Mr. Fisher names the following
shell-fish as of common occurrence : Cardium corbis, Gardium LaPeronsii, Modiola, Tapes staminea,
Saxidomus NuttaUii.
THE KARLTJK RIVER SALMON FISHERIES.
Karluk Eiver, on the west side of Kodiak Island, furnishes more salt salmon than any other
Alaskan stream, about sixteen hundred barrels having been secured there during the season of
1S80 by two firms. One of these fisheries is owned by the Western Fur and Trading Company of
San Francisco, and is operated by Capt. H. R. Bowen, of Saint Paul, Kodiak. Mr. Fisher has
obtained from Captain Bowen the following account of that fishery : It was established in 1880, at
the mouth of the river, and was active during June, July, August, September, and part of
October. Fish run up the river into a lake — the source of the river — about seventeen miles.
Tide-water extends up the stream about four miles. The only obstructions are rapids. All the
species of Oncorhynchus now recognized run into the river; they are known by the Russian names
" krasuoi riba," " keezitch," " chowichee," "gorbuscha," and "hoikoh." The trout or "sumgah"
(Salvelinus malma) also occurs here abundantly.
Salmon are caught at this fishery by seines, in the handling of which dories are used. The
natives use their spears as well as seines; instead of dories they use bidarkas. There are about
three hundred natives at the Karluk settlement, nearly all of whom are Kodiak lunuit. It is
stated by Captain Bowen that these three hundred caught and dried at least one hundred
thousand salmon (averaging one-half pound each in the dried state) during the summer.
The seines here are twenty-five fathoms long, three fathoms deep, with a mesh of three and
one-fourth inches; they cost thirty-dollars each. Four dories, sixteen feet long, are in use. The
fishery employs twenty men, five of whom are Norwegians and fifteen natives of Alaska. The
product of the fishery is as follows :
O. nerka.
June 16
June 17
Jane 18
Juno 19
June 20
Juno 21
Month of July
Mouth of August
0. keta and gorbuecha.'
Angnst 12
September 18
Number
of fish.
750
3,000
2,000
3,000
3,000
1,500
12.000
7.500
18, 500
21, 000
Estimnted
weight,
pounds.
7,500
30, 000
20, 000
30, 000
30, 000
15, 000
120,000
75, 000
185, 000
210,000
Barrels.
15
GO
40
GO
GO
30
240
150
' M;m1o into 7tkaU.
THE ALASKAN FISHING-GEOUNDS.
95
The iilali were made for the use of native liuuting parties. As before stated, tbe average
weight of a cured fish is ouc-half jiound ; hence the fish converted to this use resulted in nineteen
thousand seven hundred and fifty pounds of uTiali.
The schooner "O. S. Fowler" of thirty-five and forty-five one-hundredths tons, is engaged in
this fishery and the Kassilov fishery for the Western Fur and Trading Company. Captain Bowen
informed me that her present value is five thousand dollars, and that her outlay for the season of
1880 was five thousand dollars, which includes the cost of the buildings at Saint Paul, Kodiak,
used in preparing the fish for market. The "O. S. Fowler" has three Norwegians, one Eussian
Creole, and one American (the captain) as its force. She brought to Saint Paul one thousand
barrels of salted salmon and nineteen thousand seven hundred and fifty pounds of ul^ali from
Karluk and Kassilov, during the season of 1880.
Smith & Hirsch own a fishery which is also at the mouth of Karluk River. Charles Hirsch is
the superintendent. According to Mr. B. G. Mclntyre, this fishery was established in 1879,
during which year they put up sis hundred barrels of salt salmon which brought about six dollars
per barrel. This fii-m has in its service the twenty-nine ton schooner "Calistoga", of which Oliver
Smith is master. Her present value is said to be twenty-five hundred dollars. Besides the
master she carries four men, one of whom is a Swede and the other three are Eussian Creoles.
The average share of the crew is twenty to thirty dollars per month. Mr. Mclntyre, to whom 1
am indebted for information about the vessel, thinks the "Calistoga" had about five thousand
dollars invested in the business in 1880. Smith & Hirsch are represented as having salted nine
hundred and thirty-nine barrels of salmon and dried seventeen thousand five hundred pounds of
nlcali.
Two seines are used by Smith & Hirsch, and their dimensions are : Length, fifteen and
twenty-five fathoms ; depth, one and one-half and two fathoms ; mesh, three and one-half and four
and one-half inches. The smaller one cost twenty-five dollars and the larger thirty-five dollars.
A building used here for fish-salting purposes cost five hundred dollars. Sis eighteen-foot dories
are in use. Twenty-five men are employed — one Swede, one Irishman, and twenty-three natives.
The results of the season of 18S0 were as follows:
Nnmber
offish.
Estimated
weight in
ponnds.
Barrels.
0. nerka.
37, 500
19, 950
20, 750
375, 000
199, 600
207, 500
125
399
415
The average weight of these red salmon is estimated at ten pounds. Of the thirty-seven
thousand five hundred fish caught in June only the bellies were salted, making one hundred and
twenty-five barrels.
In the beginning of July red salmon became scarce, and after the run of humpbacks [0.
gorbuscha) set in (July 12), the red salmon (0. nerlca) disappeared altogether. Smith & Hirsch
stopped fishing until August 14, when the red salmon again made their appearance.
During July, August, and September, Smith & Hirsch made into ulcali thirty -five thousand
red and humiiback salmon, whose estimated weight fresh was three hundred thousand pounds;
the \tl;ali made from them weighed about seventeen thousand five hundred pounds.
The fish put up by this firm are consigned to the Alaska Commercial Company, and sold by
Lynde &, Hough, of San Francisco.
Captain Bowen says that a seine adapted for use at Karluk Elver should be thirty fathoms
long, three fathoms deep, of three-inch mesh, with five foot poles on the wings. He has caught and
96 FISniNG-GEOUNDS OF iS^ORTH AMERICA.
cured ;it Karliik oue luuKlrod aud seveuty-five barrels of red salmou in less tbau four days witb
teu natives at work. The natives do everything but salt the fish; this Captain Bowen does
himself. Ten men could average fifty barrels a day easily if a vessel could lie there every day,
but Karluk is open to the sea. With proper buildings ashore ten thousand barrels might be put
up in a season. At Karluk the salmou are thicker on the flood tide, becoming thicker as the tide
rises, but going off at high water. Looking down into the water, it would seem that a lead-pencil
could not be passed down between the densely crowded fish ; a bidarka cannot be paddled over
them wheii the salmon are thick.
Rod salmon are abundant every year at Karluk. There is perhaps no better place in Alaska
for the establishment of a great salmon fishery.
The following are the principal food and bait fishes of Kodiak Parish:
Pleuronectes stellatus, Pallas. Hexagrammus ordinatus, Cope.
" quadrituberculatus, Pallas. " superciliosus, (Pall.) Jor. & Gilb.
Lepidopsetta biliueata, (Ayres) Gilb. " decagrammus,(Pall.) Jor. & Gilb.
Limauda aspera, (Pall.) Bean. Pleurogrammus monopterygius, (Pall.) Gill.
Hippoglossoides elassodon, Jor. & Gilb. Ammodytes personatus, Girard.
Hippoglossus vulgaris, Plem. Mallotus villosus, (Miiller) Cuv.
Atheresthes stomias, Jor. & Gilb. Thaleichthys pacificu-s, (Rich.) Girard.
Pollachius chalcogrammus, (Pall.) Jor. & Gilb. Salveliuus malma, (Walb.) Jor. & Gilb.
Gadus morrhua, Linn. Salmo purpuratus, Pallas.
Tilesia gracilis, (Tiles.) Swainson. " Gairdnerii, Rich.
Cottus polyacanthocephalus, Pallas. Oncorhyuchus chouicha, (Walb.) Jor. & Gilb.
Hemilepidotus trachurus, (Pall.) Giinther. " keta, (Walb.) Gill & Jor.
" Jordanii, Bean. " nerka, (Walb.) Gill & Jor.
Sebastichthys melanops, (Grd.) Jor. & Gilb. " kisutch, (Walb.) Jor. & Gilb.
" ciliatus, (Tiles.) " gorbuscha, (Walb.) Gill & Jor.
Hexagrammus asper, Steller. Clupea mirabilis, Girard.
The following arc the names of fishes given to us on the voyage from Alexuudrovsk to Saint
Paul, Kodiak, by a native of the island of Kodiak. The species were all shown to him except tlie
Icrasnoi r'lba :
Gadus morrhua Ah-mo-doc.
Tilesia gracilis Sah-ke-lakh.
Muraenoidcs ornatus Poolakh.
Ammodytes personatus Ah-zhing ah-ryeerk.
Hemilepidotus Kah-log.
Cottus polyacanthocephalus Ki-oo-loong-chook.
Gasterosteus cataphractus . .E-lach-enakh.
Mallotus villosus She-gakh.
Salveliuus malma Ahu-chuck.
Oncorhynchus gorbuscha Ah-mahkee akh.
keta Ah-lay-makh.
nerka Xee-klee-uk.
Xames of other objects :
Littorina E-book.
Diomedea brachyura Kay-may-ryeerk.
Explanation. — A is sounded as in father, except in the second syllable of Ah-lay-makh,
and in the first two syllables of Kay mayryeerk. The names express as nearly as possible the
sounds used by the native in conveying his identification of the objects to me.
Fisliery lD(iu3tiit\s of the UniteJ States, Sect. III.
PLATE 4.
>
o
o
.a
w
n
S
a
THE ALASKAN FISHIXGGKOUNDS.
97
Settftments on Kodktlc and Afvfjnak Inlands.
Saiut Paul
Lesnoi
Afofrnak
Bobia
Orlova (Ea^^le Ilar'bor) -
Old Harbor
Kaguyak
lacbiok
Karliik
Total .
Creoles.
Aleuts.'
Adults.
Children.
Male. Female.
82
20
60
31
0
7
Male. remale.
55
6
36
14
4
5
53
12
25
7
1
3
Adults.
Male. I Female.
42
40
6
32
44
84
81
97
36
90
05
00
33
99
Children.
Male. Female.
473
1
12
30
3D
28
35
30
49
3
13
24
55
22
41
10
39
1 Actual count tiiken from cburcli registers.
Note. — The totals of Creoles are equal to one hundred and fiixty-fivo f.imilics of four persons each; the totals of Aleuts, lo three
buudied and thirty-four families of four persons each.
SALMO>r PKEPAEED BT NATIVES FOR HOME USE.
Salmon salted.
Salmon spawn.
Ukali.
One buudrud and sixty-fire families of Creoles juit up . .
Three hundred and thirty-four families of Aleuts put up
Barrels.
000
Barrels.
82
167
- Pounds.
126, 750
250, 500
"
Total
900
249
377, 200
Settlements on Coolc's Inlet and AlasJca Peninsula,
[Actual count taken from the church registers.]
Creoles.
Indians.
Adults.
Children.
Adults.
Children.
Male.
Female.
Male.
Female.
Male.
Female.
Male.
Female.
Katmai
11
13
8
5
04
14
40
15
20
12
58
U
38
12
18
10
30
U
25
11
10
8
29
10
23
12
8
1
N. Xilchik
15
12
7 «
Kassilo V
t
Families.
4
30
30
30
30
10
10
10
20
> Approximate.
Kenai
19
1R
12
0
Knik
Tyonak :
1
N.Kishki
1
1
Total
34 finiili^a
I
SE(! Ill-
98
FISHING-GEOU^^)S OF NORTH AMERICA.
SALMON PEEPAEED BY NATIVES FOR HOME rSE.
Salmou salted.
Salmon spawn.
TJkali.
Thirty-four families of 'Creoles put up for wiDtcr stores.
Barrels.
170
BarreU.
17
153
Pountls.
25,500
220,000
Totnl
170
172
255,500
Recapiiulation of -catch of fish for home consumption and export in 1880.
Herring,
smoked.
Codfish. 1
Salmon.
TJkaU.
Pound*.
Salted.
Boneless. Smoked.
Salted.
Spawn.
Boxes.'
Barrels.
Barrels.
Pounds.
Barrels.
150
939
345
Co5
Barrels.
Smith & Hirscli
17,500
Western Fur and Trading Company :
KassiloT fisberj"
Karluli iishcry
19,750
Saint Paul fisherv
500
250
4,000
990
82
167
17
155
126,750
250, 500
25,500
230, 000
Aleuts, Kodiak Island
170
Indians, settlements, Aliaska Peninsula
Total . .
600
250
4,000
3.249
421
070, 000
' Boxes of thirty pounds each.
lu addition to tbe above the Western Fur and Trading Company have put ui) experimeutally:
Smoked halibut, pouuds 500
Codfisli tongues, iu kits of twenty-five i)Ounds eacli 10
Halibut fius and najics, salted, iu kits of tuenty-Cve pounds each 10
Frostfish, salted, in quarter barrels 10
Salmon-trout, salted, in quarter barrels 30
Codfish, dried, iu one hundred pound boxes 30
Herring, salted, in quarter barrels 25
Herrin-^, salted, in kits of twenty-five pounds each 100
BELKOFFSKY PARISD.
Since tlie fishes of this division are practically tlie same as those of the Shumagins, it
is unnecessary to furnish a separate list of them. Mr. Petroflf gives the population as six hundred
and sixty-nine. The division, in fact, includes the settlements on the Sliumagiu group, and this
group has essentially the same species as Kodiak Parish with tbe addition of Trichodon stelleri
and Bathymaster signattts, the latter being important mainly for bait. Bathymaster is called
"cusk" at Pirate Cove, Shumagins.
Belkoifsky Parish contains the settlements of Belkoflsky, Nikolaievsky, Protassov, Vosues-
sensky, Unga, and Korovinsky. The wealthiest of all is Belkoifsky, which has an abundance
of fish, and takes nineteen hundred to two thousand sea-otter annually. Protassov takes five
hundred sea-otter and some walrus. Unga takes about six hundred sea-otter. Vosnesscnsky
and Korovinsky also take a few seaotter. The natives of Korovinsky are occasionally employed
at the cod-fishing stations of tbe Shumagins. At Belkoffskj-, a fine salmon river falls into the
l»ay. Natives take the salmon in small seines, and the women and children striut;' them o!i twigs
THE ALASKAN FISHING-GEOUNDS.
99
aud pieces of cord and drag tbcm along just at the edge of the water aiouud the beach to their
village. The fish are piled iu heaps and Iheu begius the process of ciittiug, splitting, aud
gashiug, preparatory to hanging them on the drjing-frames. Great heaps of heads and entrails
lie all around, very attractive to flies and beetles, but rather repulsive to visitors. At the time of
our visit (July 23, 1880), 0. rjorhusclm was the species taken. Mr. Frost told me that the (jorhusclia
comes first, and that it appeared iu quantities two weeks prior to our arrival; the ^^hoilwh'"
{0. l-cia) was there and the '■'Irasnoi riba^' [O.nerl-a), but neither of these was plentiful; they come
later. Cod are caught in the harbor. A few cod were lianging up to dry, but salmon were
abundant everywhere. The natives nearly all have comfortable-looking houses, a few of which
arc painted blue, with red roofs.
Mr. Devine says that natives from Korovinsky come over to a cove on Popoff Island, near
Pirate Cove, to fish for salmon; they generally get good silver salmon (0. Icisutch'i) there. A
silver salmon five feet long was brought to Pirate Cove in 1877 ; from the size, I would suppose
this to have been 0. chovicha. Clams are very abundant and excellent about the Shumagius.
One of the finest known baits for cod is common in deep water about the Shumagins; it is tht
"yellow-flsh" or striped fish" {Plcurogramtmts monopferygiuti), a species which is found in great
schools and may be taken in the purse-seine like mackerel, which it resembles in size, and, aftei
salting, iu taste. Cod are passionately fond of this fish, and also of the "whiting" or "silver
hake" of the region {PollacMus clialcogrammus). The Shumagin cod fishery, having already been
treated at length, need not be entered upon here.
UNALASHKA PARISH.
This division, with a total population of nearly fourteeu hundred, would have a fishing
population of about two hundred and eighty. It includes the islands of Attn, Atka, Umnak,
Unalashka, Spirkin, Akutau, Akun, and Avatanok. In this district will be observed a difi'erence
from the single paddle of the eastern shore of the Gulf of Alaska and the Kodiak group, the
bidarkas here being propelled by double paddles aud with quite a change of motion. The effect
of the double paddle, which is grasped in the middle, is pretty, but the movement is not so steady
as that resulting from the use of the single paddle. The bidarka is the universal form of boat for
coasting and even for sea-going in weather that will allow its use.
Aleut names of parts of a bidarka, obtained tlirouyh 2lr. King.
English.
Rassiau.
Aleut.
Un-mah-ghigh.
Ah-tah-kay.
Keel-ghagh.
Ah-gah-dach.
Koo-lich.
Oo-looch.
Tah-sach.
Eck-thoo-sahk.
Lnch-tach-ach.
Chang-iak.
Kut-koo-mah.
Koo-goo-show.
Keel
Kibs
Hatch
Luke
Stem
Zaviaski
Luvtak <
Kose of prow (in three pieces)..
A good three-holed bidarka is worth from thirty dollars to fifty dollars. The luvtaks, or skin
coverings of the wooden fiame-work, are made of sea-lion here.
The fishes of this division are nearly the same as those of Kodiak Parish, with the exception
of the species at SebastichtJn/s, none of wliich in the National Museum are from Unalashka Parish.
100 FISHIKG-GKOUiSfDS OF KOKTH AMERICA.
All tlie Alaskan species of Ecxogrammiis, however, are present, tlie conimoiiest one at Iliuliuk,
known to the whites as " grcen-fisb" and to the Russians as iurjnd; being H. ordinatus of Cope.
These fish remind nie very much of our cunner and tautog, but they are mnch better than either,
being more solid and less bony. Flat-fishes and flounders are very abundant, and are taken in
large quantities by the spear in the evening, when they come into the shoal water close to the
shore, and maybe readily seen on the sandy bottom. Halibut and cod abound. The "striped
fish", "yellow-fish", or "Atka mackerel" exists here in immense numbers, and deserves to
become a very important element in the Alaskan salt-fish trade. It extends around the whole of
the Aleutian chain and the Shumagins, congregating in great schools. At Attu it is known as
the "kelp-fish," at the Shumagins as the "yellow-fish" or "striped fish," and from Unalashka to
Atka as the "Atka mackerel." The last name is derived from the fact that when salted just as
mackerel are salted it has the same taste. I have been told that this fish can be taken by the
purse-seine, its movements being similar to those of the common mackerel. There is no doubt
that if the "striped fish" was properly introduced into the market it would find a ready sale, fin-
it is certainly an excellent fish, either salted or fresh. The fish was originally described by Pallas
as Lahrax monopterygius, and is at present known as Pleurogrammus monopterygius, (Pallas) Gill.
Last year it visited Chernofifsky and Iliuliuk, on Unalashka Island, reappearing at the latter
place after an absence of a few years. Petroft' states that "full barrels of it [have] commanded the
unwonted price of twenty-four dollars each in San Francisco." Mr. Robert King, agent of the
"Western Fur and Trading Company for the Unalashka district, writes me as follows concerning
the species: "Our agent at Atka says they are there in considerable numbers, and wishes me to
make preparations for taking three hundred barrels, which he thinks may be obtained in one
season of say two or three months. I believe these fish are more generally distributed than has
been heretofore known, as we saw young ones of the same kind at Chernoffsky on this Island, and
during the last few days there have been thousands of them moving through between the cribs of
our wharf." Mr. King's letter was dated at Iliuliuk, August 3, 1880.
With regard to the price offered for the salted " striped fish," there seems to be some
difference of experience. Mr. Hague, general agent of the Western Fur and Trading Company,
has kindly written me the following concerning them : " The best otter we have had for these
striped fish is for a quantity to arrive not to exceed forty to fifty barrels at ten dollars per barrel."
Trout and salmon are among the most important fishes of the region. The red-spotted trout
and all the species of Oncorhyuchus are taken in their season. Herring are not always abundant,
but that they are of unusually good quality our own experience has proven.
Sea-lions are captured at Attu, and in rather large numbers, by the Akun people, who go
to Oogamak for them and for the numerous hair seals found there. The skins of the hair-seal
and sea-lion are used in making bidarkas, which are >ised by the sea-otter hunters who visit
Sanakh.
Quite a number of young fur-seals are caught by natives off Umnak, as they travel, southward
from Bering Sea. The people of Makushin, too, secure between one thousand and thirteen
hundred of these animals yearly on their way through Umnak Straits in the fiill. The inhabitants
of Borka capture from twelve hundred to fourteen liundred young fur seals in favorable seasons
as they go through Oonalga Pass.
Sea-otter are taken in small numbers by the people of Akutan around the small islands near
them and on the south end of Unimak. The village of Borka secures a few sea-otter in its
vicinity, and some of its people also unite with the Unalashka hunters who visit Sanakh. The
Chernoffsky natives take sea-otter in tJmnak Straits and send representatives to Sanakh with the
THE ALASKAN FISHING GEOU^TDS. 101
Ilinliiik parties. KosLigin gets a few of tbese animals yearly in the same places as those visited
by Chernoffsky natives. The i^eople of Makushin and Iliuliuk Join forces iu quest of seaotter at
Sanakh, -n-here they are taken, and whence they are brought back annually by vessels engaged iu
the trade. The iieople on the southwest coast of Umuak Island secure about one hundred and fifty
sea-otter yearly. Atka is largely engaged also in this chase and successfully. Trading vessels
carry its hunters to the haunts of the otter, whore they remain during the season, and at the end
of their work they are returned to their homes. Mr. Petrofif, from whom I have copied my
information about the otter, fur-seal, and sea-lion, gives the catch of sea-otter in Unalashka
district, from the Shumagin Islands to Attn, as forty-eight hundred and fifty for the season of
1879.
In " Notes on the Islands of the Unalashka Eegion" (translation from the Eussiau title), by
Ivan Yeniamlnofif, Vol. II, pages 402 to 408, will be found an account of the fishes which Jlr.
Marcus Baker, of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, has had the kindness to translate
for nie. What the bishop says about the methods of fishing is here quoted : " The method of
taking the migratory fish by the Aleuts was formerly exceedingly crude and unprofitable. They
built tlams in the rivers, piling large stones on a kind of float where the circumstances admitted of
it, which served as a barrier to the fish going up the rivers. Standing upon this they fished with
small spears pointed with iron (and formerly with bone) and barbed, tlirown into the water more
by chance than by choice, and when by good luck a fish was struck it was dragged ashore by
a line attached to the spear. They now (1840) make use of small nets ; but at the principal
settlements the company has large seines, with which more fish are taken at the time when they
first begin to apjiroach the shores or enter the bays."
At the present time short seines and the ordinary fishing gear of the United States are
generally employed in the fisheries. UlaU forms a very important part of the trader's stock at
Iliuliuk.
BRISTOL BAY DIVISION.
Iu this division there is a total population of forty-three hundred and forty. This may
be called the great lake region of Alaska, the lakes emptying through rivers into Bristol
Bay. Iliamna, the largest lake, is upwards of ninety miles long, and varies between fifteen and
thirty miles in width. Nushegak, the largest river, wide and deeji, with rapid current and turbid
waters, rushes down from Nushegak Lake to the bay, and asserts its pi'esence far out over bars
and flats. Besides the Nushegak there are seven other rivers iu the division.
At Nushegak, Mr. Petroff says, the Unalashka style of bidarka is left behind, and is replaced
by the one-holed "kyak," a skin canoe similar to the bidarka and similarly propelled. The spear
is much used in fishing and in the capture of seal. The lance is in great demand for sealing, too.
The coast population have opportunities to take walrus, seals, beluga, and an occasional
stranded whale. The settlement of Igagik, according to Petroif, devotes its time principally to
the walrus hunt. At KulUik, agaiu, is a small jiopulation, devoted largely to the chase of walrus
and seal ; here the banded seal {nintriophoca fosciata) is found along with others. It is claimed
that a fresh-water seal inhabits Iliamna Lake, but the statement needs to be confirmed by the
possession of a specimen.
The principal fish of the region are flat-fish, flounders, halibut, cod, pollock, " waclina."
sculpins, two or more species of "green-fish" {Heragrammus), lannce, cajjeliu, trout, whitetish.
salmon, and herring. In order to form some idea of the abundance of salmon one should read
Petrofi:'s description of the Igushek Eiver and of the Togiak as well.' The whole region is
' Prcliiuiuary Report on Census of Alaska, l!-'Sl, p. 4S.
102 FISHING CxEOUNDS OF KORTH AMERICA.
abunil.ujtly supplied with choice flsli, while the sea-coast is iuhabited by the larger marine
animals already mentioned. I have been told that Iliamna Lake is well stocked with the best of
fish.
The following are some of the food-fishes of Bristol Bay division:
rienronectes stellatns. Ammodytes personatus.
Lepidopsetta biliucata. Mallotus villosus.
Limanda aspera. Salveliuus malma.
nippoglossus vnlgaris. Salmo purpuratus.
Pollachius chalcogranunus. Oncorhynchns chouicha.
Gadiis morrhna. " keta.
Tilesia gracilis. " nerka.
Cottus polyacanthocejihalus. " kisutch.
Gymnacanthus galeatus. " gorbnscha.
Hexagrammns asper. Clupea mirabilis.
" ordinatus.
Besides these there are some species of Corcgonns which have not come into the United States
National Musenm and have not been recorded by any writer, so far as I know.
PRIBILOFF ISLANDS.
This group is so thoroughly absorbed in the important business of taking Inrseal that the
trifling occupation of fishing is, for the most part, left to the small boys, and their principal catch
is the skulking, rock-loving sculpiu, known to the Aleuts as kah-log. They have smooth-skinned
sculpins and scaled sculpins, representing the genera Cottus and MeUetes, but all are kahlog.
Large halibut, too large to be devoured by the roaring " lion-' and the bellowing •' bear," which
exterminate all the unwary small fry, are the only important fish that can be readily taken near
the shores. The hidarra is the fishing-boat, and the fishing implements are all from the United
States.
Sea-lion are taken in large numbers, and are very important for the covering of bidarras.
SAINT MATHEW AND SAINT LAWRENCE ISLANDS.
Saint Mathew is a great resort for walrus, and it was once supposed that fur seal might bo
taken there in large numbers.
Saint Lawrence Island derives a precarious subsistence from the walrus and seal that visit its
.shores, and, according to Captain Hooper, are present all the year. Whales also supply a large
part of the food of its people. The walrus and the seal furnish them not only with food, but also
with houses, fuel, boats, and clothing. Their catch of whalebone and walrus ivory is disposed of
to traders for rum, rifles, and ammunition. This island marks nearly the northern limit of the
codfish, which is occasionally taken there.
KUSKOQUIM DIVISION.
We have hei-e a population of thirty-six huiulred and fifty-four, which is augmented
during the salmon fishing to six or seven thousand, according to ]\Ir. Petroff, from whose report I
take the bulk of the information concerning the fishes of the Kuskoquim River. In the absence
of collections, we know nothing definite about the species of fish, but it is reasonable to suppose
that they do not differ greatly from those of the Yukon, from which we have manj' species, as will
be seen from the list accompanying the account of that division. Salmon, trout, and whitefish are
THE ALASKAN FISHING-GROUNDS. 103
the priDcip;iI aiul prevailing forms, aud the fact that the people of the legiou uot only consume
vast quantities themselves, but also divide their supplies with about two thousand natives from
the lower delta of the Yukon, is a suilicient voucher for the wonderful abundance of tish.
The run of salmon up this stream is very great, and is long continued, the season opening
in June and not closing until the end of August. The density of the population, as so
remarkably portrayed in our list of the settlements at the mouth aud in the immediate country
adjoining, is such that in their active and energetic fishing for their own consumption they seem
to absorb the greater part of this salmon run; at least the natives at the source of the river
complain very often of the scarcity of salmon. Not only the people of the Kuskoquim proper fish
here, but even those of the lower delta of the Great Yukon. Two thousand of them come over
here to fish, making a sum total of six or seven thousand fish-eaters, consuming and wasting a
quantity of salmon that should feed at least six or eight times their number were the fish canned
or salted, instead of being used in their wasteful processes.'
YUKON DIVISION.
I shall combine here the two sections of Mr. Petroff, put down as Yukon delta and Uphoon
mouth to Anvik, with a population of thirty-three hundred and fifty-one.
According to Petroff, hair-seals (two species) ascend the Yukon as far as three hundred to
four hundred miles. White whales or beluga are abundant in the mouths of the river, where they
pursue the salmon.
The number of species of marine fishes is comparatively small, while there are a goodly
number of river fishes, particularly salmon and whitefisli. There is generally no trouble in
getting all the salmon required by the natives for bounteous subsistence, but Mr. Petroff mentions
a contingency that arose last summer by which a fish famine was caused at the mouth of the
Yukon. At the breaking up of the ice in the spring, it came down in such masses that it
grounded in the delta in the month of July and prevented the ascent of the salmon. Natives had
to seek food northward along the shore of Norton Sound and down on the Kuskoquim. To the
people of the Lower Yukon the absence of fish means starvation, unless a supply can be obtained
from other sources. The run of salmon in the Yukon is short, not much exceeding two months
in all. Mr. Dall has published a memorandum of the trap-fishing at Nnlato, on the Yukon, based
upon his observations extending over several seasons, and this will give a good idea of the species
taken and their relative abundance at different seasons.
November. — The fish-traps are set for winter. A week or two usually elapses before the
trap takes any fish. The natives say that it is necessary for the resin to be washed out of the
wood of which the basket and funnel are made before the fish will approach the trap. The first
fish taken are the losh {Lota maculosa), which usually come in great numbers.
Decembee. — Suckers and losh predominate. A few whitefish and a straggling salmon are
occasionally taken.
January. — Much the same ; but the whitefish begin to be more plentiful.
February'. — Losh scarce. The traps are filled with the different species of whitefish.
March. — Much the same; but suckers begin to enter the traps.
April. — Graylings and suckers very iilenty ; whitefish more scarce; a few losh taken.
May'. — A few poor whitefish and small losh are taken, but the bulk of the catch is composed
of graylings. Ice carries away the traps. As soon as the river is clear new traps and gill-nets
are set.
> Petroff, Preliiuiuary Report ou Census of Alaska, 1^81, p. Cv-i.
104 FISniNGGROUNDS OF ^"ORTU AMERICA.
June. — Kiug; salmon nppear toward tlie iiiidtUe of the luontb.
July.— " 7?oilo/i " {0. Ix-la), "i-odfisL" (0. 7ierla), "dogfish" (0. (jorlusclia), aud a few
wLitefish.
August. — Keezich ai)d straggling salmon of the other speeies. Whitefish, especially the
Luciofruffa and mulsiDi, are more abaudaiit.
September. — Salmon trout aud whiteflsh are in their best condition and most abundant.
October. — Much the same ; but toward the, twentieth of the month ice begins to form and
puts a stop to fishing until it is firm enough to allow of the setting of the winter traps, which
does not usually occur until early in the following month.'
The method of making and setting the Yukon fish-traps is so well explained by Mr. Dall in
the paper already quoted, that I shall simply state that the trap is essentially a double fyke-net
with the fence i)laced at right angles with the bank of the river, catching fish either ascending
or descending the stream. Gill nets and seines are used in summer. The Tinueh tribes formerly
made their seines out of the inner bark of willow and alder. The Innuit made theirs of fine
seal-skin strips. In localities where the river is small and narrow, the natives make what
corresponds in effect with the yshaped fish-trap of the Susquehanna aud other Eastern rivers —
huge bundles of willow brush are tied together aud placed side by side so as to block the passage
of fish completely, except at the little opening where the basket is placed. Birch canoes are used
in river flshiug on the Yukon.
We have little information about the running of the Yukon salmon beyond that obtained by
Mr. "Dall from the natives at Fort Derabin, Nulato, which follows:
" King salmon : Arrive at ISTulato ' when the trees have got into full leaf,' about the 20th of
June, and continue to run about three weeks. The last that come up are poor and lean. Hoilcoh:
The first arrive about the 10th of Jidy, just as the king salmon are about gone, and they last
about three weeks. Stragglers are occasionally caught as late as January. Eeclfish : This arrives
about a week or teu days after the first hoikoh, and continues with the latter until about the end
of August. A few straggling dogfish are occasionally caught with it, but the majority of this
si)ecies do not ascend the river as high as Nulato. Keezich : This is the last of the salmon to
ascend the river, an(;l is obtained until the cold weather sets in aud puts a stop to the summer
fishing."
The same habit of running in twos or threes instead of in schools is reported of the " king
salmon" in the Yukon, as well as in the rivers of Cook's Inlet. Capt. E. P. Herendeen told n)c
that he has always noticed it, and he thinks the salmon follow the shore to escape the beluga.
The superiority of the king salmon of the Yukon has long been well known; persons who are
able to secure a supply of the salted bellies from that source consider themselves very fortunate.
The species seems to improve in flavor regularly to the northern limit of its distribution, although
it is highly i>rized even on the Columbia.
The following is a list of the principal flshQS of the Yukon division :
Flat-fish Pleuronectes stellatus. (Marine.)
" glacialis. (Marine.)
Liiminda aspera. (Marine.)
Halibut nippoglossus vulgaris. (^Marine.)
Polar cod Boreogadus saida. (Marine.)
Wachna Tilesia gracilis. (Marine.)
' Report of Commissioner of Agriculture for 1870 (1871), p. 392.
THE ALASKAIsr FISHmGGEOUNDS. 105
Biiibot or losb Lota mnculosa. (Fresh water.)
Lycodes Turnerii. (jMarine.)
Sciilpiu Cottns polj'acantboceplialus. (Marine.)
" tijeuiopterus. (Marine.)
" humilis. (Marine.)
Hexagrainnuis asper. (Marine.)
Launce Ammodytes americanus. (Marine.)
Pike Esox lucius. (Fresh water.)
Smelt Osmerns dentex. (Marine.)
Capelin Mallotus villosus. (Marine.)
Smelt Hypomesus olidus. (Fresh water.)
Whiteflsh Coregonus Artedi. (Fresh water.)
" Laurettit. (Fresh water.)
" JMerkii, subsp. (Fresh water.)
" clupeiformis. (Fresh water.)
" Kennicottii. (Fresh water.)
" quadrilateralis. (Fresh water.)
Grayling .Tbymallns signil'er. (Fresh water.)
Trout Salvelinus malnia. (Fresh water.)
Salmon Oncorhyncbus chouicha. (Fresh water.)
" keta. (Fresh water.)
" nerka. (Fresh water.)
" kisutch. (Fresh water.)
" gorbuscha. (Fresh water.)
Herring Clupea mirabllis. (Marine.)
Sucker Catostomus longirostris. (Fresh water.)
Lamprey Ammocoetes aureus. (Fresh water.)
According to Mr. L. M. Turner, the lamjirey is very abundant at Aiivik and is used for food.
Although the Ingaliks, or the people of the great interior, are omitted here, they have an
abundance of salmon and wbitefish in the Upper Yukon and the Tananah.
KOKTON SOUND DIVISION.
lu the region embracing the coast of the Sound from Saint Michael's upward and as far as
Sledge Island, Mr. Petroff reports six hundred and thirty-three inhabitants. The fishes, of
course, are about the same as those mentioned iu the Yukon division and need not be repeated.
There is one very important fi.shery, the tom cod or wachna fishery, which is characteristic of the
region, and should be described in detail. This has already been done by Mr. Dall iu the
following terms :
"This fish much resembles the common tomcod of the Eastern States, . . . but, while tlie
latter is of most insignificant importance from its scarcity and poor quality, the former si^ecies
occupies a very important place in the domestic economy of both natives and Pussiaus on both
shores of Bering Sea. It is ai>parently a permanent inhabitant of these coasts, but is most
abundant iu the fall of the year, when the ice begins to form in the rivers and along the shores.
The Waukhui fishery commences about the middle of October. At first it is caught from boats
anchored close inshore, but later the natives cut holes in the new ice, set up two or three stakes,
with a mat hung upon them to keep oft" the wind, and sit there all day, liauling them in as fast as
106 FISHING-GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
the line is tlropiieil into the water. The hook is made of white wahus ivory, furnished with a
sharp pin set in obliquely, bnt without a barb. The whiteness of the ivory, which is kept
constantly in nrotion, attracts the fish, but no bait whatever is used. In November, when the ice
becomes very thick, and the cold increases, the fish retire to deeper water, and the fishing is over
until the following spring. In the summer the natives are occupied with the salmon fishery and
pay no attention to these small fish. They are preserved by removing the intestines, and drying
in large bunches strung on seal-line, or by throwing them as they are into long cylindrical baskets
made of twisted grass, and keeping them entire in a frozen state. : . . They are among the
most palatable of the many fish found in these seas, and the number preserved is so great as to
be almost incalculable. They serve the natives for food either boiled or in the frozen state. They
also form an important article of dog-feed in the northern portions of Alaska, near the coast.
They are well suited, from their abundance and firm flesh, to be used as bait in the cod-fishery."'
The u-achna extends southward into Cook's Inlet, where I have seen individuals a foot in
length; their average length so far as observed by me is about ten inches and their weight a half
pound or less. The form is much like that of the tom-cod, but by pressing on the sides of the
body a little behind the breast fins a series of small knobs will be felt on the ends of the lateral
processes of the backbone; these are caused by white, spoon-shaped, flexible caps that fit on the
processes and help to form a sort of roof over the abdominal cavity; the presence of these
appendages makes it necessary to use another name than Gadus for the genus, and as Swainson
has proposed to call it Tilesia, though on trivial grounds, his name may be used. It is usual to
see traveling parties of Innuits in summer supplied with stiings of waclina with the intestines
partly removed and a very gamy flavor substituted. The hook of walrus ivory is still used, and
farther north it is attached to a line of whalebone splints.
The herring run in Norton Sound is of very short duration, the fishery lasting only a fortnight,
but the schools are enormously large. Seines are used in taking them. The fish are kept until
they become half putrid, and are then considered at their best.
Parties traveling in summer by sea in this region are usually well supplied with a small
flat-fish (Pleuronectes glac ial i s), whiahhiis a close resemblance to the "fool fish" or "Christmas
fish " of Massachusetts Bay and the Maine coast, together with waclmm and smelt.
The sea boat in common use is the bidarra or haidar {oomiak of the Innuit), a flat-bottomed,
walrus-skin covering stretclied over a wooden frame-work and securely lashed with whalebone
and seal skin strips or sinew. Occasionally au oar is used, the wooden rowlock being lashed
to a rib with thongs, but short paddles are more general. A small square sail is always used
when the wind is favorable, and when not forced to embark against wind and tide the native
emulates his civilized brother, and waits. The bidarra serves not only as a mode of conveyance
by day, but also as a shelter for the night. As this boat is so largely used throughout Northern
Alaska it will be of interest to quote portions of Captaiu Hoopers remarks on the subject :
"An ordinary oomiak contains, in addition to the stock-in-trade of oil, skins, etc., a tent of
drilling or deer-skin, guns, traps, spears, bows and arrows, a l-yack, a seal-skin poke filled with
water, a quantity of dried meat, a sled, several pairs of snow-shoes, a fish-net, and several smaller
nets for catching birds, a largo drum on a pole fur the use of the ' shaman,' and several sealskin
bags containing skin clothing. The personnel consists of three or four men, about as many
women, and two or three children. Add to these two or three dogs, each with a litter of puppies,
and some idea may be formed of what a traveling oomiak contains. The working dogs are often
' Reportr of Commissiouer of AgricuUiire for 18T0 (1S71), p. 380.
THE ALASKAN FISHIXG-GEOUJ^DS. , 107
left on the beach to follosv ou i'oot, which thej do, keepiug- up a continued and most dismal howl.
If the wind comes in ahead, and the natives desire, for any reason, to continue their journey, they
paddle in near the shore, harness their dogs, and attach them to the oomiak, after the manner
of a canal-boat and horses, settle themselves in the boat, and saying ' uakouruck' (good !), go
on their way at the rate of four or five miles an hour with no other eftbrt than steering with the
paddle."'
Fish hooks and lines also ibrm an important part of the oomiak outfit, since iish, especially
in summer, are so largely depended upon for food.
Seal, walrus, and whale, as well as belufja, are important objects of Ihe chnsc in this division,
but as the methods pursued are the same as wo find farther north wc will refer to this subject
again.
king's island to point barrow.
For this extent of territory Mr. Petroif gives a total population of twenty-nine hundred and
ninety. For convenience of treatment I shall subdivide the region into several smaller parts,
taking up Port Clarence, Kotzebne Sound, and Arctic Alaska north of Kotzebue Sound, separately.
i. Port Clarence and TiciNiTY.-*-AYe must include here King's Island, one of the most
remarkable human habitations in any country, with a reputed population of one hundred souls
on its inhospitable cliffs. The shores are all bold, and the contour is jagged and broken. Here, in
summer-houses of walrus skins, and winter burrows in the face of the cliffs, live a class of seal
and walrus hunters who are said to be the bravest sailors in Alaska. I have heard it stated that
men are sometimes lifted up in their kyacks by their comrades and thrown from the cliffs clear
of the surf, which must roll almost incessantly around those ragged rocks. Clad in a water-proof
kamlayka, or shirt made of the intestines of walrus, the hardy islander is thrown out to battle
with the waves that would surely ingulf a less skillful sailor. Captain Hooper says that the
kyack of these people is covered with walrus hide. The bidarras have the same kind of covering,
and while at sea, transporting trading goods, etc., a cover protects the cargo from bi-eaking
waves. The flesh of seal and Avalrus forms the principal food of these natives, but in summer
a part of them may be found at Port Clarence and on the east side of the bay of which this
harbor forms a portion, engaged in trading and fishing.
The skins of walrus and hair-seal are converted by these men into "luvtak" which form
boat-covers; these are carried off to the mainland for trade. The throat of the seal is made up
by the King's Island natives into water-proof boots, which are in great demand for the use of
whalers, and their seal skni boots are largely disposed of to the same parties. The Cape Prince
of Wales men are fishermen and whalers.
In the shallow, freshwater lagoons, so plentiful on the spit protecting the western side of
Port Clarence, there are great quantities of sticklebacks. The King's Island people, who were
here at the time of our visit, brought to us whitefish [Coregonus Lauretta), smelt {Osmerus dentex),
herring {Glupea mirabilis), and "wachna" {Tilesia gracilis). They were well provided with oil in
seal skin bags, fishing-lines, hooks, and sinkers. The sinkers were made of soft stone resembling
slate, often of two colors, one light and the other dark, abrui>tly divided. A hole was drilled at
each end and a shallow groove was made to receive the line. The holes were drilled by means
of a piece of steel or iron rotated by an ivory or bone drill-bow supplied with a string of sinew.
The commonest form of line was made of narrow strips of whalebone neatly fastened together.
The hook is often an ivory or bone imitation of a fish, and sometimes two, sometimes four, are
'Report of Cruise of Corwin, November 1, 1880 (1881), p. 28.
108 FISHING GROUNDS OP NORTH AMERICA.
fastened to one sbanli. Occasionally picees of white and bliiisb stones are made tlie basis of
supitort for the books, and great taste is sbowu in their arrangement. As an additional lure, we
saw what was supposed to be the corneous ajipendage of the angle of the mouth of mormons,
which, when dry, resembles in shape and color an imperfect salmon egg. The rod was not over
two and one half feet long, and the line of about ten or twelve feet was neatly folded around the
ends of the rod, which were crotched to receive it. Over the jig-like hook was pulled a sheath of
seal-skin as a protection against accidents.
From the settlement at Port Clarence we obtained some dressed skins of the red-spotted
trout {Salvelimis malma), which are used for making quite ornamental water-proof vests. Rmall
seines are used.
The following are some of the edible fishes of Port Clarence:
Pleurouectes stellatus. Mallotus villosus.
u
glacialis. Hypomesus olidus.
e>
Liiiianda aspera. Coregonus Laurettaj.
Hippoglossus vidgaris. " Merkii.
Boreogadus saida. Salveliuus malma. '
Tilesia gracilis. Oncorhynchus chouicha.
Cottus polyacanthocephalus. " keta.
" ta^uiopterus. " nerka.
•' humilis. '* kisutch.
Hexagrammus asper. " gorbuscba.
Ammodytes personatus. Clupea mirabilis.
Osmerus dentex.
2. KoTZEBUE Sound. — In this body of water, especially in Escbscholtz Bay, the beluga or
white whale is extensively taken. In the vicinity of Elephant Point we found numerous skulls
of this animal lying on the beach, not far from the mouth of Buckland River.
" There are no natives living on Escbscholtz Bay, but a number are located on the Bucklaud
River, and come down to the bay during the summer months to kill white whales [Beluga cafodon),
catch salmon, and gather berries, which they 'cache' until the snow comes, when they are taken
to the settlement on sledges. Like all Indians, these are very superstitious. While buuting the
white whale they are not allowed to choji wood, dig in the earth, sew, tan skins, and many other
things, for fear the spirit that controls the movements of the white whales will take oftense and
not permit them to return the next season. When the whaling is completed they collect the
bones and burn tliein; those who can afford it burn the clothes worn while whaling, the poorer
natives paying tribute to the 'god of the white whale,' by cuding oil' and burning a small
piece of some garment."
" The ' kyack' used by the natives on Kotzebue Sound, and, in fact, along the entire coast to
Point Barrow, is a nuirvel of speed and beauty. It is very narrow and light, and great skill is
required in its management. In these fleet boats the natives easily drive the white whale, a very
timid animal, into shallow water; where it is dispatched with strong, flint headed spears.'"
The spear-i)oint used liere for the cai)ture of beluga is usually made of a brown or black stone
which is very hard; this is fastened to a wooden handle, about four feet iu length,' by strips of
whalebone. The beluga are Imnlcd iu kyacks ; a dozen or more natives take up a position near
the entrance of .some bay, where tliey can see them as they come in with the tide. As soon as
they bare passed, the natives paddle out behind them, and, by shouting and beating the water,
'Hooper, Report of Cruise of Corwiu, 1831, pp. 24-25.
THE ALASKA:N^ FISniNG-GEOUNDS. 109
drive tbem into 8boal vrater, where they are easily dispatched witli fiiut spears. According to
their tradition, to kill the belvga with any other weapon would entail endless misfortune upon
the guilty party.' We might suppose that the beluga spear would be held in high esteem by the
Innuit, but, on the contrary, it is freely bartered for a tritle of tobacco or a few percussion cai^s.
In this portion of Alaska the capture of hair-seals is one of the most important native
occupations. The seal is patiently watched for until it appears at its breathing-hole, when it is
shot with a ritle. A very ingenious decoy used by these natives is a short piece of wood on which
are fastened seal-claws, which are intended to make a scratching sound like that of the seal.
Captain Hooper thus describes the movements of the seal hunter :
" The hunter approaches cautiously, by crawling over the ice, his body nearly prostrate,
raised slightly on one elbow. He has a piece of bear-skin, about two feet long and a foot wide,
which he attaches to his leg on the side njion which he rests; this enables him to slide more
easily over the ice. The elbow rests upon a ring of grass."
As already mentioned, seal oil is carried in seal-skin pouches or bags, and the natives
sometimes paitly fill the bag with water and partlj' with oil when making preparations for
trading.
The gill-nets used by the Arctic Alaskan natives for the capture of seal did not come under
my observation, but those used iu Plover Bay, which are similar to the Alaskan, are made of
strong seal-skiu line. They are about thirty to forty feet long and six deep; the bottom is
furnished with stone sinkers at short intervals, and the top Las a series of floats made of stuffed
seal flipiDers ; they are set off from the beach and sunk to the bottom, standing up for the seal to
run into as they swim along shore in search of food. Seal skin liues are attached to the net and
held by heavy stones on the beach ; with these the net is hauled in when a seal lias been secured.
A small stone placed on the slack of some of the hauling lines and readily dis[)laced by the
struggle of a captive shows when to take up the net. Captain Hooper says the Alaskan gill net
is set from the shore by means of a pole sixty to eighty feet long, made by joining a number of
short poles together ; with this the net is pushed out to its desired position and then the pole is
withdrawn. The seal-skin lines are cut from a skin by pgssiug round and round continuously.
The line is then stretched between whalebone posts or large rocks, and the whole net after it is
finished is folded into a narrow, long bundle, and carefully stretched between similar supports.
A glance at the map will show this region to be supplied with a few rivers, the Selawik aud
Finland being the largest. Selawik Kiver communicates, through a lake of the same name, with
Hotham Inlet, near the mouth of which the Finland empties also. Buckland Eiver, a small but
important salmon stream, flows into Eschscholtz Bay. These streams are well supplied with
salmon and whitefish. Petrofif says that " the streams or small rivei's which emptj- into Kotzebue
Sound mark the extreme northern limit of the run of salmon in America,"^ but iu this he was,
perhaps, misled by Seemann. We took the young of the red-spotted trout at Cape Lisburne in
the summer ol 1880, and at least one species of Oncorhijnchns is kuowu from as far north as
Colville Eiver.
The species of fish observed bj- us iu the possession of natives iu Kotzebue Sound were fresh
flat-fish {Pleuronectes glaeialis) and smelt {Osmerus dentex) and a species of dried salmon. Dried
smelt were obtained also. Most of the species recorded from the region were takeu in our seine.
While iu Eschscholtz Bay, natives from Cape Espenberg were there for the purpose of fishing
and trading. They were well supplied with small objects made of walrus ivory, and many of
'Hooper: Op. cit., p. r/J.
'^Preliminary Report on Census of Alnslia, ISf^l, p. 59.
110 FISHINGGKOUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
these were curiously carved to represent seal, walrus, bear, whale, and even the singular large
isopod crustacean so common on all the Arctic beaches. The articles were usually intended for
belt-toggles, powder-charges, swivels, lance-heads, and other useful implements, but some were
representations of the human figure or other merely ornamental subject. Quantities of seal-skin
line were freely traded for a mere trifle. The lance-heads usually consisted of a base of ivory or
bone and an iron i)oint.
Seemann says that herring and whiting are very abundant in Hotham Inlet. The whiting of
Seemann is supposed to be PoUachius chalcogrammiis, but there is some doubt about the occurrence
of this species so far north, since none of the collectors at Saint Michael's have sent it down from
their still more southern latitude. The mullet of Seemann must be a large species of whitefish
(Coregonus). The mode of fishing in these waters is thus described by Captain Hooper:
"Salmon and other small fish are taken in nets, either by a seine in the ordinary way, or by
means of a gill-net, which is set from the shore in a very ingenious manner. This net of seal
thongs is from thirty to forty feet In length and about five feet wide; floats of light wood are
attached to one side, with pieces of stone for sinkers on the other side, and to the outer end is
secured a stone somewhat larger than the rest, serving as an anchor ; a number of short poles,
about three iuches in diameter, are lashed together to a length of sixty or eighty feet, and the
end secured to the stone anchor bj" means of a loop, which allows the whole pole to be withdrawn
after the net is set. This pole is used for jjushiug the net from shore into the desired depth of
water; when let go the net naturally assumes a perpendicular position. The outer end is held in
place by the stone anchor, while the inner end is fastened to a line of seal-thong leading to the
shore, with which the net is drawn in.'"
The following are some of the food-fishes of Kotzebue Sound :
Pleuronectes stellatus. . MaUotus villosus.
a
glacialis. Coregonus Laurettai.
»
Limanda aspera. " Merkii.
PoUachius chalcogrammus (doubtfully). " Kennicottii.
Boreogadus saida. Salveliuus malma.
Tilesia gracilis. Oncorhynchus chouicha.
Cottus polyacanthocephalus. " keta.
" tseniopterus " nerka.
" humilis. " kisutch.
Ammodytes personatus. " gorbuscha.
Osmerus dextex. Clupea mirabilis.
" spii'iuchus.
3. AitcTic Alaska north of Kotzebue Sound. — From Kotzebue Sound northward the
Eskimo are engaged iirincipally in the capture of seal, walrus, and whale. Many of them go with
whaling vessels, and all who are able to do so unite with a will in taking whales during the
absence of the fleet as well. In the spring of 1880, the Point Hope men sold the bone from five
whales which they killed after the vessels left in 1879. Natives all along the coast from Kotzebue
Sound up are supplied with whaling gear such as the whites use, and ill their trustworthy oomiaks
they show great skill and courage in this chase. Whalebone is brought out to every vessel that
comes in sight anywhere in the Arctic. The season of 1880 was a remarkable one for all concerned
in the fishery; the Eskimo were fairly gorged with blackskin and blubber, while every sail carried
away a heavy cargo of oil, bone, and ivory. On the 20th of August, ISSO, the settlement of Point
' Report of Cruise of Corwiu, 1881, j). 59.
THE ALASKAN FISHING GEOUjSDS. HI
Hope showed uo signs of life, the natives being off flsbing, liiiutiug, and x)eihaps trading. There
were plenty of dryiug-fiaiues, and at various points along the k»w shore were large conical piles
of drift-wood.
The spear-points observed at Cape Lisburne were made of copper or iron in a bone socket.
Sometimes chert or some other hard stone replaces the metal. At Icy Cape a great number of
chert flakes were found at an old Eskimo encampment, where the spear-maker had been at work.
The pole to which the head is attached is usually nearly six feet long, the shank forming a socket
fitting ou a pivot on the pole and firmly lashed on. To the pole is fastened, by seal-skin thongs,
an inflated seal-stomach. The natives throw these lances into a whale and the buoys prevent his
sinking very far; each time when he comes up to breathe more and more lances are thrust into
him, until finally the death stroke is given. The flesh and blubber are common property; the
whalebone belongs to the captors of the animal. The jaw-bone is used for various purposes; cut
into strips of suitable thickness, it is employed for shoeing sled runners; the ribs and parts of
the jaws are frequently planted in the ground in a circle for the frame- work of winter dwellings;
blubber-holes are secured by a covering of similar bones; ribs also are sunk upright into the
ground to serve as posts for stretching lines and for supports of various kinds. It is hard to tell
whether the Eskimo prefer whale meat fresh or tainted; they eat it very freely and with apparent
relish when it becomes simply revolting to our taste. The crisp, hard cracklings left by the
whalers after trying out the oil are eagerly sought for by traveling parties.
The walrus and the seal are of more importance to the Eskimo than the whale, both of them
being more readily obtained and supplying a greater number of wants. The flesh of the whale of
course serves as food, the oil as food and fuel, the bone for house-frames and certain utensils, the
baleen as an article of trade; but whales are hard to capture and are not to be dci)ended upon,
while walrus and seal, judging from the numerous I'emains of these animals found wherever we
landed ou the Arctic shores, and from the numberless appliances for which they serve, are the
great essentials, not only to the comfort, but to the very existeuce of the natives. To use the
language of Captain Hooper: "The seal may be called the mainstay of the Innuit of Arctic
Alaska. The flesh and oil form his chief articles of subsistence; the skin furnishes him clothing,
tents, and boats; cut into thongs, it is used to make nets for catching fish and birds. The oil is
also burned in lamps (nanvttc), which light and warm the ttipecks during the long, dark winter
nights." 1
In the vicinity of Icy Cape we saw great quantities of broken skulls of walrus and seal and
of polar bear. Heaps of burned bones were quite frequent ; the natives burn the bones to
ajipease the spirit dwelling in the animal, fearing a failure in their future hunting if this mark of
respect be withheld.
Walrus ivory has many uses besides that of a basis of trade; whole tusks of the proper shape
are formed into handsome and very effective ice-picks; snow-knives, resembling somewhat in
shape the throw sticks of some Indians, are made of this ivory; numberless implements of small
size but great usefulness are manufactured from the same material.
The number of species of edible Arctic fishes is small, and there is uo question that flsh-
ibod is much less important to those Innuit than the flesh of seals and walrus, but it is consumed
in considerable quantities and forms a very agreeable variation from the ordinary diet. Two species
of flatfish are known to be abuudaut, and the small polar cod is superlatively so. Two sculpins
named in the appended list (species of Gottus) reach a large size and they are very common. All
' Report of Cruise of Corwin, 1881, pp. 53, 59.
112
FISHING-GEOUNDS OP isORTH AMERICA.
iLc lagoons observed by me were well tilled with sticklebacks and young sciilpins. Lant and
capeliu abound. Smelt and grayling are reported as far around as Colville Eiver by Capt. E. E.
Smith, icepilot of the Corwin in 1880. A species of wliitefisli {Coregonus Lauretta) was obtained
in abundance by Captain ITooper j'rom natives at Point Barrow. We took tbe red-spotted trout
in our seine, and Captain Smith reports it from Colville Kiver, where he also secured herring
and humpback salmon [Oncorlujnchus gorhuscha). Seemann has declared that salmon are not
found in Alaska north of Kotzebue Sound. This is an error; we found remains of a species of
Oncorhyuchm, which I believe to bo gorhuscha, at Icy Cape, and Captain Smith, referred to above,
salted in 1875 two barrels of humpback salmon which he bought at the mouth of Colville River.
Concerning the whiteflsh of Point Barrow, Captain Hooper in his report, already referred to, says:
"We bought from the natives . . . some fish resembling shad, but smaller and very fat; they
differ also from the shad in having two (dorsal) fins. We saw the same species in Kotzebue
Sound and at other places within the Ai-ctic circle. They are called by the natives tuiwoJc."
Farther on he writes thus: " The salmon is the only variety of fish in the Arctic that is of any
value. Although smaller than the salmon caught farther south, they are of fine flavor. They are
quite plentiful, and the coast natives care large quantities of them by smoking and drying for
winter use."
The list of fishes given includes only such food-fishes as are known to occur; there ai'e no
doubt others which will be discovered by collectors in the future. The methods of capture do
not differ from those already described, seines, gill-nets, hooks, and spears being employed just
as they are farther south.
The following is a partial list of Arctic- Alaskan fishes :
Pleuronectes stellatus. Osmerus deutex.
" glacialis. Mallotus villosus.
Coregonus INEerkii.
" Laurettic.
?Thymallus. (J'Jde Smith.)
Salveliuus malma.
Oncorhvnchus gorbuscha.
Boreogadus saida.
Lycodes cocciueus.
Cottus polyacanthocephalus.
" tiieniopterus.
" humilis.
Gymnacanthus pistilliger.
Ammodytes persouatus.
17. STATISTICS OF THE ALASKAN FISHERIES IN 1880.
Clupea mirabilis.
Salmon exported from Alaska, 1880.
Karlak Eivcr Fishery, Smith & Hirsch
Do
Do
Karliik River Fishery, Western Fur and Trailing Company.
Do
Do
EassiloT Fisliery, Western Fur and Trading Company
Do
Eenai Eivcr Fishery, Alaslia Comiuorcial Company
Total
Month.
June
August
Septeuiber-
Juno
July
August
July
August
Barrels.
125'
399
415
205
240
150
100'
165'!
150 2
Number.
2,089
37, 500
19, 950
20, 750
20, 000
12, 000
7,500
8,000
18, 500
7,500
151, 700
Pounds.
375. 000
199. 500
207, 500
200, 000
120, 000
75, 000
320, COO
185, 000
300, 000
1, 982, 000
' Barrels of bellies.
* CbowicLee bellies.
' Silver or kcezitch.
EANGE OF FOOD-FISHES IX ALASKA.
113
Fish exported from AlasTca, 1880.
Xamo of compaDT.
Herring.
Halibut.
Cod.
Frost-
flsh.
Salmon
trout.
Salmon.
Smoked.
Salted.
Smoked.
Fins and
napea.
!>-''• rs!-
Tongues.
Smoked. Salted.
Alaska Commercial Com-
pany.
Smith & Hirscli ..
Soxes.
Pounds.
Pounds.
Pounds. Pounds.
Founds.
BarrcU.
Barrels.
Pounds.
Barrels.
l.iO
939
1,000
!
Westeni Fur and Trading
Company.
1 500 i
pounds, 2, 500
i-barrels, 6
Lan'els, 18
\ 500
250
3,000
10, 500
250
2i
n
4,000
2,08»'l
Value
j $1S0
$50
$25
$60
$505
$25
$17
$75
$200 1 $19, 820
* 2,069 barrels equal 151,700 fisl, equal 1,962,000 pounds.
18. TABLE SHOWING THE GEOGEAPHICAL RANGE OF FOOD-FISHES IN ALASKA.
Xames.
«
o
a
M
.2
in
1
1
CO
o
.a
1
1
1
(B
"3
a
i
'i
1
.3
"a!
w
■1
a
«3
1
1
4
5
1
a
Pleuronectes stellatns
X
X
X
X
X
' ' glacialis
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Lepidopsctta bilineata
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Limanila aspera
Hippc'lossoidcs elassodon
X
X
Hippoglossus Tul ""aria
X
X
X
PoUacluus elialcograinmns... .
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Lota maculosa
Lycodes Turnerii
' ' cocciueu3
X
X
X
X
■X
X
X
" tteniopterus
" Diger
X
" hnmilia
Gyranacanthus pistilli2;cr
x!
X
X
X
" galeatu3
Hemilepidotns trachunis
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Melletcs papilio
Subast ichlb \ s maliger
X
X
' ' caurinus
" brevispinia
X
melanops
X
X
X
" cilialua
Hfsagranjinua a.sper
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ordinatiis
X
X
X
X
X
Plearogi-amnius monopterygiaa
X
X
y
114
FISHING-GROUNDS OF NOETH AMERICA.
Table showing Ihe geographical range of food-fishea in Alaska — Coiitiiiueil.
Names.
u
<D
a
'i
1
2
1
Ph
a
CS
M
OS
1
1
o
'3
n
o5
§
a
<
•3
<
X
X
X
X
X
i
::;::;;:;;.;
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
:;;:::. .....1
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
(
,
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
1
X
X
X --.
" kota '
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
i
1
Total
1
1 1
28 1 8
10 1 17 1 1 1 25 L 4
16 1 24 1 2
2
2
!
1
^
1
1
1
Names.
1
<
1
a
1
a
a
M
i
i
Q
'i
1
•§
f
a
o
rid
9
o
u
e:
1
o
1
1
1
1
i
1
O
J
s
&
o
S
a
1
o
1
a
>
V
O
S5
s
o
1
5
•
X
X
X
x»
X
X
X
X
X
...
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
Lota niacnlosa
1
PvANGE OF FOOD-FISHES IN ALASKA.
115
Table shoiiing the geograplucal range of food-fishes in Alaska — Coutiuned.
Karnes.
'6
a
M
1
1
S
U
■g
■s
IS
1
S
g
1
u
>
§
i
o
1
3
o
o
§
a)
i
O
125
e
1
o
.a
o
1
o
a
o
.£;
K
3
>
i
1
a
P
1
o
O
X
1
i
X
X
X
1
X
X
1
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PleurograiLiiius monopterygius
X
Amiuodytea persouatiis
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
" pretiosiis
Thaleichtbys pacificua
Stoiiodus Mackenzii
X
1
CoregoDus Laurotta;
X
X
*' ^Icrkii
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
xJ
x>
X
X
X
" Gairdnerii .■
' ' iiideus
Oncorbyncliua cbouicba
X
' ' keta
X
X
nerka
" gorbuscha
x!
x!
Clupea mirabilis
X
X
X
X
Catosroiuus loDgirostris
Araraocoetes anreua
Total
1
1
2
3
8
4 1
5
3
5
3
5 ' 1
1
D. — THE FISHING-GROUNDS OF THE GEEAT LAKES.
By LUDWICr KUMLIEN AND FREDERICK W. TRUE.
19. LAKE SUPERIOK.
On accouut of the peculiar nature of tlie fisheries of the Great Lakes, the flshiug-grouuds are
all located comparatively near shore. In cousidering them, we shall begin at the western end of
Lake Superior, and proceed eastward and southward toward the eastern end of Lake Ontario.
Isle Eoyale to KE^VEENA^Y Point. — Gill-net grounds of considerable importance extend
almost without a break along the northwestern and southern shores of Lake Superior, from Isle
Koyale to within a few miles of Keweenaw Point, a distance of more than three hundred miles.
The bottom is everywhere clayey, except about the Apostle Islands, where it is sandy and rocky.
On the northwest shore of the lake, the depth of water at the outer limit of the grounds varies
from eighty to one hundred and forty fathoms, but on the south shore it is much less, being not
greater than eighty fathoms at any point.
The grounds ou the northwest shore are visited by Duluth fishermen in the fall. They fish
commonly about forty-live miles from the village, but frequently go forty or fifty miles further
north. In the spring and summer they set their nets at different points along the south shore,
between Duluth and the Apostle Islands, but in the earlier i)art of the season they fish mostly
at a station about twenty miles east of the village.
A portion of the grounds, extendiug eastward from the Apostle Islands one hundred and
twenty-five miles, is visited by the fishermen of Bayfield and Ashland. The most favorable
localities are off Iron Elver and Little Girl's Poiut, and in the viciuity of the Porcupine Mountains
and Sleeping Eiver. Different stations from Bark Eiver to beyond Ontonagon are occupied at
dififerent times, according to the season and the movements of the fish. In the fall the nets
are removed from the south shore and carried across the lake to Isle Eoyale.
The pound-net grounds of this district are located among the Apostle Islands and in the
immediate vicinity. Other portions of the coast are too much exposed to the violence of storms,
and in other respects are unsuitable for pound fishing. We may excei)t, however, the sandy bar
near the entrance to Superior City, where, in 1879, two pouuds were located. During the same
year one pound was set in Bark Bay, three in Siskowit Bay, sixteen among the Apostle Islands,
mainly inshore, and from the islands nearest the mainland, and seven ou the south side of the
long sandy liar at the entrance of Chaquamegon Bay.
The most westerly seiuing-grounds of the lakes are at Superior City and Fond du Lac. In the
former locality a very little seiuiug for whitefish is prosecuted late in the fall. At Foud du Lac,
at the head of Saint Louis Bay, the seining is more extensive, but the catch consists entirely of
pike. There are many selningreaches farther to the eastward, between Bark Eiver and Bayfield,
particularly iu the smaller bays and among the islands, but the grounds are changed so often
that it is quite impossible to locate them accurately. Bark Point, however, may be mentioned as
one of the most favorable localities.
117
118 FISniNG-GEOUXDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
In winter small quautitics of pike arc taken in different parts of Saint Louis Lay with Iiook
and line, and in tlie deei)er i)assages among the islands near Bayfield considerable numbers of
trout are caught.
Isle Royale. — The fishing-grounds at Isle Eoyale are mostly off the south shore. The
bottom is rocky for more than a mile from the island, but becomes clayey beyond. The fishermen
set their gillnets on the inshore rocky reefs early in tlie fall, but later in the season follow the
fish into deeper water. They frequently set their nets in one hundred fathoms of water. The
catch consists principally of trout. The Isle Eoyale grounds arc frequented by the fishermen
of Bayfield and of other localities on the south shore of Lake Superior.
Keweenaw Point to Grand Island. — Gill-net grounds extend along this entire stretch
of coast, except between Big Bay Point and Sauk's Head, a distance of about fifteen miles. The
land is high at many points, and the water deep at a short distance from shore. The iushore
bottom is rocky, but between Keweenaw Point and Big Bay Point it cLauges to clay and mud
farther out, while from Sauk's Head to Grand Island saud aud gravel largely predominate. The
outer limit of the grounds is uniformly about seven miles from shore, where the water is forty or
forty-five fathoms deep, except opposite Marquette and Train Bay, where the fishermen frequently
fish ten miles from shore, in water from fifty to seventy fathoms deep. ■
The fishermen of L'Anse and the neighboring villages commonly set gill-nets in the fall on the
west side of Keweenaw Point, opposite the entrance to the Portage Lake canal. In winter they
keep near shore, generally fishing in L'Anse Bay, but in warmer weather they venture into deeper
water, visiting various reefs and shoals, the position and extent of many of which is known only
to themselves. A large share of the fishing is also carried on in the vicinity of the stations where
pound- nets are set.
All fishing prosecuted between Sauk's Head and Grand Island is carried on by fishermen
from Marquette. In the fall the grounds off Shot and Granite Points are visited, while in the
spring the larger proportion of the gill-netting is prosecuted off Big Presqu' Isle and in the
vicinity of Grand Island.
The principal pound-net stations of this section of the shore are at Bete Grise Bay, Portage
Entry, Keweenaw and Huron Bays, the shallow bay east of Marquette, and the channel between
Grand Island and the mainland. Between Keweenaw Point and Sauk's Head the nets are set in
seventeen to forty-five feet of water, while further to the eastward the extremes are twenty and
twenty-eight feet. During the year 1879 the i)ouuds were distributed as follows : In Bete Grise
Bay, one ; at Portage Entry, two ; in Keweenaw and L'Anse Bays, seven ; in Huron Bay, two ;
between Granite Point and Presqu' Isle, one ; between Marquette aud Shot Point, three ; and in
the channel between Grand Island and the mainland, four. In 187S, and again in 1880, there
were two more pounds at Grand Island. Some of the more intelligent fishermen of Marquette
are now seeking some reef or shoal within convenient distance of that village, where they may
catch larger quantities of fish. All the shoals now known are so far distant that they are
unable, with their sail-boats, to reach them and return in one day. I\Iany of the best pound-net
grounds cannot be utilized on account of their exposed position. Even in tlie more sheltered
localities, in stormy seasons, serious losses of netting are frequently sustained.
Small and unimportant seining-grounds exist at L'Anse and Portage Entry. Eastward the
seining is prosecuted entirely in and about Marquette Harbor, and even these grounds are
productive of very little except herring.
Staunard's Rock, a dangerous reef lying about forty-five miles due north of Marquette, is
one of the most important trout-grounds of the Great Lakes. Marvelous stories arc told
4
LAKE MICHIGAN. ] 19
teganliiig' the (jiuuitities of trout tiikoii tbere. The grounds fxteud te-u or twelve miles lioui the
rock in everj- direction, and the water at the outer limit is more than one hundred fathoms deep
in many places; the bottom is rocky and clayey. It is a very iiivorable place for bookflshiug,
and is visited from time to time by the fishermen of Marquette.
Grand Island to Sault de Ste. Maeib and Detour. — There are but few fishing-grounds
along the south shore of Lake Superior east of Grand Island, except at Whitefish Point.
Gill-net grounds extend a few miles on either side of the point, and five or six miles from laud.
The water is comparatively shallow and the bottom everywhere sandy. A tug visits the western
grounds at certain seasons. The fishermen state that the water has receded considerably at this
point within the past five years, and that fisheries of all kinds, except gill-netting, have been less
successful than formerly.
The exposed condition of the coast about Whitefish Point renders the successful
establishment of pound-nets quite imi)Ossible. During 1S79, however, one net was set; a short
distance west of the point, and another to the south of it, iu Whitefish Bay,
Large quantities of whitefish are caught with dip-nets in the rapids at Sault de Ste. Marie
by the Indians. Not infrequently several hundred pounds are taken by a single canoe iu one
day. Grounds of limited extent exist in Whisky Bay, on which small quautities of fish are
taken with trap-nets.
20. LAKE MICHIGAN AND THE STRAITS OF MACKINAC.
Point Detour to Seul Cnoix Point. — The fishing-grounds in the Straits of Mackinac
and vicinity are widely scattered and difficult of location, and it is quite possible that some of
them have escaped observation.
The first important gill-net ground west of Detour Passage extends from Strong's Island,
about sixteen miles in a southeasterly direction, to and about Spectacle Beef. The water is very
deep in the southern part of this ground, in some places approaching three hundred fathoms, but
about Spectacle Beef and near shore it is of course comparatively shallow, although in some
spots, in very close proximity to the former, from forty to sixty fixthoms may be found. The
nature of the bottom differs very much iu different i^arts of the ground, but mud, sand, and rock
predominate. This ground has the reputation of being exhausted at the present time, and very
little fishing is jirosecuted on it.
Some little gill-net fishing is carried on between Mackinac and Bound Islands and to the
westward of the latter, and also for a short distance along the shore north of Point Saint Ignace.
These grounds are frequented, however, only by fishermen using but ten or twenty nets, who sell
their fish to the steamers and hotels.
The whole northern shore of Lake Michigan, from the straits to Seul Choix Poiut, is one vast
gill net ground. It is considered one of the best on the lake. Fishing is carried on at a distance
of ten, fifteen, or even twenty miles from laud. The favorite grounds are southeast of Poiut
Patterson, between Simmons's Beef and Point Epoufette, westward of Saint Helena Shoal, and
southwest of Poiut anx Chenes. On the first-mentioned ground the bottom is chiefli' sandy, but
on the others the sand is largely mingled with rock and clay. The depth of water does not
exceed sixteen or eighteen fathoms at any point, the average depth being considerably less.
The boats fishing on these shoals belong at different i)oiuts along the north shore and at
Mackinac. Many Beaver Island boats also fish here, especially on the southern borders of the
grounds.
120 FISHING GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
Between Detour Passage auil llie Straits of jMacldnac there are but two permanent ]H)iin(l
fisheries. Oue is located at Strong's Island, the most easterly of the Les Gheneaux grnui).
Seven iioiinds were employeil here in 1879, It is a very important and ])rodactive tishery. The
second is situated at the head of Saint Martin's Bay, where, in 1879, six shoalwarer pounds were
established.
On the north shore of Lake Michigan, west of the Straits of Mackinac, we find the most
extensive and profitable fishing-grounds of the lake, as regards both pound-net and gill-net
fishing. The first pound-nets to the eastward -are those established at Gros Cap Point, eight and
one-half miles west of Point Saint Ignace. The " Six-mile sand-beach," further to the west, at
Point aux Chenes, is a noted and productive ground. From this point westward we find ponnd-nets
scatrered along the shoi'e at Point Epoufette, Biddle Point, Mille Coquins Point, Point
Patterson, and Scott's Point. Between Point Saint Ignace and Scott's Point, a distance of less
than fifty miles, there were located in 1879 more than sixty pound-nets, and about seventy-five
gill net boats also fished there.
Along this coast the pound-nets are all set quite close inshore, and generally each man's
nets in a line. Prominent exceptions, however, are furnished in the case of two firms, each of
which sets two nets on a shoal about seven miles south of Mille Coquins Point. Another firm
has nets set in deep water about nine miles south-southwest of Point Epoufette, and two more
are set a short distance west of Simmons's Eeef, and about the same distance directly south of
Point Epoufette. The latter two are among the most profitable pound-nets on this shore.
The Beaver Islands. — The shores of the Beaver Islands present very favorable conditions
for the establishment of pound-nets, and they have therefore become the center of an extensive
fishery. The bottom consists chiefly of sand, although in some parts, especially on the west
.shore of the main island, rockj- grounds ai-e very abundant.
In 1879 thirty-two pound nets were in use at the islands, sixteen of which were located on
the east side of the large island which gives its name to the group, and constituted the Sand
Bay fishery. Of the remaining nets, two were located at the north shore of Hog Island, two at
High Island, and the others at the north, east, and south shores of Beaver Island.
At Beaver Harbor, near Saint James post-ofiice, in the northeastern portion of Beaver Island,
there is an extensive seining-reach, where, in 1879, two seines were employed.
Ofif Gull Island, the most westerly of the Beaver group, is a noted gill-net ground. The
island is owned by three persons, each of whom employs two boats in the fishery.
Seul Choix Point to Point Detour, Green Bat. — The only fishery between Seul Choix
Point and Point Detour is located at Point aux Barques, where, in 1879, sixty gill nets were
employed. The ground extends about four or five miles from the point, the outer limit being in
about twenty fathoms of water. The bottom is generally hard and sandy.
Green Bay. — The fisheries of Green Bay are very extensive, and quite varied in
character. The bay is a body of water of uo mean proportions, being about two hundred miles
in length and twenty miles in breadth at the widest part, or somewhat more than twice the size
of Lake Champlain. There are many large and flourishing towns on the west shore, while the
east shore is comparatively unoccupied.
In con.sidering the fishing-grounds wo shall begin at Point Detour, at the entrance of the
bay, and having spoken of the grounds in Big and Little Bays de Koquctte, pass southward
along the west shore to Green Bay City, and thence northward along the east shore to Porte des
Morts.
LAKE MICHIGxVN. 121
At the entrance of Green Bay, esteiuliug around Summer Island, within a radius of about six
miles, we find an important gill-net ground, known as the Sag Bay ground. West of and
adjoining the Sag Bay ground is another, six or eight miles in diameter, called the Summer
Island ground. As many as three hundred and fifty gill-nets are annually employed there.
Extending in a southwesterly direction from the grounds already mentioned, and directly north
of Washington Island, is still another and much larger ground styled the Washington Island
ground. Every summer about six hundred gilluets are in use here, and in the fall the number
swells to one thousand. The bottom, as might be expected on account of the great extent of
the ground, varies considerably in character, but is generally bard and sandy. The water is
comparatively shallow, the maximum depth not exceeding twenty-three or twenty-four fathoms.
There are no extensive gill-net grounds in either Big or Little Bay de Noquette, although in
the latter some nets are used in winter under the ice. A few miles south of the entrance to Little
Bay de Noquette, and east of Indian Town, we find a ground which supports about one hundred
and thirty-five nets. The character of bottom and depth of water are about the same as those of
the Washington Island ground, which, in fact, it touches at its western limit.
Between this ground and tlie next to the southward, a space of about five miles intervenes. The
latter ground extends I'rom near shore, in a southeasterly direction from the mouth of Bark liiver.
about nine miles. The depth of water at the outer limit is about seventeen fathoms, and the
character of the bottom is simihir to that of those previously mentioned.
rarther south there are no more important "open-water" gillnet grounds, or such as are
visited during the warmer weather, either on the west or east side of the bay, except at Green
Bay City. The grounds extend for about two miles along the low and marshy shores at the
mouth of Fox River. The nets are set in the numerous sloughs running into the marsh, and are
visited every two days. Nothing is taken in them but rough fish. The only large ground still
unmentioned is the Saint Martin's ground, which extends from the island of the same name into
Lake Michigan eastward, nortlieastward, and southeastward, about eight miles.
As we have stated already, " ojien water " gill-net fishing has died out almost entirely south
of the Bark Eiver ground except at Green Bay City. One fisherman set a few gill-nets in 1879
directly north of the bar at the mouth of the Peshtigo Eiver. Summer gill-net fishing is also
carried on to a limited extent on the east shore, between Bay Settlement and Chambers Island,
especially at the entrance of Little Sturgeon Bay, where formerly it was extensively pursued.
In winter, as soon as the ice is sufficiently firm to be walked npon with safety, the fishermen
begin setting their nets. The grounds are located almost anywhere outside tlie ten-fathom line,
often in the middle of the bay, and the nets are moved from time to time. Very few aie in use
north of Menomonee, many of the more important pound-owners not possessing any. Southward
as far as Peshtigo they increase in number. A few are set off Suaraico and between Bay
Settlement and Chamber Island, on the east shore. They are set across the bay, in gangs of from
five to thirty, and anchored.
The pound-net fisheries of Green Bay are very extensive and imjiortant. The larger
proportion of the nets are set on the west shore, between Cedar Eiver and Green Bay City, but
many are also scattered over other parts of the bay.
On the north shore of Saint Martin's Island, at the entrance of the bay, we find the largest
and deepest pound-net on the Great Lakes. The pot stands in ninety-seven feet of water, and is
inclosed by stakes one hundred and twenty-five feet long, spliced three times. The net cuts off a
deep channel by which the fish appear to enter the bay. and the catch is very large.
122 riSniNG GllOUNDS of XOKTH AMERICA.
On the west .sIkjiv of Big Bay de. Noquette, between Saiut Vital Point and Chippewa roiut,
seven ponniLs were in operation in lSIi>. The shores of the bay are unsettled, and the region
is too far away from any shipping point to enable men to carry on the fisheries successfully. It
is believed, however, that the bay abounds in fish.
At the mouth of Big Bay de iNoquette, about midway between Peninsula Point and Summer
Island, ami nearly seven and one-half miles from any laud, there is a small pound-net ground,
where, in 1879, five pounds were located. The bottom is Lard, and the deptli of water varies from
six to eight fathoms. The ground is very productive.
On the eastern shore of Little Bay de i:^oquette, directly opposite Escanaba, there were, in
1879, three pounds; at Masonville, at the head of the bay, one; and on the w'est shore of the
entrance of the bay, about five miles south of Escanaba, three. The latter are so near the mouth
of the bay that whitefish are caught in them in considerable quantities.
Directly opposite Indian Town, on the west shore, and about six miles from land, we find two
more i)ound-nets. They are set in about thirtj' feet of water, and are very productive. They are
about the only pounds that take considerable quantities of trout. A few miles farther south, but
close inshore, there are two more pounds.
Between Cedar Elver and Little Tail Point, ten or twelve miles north of Green Bay City, we
find a remarkably large number of pound-nets. Iii 1879 there were no less than one hundred and
twenty nets situated along this section of coast. In the vicinity of Cedar Eiver the water is very
deep near shore, many of the pounds being in seventy-five feet of water, but southward the shore
slopes moi'e and more gently, forming sandy reaches, over which the water is but twenty or
thirty feet deep. Between Menomonee and Suamico the nets are set on these shoals.
About four miles above the mouth of Little Suamico Eiver, and three and one-half miles from
shore, a rocky reef, nearly three miles in length, extends north and south. One net is usually set
inside the reef and three placed in line east of it, the one farthest eastward being about five miles
from shore.
The catch in all the pounds on this section of coast consists principally of herring.
The jiound-net grounds of Green Bay City ai'e located near the mouth of Fox Eiver, in about
fifteen feet of water. Four large pound-nets and seventeen "baby-pounds" owned in the city,
together with a number of others, were employed here in 1879.
At the present time the pound-net grounds of the east shore of Green Bay are located
between Shoemaker's Point and Little Sturgeon Bay. The whole extent of coast occupied is not
more than six miles. Two nets are also set off Chambers Island. The latter grounds were
formerly of great importance, but they are now almost abandoned.
At the head of Big Bay de Koquette, in Ogontz Bay, there is a single seiuing-reach, and
another at the head of Little Bay de Noquette. The catch in these nets consists chiefly of rough
fish and sturgeon, whitefish and trout not being found so far u]> in the bays.
There are but four seining-reaches on the west shore of Green Bay which are now visited by
the fishermen. Two are located a short distance south of the mouth of the ]Menomouee Eiver.
There is also one at the mouth of the Suamico Eiver, and one at the mouth of the Oconto Eiver.
Both, however, are insignificant, no large hauls having been made within seven years. Formerly
seining was a leading industry in this section, but many of the old grounds are now occupied by
pound-nets. From 1858 to 1865, seines were used on all suitable shores in this vicinity, and large
quantities of fish were taken.
At Green Bay City five large seines were in use in 1879. The yield of this fishery is very
large.
LAKE MICHIGAN. 123
On the slioals south of Greeu Islaud, which is situated iu tlie uiiddle uf the bay, southeast of
Menomonee, hook-fishing is prosecuted to a considerable extent. Prior to 1867, this fishery was
quite extensive and important.
At Green Bay City about one hundred and fifty fyke-nets are set in Fox River, near the
mouth, and various species are taken.
Hook-fishing is carried on on the east shore of Green Bay, in Door county, to a very
limited extent.
De Pere being situated at tlie head of Fox Eiver, and not directlj* on Green Bay, its
fisheries may be more properly considered separately, althougli they are of little importance. The
catch consists i)rincipally of dory, pickerel, catfish, and sturgeon, but some whitefish are also
taken. A number of small gill-nets are used and two seines, together with about one hundred
dip-nets. In the latter many kinds of fish are taken, such as moon-eyes, which are only used for
manure or as bait for catfish.
Porte des Morts to Port Washington. — The first gill-net grounds on the west shore of
Lake Michigan, south of Porte des Morts, are near Jacksouport, around the Cana Islands.
Gill-net fishing was formerly prosecuted here to a considerable extent, but pound-nets have
gradually taken their plac6 so that only about a hundred gill-nets remain between Porte des
Morts and Clay Banks, a, distance of about thirty miles.
The next gill-net ground is at Clay Banks. It extends about two miles north of the village
and the same distance south of it. At the outeii limit the water is from ten to fourteen fathoms in
depth and the bottom is everywhere rocky. The principal species of fish caught here is the
trout.
About four miles south of Clay Banks we find another small gill-net ground. In 1879 there
were two small gangs of fishermen here who employed gill-nets in taking trout. As a rule they
fish in not more than ten fathoms of water.
Between Stony Creek and Two Creeks on the south, a distance of about twenty-five miles,
there are no fishing grounds of any sort. At Two Creeks, however, we reach the upper end of
the great giil-net grounds, frequented by the fishermen of Two Eivers. These grounds extend
from nearly opijosite Two Creeks on the north to Manitowoc on the south, a distance of about
fourteen miles. The inner limit of the grounds is uniformly about two miles from sbore, where
the water is from ten to fourteen fathoms in depth. At the outer limit of the grounds, about ten
miles from shore, we find eighty or ninety fathoms of water. This outer region, however, is
visited only by the tugs, the smaller Mackinac boats fishing closer inshore. The catch consists
chiefly of trout, blackfins, and lawyers.
Passing southward we find the next gill-net ground opposite Sheboygan. This ground
extends from two and one half to eighteen miles from shore, the water varying from twelve to
sixty or seventy fathoms in depth. This ground was abandoned in 18GC on account of the scarcity
of fish, but a few years later, fishing being resumed, the yield was as large as, or larger than, ever
before known.
The most northerly pound-net gi-oiuid on this section of coast is located at Jacksonport.
The grounds arc situated a little to the southward of the village, and the nets arc usuallj' set
about a mile from shore. At Whitefish Bay, about seven miles south, is one of the oklest and
best known whitefish grounds on the lake. The bottom here is ridgy, clay and gravel alternating
in furrows. This kind of bottom is believed to be that most frequently visited by whitefish.
The next pound net ground to the southward is located between Two Creeks and Manitowoc,
and between the shore and tlie outer limit of the great Two Bivers gill-net ground. The bottom
124 FISHING-GEOUNDS OF KORTH AMEIUCA.
is generally sandy and the maximum dei)tli of water not more than six or seven fatlioms. In
1879 thirty-three pounds were situated here.
Another pound-net ground is located about thirteen miles north of Port Washington, opposite
the small village called Amsterdam. The ground extends about four miles north and south.
The bottom is everywhere sandy. The pounds are usually .set in from twenty-five to sixty feet
of water. Pound lishing was first introduced here iu 1SG2.
At Oostburg there is a pound-net ground extending along six or seven miles of shore. The
outside nets are located about a mile ft-om shore.
At Port Washington the nets are usually set in from thirty to fifty-five feet of water, the
majority being iu about forty-five feet.
There are no shoals or reefs in the immediate vicinity of Jacksonport, but at a distauce of
tweuty-five miles there is an extensive shoal which was formerly a very famous trout ground. It
is now seldom visited.
PoKT Washington to South Chicago.— The most important gill net grounds within these
limits are in the vicinity of Milwaukee. The fishermen set their nets in a southerly and
southeasterly direction from Milwaukee from ten to forty miles, northward to northeastward
forty to ninety miles, and eastward from fifteen to fifty miles. The 'principal outside ground is
the Big IJeef, which is situated directly opposite Milwaukee, at a distance of about forty miles,
but runs in a southeasterly and northwesterly direction, so that its most northerly limit is
only about fifteen miles off shore opposite Port Washington. Inside of this reef and only about
six miles from shore there is another productive ground.
During summer the fishermen go to the outside reef, but in the fall, when the fish are
spawning, they visit the inner one. Mr. Schultz, of Milwaukee, states that there are apparently
less fish on the outer reef than there T/^ere twenty-five or twenty- six years ago, but that there has
been no perceptible diminution on the other portions of the grouuds.
The gill-net grounds at Eacine extend from Wind Point, a short distance north of the city, to
about four miles .south of the city. The nets are usually set at distances of from three to twenty
miles from shore, the water varying iu dejjth from ten to seventy-five fathoms. The greater
portion of the fishing, however, is done in water about twenty fathoms deep and from six to ten
miles from shore. The catch consists principally of whitefish, trout, and lawyers, and rarely a
few other kinds of no commercial iinportauce.
We find the next gill-net ground about three miles south of Kenosha. The southern portion
of this ground is about fifteen miles distant from shore. The boat fishermen fish from twelve to
sixteen miles from shore, but the tugs sometimes go as far as twenty miles. At the outer limit of
the ground the water is about seventy-five fathoms deep.
In the vicinity of Milwaukee the only pound-net station is in Whitefish Uay, a short distance
north of the city. Only two nets were in use there in 1S79.
In the vicinity of AVaukegan ])(Mnids are set along the sandy beach for a distance of about
twelve miles, the northern limit of the ground being about nine miles north of the city. The
bottom slopes gently from the shore, and the character of the ground is such that there is no
ditUculty in diiving the stakes firmly. The quantity of fish taken here is about one-fourth less
than it was twenty years ago. In 1879 twenty-nine nets were located on different parts of tliis
ground.
At Chicago a few nets are set directly off the mouth of the river in comparatively shallow
water, and at South Chicago also the pounds are located very near shore.
LAKE MICHIGAN. 125
South Chicago to Sal'gatuck. — There are no fisbiDg-gromuls at the head of Lake
Michigan, between South Chicago aiul Michigan City. Between Michigan City and Saint Joseph
the gill-net grounds are situated a long distance from shore. In summer the fishermen
commoidy go seven to fifteen miles from shore, and in winter much farther. The water, however,
on these grounds is comi^aratively shallow, at a distance of twenty miles being not more than
twenty-eight fathoms. The bottom is principally sandy, but clay and gravel jiredominate in some
places. From New IJuflalo northward the grounds curve gradually outward, the outer limit
opposite Saint Joseph being from eight to twelve miles in summer, and in winter from fourteen
to twenty miles. Beyond Saint Joseph the outer boundary curves iuward again, until at South
Haven it is quite near shore. Although the distance to which the boats go is very great, the
water is not deep at the outer limit, being scarcely more than sixty fathoms. A few miles south
of Saugatnck and comi^aratively near shore there is a whitefish spawning-ground, which for a
long tjme has been very productive. In 1879 the fishing at this point proved almost a failure.
With the exception of this ledge, the bottom is generally sandy or clayey, and the fishermen set
their nets almost anywhere in certain depths with equally good success. One fisherman stated
that he had fished with his boat to a distance of twenty-five miles due west from Saint Joseph,
but it is certainly dangerous for the fishermen to go such distances in small boats, although the
steam-tugs, of course, can safely go much farther.
Hook-fishing is carried on on the same grounds opposite Saint Joseph.
In former years seining was carried ou to a considerable extent on this coast, but at the
present time the fish do not come inshore. It is supposed that the foulness of the rivers has
driven them into deeper water.
The pound-net grounds of this section extend from a few miles south of Michigan City to New
Buffalo. All the nets are set close inshore, in water from twenty-five to fifty-two feet deep.
The bottom consists of hard saud, and is very suitable for the driving of stakes.
Satjgatuck to Manistee. — From Saugatuck northward the grounds gradually extend
outward, and at Grand Haven it is not an unusual occurrence for a boat to go out thirty miles.
North of Grand Haven the outer boundaiy again bends inward, and at AVhitehall boats usually
fish not further than from two to four miles from shore. The most productive parts of this ground
are said to be at Whitehall and Muskegon, but as there are no good shipping facilities at these
points, very little fishing is done. No particular kind of bottom is sought for by the gill-netters,
the depth of water appearing to be a more important consideration. It is supposed that in cold
weather the fish pass out into deeper water, as it is found necessary in winter to go a much longer
distance from shore than in summer iu order to find profitable giounds.
At Peutwater most of the gill-net fishing is prosecuted iu about forty fathoms of water,
though the fishermen occasionally go as far as fifteen miles from shore, where the water is
seventy or seventy-five fathoms iu depth. These grounds are considered to be less productive
and to have been greatly damaged by mill refuse. At Ludington most of the fish are taken at
a distance of about ten miles from shore, but northward the outer limit of the ground gradually
comes nearer and nearer shore. The most productive portion of this ground is at Big Point
Sable, although even here fish are much less abundant than formerly. In 1875 the firm of
Wilson & Brothers had a line of gill-nets iu use here, which was about eight miles in length.
But little gillnet fishing is carried on at Manistee. A few boats fish here in from nine to
forty fathoms of water, the outer limit of the ground being about eight miles from the shore.
126 FISIIING-GKOUNDS OF NOKTU AMERICA.
There arc but few iiouiuliiet stations aloug this whole section of coast. A short distance on
either side of Big Point Sable six pounds were established in 1879, set close inshore, in from
thirty to forty feet of water. A short distance from Ludiugton one pound is in use.
Manistee to Cboss Village, iNCLUDiNa Little and Gkand Teaveese Bays and
Fox Islands.— The most southerly gill-net grounds of this section, of any importance, are situated
ou the west shore of Grand Traverse Bay between Cat-Head Point and Sutton's Point. Of these
the most noted are at the entrance of Grand Traverse Bay, where vast numbers of blacklius are
taken. One of the greatest spawniug-grounds in the lake is situated off Light-house Point to the
eastward and northeastward, but from its position it is so exposed to the winds, and the bottom
is also so rocky, that no fishing can be done. South of New Mission Point there are no fisheries in
Grand Traverse Bay, on the west shore, except in Sutton's Bay, where large quantities of herring
are taken. On the east shore there is but one fishery, which is situated a little to the north of
Torchlight Lake.
The most southerly pound-net station of this section is at Good Harbor Bay, where, in 1879,
two nets were located. In Grand Traverse Bay there are several important stations, the one
most worthy of notice being in Northport Bay. Six nets were in use here in 1879. Just north
of Northport Point we find three more nets. At Hog Island, near the head of the west arm of
Grand Traverse Bay, there is one pound-net station where one net is located. North of Graud
Traverse, between Petoskey and Cross Village, there are three pound-net stations. Two are
located on the north shore of Little Traverse Bay, and one farther northward near its mouth.
Five nets in all were employed at these stations iu 1879.
Important gill-net grounds extend from Charlevoix to Cross Village. The outer limit of the
ground is about 4 miles from shore. Fishing is carried on at all seasons. The maximum depth
of water is about 45 fathoms. The bottom is rocky and clayey.
Off the east shoi-e of North Mauitou Island there is a small gill-net ground, wliicli is visited
by three fishermen. The water varies from thirty to sixty fathoms in depth. The bottom is clay.
Due east of South Mauitou Island, a distance of about three miles, there is one pound net
station.
Gill-net grounds extend about South Fox Island to the outer limit of the great sandy shoal
which exists there. The fishermen fish on the north and east shores of Fox Island iu summer,
but iu winter usually fish most extensively on the west shore. Between the two islands two
pound-nets are located.
Ckoss Village to Lake Huron.— Between Cross Village and Point Waugoshance there
are a few i)ouiul-net stations, but in 1879 the fishery proved almpst a failure. The shore is too
rocky and exposed for successful fisheries of this sort. Two i)ound nets are set to the northward
of Wang'oshance, a few miles cast of old Fort IMackinac.
21. LAKE HURON.
Straits of Mackinac to Alcona.— Veiy little fishing is done ou the section of coast
between Point Waugoshance and Thunder Bay Point. In Hammond's Bay, near the eastern
entrance of the Straits of JMackinac, there are eleven pound nets.
The Alpena gill-net grounds are located east and north of North Point as lar as, and beyond.
Middle Island, the outer limit being about fifteen miles from shore. There is no gill-net fishing in
Thunder Bay proi)cr. It is estimated that the abuiubmce of fish here is only one third what it
was ten vears ago.
LAKE HURON. 127
Tbe poiiiid-iK't stations in Thunder Bay are situated on the uoitb shore, between North Point
and Wbitetish Point. Fifteen nets were located here in ]879. On the shore at the north of
Sulphur Island, in four or five fathoms of water, there are fonr nets. The bottom on this ground
is very bard and stony.
Alcona to Point avx Barques, including Saginaw Bay and the Charity Islands.
Gill-net fishing is not prosecuted to any considerable extent on this shore. The pound-net fishing
of Saginaw Bay is very important. The shores of the bay are very sandy, and great shoals extend
from the shore, upon which pounds can be established very firmly. The most westerly station is
at Ottawa Point, near the mouth of the bay, where two nets are located. Three other stations
on the west shore of the bay arc located at Gravelly Point, Point aux Gies, and south of the
shoal at the mouth of Eifle Eiver. At the head of the bay the stations are very numerous.
They are set at approximately regular intervals along the whole shore between Nayaliquing Point
and Fish Point. Not less than one hundred nets were in use within these limits during the year
of the canvass.
The sandy shoal, on which the nets at the head of the bay are placed, extends out a great
distance from the west shore, and in this part of the bay fonr lines of nets, comprising in all about
fourteen, are located at distances of from six to eight miles from land. Three other stations are
located respectively at North Island, the main shore about four miles noith of Sebewaing, and at
about two miles east of North Miueshas Island, at the edge of the inner shoal. The most easterly
shoal occupied by pounds is that making off north of Sandy Point. Four lines of nets were in
use here in 1879. Thi'ee lines of nets are also located on the shoals which extend from the Charity
Islands, situated in the middle of Saginaw Bay near the mouth.
The Charity Islands fisheries are considered to be the most profitable on the whole chain
of lakes. On the north and northeast portion of these grounds, however, the nets are greatly
exposed to storms, and heavy losses frequently occur.
Seine fisheries are still carried on quite extensively in this district. At the head of the bay,
on the west shore, there are several important seining reaches. The principal ones are situated,
(1) near the mouth of the Saginaw River on the west side of the mouth of the Ogahkaning River,
(2) midway between the Opinkawniug and Saginin Rivers, (3) midway between the Rifle and Pine
Rivers, and (4) on either side of Gravelly Point. The last three fisheries are carried on by the
Indians. The one between Rifle and Pine Rivers is the oldest and best known seine-fishery in
Saginaw Bay.
There are no gill-net fisheries in Saginaw Bay proper, but to the northward of Point aux
Barques and Point au Sable there are several important grounds. Some gill-netting is still carried
on in winter, but this branch of the fisheries has declined very much within the last ten years.
The same may also be said of the seine-fisheries, but on the other hand the number of pound-
nets has considerably increased within that time.
The winter fishing in Saginaw Bay is very important, and gives employment to a large number
of men. Not only gill-nets and pound-nets, but hooks and .spears are used, the last being by
far the most convenient and effective device for the capture of fish. The location of the spearing
grounds varies according to the season and the thickness of the ice. The fishery is usually carried
on, however, outside of a line drawn from Point aux Gres to the west shore of Sebewaing. During
a profitable season quite a village springs up on the ice, and a variety of sni)plies are brought out
by the buyers of the fish. It is stated, however, that the fishery is becoming less and less profitable
every year. A few years ago the sjiearing was so profitable that a supply of fish could always be
128 ^ nsniNG-GROUXDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
depeuded upon, but the experience of the last few years seems to show that the decrease has been
so great that dealers will no longer depend upon obtaining a supply from the spearmen.
Besides the bay fisheries, there are quite a number of pounduets located in Saginaw River,
extending from its mouth about twenty miles inland. They are set in from ten to twenty-four
feet of water, and large quantities of fish, especially pike, perch, and suckers, are taken. The river
fishery differs somewhat from the bay fishery, inasmuch as it is only prosecuted in winter.
At the mouth of the Ogahkaniug River, a pond about two acres in extent has been constructed
for the purpose of keeping fish when caught iu great abundance, so that when the amount of fish
taken is small the fishermen may still be able to supply the demand of the dealers. The pond is
now only six feet in depth, but the owners propose dredging it and also extending its area.
Point aux Baeques to Port Hukon.— Gilluet fishing is prosecuted all along the shore
of Lake Huron from Point aux Barques to Port Huron, the principal stations being at Port
Austin, Grindstone City, Huron City, Port Hope, Sand Beach, White Lake, Forestville, Port
Sanilac, and Lexington. Fishing is carried on more or less extensively at all these points, but
the most important are Sand Beach and Port Hope. The grounds extend from five to twenty-five
miles from shore. The catch consists mainly of whitefish and trout.
There are no pound-nets in use between Point aux Barques and Port Huron, the shore being
much exposed to the violence of storms. There are many seining reaches all along this section of
coast, but the fishing is not carried on so extensively as formerly.
Port Huron to Detroit, including Saint Clair River and Lake Saint Clair.— All
fishing in Saint Clair River is carried on by means of seines. The grounds extend along
twenty miles of the river, and there are ia all five fisheries on tlie American side. Seines are
also employed along the shore of the lake, but not so extensively as formerly. The season opens
about the middle of May and lasts until August.
Fishing-Grounds on the Detroit River. — The fisheries in Detroit River, witii the
exception of those carried on by means of a few fykes and "baby" pounds, is prosecuted by the
aid of seines about sixty fathoms in length. There are thirty fisheries on the river between
Windmill Point at its head and Bar Point at its mouth. They are located both on the American
and Canadian shores, and on the islands which occupy the central portion of the river. The most
northerly are situated at Isle a la Peche, at the head of the river. South of this, on the
American side, there are two more reaches. On the east shore of Belle Isle there are three
fisheries, and on the west shon^ one. South of Belle Isle there are no more until we have passed
the city of Detroit. Off Fort Wayne, on the American side, there are four fisheries, and a little
to the northward, opposite the town of Sandwich, on the Canadian side, one. The next five
are on the Caiiadian side, the most northerly being about a mile north of Sandwich. On the west
shore of Fighting Island there are five fisheries, and on the east shore of Grassy Island two.
On the iu)rtheastern shore of Grosse Isle we find three fisheries; at Stony Island, further to the
south, one, and at Sugar Island still another. The latter is the most southerly ground on the
river. ^lany of these reaches are located on the mud banks that make oft" from the shore, but in
sonui places the bottom is sandy and stony. The catch consists of whitefish and pike. A few days
betbre the whitefish appear there is usually a run of herring, and a smaller mesh in the pockets of
some of the seines is used for the i)urpose of taking them.
22. LAKE ERIE.
Mouth oe the Detroit River to Port Clinton. — Along this section of .shore fishing
is prosecuted almost entirely witli pound-nets. Stations extend without interruption from Bar
Point, at the mouth of the Detroit River, to I'ort Clinton. Between these two points, in 1879,
LAKE ERIE. 129
there were uot less tliau 425 pouud-uets. Each company's uets are set iu a line, the outer
tiet being often four or five miles from shore. The fisheries of Toledo extend from Teal Ground
to Locust Point.
Off Toussaint, about ten miles west of Port Clinton and three miles from shore, there is
a gill-net ground of considerable importance. The bottom here varies greatly, iu some portions
being rocky and in others uiuddy or sandy. The water at the outer limit of the ground is
about twenty-eight fathoms in depth.
Some seining is prosecuted in and about the mouths of the various rivers along this stretch
of sliore. At Portage Eiver it is carried on only in winter. A few fyke-nets are set in Portage
and Four Eivers as well as in some of the bayous, but the fishery is not important, although
considerable quantities of inferior varieties of fish are taken.
Port Clinton to Vermillion. — The pound-net grounds continue without iuteri-uptiou
along this section of shore. The fishing-grounds of Sandusky and vicinity may be divided into
four great districts, each partaking of some peculiarity not shared bj- the others. They are
generally spoken of as the Cedar Point fisheries, the bay fisheries, the island fisheries, and the
main shore fisheries. The Cedar Point fisheries are the oldest and most important. They begin
at Cedar Point, at the entrance of Sandusky Bay, and extend about six miles towards Huron.
Thei'e are sixty-six nets iu this district. Many of the outside nets are five and one-half miles from
shore, the nearest being about one-half mile. They are set in from twenty to thirty feet of water,
the average depth being perhaps about twenty-eight feet. The shore as well as the bottom of
the fishing-ground is sandy. The catch here consists largely of herring, but great quantities of
whitefish are also taken.
The bay fisheries are prosecuted not only with pounds but also with fykes and seines, the
stations and reaches being scattered along both shores. The water in both the upper and lower
bays being shallow, nets having a depth of five to twelve feet only are used.
The main shore fisheries extend from Sugar Bluff to the entrance of Sandusky Bay, the
pound-net stations being scattered regularly along the shore. They are set in from twelve to
thirty-five feet of water. The bottom is generally clayey. This fishery is noted for the large
catch of herring, the next fish in importance being the catfish.
What are known as the island fisheries are situated about North, Middle, and South Bass
Islands aud Kelley's Island. On the North Bass Island there are but seven nets, though north-
westward from the island there is an extensive whitefish spawning-ground. On the north of the
island it is impossible to drive stakes on account of the rocky bottom. At Middle Bass Island
there are twelve nets, many of them being set in thirty-five feet of water. The fisheries at South
Bass Island are the most important of the group. On the shoals aiul reefs about the islands
there are extensive and important whitefish spawning-grounds. The most productive of them,
however, are those north of North Bass Island, in Canadian waters. At Kelley's Island there are
twenty-three pounds, and the fishery would be very profitable were it not that vessels run through
aud destroy the nets. The principal fish taken on these grounds are herring, whitefish, and black
bass. The seine fishing in this locality is quite extensive and important. The principal grounds
are located about Willow Point. In Sandusky Bay seine fishing is carried on all winter. The
principal grounds are near the mouth of the Sandusky River.
North and northeast of Kelley's Island there are two reefs, which are frequented by sturgeon,
and about two hundred gill-nets are set here aniuially.
The pouud-net grounds of Huron extend about five miles east and the same distance west of
the mouth of the Huron Eiver. In 1879 seventy-four jiouuds were located iu this district. Five;
SEC III 9
130 FISHING GEO [JNDS OF NOItTH A.MEEICA.
miles east of Ilurou there is a small wbitefisb spawning- grouud, but the bottom is very rocky ami
only one net is located there. The pounds are set in from twenty-two to forty-two feet of water,
most of them being from seventy-five rods to three and one-half miles from shore. The "driving
bottom" in most portions of the Huron grounds is excellent, the outer portions being better in this
respect than the inside grounds. The clay bottom of the lake is covered by layers of sand forming
the best kind of "holding ground." The catch at Huron consists chiefly of herring; in fact, these
grounds are considered the most favorable for herring fisheries of any on the lake. The general
fishery is also very profitable, there never having been a failure since it was begun. The
migratory varieties, such as whitefish, are taken only while passing, but herring and blue pike
are always present in abundance. Such fish as go towards the head of the lake to spawn
sometimes fail to reach that locality, and consequently there is liable to be a failure there, but
small quantities, at least, are always caught on the Huron grounds. Very extensive herring
spawning-gi'ounds are situated here, and this fact possibly accounts for the extraordinary
numbers of this fish which are taken here in autumn.
The Vermillion fishing-grounds occupy but a very small extent of shore, the nets being set at
but one station an<l close together about four miles west of the month of Vermillion Eiver. Nets
are set in from thirty to fortj' feet of water, and from two and one-half to three and one-half miles
from shore. The bottom is all clay, and very favorable both for driving the stakes and holding
them firmly.
Vermillion to Conneaut. — The most westerly pound-net grounds of this section of shore
extend from Vermillion to the mouth of Black Eiver, a distance of about eleven miles. The next
station to the eastward, known as the Dover Bay fishery, is about six miles east of Black Eiver.
Only twelve pounds are set here in water from twenty to forty feet deep, the inner pounds being
about seventy rods from shore, the outer about one and one-fourth miles. The bottom is sandj'
and the "holding ground" very good. Passing easterly we find the next stations between
Chagrin Eiver, near Willoughby, and Grand Eiver, near Paiuesville. Thirteen nets were used here
in 1879. The only other station in this section is situated about three miles east of the mouth
of Grand Eiver, where there are four nets. The bottom, as at other jioints along this shore,
is sandy and gravelly.
Between Ashtabula and Conneaut we find important gill-net grounds extending twenty-five
miles from shore. In spring the fishermen do not go farther than twelve miles from shore, but in
summer they go to the outer limit of the ground, about twenty-five miles distant. Large quantities
of whitefish and blue inke are taken on these grounds. The fishermen are well acquainted with
the migrations of the difterent species and follow them from shoal into deep water and vice versa.
There are two seining reaches at the mouth of Conneaut Harbor, which are visited for a short
time in the spring and in some years a few days in autumn.
Conneaut to Buffalo. — The fishing-grounds of Erie extend from about eight miles west of
the "Head" to the western part of the ])eninsula encircling Erie Bay and pass in a northeasterly
direction, the distance from shore varying from four to fifteen miles according to the season. The
greater portion of the fishing is prosecuted in from twelve to eighteen fathoms of water. In the
spring the fish come from the westward and the grounds earliest visited are west of the " Head," but
the best fishing is always north-northeast of the mouth of the harbor and about ten miles out.
No considerable quantity of whitefish is taken within four miles of shore. The abundance of fish
on the Erie grounds is thought to be increasing. The largest quantities of whitefish are taken in
Jiiiic and.Tulyand in the fall about the middle of < )ctober. Later than this. <|iiantities of i)ike are
LAKE OXTAEIO. 131
takeu ill smallmesli iiets, set three or Ibui miles iiom sLore. rouiidijets are not allowed uearer
shore thau three miles, so that all fishins is done with gill-nets and hooks.
Many years ago Barcelona was the most important fishing town on Lake Erie, but at present
the grounds are almost entirely depleted. The grounds at Dunkirk were also famous for a long
time, but very little fishing is prosecuted in that locality at present.
23. LAKE ONTARIO.
There are no important fishing- grounds on the south shore of Lake Ontario between the Niagara
Eiver and Port Ontario, and very little fishing is carried on along this shore. The only important
grounds are located at the east end of the lake and on the north shore within Canadian limits.
There are small and unimportant gill-net grounds at Poultneyville, Fairhaven, Oak Orchard,
Wilson, Braddock's Bay, Charlotte, and Cole's Landing, near Oswego, where a limited amount of
fishing is carried on, the products of which are principally for local consumption. A few small
seines are also employed along this stretch of coast for the same purpose.
At Port Ontario the seining-grounds begin a mile and a half north of Salmon Eiver and extend
along the shore towards Sturgeon Point, a distance of about six miles. Outside are located the
gill net grounds, the nets being in from sixty to two hundred feet of water, and from one and a
quarter to seven miles from land.
Neat Cape Vincent one pound is located, set in about twenty feet of water, and at Bear Point
there are two in eighteen feet.
Along the entire shore from Port Ontario to Amherst Island, there are numerous gill-net
grounds, famous localities being about the Duck Islands and Torch Islands, Long and Bear Points.
This whole stretch of shore also furnishes suitable grounds for traps and fykes, some localities
being particularly suited for bull-head fishing. Southwest of Point Peninsula there is a famous
white-fish ground. Traps and fykes are set along the Saint Lawrence Eiver, on the American
side, for a considerable distance.
Sacket's Harbor grounds are situated about Black Eiver Bay, Chaumont Bay, and in the lake
oft' Grenadier and Fox Islands, Stony Point, etc. The principal fishery, however, is located at Duck
Island, in Canadian waters. These grounds are considered the most profitable on the entire lake.
E. — THE GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF FRESH-
WATER FOOD-FISHES IN THE SEVERAL HYDRO-
GRAPHIC BASINS OF THE UNITED STATES.
By David S. Jordan.
The following collectiou of partial fauual lists has beeu prepared for the purpose of iiulicatiug
the uumber of species of fishes suitable for food occurring in the several hydrographic basins of
the United States.
GEOGEAPHICAL LISTS OF THE INLAND rOOD-PISHES OF THE UNITED STATES,
24. THE GREAT LAKES.
Lota maculosa. Lawyer.
Haploidonotus grunniens. Sheep's-head.
Percina caprodes.
Perca americana. Yellow Perch. Perch.
Stizostediou canadense. Wall-eyed Pike.
Stizostedion vitreuui. Sanger.
Eoccus chrysops. White Bass.
Micropterus salmoides. Blact Bass.
Micropterus dolomiei. Small-mouth Black
Bass.
Pomoxys sparoides. Bar-fish.
Ambloplites rupestris. Eock Bass.
Chjenobryttus antistius.
Lepomis cyanellus.
Lei)omis pallidus.
Lepomis megalotis.
Lepomis gibbosus. Common Sunfish.
Esox nobilior. Muskellunge.
Esox lucius. Pike.
Esox vermiculatus.
Percopsis guttatus.
Coregonns quadrilateralis. Meuomonee White-
fish.
Coregouus labradoricus.
Coregonns clupeiformis. Whiteflsh.
Coregonns Artedi. Lake Herring. Cisco.
Coregouus Hoyi. Cisco.
Coregouus nigripinnis. Blue-fin.
Coregonns tullibee.
Thymallus tricolor. Grayling.
Salvelinus naniaycush. Lake Trout. Mackinaw
Trout.
Salvelinus siscowet. Siscowet.
Salvelinus fontinalis. Brook Trout.
Hyodou tergisus. Moon-eye.
Clupea vernalis. Saw Belly.
Semotilus corporalis.
Nocomis bi guttatus.
Kotemigouus chrysoleucus.
Xotropi.s inegalops. Shiner.
Moxostoma carpio.
Moxostoma macrolepidotum. Eed Horse.
Moxostoma aureolum. Mullet Sucker.
Moxostoma anisura.
Moxostoma velatum.
Minytrema melanops.
Erimyzon sucetta. Creek-fish.
Catostomus teres. Common Sucker.
Catostomus catostomus. Long-snouted Sucker.
Carpiodes cyprinus. Carp Sucker.
Ictalurns punctatus. Channel Cat.
Amiurus nigricans, (xreat Lake Catfish.
133
134
FISHING GROUNDS OF NOllTII AMERICA.
Aniiiinis iiatalis.
Amiurus vulgaris.
Amiiiriis nebulosus. Bull-bead Catfish.
Amiurus inclas. Bullhead.
Xotnrus flavus.
25.
Auyuilhi rostrata. Eel.
Amia calva. Dogfish.
Lepidosteus platystomus. Gar Pike.
Lepidosteus osseus. Billfish. Gar Pike.
Acipenser rnbieundus. Stnrgoon.
THE LAKES OF MAINE.
Lota uiaculosa. Eel-pout.
Perca auioricana. Perch.
Lepomis auritus.
Lcpomis gibbosus.
Corcgoiuis labradoricus.
Salveliuus iiama.vcush. Togue. Lunge.
Salveliiius oijua.ssa.
Notropis uiegalops.
Erimyzon sucetta.
Catostomus teres.
Auiinrus nebulosus.
Blue back Trout.
26. THE CONNECTICUT RIVER BASIN
Lota maculosa. Eel-pout. fc'emotilus bullaris. Chub.
Perca americaua. Perch. . Xoteuiigouus chrysoleucus. Shiner.
Lepomis auritus. Suufish. Notropis megalops. Dace.
Lepomis gibbosus. Suufish. Roach. Erimyzon sucetta. Sucker.
Esox reticulatus. Pickerel. Catostomus teres. Sucker.
Esox americanus. PickereL Amiurus catus. Bull-head.
Salvelinus foiitinalis. Trout. Anguilla rostrata. Eel.
27. THE HUDSON RIVER BASIN.
Semotilus bullaris. Dace. Horned Dace.
Perca americana. Perch.
Lepomis auritus. Suufish.
Lepomis gibbosus. Pumpkin Seed. Sunfish.
Roach.
Esox reticulatus. Pickerel.
Esox americanus. Brook Pickerel.
Salvelinus fontinalis. Trout.
Exoglossum maxillingua.
Semotilus corporalis. Dace. Horned Dace.
Notemigonus chrysoleucus. Shiner.
Xotropis mega]o[)s. Horned Dace.
Erimyzon sucetta. Sucker.
Catostomus teres. Sucker.
Amiurus catus. Bull-head.
Anguilla rostrata. Eel.
Acipenscr oxyrhynchus. Sturgeon.
Perca americana. Perch.
Roccus lineatus. Rockfish.
Roccus americanus. White Perch.
]\resagoiiistius chaitodon. Banded Sunfish.
Enneacanthus obesus. Spotted Sunfish.
Enneacanthus simulans.
Pomoxys sparoides. Goggle-eyed Perch.
Acantharchus pomotis. Mud Sunfish.
Lepomis auritus. River Sunfish
Rudder. Black-eared Sunfish.
Lepomis pallidus. Blue SunCsh.
Lepomis gibbosus. Sunfish.
Micropterus Dolomiei. Black Bass.
28. THE DELAWARE RIVER BASIN.
Esox reticulatus. Pike.
Esox americanus. Ditch Pike.
Salvelinus fontinalis. Trout.
Semotilus corporalis. Chub.
Semotilus bullaris. Chub.
Notemigonus chrysoleucus. Roach.
Xotropis megalops. Redfin.
Erimyzon sucetta. Mullet.
Ruddy Catostomus teres. Sucker.
Amiurus albidus.
Amiurus nebulosus. Catfish.
Anguilla rostrata. Eel.
Lepiilosteus osseus. Gar Pike.
DlSTEIBUTIOy OF FEESH-WATEIl FOOD FISHES.
135
29. THE SUSaUEHANNA KIVER BASIN.
Pei'ciua caprodes.
Perca americana. Perch.
Leponiis auritus. Pumpkiu Seed.
Lepomis gibbosus. Pumpkiu Seed.
E.SOX reticulatus. Pike.
Esox americanus. Pickerel.
Salveliuus foutinalis. Trout.
Semotiliis corporali.s. Chub.
Seiiiotihis bullari.s. Fall fish.
Xocouiis biguttatus. Horned Dace.
Xotemigouus chrysoleucus. Shiuer.
Notropis megalops.
Exoglossuui maxilliugua. Cut-lips.
Erimyzou sucetta. Sucker.
Catostomus uigricans.
Catostomus teres.
Carpiodes cyprinus.
Amiurus albidus. Catfish.
Amiurus lophius. Catfish.
Auiiurus uebulosus. Catfish.
Auguilla rostrata. Eel.
Lepidosteus osseus. Gar.
30. THE POTOMAC RIVER BASIN.
Perciua caprodes.
Perca americaua. Perch.
Pomoxys si)aroides.
Lepomis auritus. Bream.
Lepomis gibbosus.
Esox reticulatus. Pike.
Esox americanus. Pickerel.
Salvelinus foutinalis. Trout.
Dorosoma Cepediauum. Mud Shad.
Cnrassius auratus. Gold-fish.
Semotilu.s corj)oralis.
Semotilus bullaris.
Nocomis biguttatus.
Notemigoiius chrysoleucus. Shiuer.
Ijj'otropis megalops.
Moxostoma macrolepidotum. Mullet Sucker.
Erimyzon sucetta.
Catostomus nigricans.
Catostomus teres.
Amiurus albidus. Catfish.
Amiurus catus. Catfish.
Amiurus lojihius. Catfish.
Auguilla rostrata. Bel.
Lepidosteus osseus. Gar Pike.
31. THE NEUSE RIVER BASIN.
Perca americaua.
Micropterus salmoides. Chub.
Centrarchus macropterus.
Pomoxys sparoides.
Pomoxys annularis.
Ambloplites rupestris.
Chffiuobryttus gulosus.
Acantharchus pomotis.
Lepomis auritus.
Lepomis gibbosus.
Esox reticulatus.
Esox americanus.
Salvelinus foutinalis. Trout.
Dorosoma Cepediauum.
Semotilus corporalis.
^N'ocomis biguttatus.
Xotemigouus americanus.
Xotropis megaloijs.
Moxostoma macrolepidotum.
Moxostoma crassilabre.
Moxostoma cerviuuui. Jump Eocks.
Moxostoma album.
Moxostoma velatum.
Moxostoma papillosum.
Erimyzon sucetta.
Catostomus teres.
Amiurus uiveiventris.
Amiurus natalis.
Amiurus uebulosus.
Amiurus platycephalus.
Auguilla rostrata. Eel.
Amia calva. Grindle.
136
nsrilNG GROUNDS OF NOIITII AMKKICA.
Micropteius salmoides.
Ceutrarchus macropterus.
Poinoxys sparoides.
CbiBuobryttus gulosus.
Lepouiis auritus.
Lei>omis pallidus.
Leponiis gibbosus.
Esox reticulatus.
Esox ainericauus.
Salvelinns fontinalis.
Dorosoma Cepedianiim.
Semotilns corporalis.
Nocomis biguttatus.
Xotemigonns americ.inus.
32. THE- SANTEE EIVER BASIN.
Moxostoma cervinum.
Moxostoma album.
Moxostoma velatum.
3Ioxostoma coiegouus.
Moxostoma papillosum.
Minytrema melanops.
Erimyzon sucetta.
Catostomus teres.
Amiurus platycephalus.
Amiurus brunneus.
Anguilla rostrata.
Amia calva.
Lepidosteus osseus.
Micropterus .salmoides.
Micropterus Uolomiei.
Ceutrarchus macropterus.
Pomoxys sparoides.
ChaiDobryttus gulosus.
Lepomis auritus.
Lepomis pallidus.
Lepomis megalotis.
Lepomis gibbosus.
Esox reticulatus.
Dorosoma Cepediauum.
33. THE SAVANNAH RIVER BASIN.
Semotilus corporalis.
Notemigonus americauus.
Moxostoma cervinum.
Moxostoma papillosum.
Catostomus nigricans.
Catostomus teres.
Ictalurus punctatus.
Amiurus brunneus.
Anguilla rostrata.
Amia calva.
Lepidosteus o.sseus.
34. THE SAINT JOHN'S RIVER BASIN.
Micropterus .salmoides. Trout.
Centrarclius macroi>terus. •
Pomoxys sparoides. Speckled Tercli.
Cliaiuobryttus gulosus. Warmouth Perch.
Lepomis punctatus. Chinquapin Perch.
Lepomis auritus. Ked-bellied Perch.
Lepomis pallidus. Coi)i)erlu'ad TJream.
Lepomis Ilolbrooki.
Lepomis gibbosus. Bream.
Esox reticulatus. Jack.
Lepidosteus os.seus. Gar Pike.
Dorosoma Cepediauum. Stink Shad.
Xotemigouus americauus. Silver-fish.
Erimyzon Goodei. Sucker (Goode's Sucker).
Ictalurus punctatus. Channel Cat. Small-mouth
Cat.
Amiurus uigricaus.
Amiurus niveiventris.
Amiurus marmoratus.
Amiurus erebennus. Speckled Oat (Goode's Cat).
Anguilla rostrata. Eel.
Aniiii calva. Mudfish.
Manv sea fish run \\]t the river far above brackisli water.
DISTEIBUTI02> OF FliESH-WATER FOOD FISHES.
137
Micropterus salruoides.
Micropterus Dolouiiei.
Centi'arcbus macropterus.
Pomoxys sparoides.
Auibloplites rupestris.
Chaenobryttus gnlosus.
Lei3omis pallidus.
Lepomis megalotis.
Esox reticulatus.
Salvelinus fontinalis.
Hyodon selenops.
35. THE CHATTAHOOCHEE RIVER BASIN.
Clupea chrysocliloris.
Dorosoma Cepedianiini.
Nocomis biguttatus.
Moxostoma macrolepidotum.
Moxostoma cervinum.
Ictalunis punctatus.
Aiuiurus brunneus.
Auguilla rostrata.
Amia calva.
Lepidostens osseus.
36. THE ALABAMA RIVER BASIN.
Haploidouotus grunnieus. Dniin.
Perciua caprodes.
Stizostediou vitreuui.
Micropteru.s salmoides. "Trout."
Micropterus Dolouiiei.
Ceutrarcbus luacropteriis.
Pomoxys sparoides.
Pomoxys auuularis.
Auibloplites rnpestris.
Cba?nobryttus gulosus.
Lepomis auritus.
Lepomis pallidus.
Lepomis megalotis.
Lepomis notatus.
Esox reticulatus.
Clupea chrysochloris.
Dorosoma Cejiediauum.
Hyodon seleuops.
jS"ocomis biguttatus.
Notemigouus clirysoleucus.
Notropis niegalops.
Moxostoma macrolepidotum.
Moxostoma pcecilura.
Miuytrema melauops.
Erimyzou sucetta.
Catostomus nigricans.
Catostomus teres.
Cycleptus elongatus.
Ictiobus cyprinella.
Ictiobus urus.
Ictiobus bubalus.
Ictalurus punctatus.
Amiurus uatalis.
Auguilla rostrata.
Amia calva.
Lepidostens platystomus.
Lepidostens osseus.
37. THE MISSISSIPPI RIVER BASIN.
«. THE LOWER MISSISSIPPI.
Haploidouotus gruuuieus. Gaspergou.
Perciua caprodes.
Stizostediou vitreuui. "Salmon."
Roccus clirj'sops. White Bass.
Roccus interruptus. Yellow Bass.
Micropterus salmoides.
Micropterus Dolomiei.
Ceutrarcbus macropterus.
Pomoxys sparoides.
Pomoxys annularis. Crappy. Sac alai.
Ambloplites rupestris.
Cbaenobryttus gulosus.
Lepomis cyanellus.
Lepomis symmetricus.
Lepomis auritus.
Lepomis pallidus.
Lepomis megalotis.
Leiiomis uotatus.
Lepomis miniatus.
Esox vermiculatus.
Warmouth.
138
FISHING GROUNDS OF NOIITU AMERICA.
Hyoilou tergisiis.
Hyodou selenoiis.
Clupea chrj-sochloiis.
Dorosoma Cepedianum.
Semotilus cori^oralis.
Nocomis biguttatus.
Notemigomis cbrysoleucus.
Notropis megalops.
Moxostoma macrolepidotum.
^loxostoma i^oecilura.
Moxostoma relatum,
Minytrema inelanops.
Erimyzou sucetta.
Catostoruus nigricans.
Catostomus teres.
Cycleptus elongatus.
Ictiobus cyprinella.
Ictiobiis urns.
Ictiobus bubalus.
Carpiodes carpio.
Carpiodes cyprinus.
Ictalurus fiircatus.
Ictalurus punctatus.
Ictalnrus ponderosus.
Amiurus uigricans.
Ainiurus natalis.
Amiurus nebulosus.
Amiurus marmoratus.
Amiurus vulgaris.
Amiurus melas.
Leptops olivaris.
Noturus flavus.
Anguilla rostrata.
Amia calva. Johnny-grindle.
Lepidosteus spatula. Alligator Gar.
Lepidosteus platystomus. Duck-bill Gar.
Lepidosteus ossens. Long-nosed Gar.
Polyodon spathula. Paddle-fish.
Scapbirbynchops platyrhynchus. Shovel -nose
Sturgeon.
Acipenser rnbicundus. Sturgeon.
Lota maculosa. Ling.
b. THE UPPER MISSISSIPPL
Percopsis guttatus.
Haploidonotus grunniens. Sheep's-head. White Coregonus Arledi. Cisco.
Perch. .Black Perch. Drum. Salvelinus fontinalis. Trout.
Percina caprodes. Hyodon alosoides.
Perca americana. Yellow Perch. Ringed Perch. Hyodon tergisus. Moon Eye. Toothed Herring.
Stizostedion canadense. Clupea chrysochloris. Skipjack.
Stizostediou vitreum. Salmon. Wall-eye Pike. Clupea sapidissima. Shad.
Roccus chrysoi)s. White Bass.
Roccus interruptus. Yellow Bass.
Micropterus salmoides. Black Bass.
JMicropterus Dolomiei. Black Bass.
Pomoxys sparoides. Calico Bass. Tin-mouth
Pomoxys annularis. Crappy.
Ambloplites rupestris. Goggle Eye.
Chseuobryttus antistius. Bigmouth Suufish.
Lepomis cyanellus.
Lepomis pallidus. Common Sunflsh.
Lepomis megalotis. Long-ear Sunfish.
Lepomis gibbosus. Yellow Sunfish.
Sunfish.
Esox nobilior. Muskellunge.
Esox lucius. Pike. Pickerel.
Esox vermiculatus.
Umbra limi. Bastard Dogfish.
Dorosoma Cepedianum. Hickory Shad. Giz-
zard Shad.
Semotilus corporalis. Chub.
Nocomis biguttatus. Horny-head.
Notemigonus cbrysoleucus.
Notropis megalops. Shiner.
Quassilabia lacera. Hare-lip Sucker.
Placopharanx carinatus.
Moxostoma macrolepidotum. Red Horse.
Moxostoma aureolum.
Moxostoma vclatum.
Spotted Minytrema melanops. Spotted Sucker.
Erimyzon sucetta. Sweet Sucker.
Catostomus nigricans. Hog Sucker.
Catostomus teres. White Sucker.
Catostomus ciitostomus.
Cycleptus elongatus. Missouri Sucker. Blue-fish.
DISTEIBUTIO^" OP FKESH-WATER FOOD FISHES.
139
Carpiodes cyprinus. Spear Back. Quill Back.
Oarpiodes carpio. White Carp. Carp Sucker.
Ictiobus bubalus. Stub Nose. Sucker Mouth.
Eiver Buffalo. Black Carp. Slough Buffalo.
Buffalo fish.
Ictiobus urus. Stub Nose. Sucker Mouth. Eiver
Buffalo. Black Carp. Slough Buffalo. Mon-
grel Buffalo.
Ictiobus cyprinella. Stub Nose. Sucker Mouth.
River Buffalo. Black Carp. Slough Buffalo.
Eed-mouth Buffalo.
Ictalurus furcatus. Chuckle-head Cat.
Ictalurus punctatus. Channel Cat.
Amiurus ponderosus. Big Cat.
Amiurus natalis.
A:uiurus vulgaris.
Amiurus uebulosus. Cat-fish. Eastern Bull-
pout. Bullpout.
Amiurus nigricans. ]\Iississippi Cat. Blue-Cat.
Fulton Cat.
Amiurus melas.
Leptopsolivaris. Yellow Cat. Goujon. Bashaw.
Noturus flavus. Stone Cat.
Anguilla rostrata. Eel.
Amia calva. Dogfish.
Lepidosteus spatula. Alligator Gar. Duck
Bill.
Lepidosteus platystomus. Short-nose Gar.
Lepidosteus osseus. Long-nose Gar. Billy
Gar.
Polyodon spatula. Spoon Bill. Paddle-fish.
Duckbill Cat.
Scaphirhynchops platyrhynchus. White Stur-
geon. Shovel-nose Sturgeon.
Acipenser rubicundus. Black Sturgeon. Stone
Sturgeon.
e. THE OHIO EIVEE.
Haploidonotus grunniens.
Percina caprodes.
Stizostedion canadense.
Stizostedion vitreum. Black Salmon. White
Salmon.
Eoccus chrysops. White Bass. Bachelor
Perch.
Micropterus salmoides. Black Bass. Green
Bass.
Micropeterus Dolomiei. Black Bass.
Pomoxys sparoides.
Poraoxys annularis.
Ambloplites rupestris. Eock Bass. Goggle
Eye. Eed eye.
Lepomis cyanellus. Sunflsh.
Lepomis pallidus. Sunflsh.
Lepomis megalotis. Sunflsh.
Esox vermiculatus.
Salvelinus fontinalis.
Hyodou alosoides.
Hyodon tergisus. Tooth Herring.
Clupea sapidissima. Sea Shad. Potomac Shad.
Clupea chrysochloris. Skijyack. Ohio Her-
ring.
Dorosoma Cepedianum. Hickory Shaa.
Semotilus corporalis. Chub. Silversides.
Nocomis biguttatus. Horned Chub.
Notemigonus chrysoleucus.
Notropis megalops.
Quassilabia lacera.
Placopharanx cariuatus.
Moxostoma carpio. Eed Horse.
Moxostoma macrolei)idotum. Eed Horse.
Moxostoma aureolum. Mullet.
Moxostoma anisura.
Moxostoma velatum.
Minytrema melanops.
Erimyzon sueetta. Sucker.
Catostomus nigricans. Sucker.
Catostomus teres. Sucker.
Cycleptus elongatus. Missouri Sucker. Gourd-
seed Sucker.
Carpiodes cyprinus. Carp Sucker. Quill-back.
Carpiodes carpio. Carp Sucker.
Ictiobus cyprinella. Eed-mouth Buffalo.
Ictiobus urus. Mongrel Buffalo.
Ictiobus bubalus. Buffalo.
Ictalurus furcatus.
Ictalurus punctatus. Blue or Channel Cat.
Amiurus nigricans. Mississippi Cat.
Amiurus natalis. Yellow Cat.
Amiurus uebulosus. BuU-heail Cat.
140
nsniNG-GEOUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
Ainiurus xauthocepbalus.
Aiiiiiirus melas.
Leptops olivaris. Mud Cat.
Noturus flavus.
Anguilla rostrata. Black Eel.
Aiiiia calva.
Lota maculosa.
Haploidonotus gruunleus.
I'crciua caprodes.
Stizostedion canadense.
Stizostedion vitreum.
Koccus clirysops.
Micropterus salmoides.
Micropterus Dolomiei.
Pomoxys sparoides.
Pomoxys annularis.
Ambloplites rupestris.
Leponiis cyanellus.
Lepoinis pallidas.
Lei>ouiis uiegalotis.
Esox Incius.
Porcopsis guttatus.
Tliyuiallus tricolor.
Salmo purpuratus.
Hj'odon alosoides.
Ilyodon tergisus.
Dorosouia Cepediauum.
Seniotilus corporalis.
Platygobio gracilis.
Nocomis biguttatus.
Xotemigonus chrysoleucus.
Xotropis mcgalops.
Haploidonotus grunuieus.
Percina caprodes.
Micropterus salmoides.
Lepomis cj-ancllus.
Lepomis pallidus.
Lepomis megalotis.
Salmo sjiilurus.
Dorosoma Ccpedianuiii.
Xotemigonus chrysoleucus.
Squalius atrarius.
Squalius i)andora.
Afoxostoina albidiim.
Lepidosteus platystomus. SLortuose Gar-flsli.
Lepidosteus osseus. Gar Pike.
Polyodon spatula. Spoon-bill Cat.
Scaphirbyncliops platyrhynclius. Sbovelnose
Yellow Eel. Sturgeon.
Acipenser rubicundus. Red Sturgeon.
' d. THE MISSOURI RIVER.
Moxostoma macrolepidotum.
Moxostoma aureolum.
Minytrema melauops.
Erimyzon sucetta.
Catostomus nigricans.
Catostomus teres.
Catostomus retropinnis.
Catostomus catostomus.
Cycleptus elongatus.
Carpiodes cyprinus.
Icliobus cyprinella.
Ictiobus urus.
Ictiobiis bubalus.
Ictalurus punctatus.
Amiurus nigricans.
Amiurus natalis.
Amiurus melas.
Leptops olivaris.
Noturus flavus.
Anguilla rostrata.
Amia calva.
Lepidosteus platystouius.
Lepidosteus osseus.
Polyodon spatula.
Scapliirliyncbops platyrbynchus.
Acipenser rubicundus.
38. THE RIO GRANDE BASIN,
Minytrema melauops.
Erimyzon sucetta.
Pantosteus generosus.
Carpiodes cyprinus.
Ictalurus furcatus.
Ictalurus punctatus.
Amiurus lupus.
Amiurus natalis.
Anguilla rostrata.
Lc])idostous ossous.
Scapbirliyiicliojis jdatyrbyncbus.
DISTRIBUTION OF FEESH-WATEE FOOD FISHES.
141
Salnio purpuratus.
Saluio spilurus.
riatjgobio gracilis.
Squalius atrarius.
Squalins uigei'.
Gila robusta.
Gila Grahami.
Gila elegaus.
Archoplites iuterruptus.
Hysterocarpus Traski.
Sahuo irideus.
Saliuo Gairdneri.
Salvelinus malma.
Mylopbarodon conocephalns.
Mylocliilns cauriuus.
Coregouus Williaiusoui.
Salmo Gairdueri.
Salmo purpuratus.
Salvelinus malma.
MylocLilus caurinus.
Coregouus Williamsoni.
Salmo purpuratus.
Salmo spilurus.
Platygobio gracilis.
Squalius atrarius.
39. THE COLORADO RIVER BASIN.
Ptychocbilus lucius.
Moxostoma macrolepidotum.
Catostomus Clarki.
Catostomus insigiiis.
Catostomus cypLo.
Catostomus latipinuis.
Catostomus discobolus.
Pantosteus geuerosus.
40. THE SACRAMENTO RIVER BASIN.
Pogouiulitbys macrolepidotus.
Squalins gibbosus.
Ptycbocliihis oregonensis.
PtycliocLilus Harfordi.
Lavinia exilicauda.
Orthodon niicrolepidotus.
Catostomus oecidentalis.
41. THE COLUMBIA RIVER BASIN.
Eicliardsonius balteatus.
Ptycbocliilus oregouensis.
Acrochilus alutaceus.
Catostomus macrocbilus.
Catostomus discobolus.
42. THE SALT LAKE BASIN.
Squalius rbomaleus.
Chasmistes liorns.
Catostomus fecnudus.
Catostomus ardens.
Pantosteus generosus.
43. TABLE SHOWING THE GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE RIVER FOOD-FISHES.
«
in
a>
a.
^
<o
•■3
i-!
1
.3
1
1
s
a
6
d
o
i
1
d
ci
i
1
6
1
a
1
'a
o
a
1
O
c9
1
<
.2
1
u
3
I
o
s
o
O
1
u
a
P<
Pi
0
3
o
cc
X
X
X
o
s
a
<D
1
EC
i
a
:3
O
....
Lota maculosa
Haploidonotns granniena
Percina caprodes
X
X
X
....
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Perca americana
Stizostedion canadeuse
" vitreum
Roccus cbrysops
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
....
' * ioteiTUptus
....
....
....
....
—
X
X
!
142
nSHING-GROUjSTDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
Table shoicing the geograj)hical distribution of the river food -fishes — Coutiuued.
n
%
1
1
o
o
-^
•a
S
i
i
%
R
i
.a
i
a
s
o
%
s
1
1
1
i
1
<
1
i
o
§
u
o
6
1
00
9
1
i
.9
Hi
6
1
§
2
i
1
1
B
o
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
....
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
%
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
** annularis
Archoplltes iutermptus
Ambloplitea rupestris
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
" punctatus
^
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
" megalotis
" Holbrooki
X
X
" gibbosus
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Hysterocarpus Traski
„
Esox nobilior
X
X
X
X
*' lacius
X
" reticulalus
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Percopsis giittatua
X
X
X
X
X
X
Coregonua quadrilatoralis
*' labradoricus
X
X
'* ■Williamsoni
X
X
Artedi
X
X
X
y
X
•
X
Hoyi
" nigripinuis
X
Salmo irideua
X
X
X
X
X
" Gairdneri
" purpuratua
X
X
X
X
X
" spiliinia
X
X
X
X
" fontinalia ! x
" oquasaa !
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Hyodon alosoidos
X
X
X
X
X
X
" torgiana
X
X
X
X
" selonops
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mylopharodou conocephalus
X
X
X
Mylochilus cauriuua
Pogonicbthye macrolcpidotua
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
" bnllaria
Platygobio gracilis
X
M'ocomis bignttatus
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ricbardaonius balteatus
X
Notcmigonns chrysoleucus
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DISTEIBUTiOX OF FEESH-WATER FOOD FISHES.
143
Table shoicing the geographical distribution of the river food-fishes — Coutiuued.
09
O
6
a
©
H
0
o
1
R
O
i
6
C-i
i
•3
p
i
d
Mi
8
s
3
6
i
1
a
§
1
00
o
'3
a
c
1
©
©
a
2
O
o
s
d
o
1
s
©
i
1
a
M
o
to
o
oj
u
O
'o
O
s
©
B
ei
©
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XotropiaStorerianus
X
X
T,a.vinia, «vilira,Ti«1f^
X
X
Acrocliilas alntaceus
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
m acrolepidot nm
X
X
X
X
" crassilabre ....
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
'* papillosnm
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
■RrimyTnn sn^etta . .
X
X
X
X
X
*' Goodei
X
Catostomus nigricans
X
X
X
X
X
X
Clarki...
X
X
X
X
....
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
" discobolus ..
Pantoateus generosus
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Carpiodes cyprinns
X
" carpio
Ictiobns bubalus
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
" urus
" cyprinella
Ictalums furcatus
" punctatus
X
X
X
X
X
X
144
FISHliSrG-GKOUNDS OF NOETH AMERICA.
Table showing the (jeographical distribution of the river food-fishes — Coutiimed.
i
1
o
o
H
6
a
*3
o
s
M
&
H
«
n
d
o
1
5
§
a
1
10
1
d
<6
03
■i
d
a
a
%
ID
"d
o
•-3
_d
'3
m
1
.a
2
A
■p.
p.
*i
«
It
o
o
o
Pi
i
i
1
Li
1
1
d
§
>-;
♦3
o
-d
2
o
"o
i
d
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
vulj^aris
5<
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
....
X .
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X ■
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
....
X
X
X
X
X
... ^.- J
IISTDEX
Page.
Abner Grouuil, off Mount Dosert Islaud 30
Absecmn Ground, New Jersey coast 50
Afognak and Kodiak, table of fishery jiroducts of. 'J3
Aillik, Atlantic coast of Labrador 9
Alabama River Basin, food fishes of the 137
Alaska, fishery resources and fishing-grounds of . .81, 110
Alaskan fisheries in 1S80, statistics of 1 12
fishing-grounds, by districts, review of.. . 8G
Alcona to Point aux Barques 127
Aleut names of parts of a bidarka 99
Alexandrovsk, fisheries of 91
Allen's Shoal, oft' Monhcgan Island 33
Aiualia, Cape 5
Auclote Keys to Charlotte Harbor, fishing ledges
from 56
to Cedar Keys, sponge grounds of. . 58
Ri ver Fishery 59
Annelids on Orphan Bank 17
Anticosti 16, 23
herrings ofi' coast of 21
Ai)ostlo Islands, Lake Superior 117
Appalachee Bay, fishing gullies off 56
Arctic Alaska, fisheries of 110
Area of Gulf of Maine 42
Artimou Bank 68
Ascidian (sea lemon) on Greenland Banks 6
Atka Island 99
Atkius, CaiJtain, remarkson Atlantic coast of Lab-
rador 8
Attu Island 99
Baidar of Norton Sound 106
Bale des Chaleurs 17
Baker, Marcu.s; notice of translation from Russian. 101
Baker's Island light 43
Ridge, off Mount Di sert Ii land 28
Bald Head, ofi' Seguin Island 37
Ridges, ofl" Matinicus Island 32
Bank Comfort, Gulf of Maine 44
Bauquereau 67
Bark River, Green Bay 121
Lake Superior 117
Barley Hill Ground, oil' Isle an Haute 31
Barnegat light, New Jersey, coast east of 50
Battle Islands 10
Bauld, Cape 9,13,16
Bayfield, Admiral, on confiueut tidal waves 22
tide along Gaspd coast 23
Bay of Fundy, fisheries in 24
Islands, Newfoundland 19,21
Beau,Tarleton II., fishery resources and fishing-
grounds of Alaska 81-115
Beaufort Harbor, North Carolina 52
Beaver Island, fishing- grounds of 120
SEC III 10
Page.
Belkottsky Parish fisheries 98
Bell buoy 46
Belle Isle, Straits of 13
Beluga hunting 103
Ben's Ground, off Petit Mauan 28
Bete Grise Bay, Lake Superior 118
Bidarra of Norton Sound 106
Biddle Point, pound-net fishing at 120
Big Bay de Noquette 121
Duck Island 29
Bishop and Clark's Ledge, Nantucket Sound 46
Black Island Grouud, off Monhegan Island 34
Ledges Grouud, off' Petit Mauan 28
Blank Ground 54
Block Island, North Ground of 48
Southwest Ledge of 4S
Blue Clay, off Cape Porpoise 38
fish from Cape Cod to Southern Florida 52
Hill: Blue Hill Ground 30
Ground, off Isle an Haute 30
Bonavcuture Island , 23
Bona vista Bay 14
Cape 9, 13
Bonne Bay, herring grounds in 21
Boone Island Rock Ground, off Cape Porpoise 39
Boothbay Harbor 36
Bordukofsky, Rufus 84
Borka, sea-otter in vicinity of 100
Bounties, The, off' Matinicus Island 32
Bowen,Capt. H. R 84,90
BradelleBank 16,17,18,20
Breton, Cape 23
Brimstone Island: Blue Hill Ground 30
Bristol Bay Division, fisheries of 101
Broken Ground, oft' Moss-a-bec light 27
off Monhegan Island 36
Ridges, or "Joe Ray" Ground, off' Petit
Manan 23
Brown's Bank 72
Head Ground, between Monhegan Island
and Pemaquid - 36
Hill, Long Island Sound 49
Ledge, off' Eastern Point 40
Vineyard Souud 48
Bucklaud River, Kotzebue Sound 108
Bumper's Islaud, off Seguin Island 37
Burgeo Island 15
Burnham's Rocks, oft" Eastern Point 40
Burnt Lsland, Inner Ridge, oft' Monhegan Islaud .. 34
Outer Ridge, oft' Monhegan Lsland . . 34
Buzzard's Bay, fishing-grounds in 47
Campobcllo 25
Causo 19
145
146
INDEX.
Page.
Canso Bauk C8
Cape Bretou Island 17, IS
mackerel off 20
Capo Cod Bay, fishing grounds of :!9, 41
Capelin on coast of Noitboin I^abrador 11
Cape Romaiu Bank 53
Captiva Tisbery 59
CaiJt. Lcn. Dest in's Fishery 60
Cascapcdia Bay 23
Casco Bay, fishing-gronuds oft' 38
Cashe's Ledge, Gulf of Maine 44
Cat Point Fishery 60
Cawee Island 23
Cedar Keys, fishing-grounds off 57
to Saint Mark's, sponge-grounds of . .. 58
Ceutreville 46
Chaleur, Bay of 17, 20, 23
Chambers Mill Fishery 59
Chandeleur Islands Fishery 60
Charity Islands, fisheries of 127
Charleston, South Carolina, vicinity of 53
Chattahoochee Ei ver Basin, food-fishes of the 137
Cbatte, Cape 23
mackerel oft' 20
Cheticamp Island, mackerel off' 20
Chicago, fishing-grounds in vicinity of 124
Cholera Bank, Long Island Sound 50
Chudleigb, Cape 10
Clair,Ri ver, fisheries of 128
Clam, the soft (Mya arenaria) on coast of Maine.. 26
Clay Bank, Gulf of Maine 43
Cod fishing-grounds on eastern coast of Newfound-
land , 13
grounds at Cape North 19
in Bay of Fundy 24
Hancock's Inlet 8
tisb on coast of Greenland 6
Maine 26
on coast of Cape Breton and Nova Scotia 23
tisb, relation of, to stranded icebergs 11
on Southwest Ground 31
on Southeast Rock, Petit Manan 28
fish, spawning of, on coast of Greenland 6
ou Tibbett's Ledge 27
Coffin Land Ground, or Inner Ground 54
Collier's Ledge 46
Collins, Joseph W., and Richard Rathbun, on sea-
fishiug-grounds of eastern coast of North America. 5-75
Colorado River Basin, food-fishes of the 141
Columbia River Basin, food-fishes of the 141
Conception Bay 12, 14
Conneaut to Bufl'alo 130
Connecticut River Basin, food-fishes of the 134
Cook's Inlet, or Kenai District 90, 97
Cotuit 46
Cow Ground, oft' Seguin Island 37
Cox's Ledge, oft' Vineyard Sound 48
Crab Ledge 41
Crawley's Kock, on Broken Ground, coast of Maine. 27
Crooked Island Fishery 60
fishing-gullies off 56
River Fishery 60
Cross Village to Lake Huron 126
Crustaceans as food of codfish 11
Crustacea on Br:i(blle Hank 17
Page.
Crustacea on Orphan Bank 17
Crystal River Fishery 59
Cusk Ground, off Mouhegan Island 34
Cuttyhunk lobster fishing 47
Dall, William H. ; Broad Whitefish 82
Grayling or Blanket-fish of Alas-
ka 83
0. kisutch and O. lita 84
0. nerka 84
RoHud-fish 83
the running of salmon in the
Yukon 104
Tom-cod fishery of Norton Sound 105
Davis Strait, fishing-banks of 5
Decker's Shoal, off Monhegan Island 33
Delaware coast, fishing-grounds on 51
River Basin, food-fishes of the 134
De Pere, fisheries of 123
Depth of warer on Davis Strait fishing banks 6
Detroit River, fishing-grounds on 128
to Port Clinton, mouth of 128
Devinc, Thomas 84
Dickerson Bay Fishery 60
Dillberry Ground, Long Island Sound 50
Disco Bay 5
Dog Island, fishing-gullies off 56
Domino River 10,11
Dried smelt as food from Eschscholtz Bay 82
Duck Island Ridges, off Cape Porpoise. 39
Eagle Ridge, oft' Cape Ann 40
Earll, R. Edward, ou menhaden fishing in Chesa-
peake Bay 78
on menbadan fishing on coast of
North Carolina 78
Early catches of mackerel, 1878 to 1881 75, 76
East Chop, Vineyard Sound 46
Eastern coast of Newfoundland 13
Hole 53
Mount Desert Hill : Hatchell Ground 30
Point, Cape Ann, fishing-grounds oft" 40
Shoals, the 64
Shoal water of Cape Ann 45
East Hampton ground, Long Island Sound 49
of Barnegat Light, New Jersey coast 50
Eaton's Point, Long Island Sound 49
Echinoderms ou Bradelle Bank 17
Orphan Bauk 17
Eddy flood tide in the estuary of the Saint Law-
rence 22
Edisto Bank 54
Egg Harbor Ground, New Jersey coast 50
Rock Broken Ground, off Mount Desert Island 29
Elephant Point, Kotzebue Sound 108
Eleven-fathom Ground, off Cape Ann 40
Elizabeth, Cape 38
Elnell's Rock, off Seguin Island 37
EnglisbPoint 23
Enoch's Shoal, oft' Mount Desert Island 29
Eschscholtz Bay, beluga hunting in 108
Escuminac 20
Eskimo fishing in Arctic Alaska 110
Espenberg, Cape, traders from 109
Falmouth, Vineyard Sound 47
Farewell, Cape 5
Fear, Cajie. vicinity of 53
INDEX.
147
Pago.
Feuholloway River Fisbeiy 60
Fernaudina Gioimd 55
Fippeuies Bank, Gulf of Maine 44
Fire Island Beach, Long Island Sound 40
Ofl'-sbore Ground, Long Island Sound. 50
Fish Commission, United States 5
Fisheries of Arctic Alaska 110
Beikoffsky Parish 98
Bristol Bay Division 101
Buzzard's Bay 47
De Pere 123
Green Bay 1-20
Karluk Kiver, Salmon 94
Kenai, or Cook's Inlet District 90
King's Island to Point Barrow 106
Kodiak Parish 93
Kotzebue Sound 108
Kuskoquim Division 102
Lake Huron 126
Norton Sound Division 105
Port Clarence and vicinity 107
Pribiloff Islands ., 102
Prince William Sound Division 90
Saint Matthew and Saint. Lawrence
Islands 102
• the Grand Bank 64
Gulf of Maine : 42
Unalashka Parish 99
Yukon Division 103
Fisher, William J., estimate of supplies of the set-
tlements on Cook's Inlet and
part of Aliaska Peninsula. .. 94
on curing iisb in Alaska 87
lishing products of Kodiak
and Afognak 93
shell-fish of Saint Paul... . 94
the "king salmon," or "cbo-
wichee" 90
Fishery resources and fishing-grounds of Alaska-. 81
Fishes in the Yukon Division 104, 105
list of, taken from Cape Charles, Virginia,
to .Southern Florida 52
ofAIaska 81
Arctic Alaska, edible 111,112
Cook's Inlet, list of 93
Kodiak Parish 96
Kotzebue Sound, edible 110
Port Clarence, edible 108
Southeastern Alaska, list of 89
the Bristol Bay Division 101,102
Unalashka Parish 99, 100
taken on Bauquereau 68
Florida reefs 55
Northern grounds,6ulf of Mexico. 57
the Grand Bank 67
Fishing Bank, off New Jersey coast 50
banks of Davis Strait 5
the Off-shore 61
ground areas of Newfoundland 9
Northern Labrador 9
grounds around Monhegan Island 33
at mouth of Bay of Fundy 25
Saint Martin's Island 121
between Alcona and Point aux
Barques 1-^7
Page.
Fishing grounds between Couneaut and Buffalo .. 130
Cross Village and Lake
Huron 126
Manistee and Cross Vil-
lage l->6
Monhegan Island and
Pemaquid .16
Point aux Barques and
Port Huron 128
Port Clinton and Vermil-
lion 129
Porte des Morts and Port
Washington 12.^
Port Huron and Detroit. 128
Port Washington and
South Chicago 124
Saugatuck and Manistee. 125
Seul Choix Point and
Point Detour, Green
Bay 120
South Chicago and Sau-
gatuck 125
Vermillion and Con-
neaut 130
Cape North 18
for herring on coast of Newfound
land 21
from Anclote Keys to mouth of
Mississippi Eiver 56
Cape Charles, Virginia, to
Southern Florida 52
mouth of Detroit Kiver to
. Port Clinton 123
New York to Southern Flor-
ida 49
Straits of Mackinac to Al-
cona 126
Tortugas Keys to mouth of
Mississippi River 56
in Gulf of Maine 42
Gulf of Saint Lawrence ....19,20,21
Lake Superior 117
Long Island Sound 49
Nantucket Shoals 41
Sound 46
vicinity of Eastern Point, Cajie
Ann 40
Vineyard Sound 46
Well's Bay 39
north, northeast and east of Mon-
hegan Island 34
of Beaver Island 120
Buzzard's Bay 47
Gulf of Saint Lawrence 16
Lake Erie 128
Michigan and the Strait.s
of Mackinac 1 19
Ontario 131
Point Detour to SenI Choix
Point 119
South Carolina and Georgia,
the off-shore '. 53
Southern and Eastern Gulf
coast 55
the Great Lakes 117
148
I^^DEX.
Page.
Fishing grouuds of tlio Gulf of Mexico 55
Pncitic coast 79
off Matinicus Islaud 32
Capo Porpoise 38
Casco Bay 38
Islo an Haute 30
Matinic Island 33
Moos-a-bec light 26
Mount Desert Island 28
Petit Manan 27
Segnin Island 36
Vineyard Sonnd 47
on Atlantic coast of Labrador ... 8
coast of Maine 26
Maryland, from Isle
of Wight to Chin-
coteague Inlet 51
New Jersey 50
Khode Island 48
coasts of New Haniiishire and
Massachusetts to
Nantucket 39
Delaware coast 51
eastern coast of Virginia, from
Chincoteague Inlet to Hog
Island 51
east side of Cape Cod 41
Greenland coast 6
Morris Ledgo 41
outer coast of Cape Breton
Island and Nova Sco-
tia 23
side of Long Island 49
southern coast of New Eng-
land 46
Stellwagen's Bank, or Middle
Bank 40
the Detroit River 123
western coast of Newfound-
land 19
southeast of Monhegan Island. .. 34
southwest of Mouhcgan Island. . . 35
west of Monhegan Island 35
Rip in Nantucket Shoals -... 42
stations on Gulf coast of the United States. 59
Fish in Kotzebuo Sound 109
Five-Fathom Bank , New Jersey coast 51
Flemish Cap, the 61
Flint Island 20
Florida Reefs, fishing-gronnds of the 55
sponge-grounds of 58
Fond du Lac, seining grounds of 117
Forestville, gill-uet grounds at 128
Fortune Bay 15
herring grounds in 21
Fox Islands, fisheries of 126
Fox River, Green Bay 121
Freeman's Ground off Matinic Island 33
French fishermen at Saint Pierro 14
fishing licet 15
Frost, Mr., on appearance of salmon at Bclkoffsky. 99
Fuller's Rock off Segnin Island 37
Fur-seals caught off Uninak 100
FyUe-net lishing in Green Bay 123
Gardiner's Island, Long Island Sound ... 49
Pape.
Gay Head, Vineyard Sound 40
Gasparilla Fishery 50
Gaspd Basin 23
Cape, mackerel at 20
Geographical distribution of fresh- water food-fishes
of the United States 133
range of food-fishes in Alaska. .113, 114, 115
George's B;ink 74
German Bank, Gulf of Maine 43
Gilkey Ground, off Isle an Haute 31
Gill-net fisheries of Beaver Island 120
ground at Sag Bay 121
Washington Island 121
grounds at Green Bay City 121
Keweenaw Point to Grand Isl-
and 118
Manistee to Cross Village 126
Point Detour to Seul Choix Point. 119
Port Clinton to Vermillion 129
Porte des Morts to Port Washing-
ton 123
Saugatuck to Manistee 125
South Chicago to Saugatuck 125
Straits of Mackinac to Alcona 126
Whitetish Point 119
Gill-nettiug in Plover Bay 109
Glacial ice, action of 10
Godthaab 6
Goode, G. Brown, on movements of menhaden 78
Gorgonia (tree corals) on Greenland Banks 6
Grand Bank 0,13,61,62,64
Gosier Island Fishery 60
Island and Sault de Ste. Marie and Betour,
fishing-grounds between 119
Manan, Gulf of Maine 42
herring oft" 24
Traverse Bay, fisheries of 126
Gravel Bottom 31
Great Bras d'Or Lake 20
Duck Island 29
Eastern Rock, Long Island Sound 49
Lakes, fishing-grounds off the 117
food-tishes of the 133 '
Ledge, oft" Mouhcgan Island 36
Rip, in Nantucket Shoals 41
Green Bay City, gill-net grounds at 121
the fisheries of 120
Island Ridge 33
Islands 33
Greenland •">
coast, fishing-grounds on 6
codfish on coast of 6
Green Point, halibut off 19
Grindstone City, gill-net grounds at 128
Island 17
"Grumpy," off Isle an Haute 30
Gull Island 10
gill-net lishery of 120
Rock Ledge, oft" Monhegan Island 34
Gully, The fi9
Haddock Ledge 33
on coast of Maine 26
Southeast Rock, Petit Manan 28
Soulhwost Ground 31
Shoal 3:?
J
INDEX.
149
Page.
Hair-seal hunt iug 109
Hake Ground oti' Mouhegan Island 34
Haliljnt, as an object of commercial interest 6
lisliiug in Sontlieasteru Alaska 88
grounds at Cape North 19
on Southern coast of Newfoundland 15
Halifax Commission 14
Hamilton, George, on halibut at Klawack 88
Inlet 11,115
Hammond, Nathan, concerning hake-fishing in
Baker's Island Channel 29
Handspike Ground 27
Harps well fishing-boats 38
Harrison, Cape, Atlantic coast of Labrador 9,10,13
Harry Marshall's Ground, oft' Watinicus Island 32
Hart's Ground, oft' Cape Ann 40
Hatchell Ground, oft" Isle an Haute 30
Havre Bouehe, herring at 21
Hebron 11
Hedge Fence Shoal, Vineyard Sound . . . ; 46
Henry's Rock, coast of Maine 2G
Hereford Ground, New Jersey coast 51
Herendeen, Capt. E. P 84
Herring fishery of Alaska 85
Grounds iu Gulf of Saint Lawrence 21
in Bay of Fund y 24
method of catching, in Southeastern
Alaska 88
on coast of Maine 26
Northern Labrador 11
coasts of Labrador 13
outer coast of Cape Breton and Nova
Scotia 24
Highland light 40
Hillete, Cape 9
Hill Ground, oft' Monhegan Island 35
Segnin Island 36
Hind, Prof. H. Y.,on area of fishing-grounds about
Newfoundland 9
cod-fishing grounds on east-
ern coast of
Newfoundland 13
8ea.son on eastern
side of New-
foundland.... 14
fishing-grounds, &c., of
Northern Labrador 11
formation of inner banks.. . 9, 10
movements of cod 12
the North Labrador fishing-
grounds 8
tidal currents in Gulf of
Saint Lawrence 21, 22, 23
"Hoikoh" iu the Yukon 104
Holsteinhorg 5
as a harbor 7
Hook-fishing between South Chicago and Sauga-
tuck 125
in Green Bay 123
Hooper, Capt. C. L., description of a bidarra equip-
ment 105
on Corogonus Laurettoe 83
fishing in Kotzebue
Sound 110
Seal-hnuting 109
Page.
Hooper, Capt. C. L., on the value of the seal to the
Innuit Ill
Hopedale 10
Horn Island Fishery 60
Horton's Point, Long Island Sound 49
Hudson River Basin, food- fishes of the 134
Humpback Mountain 28
Hunter's Point Fishery 59
Huron Bay, Lake Superior 118
City, gill-net grounds at 128
pound-net grounds of 129, 130
Hyannis 46
Hydrozoa on Braddlee Bank 17
Orphan Bank 17
Icebergs, distribution of, and their bearing on food
and fecdiuggrounds of cod 10
proijortion of, above level of sea 11
Ice, effect of, on southern harbors 7
Icy Cape, old whaling apparatus found at Ill
Igagik ; walrus-hunting 101
Indian Harbor Islands 11
Pass fishery 60
Inner banks of Labrador, formation of 10
Breaker, oft' Matinicus Island 33
Bumpo, oft' Cape Porpoise 38
East Bank 53
Ground, or Co£Sn-Land Ground 54
Horse Reef, off Isle an Haute 30
Range of Banks on coast of Labrador 11
Ridge, Mount Desert 29
Schoodic Ridge, off Mount Desert Island. . . 29
Southeast Bank 53
South Ground 54
Spring Ground, oft' Monhcgau Island 34
Ipswich Bay, fishing-grounds in 39
Iron River, Lake Superior 117
Island fisheries, Lake Erie 129
Isle au Haute, fishing-grounds oft' 30
Breton Fishery 60
of Shoals 39
Royale, fishing-grounds at lib
Lake Superior 117
to Keweenaw Point 117
Jeft'rey's Bank, Gulf of Maine 44
Ledge, Gulf of Maine 4.')
Job's Neck, Naushou _ 47
"Joe Ray Ground," or Broken Ridges 2S
John's Head Ground, between Monhegan Island
and Peniaquid 3(i
Jones' Ground, Gulf of Maine 43
Jordan, David S., faunal lists of fresh-water food-
fishes 133-141
on fishing-grouudsof the Pacific
coast 79-80
Jordan's Delight 28
Judique shore, hei'ring at 21
Karluk River, salmon fisheries 94
Kassilov, salmon fishery 91
"Keezich," in the Yukon 104
Kenai, or Cook's Inlet District 90
salmon fishery 9i
Kettle Bottom, oft' Seguin Island 38
Island Ledge, oft' Cape Ann 40
Keweenaw Bay, Lake Superior 118
Point to Grand Island 118
150
INDEX.
Page.
Kilgore's Fishery 59
King, Kobert, on fisheries of Unalashka Parish ... 99
tlie " 8trii)e(l fish" iu Unalashlta
Parish 100
salmon in the Ynkon 104
King's Island to Point Barrow, fisheries of 106
Kit's Hannnock Beach, Delaware coast 51
Klawaek, halibut fishery at 88
Knight lulet, herring at 21
Koiliak and Afognak, table of fishery products of . 93
names for fishes 96
Parish, fisheries of 93, 97
Kotzehue Sound, fisheries of 108, 109
Knllnk; walrus and seal hunting 101
Kuiclieu, Ludwig, and Frederick W. True, on the
fishiug-grouuds of the Groat Lakes 1 17
Kuskoquini Division, fisheries of 102
Kyack, the 108
Ky pokok Bay 13
Labrador, Atlantic coast, fishiug grounds of 8,10
Labrador (Northern) fishery, status of 13
statistics concerning cod 12
(Southern) statistics concerning cod 12
the Atlantic coast of 8, 10
Ladle, the...-. 27
Lam pson 11
Laida, sea-otter hunting at 91
Laisdell's Ground, otf Isle au Haute 31
Lake Erie, fishing-grounds of 128
Huron, fisheries of 126
Michigan and the Straits of Mackinac 119
Ontario, fishing grounds of 131
Saint Clair, fisheries of 128
Lakes of Maine, food-fishes of the 134
Lake Superior, fishing-grounds iu 117
Lauuce ou coast of Northern Labrador 11
Le Have Bank 71
Ridges 71
Leuke's Rock, on Broken Ground, coast of Maine . 27
Lexington, gill-net grounds at 128
Lichtenfels 5
Limbo Cove 18
Little Bay de Noquetto 121
Spoon Island, Isle au Haute 30
Traverse Bay, fisheries of 126
Lobster Point Ground, off Monhegan Island 34
Lobsters iu Vineyard Sound 47
on coast of Maine 26
Long Bay 15
Islandllead 29
Sound, lishing-grounds in 49
Lookout, Cape, vicinity of 52
Lower Mississippi, food fishes of the 137
Luke's Rock, coast of Maine 26
Lynde & Hough, fish dealers 95
Mackerel and menhaden fishing-grounds of tho
Eastern coast 75
early catches of 75,76
grounds in Gulf of Saint Lawrence 20
iu Bay of Fundy 24
on coast of Maine 26
outer coast of Cape Breton and Nova
Scotia 24
Macti wack 11
Madison, Capt. Rasmus 6
Pace.
Magdalen Islands 16,17,18
mackerel otf 20
Maine, the Gulf of 42
Manistee to Cross Village 126
Marblehead Bank, Gulf of Maine 43
Marshall's Island, Blue Hill Ground 30
Martha's Vineyard, Vineyard Sound 46
Martin's Ground, otf Mount Desert Island 28
Maryland coast, from Isle of Wight to Chinco-
teagne Inlet, fishing-grounds on 51
Massachusetts Bay, fishing-grounds iu 39
Matinio Bank, otf Matinic Island 33
Island, fishing-grounds otf 33
Ooze, off Matinic Island 33
Matinicus Island, fishing-grounds off 32
Rock 32
Sou'-Sou' west Ground,otf Matinicus Rock 32
Western Ground 33
Maxwell's, Commander, soundings 10
Mclutyre, B. G., concerning Kenai salmon fishery.. 92
on the eulaehon industry 82
"king salmon." 84
Mclutire Reef, off Seguin Island 37
Menemsha Bight, lobster fishing 47
Menhaden fishing-grouuds 77
Mexico, the Gulf of 55
Middle Bank 40
Ground, between Monhegan Island and
Pemaqnid 36
Western Bank 69
Bridge, coast of Maine 27
Shoal, off Monhegan Island 33
Migrations of cod 12
Mille Coquins Point, pound-net fishery at 120
Milwaukee, fishing-grouuds in vicinity of 124
Minerva-Hub, ofl' Matinicus Island 32
Miugan Islands 16, 23
mackerel oft" 20
Minot's Ledge, Massachusetts Bay 40
Miquelon Islands 15, 18
Misaine Bank 68
Miscou Flat 17, 18
Miscou Island 17
Mississippi River Basin, food-fishes of the 137
Sound, fishing gullies oft" 56
Missouri River, food-fishes of the 140
Mistaken Ledge, Gulf of Maine 45
Moisie 23
Monhegan Fall Grounds, Gulf of Maine 44
Island 33
and Pemaqnid, fishing-grouuds
between 36
fishing-grounds around 33, 34
Outer Sou'-Sou'wost Ground 35
Inner Sou'-Southeast Ground 34
Son'-Sou'west Ground 35
Island, Southeast, fishing-grounds oft' . '34
Sonthwest, fishing-grouuds oft". :35
West, fishing grounds oft' 35
Outer Sou'-Sontheast Ground 35
Southeast Grouud 3S
Western Ground 35
Mononioy boats on Pollock Hip Grounds 41
Montauk Point Ground, Long Island Sound 43
Moos-a-bcc light, fishing-grounds off 26,27
INDEX.
151
Page.
Morris Ledfje, tisliiiig-groiuuls on 41
Mount Desert Inner Ridge 29
Island, fishiug-groinids oft' 28
Outer Ridge 29
Jloveuients of macUerel 76
menhaden on coast of New Jersey.. 78
Mud channel, oft'Monhegan Island 34
Mngford, Cape 9,10
Mullet on coast of North and South Carolina 52
Murr Hub, off Seguin Island 37
Mussel Ridge, Long Island Sound 50
Mutton Shoal Ground, Nantucket Sound 46
Mya arenaria (the soft clam) ou coast of Maine. .. 26
Nain, Labrador 11
Nantucket Shoals, fishiug-grouuda in 41
shore grounds of 46
Sound, fishing-grounds in 46
Napeague Beach Ground, Long Island Souud 49
Nash's Island 27
Natashquau cod-bank 16, 19
Naushon. Vineyard Souud 47
Nei)issiguit Bay 23
Neuse River Basin, food-lishes of the 135
Newagen, Cape 36
New Brunswick 16, 18
fishing trade of 15
Newfound Ground, coast of Maine 26
Gulf of Maine 44
Newfoundland boat-fishery 9
fishing-ground areas 9, 12
statistics concerning cod 12
New Hampshire and Massachusetts to Nantucket,
the coasts of 39
New Jersey coast, fishing-grouuds on 50
New Ledge, Gulf of Maine 45
New Loudon vessels in Vineyard Sound 47
New York to Southern Florida 49
Noauk vessels in Vineyard Souud 47
No Man's Land, lobster fishing 47
off Vineyard Sound 47
North, Cape, fishing-ground 18
herring grounds off 21
Northern Labrador fishing-ground areas 9
North Ground of Block Island 48
Harbor 15
Northumberland Straits 17,22
Norton Sound Division, fisheries of 105
Notre Dame Bay 9,13
Nova Scotia 16
vessels on Pigeon Hill cod ground 18
Nubble Ridges, oft" Cape Porpoise 38
Nulato, trap-fishing at 103
Nushegak, apparatus of capture used at 101
Oeilla River Fishery 60
Ocklokony Bay Fishery 60
Oft' Coin it, Nantucket Sound 46
Ogahkaning River, fisheries of 128
Ohio River, food fi.shes of the 139
Old Egg Rock, coast of Maine 27
Farms Ground 54
Ground, Delaware coast 51
Jeft'rey's, off Monhegau Island 35
Man's Pasture, off Cape Ann 40.
Man's Shoal, Nantucket 46
Ontonagon, Lake Superior 117
Page.
Oomiak or sea-boat 105
Orue's Ground, oft'Monhegan Island 33,34
Orient, Long Island Sound 4<)
Orphan Bank 17,18,20
Otter Island Reef, off Isle au Haute 32
Outer Bumps, oft' Cape Porpoise 38
coast of Cape Breton aud Nova Scotia 23
Crab Ledge, fishing-ground ou 41
East Bank 53
Horse Reef, off Isle au Haute 31
Old Farms Ground 54
Ridge, Mount Desert 29
Schoodic Ridge, off Mount Desert Island 29
Shoal, near Monhegan Island 33
oft' Monhegan Island 34
side of Long Island 49
Southeast Ground 53
South Ground 54
Spring Ground, off Monhegan Island 34
Owl and Doubtful Banks, the 70
Oyster Bay Fishery 60
Pacific coast from Straits of Fuca to Lower Cali-
fornia 79
Palmasola Fishery 59
Palm Key Fishery 59
Paspebiac 23
Pass k Grille Fishery 59
Island 15
Pemaquid and Monhegan Island, fishing-grounds
between 36
Pousacola, fishing gullies oft' 56
Petit Bois Fishery 60
Mauan, fishing-grounds oft" 27
Petroft', Mr., on divisions of Alaska 87
fishermen of Cook's Inlet -. . . . 91
seals and salmon in the Yukon.. .. 103
Phelps' Bank in Nantucket Shoals 42
Pickett's Fishery 60
Pigeon Hill Ground 17,18
Piuey Point Fishery 60
Placentia Bay 15
Piatt's Bank, Gulf of Maine 45
Pleasant Bay, herring in 21
Point aux Barques to Port Huron 128
deMonts 23
Detour '. 120
to Seal Choix Point, fishing-grounds
of 119
Epoufette, pound-net fishery at 120
Hope, apparent desertion of Ill
le Preau 25
Miscou 17, 20
Patterson, pound-net fishery at 120
Pollock Grounds 25
on coast of Maine 26
Southwest Ground 31
Rip Grounds, fishing-grounds ou 41
oft' Monhegan Island 33
Polyzoa on Bradelle Bank 17
Orphan Bank 17
Pond Island light -house 28
Popoff Island, salmon fishing oft" 99
Population of Alaska 86
Porcupine, Cape H
Porpoise, Cape, fishing-grounds oft' 3H
152
INDEX.
Page.
Poi-poiso, Cape, Peaks 38
rortage Entry, Lake Superior 118
Eiver, winter seining in 129
Port an Port Bay, halibut in 19
mackerel in 20
Austin, gill-net grounds at 128
Clarence and vicinity, fisheries of 106
Clinton to Veruiilliou 129
Porte desMorts 120
to Port Washington 123
Port Hood, herring at 21
Hope, gill-net grounds at 128
Huron to Detroit 128
Portland iishing-boats 38
headlight 38
Port Sanilac, gill-net grounds at 128
Washington to South Chicago 124
Potomac River Basin, food-fishes of the 135
Pound-net fisheries of Beaver Island 120
Green Bay 121
Saint Martin's Island 121, 122
grounds. Cross Village to Lake Huron. 126
in Saginaw Bay 127
Thunder Bay 127
Isle Royale to Keweenaw
Point 117
Manistee to Cross Village 126
Point Detour to Straits of
Mackinac 120
Porte des Morts to Port Wash-
ington 123, 124
South Chicago to Saugatuck. 125
stations between Keweenaw Point and
Grand Island 118
Preservation of fish by French and American fish-
ermen 15
Pribiloft' Islands, fisheries of 102
Prince Edward's Island 17, 20, 22
mackerel oft' 20
double fide 22
William Sound Division, fisheries of 90
Products of Karluk River Salmon fisheries 94
Kassiloo Salmon fishery in 1880 92
Pumpkin Rock 35
Puzzling Kock on Broken Ground, coast of
Maine 27
Eacooou Woods Ground, Long Island Sound 49
Race, Cape 9,13,14,15
Point 40
Kathbun, Richard, and Joseph W. Collins on sea
fishing-grounds on eastern coastof North America 5-75
Ray, Cape 9,15,16
Redfish in the Yukon 104
Red Island, halibut ofi" 19
restrictions concerning foreign fisli-
ing-vessels 19
Rencontre Harbor 15
Rhode Island coast, fishing-grounds on 48
Ridges, the, on Broken Ground, coast of Maine 27
Rink, Dr. Ilcnry, edible fish on Greenland Banks .. 6
cod on coast of Greenland, spawn-
ing of 6
Rio Grande Basin, food-fishes of the 140
Rock-Cod Ledge 31
"Rocky Bottom," Banquereau 67
Page.
Rocky G round, New Jersey coast 50
Rocky Spots in the Channel, New Jersey coast 50
Roseway Bank 72
Rozier, Capo 23
Sable Island Bank C9
Sacramento River Basin, food-fishes of the 141
Saddle-Back Ledge 31
Reef off Isle au Haute 31
Sag Bay gill-net ground 121
Saginaw Bay, fisheries of 127
River, fisheries of 128
Saint Andrew's and Choctawliatchee Bays, fishing
gullies oif coast between 56
Bay 25
herring in 24
Point Fishery 60
Ann's Bank 24
George's Bay, halibut in 19
herring in 21
mackerel in 20
Jacques harbor 15
Johns, Cape 13, 14
River Basin, food-fishes of the 136
Joseph's Point Fishery 60
Lawrence, Cape 18
Gulf of 16, IS
Lewis Sound 10
Martin's fishing-ground 121
Matthew and Saint Lawrence Islands 102
Paul 's Island 18
Pierre 15, 18
Salmon, Alaska fisheries 83, 84, 85
canneries at Klawack 89
curing at Belkotfsky 98
fisheries of Cook's Inlet District 90
fisheries of Karluk River 94
in the Yukon, runuingof 104
prepared for home use by natives of Cook's
Inlet and Alaska Peninsula 98
Kodiak and Afognak Islands 97
Salt Lake Basin, food-fishes of the 141
Sambro Bank 71
Sanakh, sea-otter taken at 100
Sand Beach, gill-net grounds at 128
Ditch Bar, Delaware coast 51
Sandwich Bay 11
Atlantic coast of Labrador 9
Sankaty Head..'. 41
Sautee River Basin, food-fishes of the 136
Sajielo Ground 55
Sarasota Fishery 59
Saturday Night's Ledge, oflf Cape Ann 40
Saugatuck to Manistee 125
Savannah River Basin, food-fishes of the 136
Saxicava rugosa, occiivrenco of 17
Schoodic Island (Tibbett's Ledge) 27
Scott's Point, i)onnd-net fishery at 120
Scudder, N. P., extracts from report of 5
temperature observations by 7,8
Sea-bass fishing-ground 46
Sea-lions capture<l at Attn ICO
Seal-Island Ground 73
Seals partially devoured V)y prawns 11
Sea-otter captured by the jieople of Akutau 100
hiinting at Seldovia 91
INDEX.
153
Page.
Sea-Otter hmitiug in Kodiak Parish 93
taken iu Unalashka District ia 1879 101
Sea Vrolf IsLaml, mackerel oft' 20
Seemauu on fislies of Hotbam Inlet 110
Seguin Ground 37
Island, fisbing-grounds oft" 36
Ridge 37
Seguin Sou'Sou' west Ground 37
Seiniug-gronnds between Isle Royale and Kewee-
naw Point 117
of Beaver Island 120
Seining- reaches of Green Bay 122
Seul Choix Point to Point Detour, Green Bay 120
Seven Islands 20,23
Shark River Ground, New Jersey coast 50
Shark's Ledge on coast of Rhode Island 43
Shell Ground oft" Mt. Desert Island 29
Point Fishery 60
Shells on Orphan Bank 17
Shinnieock Bay Ground, Long Island Sound 49
Sbippegan Island 18
Shore Grounds of Nantucket 46
Siascousett, Nantucket 46
Skate Bank oft' Matinicus Rock 32
Smith and Hirsch's Salmon Fishery 95
Sni jipcr Shin , off Isle a u Haute 32
South Chicago to Saugatuck 125
Southeast Bank, Delaware coast 51
Southeastern Alaska 87
Southeast Ground 31
Rock, off Petit Manau 23
Southern coast of New England 46
Newfoundland, fisheries of.«. . . 14
fishing-grounds
on 15
Southwest Ground, Nantucket Sound 46
oft' Isle au Haute 31
Ledge, off Block Lslaud 43
Vineyard Sound 48
Spot, near Cox's Ledge 48
" Sou'west Arm," herring in Bay of Islands 21
Spanish Fisheries 59
Spears used by Eskimo in whaling Ill
Sponge grounds of Florida 58
Sponges on Orphan Bank 17
Spot of Rocks, off Cape Ann 40
Spotted Lsland 10
Squan Ground, New Jersey coast 50
Squid as bait for United States fishermen 14
on coast of Northern Labrador 11
Staunard's Rock, Lake Sujierior 118
Statistics of the Alaskan fisheries in 1880 112
Stenhatchee River Fishery 60
Stellwagen's Bank, Massachusetts 39, 40
Stonewall, off Cape Ann 40
Straits of Mackinac to Alcona 126
Sucker family in Alaskan rivers 86
Sukkertoppeu 5,7
Superior City, Lake Superior 117
Susqirehanna River Basin, food-fishes of the 135
Suwanee River Fishery 60
Swan, James G., on surf-smel;(s and eulaohon 82
Tag ground, oft' Seguin Island 37
Tauter, off Cape Porpoise 38
Tantog fishing in Vineyard Sound 47
Page.
Temperatures in Passamaquoddy Bay 25
the Bay of Fundy 25
Temperature observations on Greenland Banks ... 8
ou Greenland Banks iu July 7
Ten Acres, off Cape Porpoise 39
Thatclier's Island 40.44
The Mud 25
Thuuder Bay, i)ound-net grounds iu 127
Tibbett's Ledge 27
Tidal currents iu Gulf of Saint Lawrence 21
Tides and currents on the Greenland Banks 7
Tillie's Bank, Gulf of Maine 45
Tom Never's Head, Nantucket 46
Toussaiut, gill-net ground oft" 129
Tow-Hcad Ground, oft" Matinicus Island 33
Townsend Ground, New Jersey coast 51
Tracadia Ground, oft' Cape Porpoise 38
Trafton's Island 2S
Trap-fishing at Nulato 103
Trap-net grounds of Whisky Bay 119
Tree corals (Gorgonia) on Greenland Banks 0
Trinity Bay 13. 14
Trout-ground of the Great Lakes, an important .. 11^
True, Frederick W. Ludwig and Kumlien on the
fishing-grounds of the Great Lakes IIT-I;!!
Tnnicates ou Orphan Bauk 17
Turtle-Crawl Point Fishery .59
Ty bee Deep AVater Ground .05
Ground 55
Ukali, jireparation of 84
Umnak Straits, sea-otter taken iu 100
Uuala.sbka Parish, fisheries of O'J
United States Fish Commission concerning cod on
New England coast 11
vessels oft' Pass Island 15
ou outer coast of Cape Bret ou
and Nova Scotia 24
Pigeon Hill Cod Ground. . 18
western coast of Newfound-
land 19
Upper Mississiinii, food-fishes of the 138
Veniaminoff, Ivan; " Notes on the islands of the
Unalashka region" 101
Vermillion to Conueaut 130
Vinal Haven 33
Vineyard Sound, fishing-grounds off 46, 47
Virginia, eastern coast of, fishing-grounds ou 51
to Southern Florida, fishing-grounds ou
coast of 52
Virgiu Rocks, the 63
Wachna, or tom-cod of Norton Sound 105
■Washington Island gill-net ground 121
treaty 14
Waukegan, fishing-grounds in vicinity of 124
■\Vaukhni fishery of Norton Sound 105
Wkkasikealik 11
■Weedwecder Shoal, Nantucket 46
AVell's Bay fishing-grounds 39
West Cod Ledge, oft' Casco Bay 38
Western Bank 69
Egg Rock, coast of Maine 27
Fur and Trading Company, fish i>ut up by 98
Part Ridge, off Eastern Point 40
Reef, oft" Isle au Haute 32
Kidse ■•^;5
154
INDEX.
Page.
West Shore, Gulf of Saiut Lawrence 20
Whisky Bay, trap-net grounds of 119
Whiteaves, J. G. F.; descriptionof Bradelle Bank . 17
Whitefishcs of Northern Alaska, the 82
Whitetish Point, giU-net grounds of 119
White Island Ground, between Mouhegan Island
and Pemaquid 36
Paga
White Lake, gill-net grounds at 123
Wilson, Capt. James S4,90
Wolves Haddock Grounds, the 25
Wooden Ball Island 32
Wood's Holl, Vineyard Sound 47
Yukon Division, fisheries of 103
Zirphoca crispata, occurrence of 17
OCEAN TEMPERATURES
EASTERN COAST OF THE UNITED STATES,
THIRTY-TWO CHARTS.
• By RICHARD RATHBUiN^.
155
/
OCEAN TEMPERATURES OF THE EASTERN COAST OF THE UNITED STATES,
FROM OBSERVATIONS MADE AT TWENTY-FOUR LIGHTHOUSES AND
LIGHT-SHIPS.
[With thirty-two charts.]
By RiCHAKD Rathbun.
INTRODUCTION.
Temijerature has loug been recognized as having an imijortant influence upon the general
movements of fishes, and especially of those species that migrate periodically from one region to
another. The salmon, shad, and alewives ascend the rivers in the spring, and at about the same
time large schools of mackerel and menhaden approach the coast from the direction of the Gulf
Stream, and, to some extent at least; work northward as the season advances. Cod are abundant
near shore only during the colder months, while lobsters retreat into deeper water at the begin-
ning of winter, and return again in the spring. Whatever may be the impelliug power that
incites these and other species to cliange their grounds at stated periods, whether the necessity of
seeking new sources of food or more congenial waters for the purposes of breeding, it has gener-
ally been observed that their migrations coincide more or less closely with certain changes in
temperature, and the latter, therefore, appears to exert a controlling or restraining influence upon
their movements. Until recently, however, very little has been published respecting the precise
relations of temperature to fish migrations, and the subject is but little understood.
In a history of the menhaden, published in 1879,* Mr. G. Brown Goode discusses the water
temperatures taken at several stations along the Atlantic coast of the United States for a period
of three years, in connection with such information as was then obtainable respecting the move-
ments of menhaden during their spring migrations. In prefacing this subject, Mr. Goode remarks
that "the date of the earliest appearance of the schools of menhaden at any given point upon
the coast corresponds very closely with that of the arrival of scup, shad, bluefish, and other of
the non-resident species. It depends i)rimarily upon the temperature of the water, [and the
departure of the schools] is regulated by the same causes. At the approach of settled warm
weather the schools make their appearance in the coast waters. They remain in the bays and
near the shores until they ai'e warned away by the breath of coming winter. The date of their
appearance is earlier in the more southern waters, and the length of Uieir sojourn longer. It is
manifestly impracticable [from the data he then possessed] to give anything but approximate
dates to indicate the time of their movements. In fact, the comparison of two localities, distant
apart 100 or 200 miles, would indicate very little. When wider ranges are compared there
becomes perceptible a proportion in the relations of the general averages. There is always a
balance in favor of earlier arrivals at the more southern localities. Thus it becomes apparent
* The Natural and Economical History of the American Menhaden, by G. Brown Goode. U. S. Commission of
Fish and Fisheries. Report of the Commissioner for 1877, Appendix A, 529 pp., 31 plates. AVashington, 1879.
157
158 FISHING-GKOUNDS OF NORTU AMERICA.
that the tirst schools appear iu Chesapeake Bay in March aad April, on the coast of New Jersey
iu April aud early May, and on the south coast of New England in late April and May, oti' Cape
Ann about the middle of May, and in the Gulf of Maine about the latter part of May and the
first of June. Keturniug, they leave Maine in late September and October ; Massachusetts in
October, November, and December; Long Island Sound and vicinity in November and December:
Chesapeake Bay in December, and Cape Hatteras iu January. Farther to the south they appear
to remain more or less constantly throughout the year."
In his concluding remarks the same writer states that "these facts [which he sets forth in
considerable detail] appear to indicate that under ordinary circumstances the menhaden prefers a
temperature of 00° to 70° Fahrenheit. When the rising temperature of spring has passed the
limit of 50° to 51°, the fish are certain to appear, and when the falling temperature of autumn
reaches that point, their departure is equally sure, though a few individuals may linger in waters
not congenial to them. The opposite limit seems to be marked by the line of 80° or perhaps 75°.
An easterly or northerly wind, lowering temporarily the surface temperature, causes the schools
to sink below the surface. The chill of night also drives them down. These conclusions are not
to be regarded as final. The movements of the fish about Cape Hatteras are very puzzling, and
need to be intei'preted by a series of careful temperature observations."
More recently similar comparisons of water temperatures have been made by Col. JIarshall
McDonald with respect to the shad and river herrings or alewives,* the observations he makes
use of being relatively more extensive than was the case in Mr. Goode's studies of the menhaden.
His observations are restricted to the Chesapeake Bay region, with special reference to the Poto-
mac River, and are accomjianied by instructive diagrams, on which the relations of temperature to
the abundance of the two species of herring and the shad are graphically represented.
His final conclusions are as follows : " The diagram showing fluctuations of water temperature
in the Chesapeake Bay region furnishes very interesting and suggestive data for discussion.
During the winter months the water temperatures on the ocean plateau, outside of the capes, is
higher than that of Chesapeake Bay or the Potomac River. The latter part of February or early
in March the temperature of the bay waters rises above that of the ocean waters outside. Coincident
with this the shad make their appearance in the Chesapeake and are taken in the pounds which
are set in salt-water along the shores of the bay. About the first of April the temperature of tlie
water in the Potomac River rises above the temperature of the water in the bay. Coincident with
this is the beginning of the shad season in the river. The lesson taught by the diagram is that shad
do not enter our rivers to spawn until the temperature of the river waters is higher than that of the
salt- water from which they come. Should the waters of either the Potomac or Susquehanna continue
during the season at a lower temiierature than those of the bay, we would liave no run either of
shad or glut herring during tlie season."
Our object in prefacing this introduction with the above extracts from two of the most
important contributions on the subject of water temperatures in their relation to the migration
of fishes, has been to give a practical illustration of the great value of such studies, which have
been strangely neglected by investigators. With respect to the oceanic species, there are, of
necessity, many difQculties, some of them insurmountable, iu the way of obtaining observations,
as permanent stations for that purpose must be located mostly on or very near the coast, while
the larger schools of fishes often remain some distance from the land. River stations for observ-
"The Shad — Clxpea sapidissima, by Marshall McDonald. The Fisheries and Fishery Industries of llio United
States, by GeorRe Brown Goodeand a staff of associates. Section I : Natural History of Aquatic Animals, pp. ,')94-607,
plates 214, 215. Washington, 1884. Also in Report United States Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries for 1883 (1885),
p. 1034, pi. 1.
OCEAN TEMPEEATUEES. 159
ing water temperatures conjointly with the migrations of fishes can be readily established, and
excellent opportunities for good ■work in this direction are afforded by all the larger rivers of our
country.
The practical value as well as scientific importance of investigations of this character, in their
bearing upon many of our most extensive sea and inland fisheries, has been fully recognized bj
the U. S. Fish Commissioner, and in all the explorations carried on under his direction the
observation of water temperatures has been made a conspicuous feature. Unfortunately, the
field work of the Fish Commission is, necessarily, limited to a comi)aratively short season in each
year, during which operations have, for the most part, beeu confined within narrow areas, chang-
ing more or less from year to year, or have been extended irregularly from place to place, depend-
ent upon the movements of the steamers. The temperature observations made by the Commission
do not, therefore, form continuous series sufBcieutly complete in themselves for detailed compari-
son with the movements of fishes during an entire season of their migrations. In order to supple-
ment and extend this class of investigations with reference to the surface waters and surface
schooling fishes, the cooperation of the TJ. S. Light-House Board and U. S. Signal Service was
obtained, and for a number of years past continuous series of observations have beeu taken at
some sixty stations belonging to these two services, distributed along the entire Atlantic and
Gulf coasts of the United States from Eastern Maine to Southern Texas.
In this report we have given the temperature results of the light-house stations only, reserv-
ing those of the Fish Commission and Signal Service for a future one. Most of the light-house
stations form a series which can well be considered apart from the others, all of the stations here
included being located on exposed portions of the coast, while those of the Sigual Service are
mostly situated in inclosed bays or harbors. A few of the light stations are, however, in similar
situations to those of the Signal Service and will be considered with them. Before describing the
positions and relations of the stations, it may be best to note briefly the character of observations
required for application to the problem offish migrations.
While general temperature results are of much interest, it is evident that they are totally
inadequate to explain the varying movements of fishes. The changes in temperature from day
to day and from season to season must be studied in great detail in order to ascertain their pre-
cise iufluence in regulatiug the arrival, progress, and departure of the schools. If mackerel
appear at an earlier date in one year than in another, is that earlier appearance accompanied by
a more rapid rise in temperature? If more abundant or more widely distributed during one season
than another, is it due to warmer temperatures covering a wider area than usual, or to other
causes ? Answers to these questions are to be sought in a better understanding of the conditions
of temperature along our coast, although it cannot be denied that other subjects, such as the dis-
tribution and abundance of food, and the influence of the winds and currents, need to be con-
sidered in the same connection. In order to make this precise study of the temperatures it is
necessary to establish numerous stations at successive points along the course followed by the
fishes in their migrations. These stations should be located at a sufficient distance from the coast
to be beyond the influence of local conditions, and at such an ideal series of observing posts the
determination of tiie relations of temperature to fish migrations would be simply a question of
time, but unfortunately it is impossible to locate many such stations, and inferior ones have to be
selected to complete the series. Observations should be made continuously throughout each
season of migrations for several successive years, and by this means many parallel series of
records would be obtained suitable for the work of comi^arison.
In this report we have to do only with the surface temperature of the waters immediately
160 FISHING GROUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
bordering the coast, cousiclercd also in their relations to the temperature of the air. The outside
light stations selected for taking the observatious are twenty-four in number, and represent the
entire eastern coast of the United States from Southern Florida to Eastern Maine. As enumer-
ated and described below, it will be noticed that some are light-ships anchored ofl" the land, while
others are light-houses, situated on islands or on the main coast. Those of the first class are
infinitely better located for temperature purposes than either of the others. At most of the
stations observations were begun as early as 1878, but prior to 1881 so many breaks occurred iu
the records that it has been found inexpedient to make use of any of the data relating to the first
three years. This rei^ort, therefore, covers a period of only five years, from 1881 to 1885, inclu-
sive. Although the depths at the different stations vary greatly, ranging from a few feet to 18
fathoms, it was thought advisable to have the observations cover the bottom as well as the sur-
face waters, but the former having been entirely neglected at nearly every station, no reference is
made to bottom temperatures on the following pages.
The record blanks supplied to the light-house stations call for the following observations:
Depth of water where the observations are taken, at mean low tide; time of observatious, which
are to be made twice each day at the first high water and first low water after 7 a. m.; tempera-
ture of the water at the surface and at the bottom, and by exposing the thermometer in the open
air; direction and force of the wind, and state of the sky at the time of taking the temperature
observatious ; occurrence and duration of rain or snow ; occurrence and movements of any kinds of
fish, singly or in schools, especially menhaden, herring, cod, mackerel, swordfish, horse-mackerel,
bluefish, &c., and also of seals or whales.
As the observations are taken at the first high water and first low water after 7 a. m., they
are not made at the same time every day, but generally fall within the twelve hours following 7
a. m., or between 7 a. m. and 7 p. m. Should the time for taking the first observation come
immediately after 7 a. m., the second observation would be made soon after noon. As, iu some
places, there is considerable difl'erence between the temperature of the water at high tide and low
tide, this method of regulating the hours of observation appeared to aiibrd the most satisfactory
means of equalizing results. As elsewhere explained, the temperature observations were limited
at most stations to the surface water and the air. Observations respecting the direction and
force of the wind, the state of the sky and the occurrence of rain were generally well kept, but
the opportunities for observing the movements of fishes were not equally good at all stations, nor
was it to be expected that a constant outlook would be maintained by volunteer observers already
burdened with other and more important duties. Nevertheless many interesting and valuable
records were made in that line, although nothing of importance was learned respecting the I'egu-
lar migratory movements.
The thermometers employed were of two kinds, both of which were especially designed for
taking water temperatures not only at the surface, but also in slight depths. During the first
few years the stations were supplied with the excellent pattern made for the Signal Service, and
kindly lent for the purpose. These thermometers are inclosed in a stout bronze case, with suit-
able openings for the entrance of water, and every instrument was carefully comiiared with a
standard before being sent out. From time to time the Signal Service thermometers have been
replaced by a new and equally reliable pattern, made by Charles Wilder, of Peterboro', N. H., I'or
this special kind of work, and at present all the light-house observations are taken with these
instruments. The tube is protected in a cylindrical copper case, somewhat similar in construction
to that of the Signal Service, but of larger size. All instruments are compared and none having
a large error are made use of. Occasionally, at some of the stations, when the regulation ther-
OCEAN TEMPERATUEES. 161
mometer has accidentally beeu broken, the observations have been coutiuned by means of a light-
house thermometer, or of one purchased at a neighboring town, pending the receipt of a new
instrument, but such instances have been of rare occurrence and not likely to make any appre-
ciable difference in the character of the records for the short periods involved.
While the light keepers have not been specially trained in the methods of taking temperature
observations, their monthly returns testify to their high gi'ade of intelligence and to their great
zeal in fulfilling these additional duties without extra compensation. We are led to believe that
their records contain comparatively few serious errors for which they are directly responsible,
excei^tiug in those cases which will be explained hereafter; and that, in the main, their observa-
tions have been conscientiously made and are deserving of consideration. It is also worthy of
comment that so extensive an undertaking as this should have been carried on successfully at so
little expense and with so little friction.
As above explained, detailed temperature observations rather than general results are essen-
tial for comparison in studying the migrations of the tishes. For that reason the reductions plotted
on the accompanying charts have been made for comparatively short intervals, the entire year
being divided into periods often days, each of which is equivalent to about one-third of a calen
dar month. As two observations are made daily, the mean of each ten days is derived from twenty
observations, and small errors are thereby practically eliminated. Each station is represented by
a chart on which the ten-day means of surface-water temperatures are given for each of the five
years from ISSl to 1885, inclusive, and the air temperatures from 1881 to 1883, inclusive. The
method of representing the temperatures is by curves connecting the ten-day periods, as explained
on the charts. At the stations north of Cape Hatteras there were frequent indications of careless
observation during exceedingly cold weather in the months of January and February, the ther-
mometer, at times, not being read quickly enough after it had been withdrawn from the water.
As such readings would manifestly afford a lower mean temperature than the actual, it has been
deemed best to omit the records for those two months at the northern .stations. At some of the
shore stations the observations also show the effects of local influences which render them inap;-
plicable to the open waters of the coast; but special explanation of those stations is made furtlier on ..
In addition to the charts of tendaj- means, there are also seven isothermal charts on wliichi
the temperature observations at all the stations are combined, in order to afford more convenient,
means of comparison. Five of these charts represent the separate years from 1881 to 1885, inclu-
sive, a sixth, the means of the same five years, and the final one, the relations of the air isotherms.
to the surface isotherms. The isotherms are plotted for every 5° of temperature, Fahrenheit, from,
40° to 80°, inclusive. The isotherm of 35° F. occurs only at the northern stations, and there mainly-
iu the months of January and February, the records for which have not been used. The writer
has refrained from drawing any conclusions from the temperature results presented in this leport,
and his remarks on the following pages are mostly confined to describing the stations and indicat-
ing some of the main features with respect to the temperature curves and the isotherms. The
Fahrenheit scale of temperatures has been exclusively used both in making the observations and in
the construction of the charts.
The work of reducing the many observations to ten-day means and of making the original
l)lottings of the same has been done by Miss INI. J. Eathbun, while the writer is respi)usible for
the computations for, and the plottings of, the isotherms. The charts were prepared for engrav-
ing by Mr. C. E. Gorham.
SEC HI 11
102 FISHING-GKOUNDS OF NORTH AMEEICA.
ENUMERATION AND BRIEK DESCRIPTIONS OF THE STATIONS.
The light houses and lightships selected as temi)eratnre stations numbered thirty-six iu all,
distributed at intervals along the eastern coast of the United States, from Petit Manan Island iu
Eastern Maine, to the Tortugas Reefs in Southern Florida. As explained before, twenty-six of these
stations were located off shore, or on exposed portions of the coast, and the remainder in more or
less inclosed bays, sounds, and harbors. The outside stations are alone considered in this report,
and of this class the two following have been omitted, reducing the number to twenty-four. The
observations were continued for so short a period at Minot's Ledge light-house, iu Massachusetts
Bay, that it was deemed inexpedient to make use of them ; and the records for Race Point light-
house, at the northern extremity of Cape Cod, show such extreme variations within short periods,
due probably in part to the very gradually sloping shore in front of the light, as to render their
value questionable until further examination can be made.
The outside stations differ widely iu the character of their surroundings, and therefore do not
afford the means of obtaining observations of equal value respecting the open waters along the
coast. Ten are lightships, anchored off' shore, in depths of 5 to 18 fathoms, and consequently pos-
sessing unusual advantages for the taking of ocean temperatures ; nine are located on small islands
or reefs, more or less widely separated from the mainland ; and five are situated on the shore of
the mainland or on large islands, the last, as a rule, forming the least desirable stations of the
series. Some of those stations situated on small islands or reefs also show considerable variations
of temperature due to local iufluences, as described further on.
The arrangement of stations followed in this report is generally from south to north, this order
affording the most natural sequence for comparing the different rauges of temperature in succes-
sive latitudes. The locations and general characteristics of the stations are as follows : *
THE FLORIDA REEFS.
Dry Tortugas Vyht-house. — Located ou tbe western island of the Tortugas, at the southwestern extremity of the
Florida Reefs. The light-house is situated ou the eastern side of Loggerhead Key (or island), which is bordered by a
channel having depths of 10 to 12 fathoms and occupied by strong tidal currents. The surface temperature observa-
tions were taken where the water is only 5 feet deep, and show indications of local influences, which render them
more or less unsatisfiictory with respect to the open waters surrounding the reefs.
Carijsfort Eeef light-house. — Located near the uortheastern end of the Florida Reefs, about 158 miles from the
Dry Tortugas light-house, and ou the outer side of Carysfort Reef. Depths of GO fathoms occur within 2 miles of
the light. Observations were taken in a depth of only 3 feet, but evidently in a more exposed positiou than at the
Tortugas station, as the effects of local influences are less apparent in the surface temperature records.
Fowey liocka light-house. — Located on the outer edge of Fowey Rocks, at the northeastern extremity of the Florida
Reefs, and 23 miles from Carysfort Reef. The 100-fathom curve is distant about '2i miles. The depth of water at tbe
place of observation is 5 feet, and tbe water temperature records compare favorably witli those of Carysfort Reef,
indicating a similar exposure.
SOUTH CAUOLINA.
Martiii's Industry light-shij). — Anchored in 9 fathoms of water, about 84 miles from land, off the entrance to Port
Royal Sound ; distant about 390 miles from Fowey Rocks light-house.
Hattleanakc Shoal light-ship. — Anchored in 5 fathoms of water, about 5 miles off land, just north of the entrance
to Charleston Harbor, and aViout 50 miles from Martin's Industry light-ship.
NORTH CAROLINA.
Frying Pan Shoals /iV//i/-.v/ii/).— Anchored iu 10 fathoms of water, al)oul 17 miles southeast of Capo Fear, and
about 108 miles from Rattlesnake Shoal light-ship.
Cape Lookout light-house. — Located on the outer shore, about 3 miles north of the extremity of Cape Lookout, and
90 miles from Frying Pan .Shoals light-ship. The observations were taken at the lower edge of the beach in a depth
of 1 foot of water. The bottom slopes gradually, aud attains a depth of 10 fat horns about ,'j miles from shore. Although
the maximum and minimnm surface temperatures at tliis station correspond closely with the same at Frying Pan
Shoals, the surface curves are much less regular, aud show direct atmospheric influence.
* For more complete descriptions, reference should 1)0 made to the explanations of the chart.s.
OGEAX TEMPEKATDEES. 163
Body's /ofiiiK/ liijht-honse. — Located uear tho sonthcrn end of Body's Island, abont 35 miles uortb of Capo Hatteras,
and 8(j miles from Cape Lookout. The shore is similar iu cliaraoter to that at Capo Lookout, but tho surface observa-
tions were takeu where the depths are from 7 to 9 feet. The temperature curves for the surface and air are almost
precisely alike, and the observations cannot bo regarded as of any value with respect to the open waters ofl' shore.
VlltGIXIA.
Winter Quarter Shoal Uyht-ship. — Anchored iu 10+ fathoms of water, 8^ miles off Assateague Island, and about
midway between the entrances to Chesapeake Bay aud Delaware Bay ; distant about \iS miles from Body's Island.
NliVir JERSEY.
Five-Fathom Banlc light-ship. — Anchored iu 12 fathoms of water, abont 14 miles off the coast, just east of Cape Mu^
and oil' the entrance to Delaware Bay ; distant about 56 miles from Winter Quarter Shoal light-ship.
Absceon light-house. — Located on the beacb in front of Atlantic City, and just south of tho entrance to Absecoii
lulet ; 34| miles distant from Five Fathom Bank light-ship. The shore is faced with shoals, but the surface observa-
tious were takeu iu the channel leading to the inlet, iu depths of 9 to 15 feet of water. The surface records are much
more satisfactory than at either of the previous shore stations (Cape Lookout and Body's Island), and the surface
curves are nearly as regular as at Five Fathom Bank light-ship.
NICW YORK.
Sandy Hoolc lightship. — Anchored in 14 fathoms of water off the entrance to New York Bay ; (J miles east of Sandy
Hook, N. J., the nearest land ; and about 70 miles from Absecou light.
Fire Island light-house. — Located on the east side of Fire Island Inlet, south side of Long Island, 31 miles from
Sandy Hook light-ship. The surface observations were taken in the entrance to Great South Bay, between Fire
Island and Oak Island, iu 3 feet of water. A strong current Hows through the channel, which is somewhat similar in
character to the entrance to Absecou Inlet.
lillODE ISL.VND.
liloclc Island southeast light-house. — Located at the southeastern corner of Block Island, 82 miles from Fire Island
light. The observations were taken at the lower edge of the beach, which faces the open sea to the south. The
surface temperature curves are comparatively regular aud show less variation from local iuflm-uces than would be
expected at a shore station of its character.
Brenton's Beef light-ship.— knchoTcd in Hi fathoms of water, off the entrance to Nanagausfclt Bay, aud about IJ
miles from land ; 17f miles distant from Block Island southeast light.
MASSACHUSETTS.
Vineyard Sound lighl-sliip. — Anchored in 15 fathoms of water, on the western side of the southern eutrauce to
Vineyard Sound, di miles from Cuttyhuuk Island, the nearest laud, aud 17^ miles from Brenton's Reef light-ship.
Nantueket Neie South Shoal light-ehip. — Anchored in 16 to 18 fathoms, at the southern edge of Nantucket shoals,
and 21 miles southeast of Nantucket Island, the nearest land ; distant about 58 miles from Vineyard Sound light-ship.
This station occupies a very imiJortaut position with reference to the ofl-shore fisheries.
Follock Hip light-ship. — Anchored in 5 to 7 fathoms of water, iu the eastern eutrauce to Nantucket Sound, aud 3J
miles SE. by E. ^ E. from Monomoy Point light-house. Cape Cod ; distant abont 36 miles from Nantucket New South
Shoal light-.ship. This light-ship is mostly surrounded by numerous shoals which are separated by channels occupied
by strong tidal currents.
Thatcher's Island ii(//i(s.— Located ou Thatcher's Island, olf the eastern extremity of Cape Ann, about 73 miles from
Pollock Kip light-ship. Depths of 60 fathoms occur within a distance of 6| miles to the eastward. The surface tem-
perature observatious were taken where the water is 7 feet deep, and show variations from local influences. Obser-
vations were first made at this station by one of the light-house keepers, but after April, 1881, by an observer of the
U. S. Signal Service.
MAINE.
Boon Inland liglit-house. — Boon Island is a small rocky island lying off York Harbor, and 5f miles from the nearest
janil. It is distant about 35 miles from Thatcher's Island, and. is surrounded by depths of SJ to 25 fathoms within a
radius ofl mile. The depth of water where the surface observations were taken is 9 feet. Many gai)s occur iu the
records of this station, aud the reductions plotted on the chart are therefore probably not reliable.
Seguin Island lighthouse. ^Seguin Island is small and rocky, aud is situated about 2i miles off the nearest point
of the mainland, on the eastern side of the entrance to Kennebec Eiver, and about 47 miles from Boon Island. The
light-house is on the western side of the island, where the water is from 6 to 8 fathoms deep close inshore at the
place of observation.
Matinicus Boek light-house. — Mafinicus Bock is a rocky islet about 14 miles south of Viual Haven, at the mouth of
Penobscot Bay, and about 80 luiles from Seguiu Island. Depths of 4 to 45 fathoms occur within a radius of 1 mile,
the depth where the surface observatious where taken rauging from 6 to 12 fathoms.
Mount Desert Bock light-house. — Mount Desert Rock is similar iu character to Matinicus Rock, and io situated
about IS miles otl' Moiuit Desert Island and 34 miles from Matinieus Rock. Within a radius of 5 miles the depths
]64 FISUING GROUNDS OP NORTH AMERICA.
likuge from 00 to 'J.') l:ulioms; the tleptlis of water where the observations were taken were i to 10 fathoms; the rceords
are about as imperfect at this station as at Boon Island.
Petit Ilinan light-house. — Petit Mauau Island consists of a gronp of low, rocky islets, situated about 2 miles from
land, off the western entrance to Pigeon Ilill Bay, and 27 miles from Mount Desert Kock. They are surrounded by
deep water, the observations having been taken where the depths range from 8 to l.'i fathoms.
RELATIVE POSITIONS OP THE STATIONS.
The three most southcru of the temperature stations, those at the Tortugas, Carysfort Reef,
and Fovrej' Rocks, are located ou the northern and western edge of a deep and coiiii)arative]y
narrow channel, called the Straits of Florida, which extends first easterly from the Gulf of ]\Iexico
and then northerly into the Atlantic Ocean. This channel, which is occupied for its entire width
and length by the Gulf Stream, is bounded on the north and west by Florida, on the south by
Cuba, and ou the east by the Bahama banks and islands. Its length is about 350 miles, but the
temperature stations are limited to its central and western portions, all being situated on the
Florida Reefs. In front of the Tortugas, the 100-fathom curve is distant about 15 miles from the
southern edge of the reefs, wLich are located at the southern end of the submerged continental
slope bordering the west coast of Florida for a width of 110 to M5 miles. At Carysfort Reef, the
100-fathom curve is distant only about 7 miles from shore, and at Fowey Rocks only 2i miles.
The deei)est water in the straits occurs at the western entrance, opposite the Tortug.is, and iu
places exceeds 1,000 lathoms, the southern and eastern sides of the straits being generally deeper
tlian the northern and western. The influence of the great body of warm water composing tbe
Gulf Stream is felt directly upon the Florida Reefs, although these reefs are known to be bathed
by a narrow counter current flowing to the westward. The axis or warmest band of the Gulf
Stream glasses nearer the southern and eastern than the Florida side of the channel.
The Tortugas Reefs are situated at the western end of the Straits of Florida, on the northern
side, where the distance across from land to land is about 90 miles. The Tortugas station, bow-
ever, is in a somewhat protected position, and local influences are perceptible iu the temperature
records. At Fowey Rocks, the width of the cliaiinel is reduced to about 40 miles, this width
being the least of any in tbe straits. The stations at Carysfort Reef and Fowey Rocks both
occupy more exposed positions than the one at tlie Tortugas, and are therefore better located for
ascertaining the temperature of the open waters bordering the reefs.
Between the Florida Reefs and the first station to the north (Martin's Industry light ship,
South Carolina), a distance of about 6i degrees of latitude intervenes. Within this distance tbe
100-fathom curve and the inner edge of the Gulf Stream gradually recede from the coast line as
far as Georgia, whence to near Cape Lookout, North Carolina, they retain a nearly uniform dis-
tance from the shore. Along this section of the coast the submerged continental plateau bas an
average width of about 55 miles to the 100-fathom curve, which lies ju.st within the inner edge of
the Gulf Stream or "Cold Wall.' The bottom slopes gradually from the shore into depths of
about 50 fathoms, beyond which the descent is very rapid. Just south of Cape Lookout the 100-
l^ithom curve bends in somewhat toward the shore, and iu front of Cape Ilatteras tbe submerged
continental border is only about one-third as wide as it is farther south, the Gulf Stream also
approaching nearer to the land. North of Cape Hatteras the 100-ftithom curve again recedes
from the sbore and the Gulf Stream is deflected toward the east.
Between Georgia and Ca])o Ilatteras there are four stations, of which three arc light-ships,
located .several miles olf shore, in depths of 5 to 11 fathoms. Martin's Industry light ship is off
tbe entrance to Port Royal Sound, South Carolina, iu front of Martin's Industry Shoal, which
separates the sontli and southeast clianuels; Rattletuake Shoal liglil-shi]> is just north of the
OCEAN TEMPERATURES. 165
e-utrauce to Ohailestou Harbor, aud Frying Pan Sboals light ship is 17 miles off Cape Fear, North
Carolina. It is possible that the fresh waters emptying into the sea in the neighborhooil of the
two former stations may influence the surface temperatures to a greater or less degree, but the
distance of these lightships from .shore makes this supposition improbable. Cape Lookout
light-house is a shore station aflbrdiug results of local value only, and Body's Island light-house,
about 35 miles north of Cape Hatteras, is of the same character.
At Winter Quarter Shoal light-ship, Virginia, the next station north of Body's Island, the
lOOfathom curve is distant about 55 miles from shore, the submerged continental i)lateau having
about tlie same width here as to the south of Cape Lookout. At Five Fathom Bank the width
increases to over Co miles; opposite New York Bay entrance it is about 100 miles wide, and in
front of Nantucket Island about SO miles wide. The slope of the bottom along this part of the
coast is also very gradual until a depth of about 50 fathoms is reached, the distance between the
50 aud 100 fathom curves being only 5 to 15 miles. The inner edge of the Gulf Stream i.s distant
from the shore at Winter Quarter Shoal about 100 miles; at Five-Fathom Bank about liO miles ;
at Nantucket Island about 200 miles, and, therefore, bears no relation to the submerged continental
border, north of Cape Hatteras, as determined by the lOO-fathom curve.
Winter Quarter Shoal and Five Fathom Bank light-ships are the two most southern stations
on this part of the plateau, and both are favoi^ablj' situated, the former Si miles off shore in a
depth of 10 fathoms; the latter 14 miles off shore in a depth of 12 fathoms. The next light-ship
to the north is that off Sandy Hook, New Jersey, which is anchored in 14 fathoms of water. Being
located directly off the mouth of New York Bay, the surface waters at this station may i>ossibly
be influenced to some extent by the outflow from the Hudson River, especially in the early spring
after the ice has broken up, but there is no special evidence to that eifect. Between Delaware
Bay and Rhode Island there are three shore stations, two (Absecon aud Fire Island) situated upon
tidal inlets, and one (Block Island) upon an ocean beach. The two former have furnished better
observations than would ordinarily be considered possible iu such places.
East of Block Island there are four temperature stations off the southern coast of New Eug-
laud, all of which aiv well located. The Brenton's Reef and Vineyard Sound light-ships belong
to the area included between Block Island and Martha's Vineyard. Pollock Rip lightship is at
the eastern entrance to Nantucket or Vineyard Sound, aud, although surrounded by shoals, is in
the midst of strong tidal currents, which are probably not influenced by the neighboring laud.
Nantucket New South Shoal light-ship occupies one of the most exposed positions on tlie coast.
and is distant over 20 miles from the nearest land. A series of stations like this one, distributed
along the entire coast, could be made to furnish most important data respecting the fisheries.
The Gulf of Jlaine, iu which the remaining stations are located, is a moderately deep basin.
surrounded on the west, north, and northeast by land, on the south by George's Bank, aud on the
east by Browu's Bank, in pait, and the shoal water off Cape Sable, Nova Scotia. The Bay of
Fundy opens into it from the northeast. This area contains many banks and ledges, and the bot-
tom contour lines are very irregular. The SOfathom curve is nowhere distant from the land, and
along the northern coast, where most of the stations are situated, approaches close to it. The 100
fathom curve is also not very far distant from the Massachusetts coast, and approaches the coast
of Maine between Mount Desert and Machias. The most southern station is on Thatcher's Island,
off Cape Ann, an important location, though, unfortunately, the observations were taken iu too
shallow water to make them of value with respect to the open waters of the gulf. Boon Island is
in the western part of the gulf, midway between Cape Ann and Portland. Seguiu Island, Matini-
cus Rock, and jNIount Desert Rock are in nearlv the same latitude, the first mentioned being near
I6G FISHING-GEOU^'DS OF NORTH AMERICA.
the raninlaiul, the two latter close to the oOfathoiu carve. Petit Manan Islaud, like Seguiii, lies
but a short distance ofif the mainland, and is the most northern and eastern station of the series.
COMPARISON OF THE STATIONS WITH RESPECT TO TEJIPERATUKE.
As explained elsewhere, the stations do not all afford temperature observations of equal value
on account of differences in the nature of their surroundings. Many of the stations included in
this report do not, therefore, furnish correct data with respect to the open waters of the coast, but
the character of the surface observations may be more or less accurately determined by a study of
their relations to the air temperatures. The light ships, being all located off shore in depths
exceeding 5 fathoms, are naturally best adapted for the taking of ocean temperatures, while nest
in order of excellence, as a rule, are the light-houses situated on small islands and reefs, more or
less distant from the mainland. The records for January and February at nearly all the stations
north of Cape Hatteras have not been used, on account of the manifest errors of observation some-
times made during extremely cold weather, by not reading the thermometer quickly enough after
it has been withdrawn from the water. These errors do not appear to extend much into either
December or March, although at some stations the records for those months may show too low a
range of temperature by a very small amount. However, the winter surface temperatures are not
of much importance in connection with any fishery problem north of Cape Hatteras.
At the extreme south we recognize a group of stations which differ from all the others in the
conditions of temperature. It includes only the three light-houses of the Florida Reefs, bordering
the Gulf Stream. At Carysfort Reef and Fowey Rocks the curves of surface temperature are more
regular than at the Tortugas and correspond less closely with the air curves, indicating fewer local
influences or more open exposures at the places of observation. The three succeeding light ships,
Martin's Industry, Rattlesnake Shoal, and Frying Pan Shoals, afford more or less uniform results,
the plottings forming much more pronounced curves than at the Florida Reefs ; the surface curves
are most regular at the first mentioned light-ship. Cape Lookout is a shore station at which the
irregularities in the air curves are almost exactly repeated in the .snrfiice curves, although the
maximum surface tempeiature is no higher than atFrying Pan Shoals light-sliip. At Body's Island,
another station on the mainland, both the air and surface curves indicate extreme fluctuations in
temperature, which are almost precisely alike for both the air and surface. The surface lines at
Winter Quarter Shoal and Five-Fathom Bank light-sliiiis correspond closely in their general cur-
vature, and also in many of their details. At Absecou Inlet, the third shore station, the water
curves are more regular than at either Cape Lookout or Body's Island, but the maximum temper-
ature is the same for both the air and water. The surface curves differ considerably from those of
the air at Sandy Hook lightship, and at Fire Islaud and Block Island the results are much more
satisfactory than at any of the other shore stations, in both cases the maximum surface tempera-
tures being about 8o..j lower than the maximum air temperatures. At the three succeeding light-
ships, Brentou's Reef, Vineyard Sound, and Nantucket New South Shoal, the surface curves are
all comparatively regular; but at Pollock Rip lightship, they present many irregularities which
do not, in all cases, correspond with those of the air. The fluctuations of temperature are still
greater at Thatcher's Island, wliere the observations were taken in a sheltered position in .shallow
water. Of the islands in the northern part of the Gulf of Maine, the most regular and uniform
series of surface curves are presented by Matinicus Rock, Seguin Island affording the next best
series in that respect. At the three other stations the surface curves are less regular, especially
from 1881 to 1883, inclusive, but the irregularities do not appear to be due, in most cases, to atmos-
pheric influence.
o
OCEAN TEMPERATUltES. 167
The Florida Reefs. — ExcUidiug the observatious for the Toitugas, the extreme range of sur-
face temperature at the Florida Eeefs is lCo.5, with a maximum of 8G°.5. The maximum at the Tor-
tugas is about the same, but the minimum is 5° lower. The air temperature presents a range of 18°
to 210.5, the air maximum being about the same as the surface maximum at Fowey Eocks, 2o.5
higher at the Tortugas, and 2o.5 lower at Carj'sfort Eeef. At none of the other stations along the
coast do we find nearly so short a range either of surface or air temperature, and these are the
only stations that are situated directly within the influence of the Gulf Stream.
South Cakolina to Virginia. — At the light-ships of Martin's Industry Shoal and Eattle-
snake Shoal, the range of air temperature is 41°, the surface range 38°, the maximum for the air
being SG°.o, the maximum for the water 85°, or about lo.5 lower than at the Florida Eeefs. The
greater range of temperature at these two light-ships, and at the stations immediately following
them toward the north is due to the much lower temperatures of winter, amounting to over 20°, the
differences in the maximums being slight. At Frying Pan Shoals light-ship, the maximums of both
air and surface temperatures are slightly lower, the air range being the same as at Eattlesuakc
Shoal, the surface range only 33°, with a maximum of S2°.5. The records for Cape Lookout and
Body's Island, show approximately the same range for both air and surface temperature at each,
amounting to about 42° at the former station, and 64° at the latter.
Virginia to New York. — iforth of Chesapeake Bay the maximums of surface temperature
are much lower than to the south, reaching 7C°.5 at Winter Quarter Shoal light-ship, and about the
same at Five-Fathom Bank lightship. This is 6° lower than at Frying Pan Shoals, the first light,
ship south of Cape Hatteras, and about 9° lower than at Eattlesnake Shoal and Martin's Industry
light-ships. At the northern stations, beginning with Winter Quarter Shoal light-ship, the tem-
perature plottings for January and February have been omitted in most cases, and the ranges of
temperature, where given, are, unless otherwise stated, for only ten months. At Absecon Inlet,
on the mainland, the surface maximum is about 3° higher (79°. 5) than at the two preceding light-
ships, and agrees with the air maximum ; at Sandy Hook light-ship the surface maximum is ]i° to
2° lower than at Five-Fathom Bank and Winter Quarter Shoal, and 7° lower than the air maxi-
mum at the same place ; at Fire Island the surface maximum is S° lower than the air maximum,
and about the same as the surface maximum at Sandy Hook, showing more satisfactory observa-
tions than at any of the previous shore stations.
Block Island to Cape Cod. — The surface maximum at Block Island is 8o..5 lower than the
air maximum, and onlj' 1°.5 higher (70°.5) than at the neai'est light ship, which is about 18 miles
distant. Brenton's Eeef and Vineyard Sound light-ships afford closely corresponding results, the
maximum of both air and surface temperature being slightly lower at the latter station. Tlie sur-
face maximum at Brenton's Eeef is G9°, being 5°. 5 lower than at Sandy Hook, 7°. 5 lower than at
Winter Quarter Shoal, 16° lower than at Martin's Industry, and 17°.5 lower than at («lie Florida
Reefs, the maximum for Brenton's Eeef being a little lower than the minimum for the Florida
Eeefs. At Nantucket New South Shoal, and Pollock Eip liglitsliips, the maximums of surface
temperature are approximately the same, about G2°, and the range of temiierature is but slightly
less at the former station; the air maximum is 3° higher at Nantucket than at Pollock Rsp- The
surface maximum is the same at these two light-ships as at Boon Island, in the Gulf of jMaino,
which has also approximately the same range, 29° for 10 months. This range is much sliorter
than at Vineyard Sound light-ship and preceding stations, while the air i-ange remains about the
same. The surface curves at Nantucket New South Shoal and Pollock EJp are, therefore,
straighter in comparison witli tlie air curves than at tlie more western stations, and Ibis same
feature will also be found characteristic of the stations in tlie Ijulf of Elaine.
1G8
FISHING-GKOUNDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
(xULF OF Maine. — Cousidorable (liffeieiico.s occur in the iiiaxiinnui.s of both aii' ami .surface
temperatures at the several stations iu the Gulf of Maine. Aside from Thatcher's Island, the high-
est air maximum is 75o.5, at Mount Desert Rock, the lowest 05°, atMatiuicus Rockj the highest
water maximum i.s 62°, at Boon Island, the lowest 54°, at Matinicus Rock. As to the surface
curves, Boon Island agrees most closely with Pollock Rip and Nantucket New Soutli Shoal, while
Matiuicus Rock and Mount Desert Rock afford the lowest surface maximums of any of the stations
on the entii'e coast.
Tabic showing llie miiiimuni, and maximum temperatures of the air and surface water, and the ranges of air and surface temper-
ature at the light-house stations, for the five years from 1881 to 1885, inclusive.
Stations.^
Petit il.in.in Island, Me
Mount Desert Rock, Me
Matinicu3 Kock, Me
Seguin Island, Me
Boon Island, Mo
Thatcher's Island, Mass
Pollock Hip, Mags
N'antiicket X. S. Shoal, Mass.
Vineyard Sound, Mass
Brenton's Reef, K. I
Block Island, R.I
Fire Island, N. T
Satidy Hook, N. T
Absccon Inlet, N. .J
Five-Fathom Bank, N. J
Winter Quarter Shoal, Va
Body's Island, N. C.
Cape Lookout, N. C
Frying Pan Shoals, K. C
Eattlemake Shoal, S.C
Martin's Industry, S. C
Fowey Rocks, Fla
Carysfort Reof, Fla
Tortugas, Fla
Pt-riod.
Air temperature.
Minimam. Maximum. Range.
March 1 to January 1 .
do
do
, do
, do
Entire year
March 1 to January 1 .
Entire year
March 1 to January 1 .
do
, do
do
do
do
do
do
Entire year
do...
do
do
do
do
do
do
o p,
20
24
52.5
30
27
20
28.5
29
22
.^5
31.5
33
36.5
33
43
44
45.5
45
68
05.5
67
o p,
■?o
75.5
05
70.5
73.5
78.5
66
C9
71.5
74.5
79
83.5
81.5
79.5
83.5
81
91
84
85
86. 5
81
88.5
50
50
42
40.5
51
48.5
39
43
43
45.5
57
48.5
50
40.5
47
48
04
41
41
41
41.5
18
18.5
21.5
Surface temperature.
Minimum. Maximom. Range.
o F,
31
33
32.5
33
33
33
3'2
33.3
31
34
aa. 5
33
33
34. 5
37
35. 5
28
42
49.5
47
47
70
71.5
05. 5
" F.
58.5
54.5
54
58
62
07
02.5
62
08
09
70.5
75
74.3
79.5
70
70.5
91
84
82.5
85
85
80.5
80.5
86
°F.
27.5
21.6
21.5
2,',
•:!>
3>
30.5
28.5
37
33
41
40
41.5
45
39
41
63
42
33
38
38
10.3
15
20.5
*The names of light-ships are printed iu italics.
RELATIONS OF THE TEMPEKATUUE CURVES.
A comparison of the temperature curves for corresponding years at successive stations shows
great uniformity in their relative positions and also in those irregularities which are indicative of
more or less rapid changes of temperature. This uniformity often extends to stations that are
widely separated or differently situated. Between January 20 and April 10, 1881, there were three
separate periods during 'which the temperature fell below the average for that time of year at the
.southern stations. These several jieriods of low temperature are well brought out for both the air
and surface by marked deflections in the curves beginning at the Tortugas and extending as fiir
as Body's Island, tlie most northern station at which the temi>eiatnre observations have been
plotted for January and l'"ebruary. North of F.ody's Island, the last of these three period;;, occur-
ring between March 21 and A])ril 10, can be traced as far as tlie Gulf of Maine, although at the
northern stations the temi)erature at that time was not always lower than in otheryears. Again,
between November 10 and December IC, 1882, another innisually cold si)cll is indicated on all \he
charts from the Tortugasto the Gulf of IMaine. Manvother indicalions of contbrmity luMween the
OCEAN TEMPERATURES. 169
temperature curves at different stations will be observed on even a very superdeial comparison of
tbe charts. It will also be noticed that, while at the southern stations the temperature curves are
generally most regular durinjr the summer months, the reverse is true of the extreme northern
ones.
THE SURFACE ISOTHERMS.
The purpose in view in preparing the charts of surface isotherms (Nos. 26 to 31), Las been to
present the temperature observations on which this report is based, in what api)ears to be the
most couvenient form for use in conuectiou with such fishery i)robleras as are suggested by the
migrations of surface schooling fishes. If such species as the mackerel are controlled in their
movements toward the north by conditions of temperature that are constant for all latitudes, a
line drawn upon a chart to indicate their progress with reference to time must agree more or less
closely with some line of equal temperature projected from point to point along the same coast.
This supposition expresses in a general way the belief of many i)er.sons who have studied the
migrations of mackerel and other economic fishes, but up to the present time sufficient data have
not been collated to render possible the practical application of the priuc7i)le to those species that
live solely in salt water.
The isothermal charts are seven iu number; one for each of the five years iVom 1881 to 18S5,
iuclusive, one representing the means of the sauie five years, and the final one illustrating the
relations of the air and surface isotherms. The annual charts are of most importance for fishery
puriioses, as, in showing tlie changes of position of the isothermal lines from year to year, they may
])0ssibly serve to explain tlie causes of the irregularity in tbe appearance of certain species upon
diflerent parts of the eastern coast iu different years. A few words of explanation are necessary
i-es[)ectiug the construction and contents of these charts.
Although, as elsewhere explained, the temperature results are not of equal value at all the
stations, the latter have all been included in the charts, for the reason that it was impossible to
determine satisfactorily, excepting in a few cases, which should be excluded. The observations
at Cape Lookout, Body's Island and Absecon Inlet evidently do not apply to the open waters of
the coast, and the same is probably true to some extent with respect to a few of the other mainland
and islantl stations. The three stations specially referred to have not generally been considered
in discussing the isothermal charts. The data for the construction of the charts has been taken
from the original temiierature records, and not from the reductions to ten-day means, although the
latter have been considered in deciding every date used in constructing the isotherms. In deter-
mining the dates for each isotherm no observations were considered unless the means of twenty
consecutive observations (ten days) equalled or exceeded the temperature of that isotherm, except
in a few instances elsewhere explained. The temperature of 40°, for example, might be reached at
any station either within the first ten-day period indicated upon the special chart of that station
(charts of ten-day means) as having a mean of more than -lOo, or in the latter part of the previous
ten-day period; but the mean temperature for the ten days following and including the date of the
isotherm must not be under 40°. For the isothernis during the period of falling temperature in
the last half of the year this order is reverse<l.
In constructing the charts, the names of the stations have beeu arranged vertically, in geo-
graphical sequence, on the left hand side of the chart. The remainder of the chart is divided into
thirteen vertical spaces, each representing one month, that on the extreme right being for the
month of January of the year following that to which the chart relates. Each month is further
divided by the fainter lines into five equal parts, for convenience in reading tJie dates. Tiie iso-
170 FISIIIXG-GROUNDS OV NORTU AMERICA.
tbeniial Hues are coustructeil for every five degrees of tempeiatiire from 40° to 80°, aud are carried
vertically from statiou to station, connecting the dates at which the temperatures they represent
were reached at each station ; the data for each separate statiou are to be read across the chart
from left to right. Two series of isotherms are actually included on each chart, one relating to the
l)oriod of rising temi)eratures in the first half of the year, the other to that of falling temperatures
in the hist half of the year. The space included between any two isotherms of equal value is sup-
posed to represent a period during which the temperature was always equal to or above that indi-
cated by the isotherms. Those portions of the isothermal lines consisting of dashes denote the
lack of observations for the stations opposite them. Complete breaks in the lines generally indi-
cate that the temperature did not reacli the isotherm at that station during the year, or during the
period of either rising or falling temperature.
In explanation of the arrangement, reference may be made to the isothermal chart for 1881
(No. 26). In that year the isotherm of 40° did not extend south of Body's Island, where the tem-
perature reached 4()o about the middle of February. At Winter Quarter Shoal the same tempera-
ture was reached March 20; at Five-Fathom Bank, April 15 ; at Absecon Inlet, March 20; at Sandy
Hook, April 14; at Fire Island, April 8; at Block Island, April 16. The temperature remained
above 40° throughout the rest of the year, and until after January, 1882, at Body's Island, Winter
Quarter Shoal, Five Fathom Bank, and Sandy Hook; until January 2, 1882, at Absecon Inlet ;
until December 31, at Fire Island ; and until January 1, at Block Island. The isotherms of 4.5°, 50°,
55°, &c., are reached at successively later dates during the period of rising temperature, and at
earlier dates during the period of falling temperature, Init the intervals between them vary greatly
at the different stations.
RANGES OF THE ISOTHERMS.
A detailed comparison of tiie isothermal charts would tend to confuse rather than to aid refer-
ence to them, and our remarks on the subject will be limited to a few statements respecting the
range and general position of the isotherms.
The isotherms of 40° and 4.5° are generally co-extensive iu their range. They always reach
as far north as Petit Manan, and frequently as far south as Body's Island, but may stop at either
Winter Quarter Shoal or Five-Fathom Bank; in 1882, the isotherm of 40° extended south only as
far as Absecon Inlet. The isotherm of 50° begins at the north at Petit Manan, and at the south
may terminate at Cape Lookout or Martin's Industry. The isotherms of 55° to 70°, inclusive,
always reach south to Martin's Industry, but no farther; while those of 75° and 80° are the only
ones ranging aloyg the Florida Reef stations to the Tortugas. A temperature of 55° is often
recorded at Petit Manan, but seldom at the next two stations to the westward— Mount Desert
Eock aud JIatinicus Rock. South of here the isotherm of 55° is generally continuous. The
temperature usually reaches 00° at Boon Island and Thatcher's Island (although at the latter
station observations are wanting for 1884 aud ISSo), but during some years remains lower than
this at Pollock Rip and Nantucket New South Shoal. The isotherm of 65° generally extends
northward to Vineyard Sound, but in 1884 it began at Breuton's Reef; that of 70° extends north
to Fire Island or Block Island. Absecon Inlet is the northern limit of the isotherm of 75°, which
in some years, however, does not reach north of Body's Island or Cape Lookout. The isotherm of
80° does not pass north of Body's Island.
CHANGES IN POSITION OF TIIE ISOTIIEliM.y I'M DIFFERENT YEARS.
During the five years represented by the charts there is considerable change in the positions
of the isotherms of equal value from year to year, frequently amounting to a month in time, and
OCEAX TEMPERATURES. 171
occasionally to uiucli more. The differeuces arc greater at some stations than at others, and are
seldom nearly the same at any station for two or more isotherms of different valnus. At Nan
tucket New South Shoal, for example, the isotherms of ^0° for five years, during the periods of
rising temperature, all appeared within four days of the same date, while those of 45° are
distributed over a period of abont eigliteen days. At the next station to the norlt — Pollock Rip —
the isotherms of 40° cover a period of over forty days, and those of 45°, a period of tweuty-four
days. At Petit Manan the isotherms of 40° and 45° are remarkablj- constant in position from
year to year. The isotherms of 45° and 50° appear to bo the most uniform in that respect for
their entire range during the five years; but no two isotbernis of equal value retain the same
relative x^ositious throughout their range. There may be comparative regularity with respect to
several consecutive stations, but they generally cross one another one or more times, and while
the isotherm of 40° for 1881 precedes that of 40° for 1882, between Mount Desert and Pollock Rip,
at the more southern stations the reverse is true. The differences and irregularities in the posi-
tions of the yearly isotherms are so great tliat no definite laws respecting their relations over an
extended range of coast can be deduced from the materials used in the preparation of this report.
GENERAL POSITIONS OF THE ISOTHERMS.
Forty degrees. — The five isotherms of 40° (1881-85), during the period of rising tem-
perature in the spring, pass from Winter Quarter Shoal to Fire Island in March and the first half
of April, from Block Island to Pollock Rip mostly in April, and reach the Gulf of Maine in the
latter part of April or first half of May. At Petit Manan this temperature appears with great
regularity about the middle of April. During the period of falling temperature, the isotherms of
40° are confined for the most part to the month of December, although they sometimes extend into
January of the following year, and, as a whole, are more nearly vertical in their direction than
tbose of the first half of the year.
Forty-five degrees.— From Winter Quarter Shoal to Fire Island the isothernis of 45°,
during the period of rising temperature, fall mostly within the month of April, but during two
years at Absecon Inlet, and one year at Winter Quarter Shoal, that temperature first appeared in
the last half of March. From Block Island northward the same isotherms extend, in a general
way, obliquely across the month of May into the first part of June at Matinicus Rock and Mount
Desert Rock; they reach Petit Manan in the last of April or first part of Jlay, or earlier than at
any other station in the Gulf of Maine. During the period of falling temperature, the isotherms
of 45° in the Gulf of Maine are mostly conlined to the month of Xoveinber, and farther sontli to
the last part of November and December.
Fifty degrees. — On the coast of South Carolina, the isotherms of 50° occur in January and
February, during the rise of temperature ; at Winter Quarter Shoal not until May, and at Absecon
Inlet in the last part of April and first half of May. From this point they extend obliquely across
the months of Jlay and June, I'eaching Nantucket New Sonth Shoal in the first part of June,
Matinicus Rock in July, Mount Desert Rock between May 24 and July 12, and Petit Manan
between June 8 and July 10. The same irregularities in the positions of the isotherms occur
during the period of falling temperature in the Gulf of Maine, where they cover a period extend
ing from September 10 to November 2G. From Pollock Rip to Absecon Inlet the same isotherms
are mostly limited to the month of .»Tovember, and from Five-Fathom Bank to :\[artin's Industry
they extend from the last of November into the first part of January.
Fifty-five degrees.— None of the isotherms of 55° can be plotted continuously east of
Seguin Ishuid, although at Petit Manan this temperature was recorded during all the four years
172 FISHING-GROUXDS OF NORTH AMERICA.
from 1SS2 to 1SS5, inclusive, and at Mount Desert Rock, during short periods in 1881 and 18S3.
South of Cape Lookout, the isotherms of o'P, during the season of rising temperature, occupy very
different positions every year, ranging from January 1 to April 1. From Winter Quarter Shoal to
Fire Island, they occur mostly between the lOth and last of May, from Block Island to Nantucket
New South Shoal in June, and farther north in the last part of June or in July. During the
period of falling temperature, tliey occur in the last part of August, September, or the first part
of October, at Seguin Island, and in December or January on the coast of South Carolina.
Sixty degrees. ^Thc isotherms of G0° for 1S85, are the only ones that extend northward
continuously to Boon Island, the isotherms of that temperature during other years generally stop-
ping at Nantucket New South Shoal. On the coast of South Carolina these isotherms are confined
to IMarch and April ; from Winter Quarter Shoal to Fire Island, Ihey occur during the last of May
and fust half ol' June; from Block Island to Vineyard Sound, in June; and at Nantucket New
South Shoal, between July 14 and August 28. During falling temperature they appear at Nan-
tucket New South Shoal between August 14 and October l,and reach Martin's Industry between
November L'G and December IS.
Sixty-five degrees. — The isotherms of 65°, during rising temperature, occur in Ai)nl at
Martin's Industry and Rattlesnake Shoal, in the tirst ]iart of May at Frying Pan Shoals, but at
Winter Quarter Shoal not until the middle of June or first part of July. Between Five-Fathom
Bank and Fire Island they appear mostly in June, at Block Island in July, and at Brenton's Iteef
and Vineyard Sound in the last part of June and in July. During falling temperature, they occur
at Vineyard Sound in August; at Block Island are exceedingly variable in position, ranging from
Augusts to the last of September; and on the coast of South Carolina are mainly confined to the
month of November.
Seventy" degrees. — The isotherms of 70° sometimes extend ro Block Island, but generally
terminate at Fire Island. South of Cape Hatteras they are almost entirely confined to the niontli
of May. From Winter Quarter Sboal northward they are exceedingly Aariable in position from
year to year, during the periods of both rising and falling temperature, their extreme range in
time in the former period being from June 18 to August IS, and in the latter from July 23 to Octo-
ber 14.
Seventy-five degrees.— The isotherms of 75° are diflicnlt to plot at the Florida Reefs on
account of the frequent fiuctaations in temperature, which generally occur between November
and the following ]\lay. During those months there were often brief periods of higher tempera-
ture than 75°, which it was impossible to represent in connection with the isotherms, but they are
all shown on the .special charts of the three Florida stations. At Carysfort Reef and Fowey
Rocks the isotherm of 75° may appear as late as the 18th of April, durnig rising temperature,
and as early as the 24th of November during falling temperature. At Martin's Industry, dur-
ing the period of rising temperature, they occur mostly in the extreme latter part of May and at
Frying Pan Shoals in the first part of June. From Winter Quarter Shoal northward to Absecon,
these isotherms, when they appear, are mainly confined to the last part of July and August.
Eighty degrees.— TJie iieriod of higher temperature than 80° is shorter at the Tortugas
than at the more northern stations of the Florida Reefs, and tlio isotherms of 80° of both series
bend inward ujiun the chart at that place. At Carysfort Reef and Fowey Rocks these i.sotherms.
on the rising temperature, were distributed, during the five years, between the lOtli and tiu' very
last of May; at :\Iartiii's Industry and Rattlesnake Shoal between the 12th and last of June; and
at Frying Pan Shoals between Hie 1st and middle of July. During the period of falling temi)era-
ture they occui)y a wider range in time, and extend obliquely from Fi-ying Pan Shoals to Carysfort
OCEAN TEMPERATURES. 173
Reef, at the foimer statiou occuniiif;' between Augiif^t 1 and September 20, and at the latter be-
tween October 20 and December 8.
Eighty-five degrees. — The isnrfaee waters seldom reach a teinperatureofSyC excepting for
short periods at the extreme south, and it has been impossible to coustrnct isotherms for more
than one j'ear at Martin's Industry and the Florida Reef stations. Temperatures of 85^ and over
•were recorded between the Sth and last of July, 1881, at Rattlesnake Shoal, Fowey Rocks, and
the Tortugas; between the lirst part of July and the last of August, 1883, at (Jarysfort Reef and
Fowey Rocks ; and in 1885, from August 2 to 2G, at Martin's Industry, from July 29 to Septendjer
28, at Fowey Rocks, and from July 9 to September 25, at Carysfort Reef.
Ninety degrees. — A surface temperature of 90° was occasionally recorded at some of the
extreme southern stations, but never for more than a day or two at a time.
MEAN ISOTDERMS BASED IPON I'lTE YEARS' OBSERVATIONS.
lu constructing chart No. 31, it was impossible, in all cases, to obtain the reductions of five
years' observations, ou account of occasional breaks in the records, but the number of years
plotted is never less than three and generally more than four. The exact number iu each instance
may be determined by reference to the annual isothermal charts (Nos. 2G-30).
Ou this chart the surface isotherms are represented as being much more regular and more
uniformly distributed with reference to time than ou any of the yearly charts. Ou the left-hand
side of the chart, north of Body's Island, there is a wide area of low temperatures, bounded by the
isotherms of 40°. From Winter Quarter Shoal to Fire Island, inclusive, this area represents a
period of about seventy-five to one hundred days, being shortest at Five-Fathom Bank, and
longest at Sandy Hook ; from Block Island northward the length of this period varies from one
hundred to one hundred and thirty-five days, being shortest at Brenton's Reef and longest at Boon
Island. A narrower space of maximum temperatures extends vertically through the center of the
chart, occupying principally the month of xVugust, which is not crossed by any of the isotherms,
although a few of them extend a short distance into it. The length of time elapsing between
successive isotherms is generally from about twelve to twenty-four days, seldom less but often more.
The isotherms are more numerous and follow one another more ra[)idly at the intermediate stations
of the series than at the northern and southern stations ; toward the north and south they diverge
somewhat and become more widely separated. This naturally results from the fact that at the
intermediate stations there is a much greater range of tem])erature (above a minimum of 40°) than
at the northern and southern ones. In the eastern part of the Gulf of Elaine there are only three
continuous isotherms of the value of those i)lotted (40^ to 50°, inclusive); in the western part four
such isotherms (40° to 55°, inclusive). Ou the southern coast of New England there are five
isotherms at Nantucket New South Shoal (40° to 00°, inclusive;, and six from Vineyard Sound to
Block Island (40° to 05°, inclusive) ; seven extend from Fire Island to Body's Island (40° to 70°,
inclusive) ; four occur on the coast of South Carolina (55° to 70°, inclusive), and two at the Florida
Reefs (75° to 80°, inclusive, and sometimes 85°).
North of Body's Island the isotherms of both series extend in a slightly oblique direction trend-
ing inward toward the north. At Cape Ilatteras they bend abruptly, and the same isotherms
appear much earlier iu the year to the south of that important cape.
At Frying Pan Shoals, the first reliable statiou south of Ilatteras, the isotherm of :)3° api)ears
about ninety days earlier than at Winter Quarter Shoal; the isotherm of GOo about sixty days
earlier; the isotherm of 05° about fifty days earlier; and the i.sotherm of 70° also about fifty days
earlier.
174 i'i.siii^G GiiouNDS OF ^■oIr^ll ameiiica.
The isotherms of 75° ami 80° also bend abruptly between South Caroliua and the Florida
Reefs, that of 75° occurring at Fowey Rocks about sixty days in advance of Martin's Industry,
and th;it of 80° about twenty-six days in advance.
RELATIONS OF THE AIR AND SURFACE ISOTUERMS.
As stated in the explanation of Chart No. 32, there appears to be no constant relation between
the air and surface isotherms at any of the light-house stations. During the periods of both ris-
ing and falling temperature, the air temperature of any degree, as a rule, precedes the surface tem-
perature of the same degree, but the length of time intervening may vary from two or three days
to over a nionth.
THE WIND RECORDS.
Very complete records respecting the direction of the winds were kept at all the stations
excepting Thatcher's Island, the observations being taken twice each day, at the same time as
the temperatures. The wind records are even more complete thau are those for surface tem-
perature, having fewer breaks at any of the stations; and as temperature is greatly influenced by
the wind, it has been thought advisable to present in this connection a tabulation of the observa-
tions made. In this table (p. 170) the means of tive years' observations for each month are arranged
according to quadrants of the compass, beginning with the northeast quadrant. Northerly winds
have been included in the same quadrant with northwesterly winds, to which they appear to be
most nearly related in their eft'ects upon temperature. The extent of the several quadrants is, tliere-
fore, as follows : Northeast, from NNE. to E., inclusive ; southeast from ESB. to S., inclusive ; south-
irest from SSW. to W., inclusive; northvcst from WNW. to K, inclusive.
The general arrangement of the table scarcely requires an explanation. The data respecting
the several stations are classitied by quadrants under each month, and that for each station extends
from left to right across the table. In the columns of figures, each one-tenth of a unit represents
one observation, ami each unit ten observations, extendiug through five years, the latter being
equivalent to one day's ob.servations for Qvc years. The time ratio for eacli qnndnmt is, therefore,
represented by days and fractious of a day. For example, at the Tortugas station in January,
which has thirty-one days, the northeast quadrant shows a mean record of 11.9 days ; the ;*outheast
of 7.2 days; the southwest of 2 days, and the northwest of ~j.'.) days, making a total of thirty
days. The discrepancy of one day results from calms and variable winds. The terms used by
the observers to express the velocity of the winds not being nnifonn at the diflerent stations, it
has been impossible to tabulate them.
At the Florida Reef stations northeasterly and southeasterly winds prevailed tliroughout the
entire year, the records for the northwest and southwest quadrants being relatively small dnring
nearly every month. Northeasterly winds predominated at the Tortugas during every month
excepting June, in which the prevailing winds were southeasterly, and they afford an exceedingly
high record during October, November, and December. The records for Carysfort Reef and Fowey
Rocks, which are situated only about 23 miles apart, present some, though not considerable difter-
ences. At the former station northeasterly winds prevailed during February, May, September,
October, and November; at the latter, during September, October, November, and December;
the prevailing winds for the same stations during the other months being southeasterly. North-
westerly winds very rarely occur at the Florida Reel's during the summer months, and in only one
instance did they exceed a mean of eight days during the winter months, that being at Carysfort
Reef in December. ContiTiuons winds from tlie north and northwest cause a marked reduction in
OCEAN TEMPERATURES. 175
the teiuperature, as is strikingly illustrated in the chart for the Tortugas during March, 1881, and
November and December, 1882. The same conditions of temperature prevailed to some extent at
Carysfort Reef and Fowey Rocks during the same periods, but northwesterly winds were far less
prevalent at those stations during 1881 and 1882 than at the Tortugas. This subject is further
discussed in the explanations of the charts for the three Florida stations.
Passing northward from the Florida Reefs, the prevailing winds gradually change from north
easterly and southeasterly to northwesterly and southwesterly. From Martin's Industry Shoal,
South Carolina, to Cape Lookout, North Carolina, noitheasteily winds generally prevailed during
January, February, April, May, xVugust, September, October, November, and December; and
southwesterly winds during March, June, and July. A few slight exceptions to this rule are pre-
sented by some of these stations, and the wind records for two or even three quadrants are some-
times nearlj' alike during the same month. Northwesterly winds are no more common than at the
Florida Reefs.
Body's Island, North Carolina, and Winter Quarter Shoal, Virginia, occupy an intermediate
position between the southern and northern stations with respect to the winds as well as geo-
graphically. Northeasterly winds are less prevalent and northwesterly winds more common, espe-
cially during the colder months. At Five-Fathom Bank-, New Jersey, northeasterly winds prevailed
only during October, but they also furnished a relatively high record during May, August, and
September. The prevailing winds at that station for January, February, March, April, November,
and December were northwesterly ; for May, June, July, August, and September, southwesterly.
At Absecou Inlet, New Jersey, northeasterly and southeasterly wiuds prevailed from April tc
October, inclusive, and northwesterly winds during the other months. North of this station,
northeasterly wiuds rarely prevailed during any mouth, but northeasterly and southeasterly winds
are of much more frequent occurrence at the northern stations than are northwesterly and south-
westerly winds at the extreue southern ones. Northwesterly wiuds generally prevailed from
November to April, and southwesterly from April to November, but there are numerous excep-
tions to this rule, and at some of the stations southwesterlj- winds continued to be the i)revalent
ones through November and December. At Boon Island and Petit Manan, in the Gulf of Maine,
southeasterly wiuds predominated during most of the summer months, and the record of winds
from the northeast quadrant is very high at Boon Island, as also at some of the other stations on
the coasts of Massachusetts and Maine.
ITG
FISHmO-GROUNDS OF KOKTH AMERICA.
Table tliou'ing the direction of the winds, hij quadrants, for each month of the year, at the liyht-hovoe temperature slationx on
the eastern coast of the United Stales, being the mians of fire years' observations, from l!i81 to 18t'5, inclusive.'
Stations.
Jannary.
February.
Petit ManaD, Me
Sit. Desert Kock, Me
Mat iiiicus Kock, Me
Seguiu Lsland, Me
Boon Island, Mo
Pollock llii>. Mass
Nantucket N. S. Shoal
Vincyiud Sound ligbt-sliip, Mass
Brtnton's Keef, E.I
Block Island, K. I
Fire Island, N. T
Sandy Hook light-ship, N. Y
Absecon Inlet, N.J
Five-Fathom Bank, N. J
Winter Quarter Shoal, Va
Body's Island, N. C
Cape Lookout, N. C
Frying Pan Shoals, N. C
Kattlesnake Shoal, S. C
Martin's Industry Shoal, S. C ...
Fowey Kocks, Fla
Carysfort Keef, Fla
Tortugas, Fla
S. 5
4.9
3.7
7.4
7.8
4.5
4.8
6.8
4
6.7
5.8
7
5.2
5.2
9.5
8.4
11. S
13.5
12.1
12
11. G
8.4
14.9
3.6
4.5
4.8
2.1
3.2
5.3
4.4
2.4
3
4.3
1.7
3
2.8
1.8
■2.7
3.5
2.9
2.2
3
4.4
13.1
15
9.5
8.5
9.1
9.5
9
7.7
7.1
8.6
8.7
7.5
7.3
4.9
6.9
7.8
8.6
10
7.5
9.6
8.5
6.9
2.9
2.6
NE. SE. SW. N'W. NE. ' SE. SW. NW.
12.4
12.9
12.9
11.6
10.9
13.4
13.7
13.8
14
12.5
11.0
15.6
16
14.4
9.9
9.1
7.7
5
5.2
5.2
3.3
4.8
5.9
5.6
4.6
7.6
9
5.4
4.1
6.5
5
4.8
4.6
6.7
7.2
6.1
7.7
8.2
10.2
11.3
11.1
10.3
9.1
II
15.1
4.9
4.9
3.1
3.6
3.9
4.2
4.5
3.3
4.2
4.2
3.1
2.8
2.9
4
5.3
2.7
4.5
5.8
5.5
10.3
7
7
7.3
8
6.4
7.8
7.2
8
5. 7
5.3
6.3,
6.2
6.4
3.7
5.3
6.3
7.8
6.4
9
8.4
6.6
6.2
2.3
2.2
1.1
March.
NE. SE. S'W. NW.
9.9
9.4
11.7
8.8
6.4
10.7
12.6
10.2
12.1
8.8
9.6
12.6
12.9
11.5
7.9
7.5
4.6
3.9
3.1
3.9
5.9
8.6
7.2
5.3
9
9.3
5.7
S
6.3
6.5
8.1
5.3
6
7.8
6.3
8.1
9.6
8.6
11
7
7.6
8.9
6.8
4.8
4.3
5.9
4.1
4.6
4.3
4.4
2. i
3.8
4.0
4.3
3.7
5.3
5.1
3.9
2.5
5.8
7.1
10.5
11.9
8.4
9.2
7.1
7.4
8
5.6
10
5.8
7.8
6.4
8.2
6.6
3.8
6.2
6.8
6.8
8.9
10
10.8
13.3
10.3
4.2
4.5
2.2
7 2
9.6
13.6
9.2
10.6
10.7
13.8
11.7
13.2
11.7
10.9
15
12.7
13.4
9.9
7.4
6.8
5.7
3.9
5.5
6.8
5.4
6.6
April.
NE. SE. SW. NW,
6.4
6.3
6.6
9.1
6.6
7.3
6.9
6.2
8.7
4.5
5.3
9.7
6.8
9.4
12.9
10.8
11.2
9.9
9.8
9
8.2
11.6
5.7
5.3
4.8
6.4
8.8
4.1
3.6
3.6
4.6
3.6
4.6
5.5
6.7
5.2
5.7
6.9
7.8
12.1
12.8
10.2
10.7
10.1
8
8.6
3.9
10-5
8.2
10.7
9.6
11
8.9
5.7
4.9
6.6
6.9
6.7
8
11.2
10
7.1
4.5
3.6
1.8
6.8
7
7.9
8.6
8
7.6
8.8
6.8
8.6
6.8
7.6
11.5
8.5
8.9
6
5.2
4
3.9
2.5
4.4
3.7
5.4
6
Stations.
Petit Manan, Me
Mt. Desert Kock, Me
Matinicus Kock, Me
Seguin Island, M©
Boon Island, Me
Pollock Kip, Mass
XantucketN. S. Shoal
Vineyard .Sound light-ship, Maes
Brentou'sEcef, K. I
Block I.sland, K. 1
Fire Island, N. T
Sandy Hook lightship, N. Y
Absecon Inlet, N. J
Five-Fathom Bank, N. J
Winter Quarter Shoal, Va
Body 'a Island , N . C
Cape Lookout, N. C
Frying Pan Shoals, N. C
Rattlesnake Shoal, S. C
"Martin's Industry Shoal, S. C
Fowey Kocks, Fla
Carysfoi t Keef, Fla
Tortugas. Fla
May.
NE.
SE.
SW.
NW.
NE.
8 5
10.5
8.4
3.6
3.7
7.1
8.3
10.9
3
2.5
6.0
9.0
9.2
4.3
2.7
9.3
8.8
9.2
2.9
4.9
9.9
13
4.5
3.2
6.3
9.9
0.1
9-9
4.2
4.3
9 4
5.1
9.9
4
5.2
8.6
5.8
12.3
3
4.3
7.1
7.6
10.8
*
•2.7
8.P
5.0
10.7
4.6
6.2
5
8
8 7
3.9
3.3
6.4
10.4
4.!)
7
3.6
10.3
11.2
4.8
4.5
7.9
9
6
10
5
6
11.6
5.6
10.8
1.9
7.5
14.1
5.5
9.1
2.3
10
12.7
6.2
10.5
1.6
9.2
8.5
4.1
8.7
2.8
9
10.6
9
8.4
1.6
0.7
11
9.9
7.1
2.4
7.8
11.6
11.8
4.4
1.9
6.3
11.6
10.1
6.4
2.8
8.8
14
8.2
2.4
5.2
9.6
June.
NE. SE. SW. NW
11.1
8.9
8.5
6.8
13.3
5.9
3.9
5.6
6.2
4
4.7
11
12.1
7
9.3
5
6.4
3.3
8.2
10.6
16.9
17.1
15.6
11.8
13.3
12.8
13.8
5.6
14.6
14.8
16.3
15
16.9
12.7
7.1
6.3
12.9
9.6
11.6
13.9
15.2
13
9.4
5.6
3.2
2.2
3.4
3
4.4
3.4
4.8
4
2.2
2.9
3.8
3.7
3.6
6.7
3.5
3.1
1.8
1.6
.8
1
1.4
1.5
1.1
July.
NE. SE. SW. NW.
3
1.7
2.4
3.9
5.8
4
4.1
4.4
2.8
4.1
3.2
3.5
8.5
5.5
5.5
9.8
7.3
5.8
6.4
7
6.8
6.7
11.4
14.8
9.9
9.4
7.4
12.9
6
6.4
5.3
6
3.8
4.7
9.5
10
5.5
5.1
5.7
3.7
1.5
9
7.8
15.4
17.9
10.8
11.4
14.3
13.9
15.6
7.7
15.8
13
16
15.5
16.7
13.2
8.3
7.5
14.1
14.1
13.1
17.2
2L1
14.3
13.6
6.4
4.9
6.2
1.8
2
2.9
3.2
3.8
3.3
2.1
3.6
4
4.2
4.9
8.1
4.6
4.2
2.8
1.9
2.1
.7
.8
1.4
1.3
August.
3.8
3
3.7
4.9
7.5
6.7
8.1
6.3
4.6
6
5.3
6.6
9.8
9.3
12. 2
14.7
12.8
10.9
10.9
10.5
6.7
9.1
118
SE.
SW.
13.6
11.3
7.3
14
7.3
12.9
7.5
14.2
10
10.5
6.7
12.2
4.6
10.5
5.4
14.8
4.8
15.9
4
17.0
5.5
12.5
8.3
7.3
9.4
6.9
6.9
10.5
5.4
9.6
7
7.9
3.9
10.7
3.2
11.6
8.1
9.3
7.5
8.6
16.7
4.4
17.2
2.3
9.4
3.0
NW.
2.3
3.1
3.4
3.4
2.6
3.6
3.9
2.1
4.1
3.2
2.1
7
4.6
3.8
2.2
1.2
1.2
2.2
1.6
2.6
1.6
1.9
4
•Tho nortliPiiBt quadraut includes NNE. to E., iuclusivo; the southeast, ESE. to S., inclusive; the southwest,
SSW. to W., iuclusivo; the northwest, WNW. to N., inclusive. In the columns of figures, each one-tenth of a unit
rejirescuts one observation, and each unit ten observations extending through live years, the latter being equivalent
to one day's observations for five years. The time ratio for each quadrant is, therefore, represented by days and frac-
tions of a dav.
I
OCEAX TEMPERATURES.
17
Tuble showiiiij the direction of the icimls, hij quadrtintu, fur each month of ti.e lear, iSc. — Coutiiiutil.
Petit Manaii, Me
ilt. Deser t Kock, Me
Matiuicna Kock, Me
Set^uin Islaud, Me
Boon Island, Me
Pollock Rip, Mass
Nantnckot N. S. Shoal
Vineyard Soimd light ship, Masa
Brenton'a Eecf, K. I
Block Island, K. I
File Island, N. T
Sandy Hook light-ship, S. T
Ahsecon Inlel, 'N, J
Five-Fathom Bank, N. J
Winter Quarter Shoal, Va
Body's Island, N. C
Ca[>e Lookout, N. C
Frj iug Pan Shoals, X. C
r.attlesnake Shoal, S. C
Martin's Industry Shoal, S. C
Fowey Kocks, Fla
Carysfort Eeef, Fla
Tortugas, Fla
September.
NE. SE. S-W. NVr.
9.2
0.9
6
4.7
10.1
6.2
5.3
4.5
6.3
5
4.7
8.8
8.2
4.6
5.1
6.7
0.1
5.1
10.2
7.1
9.7
10.9
10.6
10.2
11.8
6
8.5
11.3
11.3
10.9
11.3
11.5
6.8
6.9
11.7
10.5
6.8
6.5
6.1
3
3.7
4.4
3.6
4
4.3
4.1
5.1
4.4
3.1
4.5
3..")
4.1
4.7
3.9
3.5
5.7
4.5
3.8
2.8
1.1
2.3
1.5
2.4
3.3
1.5
1.3
1.6
October.
NE. SE. HW. NW
.'i.6
5.7
6.1
8.6
11.4
10.8
9.3
10.2
8.1
10.9
7
8.6
8.6
9
12
15.9
13.6
16
17.7
17.8
17.3
16.1
23.2
8.9
7.1
5.8
4.5
7.3
4.7
5.2
4.1
4.8
4.1
.4.9
6.4
7.1
4.2
5.3
5.
4.2
4
4.9
4.5
5.7
8.1
2.2
7.4
9.8
10
11.4
7.7
8.3
9.4
9.4
9.7
12.1
7.7
5.7
0.2
8.6
7.8
6.2
5.9
5.7
4.9
4.2
2.8
3.2
2.4
9.1
6.6
8.0
6.1
4.2
6.9
7.6
G. 5
7.1
3.9
6.9
9.5
8.7
7.9
4.8
3.8
6.1
3.9
2.7
3.8
4.5
November.
NE. SE. SW. iTW.
6.4
6.8
6.1
8.4
9.7
6.8
6.1
6
4.7
5.4
5.4
6
4.4
6.3
7.5
8.0
10.2
12.5
13.9
13.8
15
13.7
21. 2
6.3
5.7
3.7
1.8
4.3
3.1
2.9
1.9
2
2.7
1.9
3.9
4.2
2.1
•2.3
4.4
3.7
3.5
4.6
3.1
7.1
7.4
2
9.6
9.7
10.3
10.1
9.1
9.1
7.3
11.1
11
9.9
8.3
6.1
8.9
9
9.9
7.3
4.5
4.3
4.6
3.9
1.4
2.3
.4
7.7
7.5
9.7
9
6.8
10
11.9
10.2
11.6
9.8
9.8
13.0
12.1
12.1
9.8
9.7
8.9
8 3
5.8
8.1
5.9
6.4
December.
NE. SE. SW. NW
4 3
5.3
4.5
7
8.8
5.1
4.7
5.5
4.9
7
7.4
6.5
3.8
4.2
6.1
7.5
10.2
12
11.9
10.7
12.2
10.5
20
7.2
7.1
5.5
2.9
4
4.4
4.6
2.3
2.9
2.2
1.8
3.7
3.9
3.2
4
5.3
4.3
3.2
i.4
4.1
9.2
11
3.8
8.2
10.7
9.6
10
7.2
9.3
9.4
9.7
8 8
5.8
9.4
9.7
9.8
9.3
0.6
7.2
8.4
7.8
2.1
.7
.2
11.0
9.6
I'i. 3
9.7
8.0
10.3
13.8
13.8
13.2
9.9
8.4
14.6
13.8
12.7
9.5
8.6
7.7
7.9
6
0.3
-6.B
8.7
6.8
SKC III 12
EXPLANATION OP OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 2
DRY TORTUGAS LIGHT-HOUSE, FLORIDA.
Observer: Robeht H. Thompson.
Location of station.— The Dry Tortuga,s ligbt-bouse is built on Loggerboad Key, tbe westernmost island of the
Tortu'MS Reefs. Tbese reefs are a westerly extension of tbe Florida Reefs, and are located about 1 degree from Key
West. Lofo-orbead Key is about tbreo-fourtbs of a mile long, and less than one-fifth as wide. It is situated on the
southeasterly side of an elongate bank, bearing tbe same name, and trending in a northeasterly and southwesterly
direction. The bank is about 5 miles long, and has an average width of three-fourths of a mile, inside of the 3-fathom
line. The Southwest Channel, with depths of 10 to 13 fathoms, separates Loggerhead Bank from the Bird, Garden)
and Lon" Key Bank on the east. Strong tidal currents set through it, running northeast on tbe flood and southwest
on the ebb. The channel between the Tortugas and Cuba is about 90 miles wide and is occupied by the Gulf Stream,
the axis of which approaches much nearer the Cuban coast than the Tortugas. The depth of water in this channel
exceeds 1,000 fathoms in some places, being greatest in its southern part. The 10-fathom curve passes close by the
eastern side of Loggerhead Key, and the 100-fathom curve is distant only about 20 miles to the southward.
Geographical position of the Jiff/it-Z/OMSC— Latitude, 24° 38' 04" N. ; longitude, 82° 55' 42" W:
Vepih of water. —The depth of water where the observations were taken is 5 feet at mean low tide.
nange of temperature.— A\i, 21°.5 (67° to 880.5); surface, 20°.5 (650.5 to 860).
The depth of water where the observations were taken is probably too little, and the locality too much sheltered
to aft'ord satisfactory results respectiug tbe temperature of the open waters surrounding tbe Keys. Tbat such is the
case will appear evideut ou comparing the temperature chart for the Tortugas with those for Carysfort Reef and
Fowey Rocks. Ou the fust mentioned, the more direct influence of the air upon the water temperature ia made
apparent by tbe manner in which each fluctuation in the curves of air.temperaturo is repeated in the curves of water
temperature. At the two more northern stations, although the depths arc no greater, the curves of water temperature
present fewer angles, j^robably due to the more open exposure of the places of observation.
The range of temperature given above is for 1881, tbat year having afibrded the greatest extremes in temperature
of any plotted. There is comparatively little ditference between the air and surface temperatures at any period, and
great uniformity in the curves of surface temperature during the summer and early fall mouths of all the years
excepting 1884, in which year both the air and surface temperatures were constantly from 3 to 10 degrees lower
between April and the middle of October. The collateral observations fail to explain the cause of this variation, the
records for direction and force of the winds showing that es.sontially the same couditions in those particulars prevailed
during 1884 and 1885, though both of those years differed more or less from tbe three preceding ones.
Between March 21 and April 10, 18S1, and between November 26 and December G, 1882, tbe temperature of both
tbe air and water fell far below that for the corresponding periods of other years, aftording the lowest ob.servations
recorded. Tbe cause of these extreme variations, which are so clearly brought out by the curves of temperature on
tbe chart, may be explained by tbe fact that during those two periods the winds were almost constantly from the
north and northwest, and blowing fresh ; the prevailing winds for the months in question are generally northeasterly.
Low temperatures were recorded during the same periods at Carysfort Reef and Fowey Rocks, the next stations to
tbe north.
Tahlc nhoicin// the direciioii of the teinds, hij quadrants, for each month of the ijear, being the means of five years' obseriationi
Quadrant.
January.
Febru-
ary.
March.
April.
1
May. June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem- Decem-
ber, her.
Northeast
Soutbcast
Southwest
Northwest
14.9
7.2
2
5.9
15.1
7
1.1
4.4
13.4
8.4
2.2
5.6
11.6
10.2
1.8
6
14 9.6
8. 2 15. 6
2.4 2.2
5.2 2
1
11.4
10.8
5.2
2
12.8
9.4
3.6
4
14
10.2
*
1.6
23.2
2.2
2.4
3
1
21.2 * 20
2 1 3.8
6 1 6.8
178
CM
O
<
u
w
h
o
o
13
to
3
O
bJD
ap-S -5
J
c« s
rt
S
a
o
en
bp
I
2 =
uJ
a: e
1- s
o
-_
■p
TT"
■P
J
-H-
—
^^
^
^
TT
—
"^^
_
—
_
—
_
—
™
~~
^
—
"
"
BBI
~
"
—
^
■^
—
"
f^
—
—
^
—
"
^
~
"
"
~
—
^
—
—
"
^
^
—
^
^
™
•^
^
05
O
CO
"it:
r'
'in
in
—
J —
—
-> —
- —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
■^ —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
- —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
\ —
133
—
—
—
—
—
— r
—
— [
__,
™™
~
—
—
—
—
—
—
- —
—
—
— i
—
—
—
—
, ^"
.,
—
-M.
—
1
£i^
_^
?^
-.^ .^
:
J
J
.^-
^1.
—
— -
J —
—
-^
li^
,. ■
-•--■
^
_
^'^
— ^
- ,
__.
—
.
j=^
—
_^ r ;
'1 »^ 1
—
>:^
_:
X
1 1
"^■"■^ 1
1
—
T —
■r^
=H*
-jc7
c:
=5=
^
pr
-r-
iste
^
—
7^
—
1
■"^
—
— ;
~~~
'_
■~~
"T"
^i
=^
■^ —
—
n:
_- L
^
—
^
-^=
^
^
^
2:frj — 1
' r
—
--2fe-
^-^
^^-i^^l^
^^
—^
^r'^
—
—
"•^
t^
..«|.'.'i-
H—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
->^
* —
—
^
—
—
—
—
TsH
£!?zr
r
*^r
__
J
„-
J
- —
—
—
—
—
—
J —
—
—
J
t
,
.
—
—
—
—
— _
—
—
—
—
—
— ,
—
__
___
- —
—
—
—
—
T
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
1
___
J
_
__
1
,
____
1
(
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
^ —
—
—
—
—
—
Em
—
—
—
- —
—
—
1
' —
—
—
— '
—
— '
—
—
— ^
—
'
—
- — -
— 1
—
QC
3 1,
r
if c
r* ^
UJ
o
b
'in
'S
Li
in
1
—
1
—
J —
J
—
1 —
- — -
1
1 —
—
1
—
1 —
—
^ —
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—^
-^
s^
1
1
—
—
—
—^
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
_
—
—
—
—
■
—
—
—
—
J —
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
r¥STif
_^-*
-^
^£i^
■■ri'
'^-.
■TTr-
=:
™1^
Illl^
5
a^Tflf*
=
■^■jr.n
«*n*
^, — -
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
1
^i^
-^^
1
1
^•
!^,<r
-
-•' '
.— ■?
/
^'^.
'
— f-
' —
1 —
—
—
—
' —
—
1
—
-^
^
-=i
,^-~
1 — 1
~ii^
/-
—
1 —
—
— -
1 —
-^-
,
—
1
—
'
— ^
-=^
^
^^*6=-
—
~
^
^
— t—
—
'y—
—
—
-^
=i.^
—
-ISS
=r|^
^^
^X-
V
—4
P
^^=^
-^
—
—
—
—
—
—
— 1 —
—
—
—
'-
-^
—11
v^^
ini:
^.^■
■"=t-
7— —
TT^'-^
—
-^=^ —
1
. ■-...-
.
A-^
...
^L ■■H'
J 1
1
^—
— •
!?
■-^
^?^
^i^
rp
^
Sm
■=-■=!—
—
-V
—
—
—
—
—
—
- —
—
— '
—
—
—
—
'
—
— ' —
—
—
—
1
—
.-'
"-
1
/'
i
"*■ -^
s^
'
/
>
V
/
'
V
/
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
. —
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
— .
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— ■
—
—
—
-_
—
1
-^
—
— 1
—
-^. —
—
—
„
_^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
r—
—
—
—
—
—
L
—
L
— ^
..
—
■
1
1
.
—
—
—
E
:^
—I;
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
^
=
Z^
^
^
^
E
■^
1
1
^^
— '
E
E
^
^^
E
.^
^
^
E
E
:^
1
1
1
E
^
E
^
E
E
^
E
^
:^
E
^
E
E
E
E
i;^
—
E
E
E
—
E
E
^
E
t;
■PS
OO
£S g
U
~
E
3
E
E
E
E
E
E
"
E
E
~'
E
1
~x
EE
E
^
rS
■ ' 1
ZZ~
1
s
^
1
E
^
— --« =
=^;»^- —
1
E
^
^
S
^
^
^
^
^
-t--
^
§
^
E
•v
E
1
1
E
E
03
b
\n
tr>
o
't-1
b
..'
E
sr
^
E
— i —
■•,1
1 r
~i~"
(8S
■^
-?"^
E
E
—
zz
^
P^-
=H
^^
^
4
2r
— ! —
—
E
E
—
=1=
E
E
—
—
—
1
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
__
~
—
ZE
~
5S
N
CC 'o
□.
2..
DC 'p
~
^
=^
B32
s
&
3
e
2
E
^
^
—
^
E
3
—
1
/
E
E
E
E
— ~
—
1
E
E
1
E
—
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
1
E
E
E
=
E
E
E
ZI
E
E
E
—
E
d
^?
s
§
E{E
— K
I
5^
-9
3
E
c
1
c
E
1
<
3
E
G
E
?
^
i
<
f
o
E
c
i
1
c
Q
t
r.
J
■3
C
■s
1-3
Oi
ff»
00
i
QC
<«
02
J \
\
ci
i
o
CI
o
§
■1 in
i *^
rH SO
5 ° S <^
s "2 i: s
> H c
fe ■= = =
3 >. " .2
- ^ -^ 'S =£
CU " d u -
:9 ^ O -a rt
S c S "
O e rt " Qi
=^ a I c, e
'^ o «J " t*
^ S -S ". s
li a S "■' «
J: c « *- o
S i ^ 3 "
01 c a. T3
S a B «
, > CO ffl ^
u
2 -3
1^ B
s •;;=^
<u oj I: u
T3 c » „! O.
e} ;^ c u M
c I. 2 .£ 2
s s a S 2
a, "5 o
= ■5*2
" - -g 2
S ° 2 S
J* -3 -a. 9-
'in
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 3.
CAKYSFOET REEF LIGHTHOUSE, FLORIDA.
Observers : Edwakd Bell, F. A. Bkost, Maktin Weatueiu'ord.
Location of station. — Carysfoit Reef lighthouse is located ou the outer side of Carysfort Reef, in front of Key
Largo, .and facing the Straits of Florida. It is about 158 miles northeasterly from the Dry Tortngas light-house. The
water deepens rapidly from the outer edge of the reef, attaining a depth of 50 fathoms within a distance of about 2
miles. The 100-fathom curve is distant about 7 miles, and the axis of the Gulf Stream about 27 miles.
Geographical posi/ion.— Latitude, '.^5° 13' 15" N. ; longitude, 80° 12' 42" W.
Depth of icater. — Three feet.
JRange of temperature.— Air, t8°.5 (65°.5 to 84°) ; surface, 1.5° (71°.5 to 86°.5).
The temperature is more equable at this station than at the Tortngas, both as regards the air and water. The
air temperature is relatively lower throughout the year, the maximum bejug 4i° lower at Carysfort than at the Tor-
tngas. The curves of surface temperature are more regular, and are very uniform for all the years, apparently indi-
cating that the place at which the observations were taken was well suited for the purpose, although the depth of
water was only 3 feet. The maximum surface temperature was practically the same at this station as at the Tortngas,
and exceeds the air maximum by 2°. 5.
The low temperatures recorded at the Tortngas for March, 1881, and November 26 to December 6, 1882, were also
observed at this station, though in a relatively less degree, especially as regards the former period. During the first
part of March, 1S61, northerly and northwesterly winds prevailed, while during the latter part of the same mouth the
winds were variable. During the ten days ending December 6, 18P2, they were mostly from the north and northeast.
Table showing the direction of the xtiiiids, by quadrants, for each month of the year, being the vuans office years' observations.
^ (Juadinnt.
.Tannarj-.
Febru-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Northeast
Soathoast
Southwest
Northwest
8.4
15
2.6
4.8
11
7
2.2
8
8.6
11.9
4.5
6.4
8.2
12.8
3.6
5.4
11.6
10.1
6.4
2.8
8.8
17.1
3.2
.8
6.7
17.9
4.9
.9
9.1
17.2
2.3
1.9
15.1
8.9
3.6
1.3
16.1
8.1
3.2
3.6
13.7
7.4
2.3
6.4
10.3
11
.7
8.7
180
CO
o
<
U
ex
<
u
o
O
^^
(U
V5
l-i
U
C
ro O
CO Tj
o
2 e
2
C/5
c
•B
a
u
Gi I
" o
^ s
w 00
3 00
S £
U
X
H
h.
O
O
P
<
\
afj..U-
^V
rfe
=t
EtE
•■■ — ^.«.
Efe
^55^
Ui 35
a a
o ^
= •S 3
*J^ -a "S > 59
"o g
•fi •-
■a
.=1
II
g a ^ s
i 2 H g
s 1 1 1 -a
II ^'^ I
^ ■= p ■a
n S o ,
^ ^ »3 «
■I
■S! S g
g y
I
■". ■§ "a
ill
i^ 5.
'5 11
P
2
>•
1
1
1
-9
1
1^""
1
d
r.
4 <.■
^
R
I D
1
*P-
a
5
^
§
i
'O ^
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 4.
FOWEY ROCKS LIGHT-HOUSE, FLORIDA.
Observer: John J. Larxer.
Position. — Fowcy Rocks light-Louse is built ou Fowey Rocks, whicli are located very near tbe northeastern
extremity of the Florida Reefs, about 6 miles southeasterly from Cape Florida, aud 23 miles northerly from Carysfort
Reef. These rocks are on the western side of the Straits of Florida, in their northern and narrowest portion, some-
times called the Straits of Bernini, the eastern border of which is formed by the northwestern extremity of the Great
Bahama Bank. Tbe light-house is situated on the outer edge of the rocks, which lie directly in front of the widest
opening to Key Biscayne Bay. Depths of 7 to 16 fathoms occur close to the light ; the ICO-fathom line is distant only
about 2J miles, and the axis of the Gulf Stream about 24 miles.
r;eo(/)-aiJ/iicaZj)osi7ioH.— Latitude, 25° 35' 25" N. ; longitude, 80° O.V 41" W.
J)ei>ih ofuatcr. — Five feet.
Hatigc oficmjjerature.— Ah; 18° (08° to 86°) ; surface, 10°.5 (70° to SG°.5).
There is comparatively little difference between the temperatures at Fowey Rocks aud Carysfort Reef, these two
stations, located only 23 miles ajiart, being more closely related than are either of them to the Tortugas. The air
tcmi)eratures range slightly higher at this station than at Carysfort, but the surface curves correspond very closely
throughout each year, tbe greatest dilferenco at any period being only 2° or 3°. Tbe more prominent irregularities
in the surface curves at one station are almost invariably repeated in those of the other at the same period. The angles
indicating low temperatures for March, 1881, are more pronounced here than at Carysfort, but those for the last jiart
of 1832 are less marked. Tbe maximum air and surface temperatures at this station are very nearly identical.
Table showing the direction of the winds, bij quadrants, /•,r each month of the year, being the means of fire gears' obserrations.
Quadrant.
January.
Fobru-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Northeast
Southeast
Southwest
Northwest
11. e
13.1
2.9
3.3
9.1
10.3
2.3
5.9
8.9
10.5
4.2
6.8
9
12.1
4.5
3.7
11.6
11.8
4.4
1.9
5.3
16.9
5.5
1.1
6.8
15.4
6.4
1.3
6.7
16.7
4.4
1.6
13.5
9.7
4.4
1.5
17.3
5.7
2.8
4.5
15
7.1
1.4
5.9
12.2
9.2
2.1
6.9
132
o
ffi
<
u
o
lb
3
O
C
rt
•71 C
V-(
00
w)
O
CO
C
2
t^
0
e
0
IS
X
CO
oo
s
s
n
0
0
o
3
ffi
0=
(-
o
a-
■u
■s
>
XI
•5
3
-0
•J
^
c
o
>.
(U
o
C
o
is OO
2 s
2
to
B
pi
•s-s
1 3'
2 § i
I ^^
11^
II
ill
ill
•s
■s
'a
•e
1__
5J 5 ■-
I
C U
O U
a s 11
111'
1
■e
^ s a
-g s u
'11
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 5.
MARTIN'S INDUSTRY LIGHT-SHIP, SOUTH CAROLINA.
Observer : John Masson.
PosifJoif.— This light-ship is located off the entrance to Port Royal Sound, South Carolina, and about 390 miles
northerly from Fowey Rocks, Florida. It is anchored about 8J miles from laud, directly in front of Martin's Industi-y
Shoal, from the outer edge of which it is distant a little more than a mile, the depths between ranging from 6J to !j
fathoms. The 10-fathom curve is distant about 9 miles, the 20-fatliom curve about 32 miles, and the 100-fathom
curve about 02 miles.
Geogmjyhicaliiosilion.— 'Latitude, 33° 05' (31") N. ; longi(«udo, 80° 35' (07") W.
Depth of water. — Nine fathoms.
Sange of temperature.— Mr, 41°.5 (45° to 8G."5); surface, 38° (47° to 85°).
The conditions influencing the temperature at Martin's Industry Shoal are very different from those prevailing
at the Florida Reef stations. The range of temperature is very much greater, and the temperature plottings on the
chart form much more pronounced curves. The surface curves, although more regular than those for the air, are
nearly parallel with them throughout each year, and the difference between the surface and air temperatures are
seldom great. The maximum and minimum temperatures are nearly the same for both the air aud surface, the lat-
ter having a slightly smaller range than the foroier. The maximum temperatures are about the same here as at
Fowey Rocks, and Carysfort Reef, but the minimums are over 20° lower.
Table showing the direction of the teinds, bij quadrants, for each month of the year, being the means of five years' obscrvatio'is.
Quadrant.
January.
Febiu-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
Angust.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Northeast
Southeast
Southwest
Northwest
12
4.4
6.9
5.2
10.3
5.5
6.1!
3.9
7.G
7.1
10.3
5.5
9.8
7.8
7.1
4.4
11
9.9
7.1
2.4
7.8
10.6
9.4
1.5
7-
7.8
13.6
1.4
10.5
7.5
8.6
2.6
15.1
7.1
3.7
3.3
17.8
4.5
4.2
3.8
13.8
3.1
3.9
8.1
10.7
4.1
7.8
6.3
184
fi
<i3
3
U3
U
-3
W
rt
^
U
10
* »H
0
0
•5
^
U
o
H
4-1
Pi
o
CD
^
r'
-r
np
T-r
i
T
^
^
^
:z:
T^
^
^
J
^
T^
TH
-
-
rz
^
3
—
"
"^^
=q
=^
3
^
^
:5
■3
-r-
—
z±
1
rr
3
=5
zzf
1
^
^
-1-
--
^
r-
n
UJ
:E
—
= =
1^
:-
]^
:E
j^
=cz
:E
; —
3E
E
:E
Ez
:E
:z:
:^
g^
ss
--=='^—
—>-'
— 1—
EFE
1
E
E
—
zz
zz
E
E
E
E
E
3
zz
—
—
g
zd:
—
E;
E
Et
E
1
— V
1 -
=N
s
o
in
o
1
■sJ
1 r
1
—
—
J —
-1 —
—
j_
—
—
—
—
-^ —
—
—
—
J—
—
—
—
1
— f
—
- —
—
—
— 1-
—
—
—
—
— L
—
—
—
— [■
—
—
L
— ^-
■S^
■^
—
H-
— L
—
-1 — Rl
3 o
—
—
- —
- —
- —
1 —
—
-J —
—
J —
—
J —
_
—
—
t.5f-
—
—
^
—
—
—
— t
—
—
—
—
— I-
_
—
■ \
^
—
~
1
-H
^-
1 ' 1
^ 1
-
-kI
—
IE
—
f:;
—
j —
—
-j —
—
E
5
^
^
-^
—
=
1
=
=
-^
E
—
— -
—
zz
zz
E
zz
E
—
—
-^-
E
E
—
—
—
ZII
—
—
—
—
—
"T
1
^
~
—
m
E
—
i
~
1=
E
—
zz
—
.-^-
IZ
E
E
~
—
E
zz
E
zz
ZZ
zzz
E
zz
=
zz
E
E
E
zz
E
^i
zz
zz
=
zz
^
—
~
ZZ
zz
ZZ
E
E
zz
~
*■>• 1 1
^1
•-!.
<<-"
"^;»--
1
^
^- [
1 J.--
ft
— =>
-. 1
^^^
i*^
*^
:.—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
, —
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
t
—
— 1
S:
=^
^'\
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— 1
—
— 1
—
— I
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— '
—
— '
_
—
—
—
—
—
—
\ —
—
—
—
—
—
T—
—
—
—
—
-
L-
--
' —
—
—
—
f—
—
— 1
—
^^
—
— '
—
—
— ^
—
— '
—
—
—
r^
—
—
— I
—
^
—
:^
^
r^
—
—
—
^
—
=:
z;
—
z:
—
—
zz
ZI
—
:::_
i^
^:
—
zz
zz
•
-' —
—
zz
zz
—
—
f
^•-
^
=^^^
bs
laa
^=*^
"— ,
1
■^
ZZ
=
—
zz
z:
zz
zz
—
^^
—
t
o
CO
.3»
=!
. o _
"■l'
p-
(SJ ~
3=^
\
Tv
s
=
—
HZ
—
zz
^::
:^
—
—
—
—
—
—
=izz
—
~p^
-^^
:^
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
ZZ
^:
zE
F^
—
ZZ
zd
:z
zz:
-wi
E^
-^■-.
^
zz
zz
zz
E
zz
zz
zz
ZZ
E
zzj
z^
=
zz
—
E
—
—
—
—
m
E
E
zz
—
;^
zz
zz
E
E
^
E
^p
^
zz
—
E
—
E
E
E
=;
E
zz
—
—
—
E
zz
zz
zz
—
—
zz
E
E
E
zz
■.
1
:s
zz
^
zz
ZZ
ZZ
E
E
—
1""-
^^
1
—
zz
ZI
_-
E
—
zz
zz
zz
E
_.^
F
?
?^- =
H
zz
zz
zz
—
E
E
E
i:^
E
E
E
^
zz
zz
zz
zz
—
—
—
—
E
zz
=
—
—
■
3
—
§
^
~
zz
—
zzz
ZI
zz
zz
S-2-
^
r:
t
^
zz
^z
—
zz
^-
—*'
?^
zz
ZZ
zz
ZZ
zz
—
^
zz
HI
=z
^I
zz
^
zz
:z
=
^
—
=
zz
zz
=
—
ZZ
zv
sz
F^
t
;^
zz
—
1- -
>
..•'
/
-
_
,
,
L
Pm m -
^,
J
ui —
—
— 1
LII
c^
J^^—
^
•^ — 1
■
4~
1__
—
—
—
—
—
—
1^1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
' —
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
—
^^
Es^
—
—
—
J —
So
V
1
sz
\
'-'-
— "»
^•
^
%
«. =
,—
■^
—
-x"^
-^
J
m
^
^
5S
!^
^
^
^
^
~T^
^
'^Z
zz
.
— :
zz
zz
zz
ZZ
zz
ZZ
zz
ZZ
—
zz
—
—
zz
ZZ
zz
~
zz
zz
zz
zz
ZZ
zz
—
—
—
zz
—
—
—
—
—
—
f5fc=
^
—
iv
—
^
-^
zz
^
^
—
*^
—
zz
HI
—
zz
.^Z
^I
zz
—
- ^
i::
zz
zz
13
"j—
zz
ZZ
zz
—
—
zz
—
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
^I
zz
zz
zz
ZZ
—
—
—
—
zz
—
—
—
—
—
^
=
—
—
p^
—
~
o
-r-
<^
g-
~' —
f7 II -
—
r^
-**^
1
—
.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
! —
J —
—
J~ —
f "
EE
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
=
=
E
E
E
zz
^
—
- —
E
E
=
z
=
i
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
=
E
E
E
~
E
-~
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
zz
zz
—
ZZ
zz
—
—
—
o ~
=
= z
E
E
E
E
—
—
—
E
E
E
z^
zz
:^
E
E
zz
zz
^H—
;:;
zz
fe
^
^
^
1^
—
3
^
i^
g
^
^
^
^^
E
s
E
s-
E
E
—
zz
—
—
—
E
E
E
: =
E
E
zz
ZZ
zz
00
■v 1
«i
—
~
—
—
—
—
ZI
^
zz
—
—
zz
^Z
—
ZI
zz
I IZI
zz
^
^
H—
—
ZZ
^
ZI
—
ZZ
zz
zz
—
zz
zz
—
—
zz
4^
^
—
El-F
s
r-
—
zz
zz
—
—
zz
—
zz
:^=
—
^^
=
00 ^ —
00 —
iJ c. —
oc '^ _
§ =
^
E
3"
E
E
E
^
E
E
E
s
fZ
^
5
2
2
'^
1
1
— s
!?Z
^
E
—
E
—
zz
E
=
zz
E
1
1
=
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
zz
l:;^
— -=v
—
5
jA
5
V
1 ^
1
=i
: =
i
E
E
E
E
"is
o
t>
(£
CO
o
< —
'si
O
c
5
O
CO
■4
1
^
1
S
^
g
s
1
CO
4
3
C
o
CM
2
g
=i
o
5
3
E
:5
o
\
1
■3
ZI
71
o
Oi
t;;
CI
5:
CO
c
00
CO
1
m
i
J^
CI
c
!
— V-
zs
o
r-*
-^^ —
O t= «J
Zz ^•
— 9
= -.
s
^ u
CJ o
-^ '^'n "+3 ?i
|«R
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 6.
RATTLESNAKE SHOAL LIGHT-SHIP, SOUTH CAROLINA.
Observer : JouN McCoRiiiCK.
Position. — Rattlesnake Shoal light-ship is placed just north of the entrance to Charleston Harbor, South Carolina,
and about 56 miles northeasterly from Martin's Industry light-.ship. It is anchored about 5 miles off shore, and 2
miles off the shoals of the same name, between which and the light-ship there are depths of 4 to 5 fathoms. The
10-fath)ra curve is distaut about 11 miles, the 20-fathom curve about 30 miles, and the 100-fathom curve about 50
miles.
Gtograpliicalposilion.— Ijalitude, 32° 44' (00") N. ; longitude, 79^ 43' (40") W.
Depth oftcatcr. — Five fathoms.
nange of temperature— Air, 41° (45°.5 to 86°.5) ; surface, 38° (47° to 85°).
The range of temperature at this station is almost precisely the same as at Martin's ludnstry, there being a dif-
ference of only half a degree in the air records. The curves as plotted also agree closely at the two stations, both
as regards their general features and their details.
Tahle allowing the direction of the loiiuls, hij quadrants, for each month of the gear, hcing the means of fire gears' observations.
Quadrant.
January.
Febru-
aiy.
March.
April.
Mixy.
June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Northeast
SoQtheast
Southwest
Northwest
12.1
3
8.5
5.2
11.1
5.8
6.6
3.1
7
5.8
13.3
3.9
9.9
C.9
10
2.5
10.6
9
8.4
1.6
G.7
8.2
13
1.4
G.4
9
14.3
.8
10.9
8.1
9.3
1.6
13.1
10.2
3
2.4
17.7
4.9
1.9
2.7
13.9
4.6
4.6
5.8
11.9
3.4
8.4
5
186
,S rt
■s
C/D
a.
g
=
IT
«fe
—
E
i
—
E
=
—I—
1
i
I
^
E
E
E
.:^
E
E
^
1
— f —
f
r
-
^
2
E
z::
—
1
—
2k:.
1
1 1
ziife;
— 1—
A
•^n —
A
E^
**Trr —
5
—
o
50
to
o
o
'•*.
— i —
—
^
HI
HI
IH
HI
— t—
— H
E
—
E
—
E
HI
—
^
IZ
=
E
—
E
~
E
IH
!z
=
—
—
m
=
=
m
—
^
—
^
—
^
E
—
—
—
~
HI
E
E
—
—
=
—
—
1
E
~
E
E
E
E
-4-
— 1 —
1
E
E
E
E
=
^
E
=
E
E
E
~
E
— t
E
~^
E
^
^
s
^
s
-^
;^^
-i^
S
^
^
s4
u^
E
~
E
E
E
E
=
E
E
E
~
—
~
~
E
=
=
E
^ .
--■
S
,.
— 1 —
—
—
__
1
^
r^
1 —
1 —
1 —
—
1 —
— -
—
—
—
1
1 —
^^
Ai
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
^
—
—
—
—
—
^
—
— ^
—
—
—
—
-^te*r-
V
—
- —
—
— 1
—
—
—
' —
—
—
—
— 1
- ^
.-^
—
—
—
"^
HI
~
nr
i
IH
—
—
1
—
—
~
—
—I—-.
'^
"—
—
—
—
zz
—
—
~
—
~
~
—
—
—
—
^
—
:^
—
=""
^
^?^
—
zz
—
—
IH
1
^m
—
—
HI
~
UJ
uJ
zz
ZZ
—
HI
—
IH
1
^:
—
—
—
—
—
zr
—
— '
—
~-f
g4^^
E
— 1
—
—
1
- —
—
—
—
—
— ^
—
—
—
—
—
—
^
zz
^Z
zz
^
V
—
HI
—
zz
13
ZZ.
IT
1
27
1
_^
1
,
^
^
^—
.
,
—
—
^
X
—
—
—
- —
—
' —
— '
—
— '
—
/ ' *^
'^"^1
-'^'(—
—
—
' —
—
—
—
—
— ^
— ^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—~
—
—
=--•—
CI
—
—
—
—
—
■■■ i
\
~
/
/'"
•
^
V
v TV
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— '
^^
-^
—
^L.
zf
—
—
—
—
—
—
[ —
—
-^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
-—
—
—
—
—
—
-^k4-
^
—
—
—
—
is
'g
—
—
—
—
—
— '
^rrj
—
1 —
—
^
—
1
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
-^
F
^
—
—
O
—
—
—
— '
—
^^
.=^
•
—
—
—
i —
—
l^r-
-^^
—
— ' —
— 1
—
1 — '
—
—
1 —
—
1 —
' —
—
—
^^
—
^^
-^
— -
—
-^
—
— ^
—
—
— -
—
_
— 1 —
—
—
—
—
— ^
1^
^ —
—
—
-y
u-
■=-.
— ,
r-<
-^
:;;r
—
!— t;
v^
L;!-
—
::—
—
—
— —
—
—
—
—
— ! —
—
—
—
—
^
^
^
—
—
^-
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— H-
V-
— .
—
'v.
—
o
i—
—^
^^
— 1
—
—
>
— ■
1 —
1 — '
1 —
-
—
I —
—
—
1
-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
-—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— \ —
—
-4-
—
—
—
'
1
—
"T^
r—
—
—
—
—
— 1
—
—
—
—
— 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
^-
^
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
»-,
;;-
—
-:s
p
—
1
—J
.S
-t—
—
—
—
^-
^
— \ —
—
—
— 1
-
—
—
—'r-
—
-.
—
zz
1
—
1 —
—
1—
—
^
—
r—
—
' —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
J—
—
—
—
—
—
E
E
—
E
TT
E
E
E
E
E
=
E
—
H-
E
E
E
L^:
E
E
^
"^
^
^
^
—
^
^
^
E
^
^
1
^^
"
"
^
E
E
E
^^
"
E
"
E
E
E
E
~
8
:^
zz.
^;
=
zz
—
H
E
— '
1 —
1:^
—F^
\
ZZl
— ; — '
z^
B
<Sil
31
zz
tz
zz
zz
1^
E;
-^
^PS^
—
H^
—
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
—
—
JZZ
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
E
E
g
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
— J—
zz
—
-^
=?
^ . -
¥
^
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
—
5
—
zz
V
—
1
E=
—
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
■=
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
^
E
E
t —
E
,
— ^
^
^
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
=
=
^
—
—
— I—
Ie
5
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
"!Z"
:r"
r:
—
— 1 —
— ^iZZ
=.=
—
—
1 —
—
— 1—
t2
— ?
:rn
r?
t£
zzn^
zz
—
—
;^
—
— ! —
ZZ
—
ZZ
zz
—
—
^I
—
1 —
— 1 —
1
—
—
zikz
:=te
hV
zr
—
^
—
—
—
—
E
i
2
5
E
t«8
E
2
5^
■^
^
=
1
fe
=
i
t
i
5
^
E
/^
E
1
—
E
I —
—
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
=
zz
E
=
E
E
E
■
—
E
E
—
ZZ
'v-'-
iH
s
i
§
i^
P
E
c
i
1
1 .
1 .
1
c
c
?
p
c
e
S
1
e
I.
C
1
(
3
E
-
r
b
c
P
■*.
d
i
E
r
c
3
1
-i
0
E
t
■> c
3
•»
B
E
c
^
s
S
3
s
c
■5
c
X
0
4
0
1
OS
OS
B
CO
1
e
00
a
M
H
I-
(?)
o
c
o
M
I
•A
o
•i
S -5 5 w
u= *^ c^ iS
j^ c E S
T' O !U S
s! p 2
^ 2 •tj '^ VI
° S n Ji "S
•fi •- e- g *
'S. " c o ^
lu J- * •S V
3J 5x UJ
O rQ
p^ a
0) =£
•a
a. t z
Qi *t:j
^ I 1^
g S K ^. ^.
J! ^ ! 1 1
° i, .a -a TJ
-2 I ^ g
c _ *r u
'T„ 5 = -3
" i ■> °
s .2 .a 3
- =5 6 *
S! i S f
g g ^ =
3 .? J w
V ^
a;
c
rt
13
rt
■s
•S
i
1
a
-R
?
•1
n.
1
Si
■a.
^
yjL
•?
I
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 7.
FRYING PAN SHOALS LIGHT-SHIP, NORTH CAROLINA.
Observers: D. W. Manson, W. R. Walker, J. H. Dosher.J. D. Davis, G. D. Walker, H. Swax.
Position. — Fiyiug Pan Shoals light-sbip is located about 6J miles from the outer extremity of the main part of
Frying Pan Shoals, about 17 miles .southeasterly from Caiie Fear, North Carolina, and about 108 miles northeasterly
from Rattlesnake Sboal light-.sbip. Within a radius of 3 miles on all sides depths of 6i to 11 fathoms occur. The 20-
fathom curve is distant 21 miles, the 100-fathom curve 36 miles.
Geographical ^wsiJioH.— Latitude, 33° 35' (00") N. ; longitude, 77° 50' (04") W.
Depth of waUr. — Ten to 11 fathoms.
Range of temperature.— Ah; 41° (44° to 85°) ; surface, 33° (49°.5 to 82°. 5).
The curves of air temperature do not diH'cr essentially from those of the two' preceding stations; the range of
temperature is precisely the same, although the maximum and minimum records are each 1|° lower at this station.
The surface temperatures, however, have a more limited range by 5°, reaching neither the same maximum nor mini-
mum as at Rattlesnake Slioal.
Table showing the direction of the winds, by qiiadr/inls,for each month of the year, being the means of fire years^ obscrrutivns.
Qaadrant,
January.
Febru-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
Juno.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
{)ctober.
Novera- Decem-
ber, ber.
Northeast
Southeast
Southwest
Northwest
13.5
2.2
9.C
5
11.3
4.5
8.4
3.S
11
2.5
10.8
5.7
11.2
2
11.2
3.9
8.5
4.1
8.7
2.8
9
3.3
15.2
1
5.8
1.5
21.1
.7
10.9
3.2
11.6
2.2
13.5
5.1
6.1
1.5
16
4
6.7
3.9
12.5 12
3. 5 3. 2
4.3 ! 7.2
8.3 7.9
188
h
<
u
o
o
1^
s
•
0
U
■4-'
;z;
CI
0
C
S
a
XI
^> s
^j
■j-j
r a
\
0
'^'«
u
Z
CO a,
CO c
" S
0^
z
D
D
X
a-
2 6
« s
U)
^
4-1
P S
h
1
J2
.WD
>- .s
o
C/)
'-I fc
t^ e
c °
2 s
•a s
CO ^
'a
I g
oo'o-
CE
Ul
UJ"©
£
to
o
1-1
;-
E
-
—
-
1
-
1
1
E
zi
—
=
=
—
—
~
~
z:
:=
—
z:
—
-^~
— pi-'
y"
E
*-*-
^
-.k
^
=
™
E
—
^
—
^,
S
..-
z:
^
1
s
:^
z
^
-
1
-
3
-
z:
= '0
,
^•-t
^
—
—
^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
-^
'
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— I
—
—
— L
—
4^
-^
—
—
—
. j.^
1 0
~
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
!=
—
—
—
—
— ^
—
—
—
—
—
rrsi
^^
—
—
— :
—
EZ
zz
—
_
ZZ
zz
ZZ
zz
zz
::z
ZZ
—
—
—
—
—
ZI
ZI
—
—
—
ZI
—
5«J-
—\
—
ZI
IZ
zz
—
—
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
^^
-— 7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
;
— ■■
— I
—
— j-
—
lA
—
~~ul
to
t
I
l.-'j
_(^-
:^^^
1
ZI
[i^
—
^
4e
2
!ZI
m
T^
■l—
>=
zz
~
;z
—
j
-M-
;
~
zz
in
ZZ
r^
zz
IZ
—
ZZI
m
^;
ZZ
ZI
^
zz
—
IZ
—
zz
—
—
—
—
zz
_
zz
IZ
—
—
izj
ZI
—
—
IZ
n
cri
I^
^
^
™
i^H^ik !
—
^
Elsi
ee;-^^
^2
-^
i£
z;
zz
1
^
zz
zz
;Z
zz
iz:
zz
ZI
^^
zz
zz
1
zz
zz
zz
ZI
IZ
ZZ
zz
~
IZ
—
—
IZ
E
—
zz
E
ZI
ZZ
zz
zz
—
7=^ te
1
/>
1
—
—
-
J
1
■>
1_ §
1
—
1
is
UJ
5S
■ 1
—
J
—
— ^
—
—
1
1
1
—
^^-
-^
— -
-^—
_
—
^-
(
=
E
~
1
E
E
i
E
i
E
1
1
1
-f-
1
—
— |—
E
~
E
E
E
—
^^
p
5
1
5^
^
si
z:zz
1
H=^
=
1
s
^
E
i=
§
5
— ^ —
V
■--. J ..
S<^ —
1
^
-
—
— 1-
E
E
E
E
i
1
— t-
:
1
" 1
0
CO
=
—
^
—
E
~
^7~
E
E
=
E
— ;
iE
zr
—
—
—
—
^^
^
zz
zr
=n
^
zz
1
E
=
E
E
E
^^
E
1
-+-
zi-
i
—
ZZ
~
E
ZZ
~
—
^
Z
5
^^-'=
___
— 1
- 0
—
—
—
~
"^
~~
E
^^
zz
~ =
zz
1
^ — ;
—
—
— i^
^
-
m
zz
^
ZI
^
—
—
zz
zz
—
—
-__
I—
bz
ZZ
z:
■
;'
'
rr
IZ
■\ \
1
s;
— 1-
1
1
tn
—
1 .
1
1
,
-y-^
,^
.V
— ■
—
__
.
— 1
1
^T-
—
iv<-
CO
UJ
3
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
-A-
— ■
-«^
— J
y^l—
— _
—
—
—
—
—
—
— _
^^
—
—
—
-r^^
—
' — -
- —
—
- —
—
—
^—
-^
—
—
' —
ultz
^
^•^
i
1
-*
-
-
1
E
§
"?
^
E
^
IE
E
=
E
E
s:
^
—
E
^
—
~
~~~ "
~
E:
E
E
=
=t=
-t—
t
E
z:
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
IZ
E
E
E
^
in
CO
to
E
^
5
E
2?
E
=5
^
i
"^
^
g
^
^
^
—
^
~~7
=
E
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
r
E
ZZ
E
E
zz
z:
— —
—
:=^
—
^^=
-^
— 1
1
—
—
— 1
—
—
— ,
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
-^
- —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
iC
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
\
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
-^
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
"-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
-„
__
—
—
—
—
—
—
"1~^
—
—
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
—
E
E
E
E
—
—
z:
E
E
E
E
1
1
-1 — -.-
mi
1— -
1
1
t
1
%
=:
^
^
E
i^
E
•-u^ ._ :^ _
'. ^^^^ r=;
)
lE^s
-4^
V
^
E
%
E
1
^
—
) ■■
5E i
1=^
Etz «
<
o
T
[
1-
E
■i
3
i-
1
c
r-
C
i
^
i
S
^
t
■
E
c
^
-^^
1
g
5
s
s
B
^— i —
1
1
o
i;
5^
o
e
O
—
e
-J
3
c
C
i
t
OS
3
OS
P
1
CO
S
1
1
1
I
r-4
a
o
]— 1
a
— V
s
— ^
±
iE-^ —
*: a
i
1 -
>
CO CO — <
MftW
i i fl
a ■-a' s "J ft
1
S >5 '^ 'i i
IS "^ e s B
£■1 -^ •; B
« 'o . l3 v. a
S D fc to 5
^ g H I
B 3 2 Si I
I '^i e|
E S i E t.
I I a- : I
"-S ! E-i
° t, .a -3 "9
« I
i
6 S
> a
a —
c 4i I"
- CJ
(r. :^ ^ K -
F S a 3 e
a. a o ^ a
e J-J t X.
■5 B " >H in
a § -5 * K
.0 ii >- *3 3
^ j; P B 3
a D. »j o a
^ -2 -3 g I
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 8.
CAPE LOOKOUT LIGHT-HOUSE, NORTH CAEOLINA.
Obsti-vcr : Denaisd RUiMLEY.
Location of station. — Cape Lookout lifjht-Uouse i.s .situated on tlie easterly sliore, laciug the open ocean, aljout 3
miles north of the extremity of Cape Lookont, North Carolina, and is ahout SO miles northeasterly from Frying Pan
Shoals light-ship. The sandy shore sloires gradually for about half a mile hefore a depth of 3 fathoms is reached.
The 10-fathom curve is distant about 5 miles, the 20-fijthom curve 21 miles, and the 100-fathom curve 35 miles.
Geographical position.— haiUndK, 34° 37' (20") N. ; longitude, 7()0 31' (26") W.
Depth of water. — One foot.
Range of temperature.— X\v, 41° (43° to 84°) ; surface, 42° (42° to 84°).
The curves of air temperature correspond more or less closely with those of the three preceding stations; the range
is precisely the same, aud the maximum and minimum records are each but 1 degree lo"n-er than at Frying Pan
Shoals. It will be observed, however, that the surface curves agree in nearly all their details with those of the air,
having essentially the same range, and being much miiro irregular than at the three preceding light-ships. This is
due to the fact that the observations were made in shallow water, close inshore, on a very gradually sloping beach.
Table showing the direction of the iiinds, hij qiiatlranis, for each montli of the year, being the means of fire years' ohscrrations.
Qnadrant.
January.
Febru-
ary.
Marcb.
April.
May.
June.
July.
August.
Septera.
ber.
October.
Novem- Decem-
ber, ber.
Northeast
Sontheast
Sonthwest
Northwest
11.5
2.9
7.5
7.7
10.2
2.7
4.6
8.G
3.0
10
0.8
10.8
3.2
8
4
12.7
5.2
10.5
1.6
9.2
5.4
13.9
.8
7.3
3.7
17.2
2.1
12.8
3.9
10.7
1.2
13.2
6.1
0.5
2.3
13.0
4.2
5.9
0.1
10. 2 ^ 10. a
3.7 ! 4.3
4. 5 , 0. 6
8.9 T.7
IDO
h
<
u
o
8
00
■
0
u
o
U
ji: .s
i1
ro O
s e
r p -^
►, op ^ ^
3
O
O
0
C3
u
• •
o
1/5 >
Z
o
5
X
H
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 9.
BODY'S ISLAND LIGHT-HOUSE, KOKTH CAEOLINA.
Ohscrvei- : Peter G. Gallop.
Location of station. — This ligbt-liouse is situated near tlie southern end of Body's Island, north of Oregon Inlet,
North Carolina, and is about 35| miles iioith of Capo Hatteras, and about 86 miles northeasterly from Cape Lookout.
Tho shore is similar to that at Cape Lookout, sandy, and shelving very gradually so as to afford but slight depths of
water near laud. The 10-fathom curve i.s distant 3 miles, the 20-fatbom curve 24 miles, and the lOO-rathom curve
35 miles.
Geographical jwiition. — Latitude, 35° 49' 07" N. ; longitude, 75° 33' 49" W.
Depth of loater.— Seven to 9 feet.
Range of temperature.— Kit, C4° (27° to 9P) ; surAice, C3° (28° to 91°).
The records for this station show an extraordinary range of temperature. The air and surface curves are almost
precisely alike and indicate the same range of temperature for both air and surface, within 1°. The lowest surface
temperatures recorded are probably the result of careless reading; the higher ones indicate that the observations
were probably made in very shallow and quiet water, directly influenced by the sun's rays during the heat of summer.
The highest mean plotted, 91°, is 21° higher than the maximum for the air at tho Tortugas, and 4° higher than the
air maximum for any of the other stations to the south of Body's Island. The surface maximum also exceeds that
of any of the more southern stations bj' 4i°.
Tablcshowing the direction of the leinds, by quadrants, for each month of the year, being the means of three years' observations.
Quadr.int.
January.
Febru-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Noveoi-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Northeast
Southeast
Southwest
Northwest
8.4
3.5
10
9.1
8.2
5.3
6.4
7.5
9.6
5.1
8.9
7.4
12.9
6
6.7
5.2
14.1
5.5
9.1
2.3
10
5.5
11.5
1.5
9.8
5.7
13.1
L9
14.7
7
7.9
1.2
15.4
6.7
6.8
1.1
15.9
5
6.2
3.8
8.6
4.4
7.3
9.7
7.5
5.3
9.3
8.C
192
<
u
o
0)
0
u
o
D
eg r.
Q O
o
" Jc
c
00
00
£ B
- 0
■n
CC
.0 1?
-o
o
PQ
c
o
4-1
a
be
3
I "
>
oo
CX3
ul
tr
z>
H
<
DC
LJ
Q.
u
1-
UJ
o
i2
a
(A)
to ^
f—
^^
;|
;-
"-
;—
-4-
r
P
j =
- — ^
—
1
E
—
E
—
E
—
1
=
—4
—
—
—
—
—
r=
—
—
E^
—
—
-
—
-
™
■ —
_>
—
—
—
—
—
— ;
ZT
~-
z::
44=
- "^
1
o ^
1
to
:
L
■^ —
".
—
—
—
—
—
^
^
^
zn
^z
IZ
i^
^
zz
—
~~"
~~
^
::^
~
—
—
77~
"7"
zz
—
—
^
—
zz
—
ZZ
— r
I^
~
IZ
"0
—
F-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
VTi
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
__
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
un
to
1
—
—
—
—
- —
^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
-__
—
iCi
'.
^.A^
^
_
1-
^
-A —
—
—
—
—
—
__
—
<>
iTi
—
J —
—
1 —
'
—
—
— '
—
— -
— \
^
— '
—
—
—
—
^
—
[
—
—
__i
—
—
— s
V-
—
—•
__l
E
E
=
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
^
^^
;;rP>"*
"•^^r^
i.
E
—
E
E
5!.^,
1
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
CVI
00
CO
IJ
g
LJ
u
1-
u
12
a:
n
rJ
00
00
_j__
r~
— !-
-,_.
t=:
"
^
~
^
_,
-r
E
—
^
—7'
1
i
E
^^^
^
—
"
^
E
V
1
^
—
—
E
~
E
E
E
E
tn 1
'V
_i.
\
t
1
/
—
-^
— ^
1
— >-
A
1
1
t^
1
=
~^
— f—
E
/
<
i
z^
z
^^
^
—
E
E
E
E
E
- _
E
E
zs
^
E
E
—
:^
"S^
r
r^
1
^
^
~~~~
=
^
—
—
E
E
E
0
o
-J
y^
IZ^I
1
1
£;
^
Uil
i
1
^-•i
^■^
Y
—
I^
—
ZZ
1
—
—
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
—
—
m
—
—
zz
■ —
—
—
— \
—
1
^Z.
^
^
5
1
___L —
—
—
1
'"^
—
-/
-'\i
—
1 —
—
, —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
, —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
V
s-
—
—
:c
-^y-
■ T-'
*^ —
-f—
E
- — -
#
rH—
— -
—
^z
—
— ^
— 1 —
E
E
E
E
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—~-
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
-^
S
10
■o
to ^
o - — —
t-^
0
L^
^
1
~ 1—
,^
-?
1
1
=1
=
^
1
—
^
y
-E
— f-
1
'U^
—
r^
1
^
^
fc;
— '^
~
r
5;
2
P
§
E
5
2^
^'
E
i
E=-+-
m
E
E
z
A
— \ -*
— \
t ^^^^
0
0
Ul
cc
!i
QC
u
1-
<
UJ
o
O
o
0
:*
1-
»-3
-^
_ ,- — . ^^
i_hr;
e
5-
u — !
^^ —
— H-
1
n — "
o
I-l
t
1
=[
E
1
o
CI
=5
—
<
e
:
I
c
c
-J
-i
1
' 1
OS
CO
00
00
i
02
"
s
E^
i
— 'x
CI
— ^%^-=
-S-;
'^ S S "^ vS
1 i
i 1
50
0
0
cc
■ IC
r- — CO
CO
<H
a
III _^7 .asJl
a ^ B
jq c S
"0 o oj
(2
; -a
to
> " C
i -s 3 5
•S -S ■^ :§ «
° 3 S J! -o
I 's -3 ^ g
a. " c a -•
•r : 1 » I
jQ rt o
o c
C 1)
rt ^
rt «
00 (i>
1- 00 (i>
■t^ - ^ -- 1
J^ O C 03 2
S w fV %2 ^
^ g o I d
^ I "^ i -I
— « c a. -u
ji s; s! - -^
M rt _^. -g)
Sl^ S g 5
s -a
■a -a
a a
•rt J .2 ■^
S -g -S .2
'^ ,^
g -3
ti a
C rt
rt
.-■ 5! 1 > i
QJ C .S _g W
■^ j= ::= fl, 'a
E" -si
E^
2 '^
o _aj a — ^
c s - s a
,, ;= t^ c rt
•3 flj o
V
^ -a
a ^
■§ .2 -u e i'
-d ^ rt ?
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 10.
WINTER-QUARTER SHOAL LIGHT-SHIP, VIRGINIA.
Ohservcr: C. Lixdemanx.
Location of station . — This ligbt-.ship is aucborcd2 miles SE. by E. i E. from Wiutcr-Quarter Shoal, and 8-} miles off
Assatcague Island, ou the coast of Virginia. It is about midway between Chesapeake Bay and Delaware Bay
entrances, and about 1'28 miles north of Body's Island light. Between the light-ship and the mainland depths of 4
to 10 fathoms occur. The 20-fathom curve is distant about 20 miles, the 100-fathom curve nearly 50 miles.
GeograiiUcal position.— LsLlitrxdid, 37° 57' (03") N. ; longitude, 75° 05' (29") W.
Depth of water. — Ten and one-half fathoms.
Hange of temperature (March 1 to January 1). — Air, 48° (33° to fcl°); surface, 41° (35°. 5 to 76° .5.)
Winter-Quarter Sho.al light-ship may bo regarded as the southernmost of a third series of stations in which the
surface temperature seldom exceeds 75° F., and within the period plotted (March to January) may fall (according to
t;he record.^) to nearly 3.5°. The surface curves are somewhat less uniformly parallel with the air curves than at the
more southern stations, but the ditfereuces are not very marked.
TaMe showing the direction nf the winds, bij quadrants, for each month of the year, ieing the means office years' observations.
Quadrant.
January.
Febru-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Nortbeast
Soutbeast
Sontbwest
Nortbwost
9.5
2.7
8.6
9.9
7.7
4
7.8
7.9
8.1
5.3
6.8
9.9
9.4
5.7
6.9
6
11.6
5.6
10.8
1.9
7.5
9.3
9.6
1.8
5.5
5.1
U.l
2.8
12.2
5.4
9.5
2.2
10.6
5.1
10.5
2.8
12
5.3
7.8
4.8
7.5
2.3
9.9
9.8
6.1
4
9.8
9.5
194
J
X
o
w
<
u
o
p
_3 T3
j:3
-H ^ U
x;
5
bJD
n
^
a
tf
X
rt
o
0
OS
s^
ff
en
o
o
•a
-*■ .s
o "
S8
M
1
I :
2 s
C/3
bo
a
•O
e
a.
o
<
<
a, ts
I =
ii in
4- H :5
= a
„ ■> 00
•n ^ -
' c S "
. 3 == j;
3 O
0_ TI
-^ C •£
-^ -S-
rt
flj '^
^ rt
- E -3 ^ K
EXPLANATION OP OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 11.
FIVE-FATHOM BANK LIGHT-SHIP, NEW JEKSEY.
Observers: John Reeves, Daniel Manlove, William W. Smith.
Location of station .—Th'xs light-ship is located about 14 miles from the nearest part of the New Jersej' coast, just
east of Cape Mny, north of the entrance to Delaware Bay, and about 56 miles northeasterly from Winter-Quarter
Sboal light-ship. It is anchored about IJ miles outside of the 10-falbom curve, in a depth of Vi fatlioms. The 20-
fathom curve is distant 13^ miles, the 100-fathora curve 55 miles.
(icographical ^josi/ioH.— Latitude, 38° 48' (25") N. ; longitude, 74" 3!i' (09") W.
Depth of water. — Twelve fathoms.
Range of temperature (March 1 to January 1).— Air, 47° (:J6°.5 to 83°.5) ; surface, 39° (37° to 7G°).
The temperatures at this station differ somewhat from those at Winter-Quarter Shoal, and not constantly in the
same direction, being sometimes slightly higher, at others slightly lower, during corresponding periods. With a
single marked exception, the summer air temperatures average lower here ; the surface curves are more nearly like
tbo.se at Winter Quarter, but do not sliow so low a minimum in the colder months plotted. An unusually high air
temperature was reached between June 19 and 29, 1882, accompanied mainly by southwesterly winds, which are tlie
prevailing winds for that month. This extreme variation is not observable at tlie neighboring stations, and it ap-
parently had no inlluenco upon the temperature of the water at this place.
Table sJiowing the direction of the windi, by quadrants, for each month of the'yeur, biiny the means of five j/ears' obserrations.
Quadrant.
January.
Febru-
ary.
March.
AprU.
May.
June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Northcist
Southeast
SoatUwcst
Northwent
5.2
1.8
7.8
UA
0.1
2.9
6.3
11.5
6.3
3.7
6.8
13.4
6.8
5.2
0.6
8.9
9
6
10
5
6
7
12.9
3.1
5.5
5.5
14.1
4.2
9.3
5.9
10.5
3.8
9.4
4.6
11.7
3.8
9
4.2
8.6
7.9
as
2.1
9
12.1
4.2
3.2
9.7
12.
196
o
U3
C/3
0
•g
CO
%
«
o
C
1
i
H
1-
u >,
^
» — )
•| n=
^
<
1 ^
1
H
Z
ro 0
00 tn
;
U
a,
00 c
2 H
H O
w
3
x^
D:i
I
c/i
H
1
Q
Si
X
WD
Jl
1
1
rt >
S
K
:x
y 3
s
Q^
a-
c
4-1 O
^ .5
0 ,
S
0
3 oo
..
^
if
i
^
1
•a
e
H
^
u-
^
g
g
• •
c
o
tn
a
1
<
2
<
0
4-1
tJ
51 s 8
t ° a 3
a " ^ u
£ y £ ^
i! - 3 e
3 >. "^ .3 .
(J ^ « ,2 ■>«
"5 -S "= « S
° .3 S » •=
c t>
O c
«
rt -S '^
^ 00 «
«— "^ 3
= 5 V
y « C
o Si ^ r
" n. ^o ^
c w ^* o
^ S s £i c
rt u '^ 3 o
.y a. -T3 t; -5!
'^ iL ± ^ '>
— V) c a. rs
Si S I E -B
8 .S K - I
0 t, .Si -a -5
- -^ n " §
-Jll^ i
g -a -3 «i -
.2 -2 = 'S ^
g v, «i o ■=
I. S .i 2
■^ a 2 -3 -a
■5 S ,2 .a S
" « "3 5 I
-" 2 E > o
1 F -2 I •^
ii si S
c 1. 2 E =
o w o — ^
U
fc! ^ — o >»
S " d •" "
S- >. § o •^
la
.- 13
b ii
s I
eas
SL
fat
sat
sic
the
tei
pr<
pa
Ta
No
Soi
Soi
No
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 12.
ABSECON LIGHT-HOUSE, NEW JERSEY.
Observer: A. G. Woi.F.
Location of station. — Al^eton li};lit-liousi! is located on (lie beach in front of Atlantic City, N. J., and just south of
the entrance to Absecon Inlet. It is 34| miles N. by E. f E. of Five Fathom Bank light-shii>. The shore in front of
the light-house is faced with shoals. The 10-fathoni curve is distant C^ miles, the '20-fathom curve 34 miles, the 100-
fathom curve 70 miles.
Geographical position. —La,\\taAc, 39° 21' 59" N. ; longilndo, 74° 24' 52" W.
Depth of water. — Nine to 15 feet.
Range of temperainre Qilarch 1 to Jannrfry 1).— Air, 4r)°.5 (33° to 79°. 5); surface, 45° (34°.5 to 79°.5).
Although located on the shore of an inlet, jirotected by shoals in front, this station affords more satisfactory results
than either Body's Island or Cape Lookout. The ranges of temperature given above are essentially the same for both
the air and surface, but if vre except the surface curve for 1885, and compare only the air and surface curves for cor-
responding years, 1881-1883, we find that the maximum for the air exceeds that for the surface by nearly five degrees.
The conditions are, therefore, very much the same at Absecon as at Five Fathom Bank, and the surface curves are
nearly as regular.
Table slioicing the direction of the winds, by quadrants, for each month of the year, being the means of five years' observations.
Quadrant.
Northeast
Sonthfast
Soulliwost
Korthwcst. ...
Jannary.
0.9
16
Febrn-
ary.
7.2 I
2.8
5.3
12.9
7.8
4.3
C.2
12.7
April.
9.7
6.7
4.9
8.5
May.
10.3
11.2
4.8
4.5
June.
7.9
12.1
6.3
3.5
July.
10
7 5
4.0
August.
9.8
9.4
0.0
4.6
Septem-
ber.
10.3
8.2
0.9
4.5
October.
8.C
7.1
0.2
8.7
NoTem-
ber.
4.4
4.2
8.9
12.1
Decem-
ber.
3.8
3.9
9.4
13.8
198
CM
is
z
c
•T3
H
«
S2 1-3
<
d:
o
dJ OO g
0 »- H P
5 2 H -^
w
^
D
H
in: el
0^
.- .2P ■£ -1
w
-1 ^'^
a.
4-1 u ,^
§
ttJ 3 OO
"ego
►-la.*"
cj -S
;?;
<
< ^
^
• • u^
G
O S
0
•i^ r
'O >
c
P4
o
u
s
b
O
z
o
<
a,
X
w
w
a 1^ *j
■S g,^
o 5 s
•^ S
l-s
3 -^ S 12 ^
^ U — -^ '^
I s
y ^
3 ;. ~
. ^
u _- a -3 1.
s = « '« s<
I e M c
i ■= - M
_>.
.S = 2 o
"O QJ t- ■', *^
ii ^^ 3 y -
rt cl *-• 3 5
1t-j C* -J "> •-
I 3
cj u O
o " u
S •3' S
u -Ta
ij .2
■ .2 .y pj
"3 t! O"
y y S
'5 u L. _,
> 5
j= >; a
c rt
S 2 - "S w
o £ - S! '5
•S ^ s ^ g.
s 1 1 .1 1
O O 3 — ^
(/; *> I- « .
g. " }i Ji ,=
V, =?
.2 -i i" f
" g " r
.S u § 5
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART Nc. 13.
SANDT HOOK LIGHT-SHIP, NEW YORK.
Observers : James CosGnovE, R. H. PRixcnARD.
Location of station. — This ligtit-sbip is ancliored in 14 fatlioms of water, off fliG entrance to New York Bay, 6 miles
east of Sandy Hook, N. J., the nearest land, and Si miles south of Rockaway Beach, Long Island. It is distant about
70 miles northeasterly from Absecon light. The 15fathom curve forms a bight extending in towards New York Bay
entrance, and reaching nearly to the light-sliii), inside of which the depths decrease somewhat rapidly. The SO-fathom
curve is distant 16 miles; the 100-fathora curve, 95 miles.
Geographical iwsition.—Ijatitude, 40° 26' (12") N. ; longitude, 7.3° 51' (42") W.
Depth of water. — Fourteen fathoms.
Bange of temperature (March 1 to January 1).-Air, 50° (31°.5 to 81°.5) ; surface, 41°.5 (33° to 74°.5).
The range of air temperature is greater than at any of the three preceding stations, but the maximum is two
degrees lower than at Five-Fathom Bank, about the same as at Winter Quarter Sho-al, and two degrees higher than
at Absecon. The maximum surface temperature is slightly lower than at the preceding stations.
Table showing the direction of the windi, by quadrants, for each month of the year, being the means of five years' observations.
Quadrant.
January.
Febru-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
A ugnst.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Northeast
Southeast
Southwest
Korthwest
7
3
4.9
15.6
6.7
3.1
3.7
12.6
G
4.0
3.8
15
5.3
5.5
5.7
11.5
6.4
10.4
4.9
7
3.6
11
7.1
8.7
3.5
9.5
8.3
8.1
6.6
8.3
7.3
7
7.6
8.8
6.8
5.7
8.6
6.4
5.7
9.5
6
3.9
6.1
13.6
6.5
3.7
5.8
14.6
200
<
Oh
<
u
o
i
<i3
£2
o
u
o
ex I
13
^1
s e
5 ^
■x:
o
o
X
u oo
3 OO
6 ,
C/5 S
o
c/5
2 c
C
■a
c
I 2
a
o
m
a
H
b
O
2
O
I
<
- s
II
'2 ■" at ■= -■*
^-12
C M u
«
'jO
>
flj
V
— 1
e
^o
p.
V
r.
o
K
c
Tt
7
V.
^
>
z
%
2i
£
-:3
V ^ ti 3
2 -B
n .™ .- rt
:- s!
2 ^ rt
■a r T. ■a
« « ■- tfi
a ° a a
H 3 ^ Q,
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 14.
FIRE ISLAND LIGHT-HOUSE, NEW YORK.
Ohservers : C. A. Blydexburgii, Seth E. IIuubard.
Location of statiqn. — This light-house is situated on the cast side of Fire Islaud lulct, south side of Long Island,
:il miles E. by N. from Sandy Hook light-ship ; and the observations were taken in the narrow entrance to Great
South Bay, between Fire Island aud Oak Island. The 10-fa thorn curve is distant IJ miles from the outer beach;
the 20-fathom curve, 18 miles; the 100 fathom curve, 85 miles.
Geographical position. —La.ma<io, 40° 37' 57" N. ; longitude, 73° 13' OD" W.
Depth of water. — Three feet.
Range of temperature (March 1 to January 1).— Air, 48°.5 (35° to 83°.5) ; surface, 40° (35° to 75°).
The observations at this station were jirobably taken in rapidly running water, as the surface curves are compar-
atively regular, aud the maximum surface temperature is 8° lower than the maximum for the air. lu the range of both
air and surface temperatures this station agrees most closely with Five-Fathom Bank, the differences being very slight.
TaWc showing the direction of the winds, hg rpiadrants, for each month of the gear, heing the means of five years' ohscrvations.
Quadrant.
January.
Fobru-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
XortlK-ast
Southeast
Southwest
Northwest
5.8
1.7
7.3
U.G
4.G
4.2
6.4
a.o
3.8
6.0
10.9
4.3
4.G
8.9
7.G
5
8
8.7
3.9
3.3
4.7
12.7
3.0
3.2
4.7
13.2
4.9
5.3
5.5
12.5
2.1
5.9
4.7
11.5
3.5
7
4.9
7.7
6.9
5.4
1.9
8.3
9.8
7.4
1.8
8.8
8.4
202
<
u
h
w
S
H
Z
<
u
o
-o
c
rt
(U
<u
H
3
en
T3
3
'i;
►-.
O
flT
ffi
rt
>
^
_ -^
o
^
•-M
c
M)
->
J
3
00
rt
M
-T3
o
d
o.
rt S
O C
rt 6
2 <2
OS
D
u
a
li.
O
o
h
<
<
O.
oc
25
lJ
cc
Z)
5
UJ
H
.y
oc
i
OO
DO
lJ
OC
i
0-
h-
u
o
a
oc
CO
0
o
t^
<^
o
i^
i^
o
-^
<^
O
cc;
-a*
^
1
—
I
—
—
3
—
E
E
1
E„
__
—
-J ■
f
Etr
EE
— ^
— I —
1
E
1
1
—
E
1
E
^
^
=
I
1
1
EE
i_
— 1—
. — .
^
:2
—
r-j —
i
i
=
z:
E
E
— 1—
1
=rT~r
1 —
^
^—5 —
-
1
1
—
5-.
5
—
— \-
\
^
JV -_- «8. . ^
^^
1 1 — \ — 1
— \ — \ —
1 — 1 — 1 ' i
y i ! 1 i M
^
1
o
tn
':
ir.
o !
s
o
O
0
O
in
•^
O
—
E
zz
zi
zn
E
E
E
t:
=
=:
^Z
tz
-V-^
tz
i —
zz.
7^
"t^
zz
=
zz
—
— '
— 1 — 1
1
E
=
=
=
E
zz
zz
E
ZZ
ZZ
—
z:
—
zz
^
^^
i— E-
—
—
^
0
—
' —
—
—
—
^
—
—
—
—
1
r^
^
—
—
—
' —
—
—
—
—
—
1 —
—~
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
^^^■E-
—
^
—
-
~
—
— 1
' —
—
—
—
— i —
/f3-
-^
^ —
—
—
—
—
—
— J —
—
' —
1 —
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
1 —
—
1 —
—
—
—
' —
V
V
O
O
0
1
•■' . . ^
1 J
^••■j
^*o
^. V
^'
V ■•■
l>
s
V
n
^Sii
— 1
—
—
—
— —
—
—
■
-U'—
^
/■'-'r-
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
— ^
^■=_
—
-^
kl
—
w
—
—
—
—
—
— '
—
—
—
—
—
1
^>^
■ZL.
— ^*f=
1=4-
.
-^
E
=f=
z:2—
E
—
E
S^
•j:'-^
^
EE
— '
—
—
=^
^-
^K
V
^1=
^^•^
^
=
K>
E
—
—
—
—
E
E
—
:z
—
—
—
—
~
1
1
V
-^
O
c<5
OO
OO
LJ
OC
Q.
UJ
0
to
L--;
■ — ^—
—
—
i
—I—
—^
<...
1
^
~
—
—
—
—
—
=
—
-^
-5
—
-y-
^
^
-4^
^^
±
";::-
^
=
h
^
—
—
^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
%
■^
o
o
lEJE
E
z^
i
—
^1—
E
E
E
E
E
=
~
E
ZE
zz
—."
^-^
F^
'z
zz
=p
E
E
%
V
— ,^^4^
^^-
zz
zz
ZZ
zz
E
~
-
E
zr
]
— 1 —
~
t
ZH
cz
-^—
zz
i^
Z3
—
—
—
—
— :
^
—-/
=
—
zz
—
zz
—
—
^:
—
—
— '
-"
zz
i±:
s:;
—
_^
^
s^
3:
—
—
—
ZI
zr
— [—
ZZ
zz
zz
"~
in
<o
o
O
ca
0
IC
o
o
lo
1
r--
JZ
s
^k
1
—
—
—
— \ —
—
—
1 —
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
-^
>«^ —
—
' —
— '
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
' —
--i
— ^^
5~
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— ■
—
—
1 —
—
1
—
'^'
— ^
—
—
—
—
-hn
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
^
^
1^.
—
—
—
—
—
—
— 1
—
1
A
s
^1 —
—
E
~
z
E
1
— 1 —
— f—
E
E
—
E
=
E
— •
E
E
E
1
E
1
1
="
^
5
zf
£
E
—
E
zz
E
E
E
E
ZZ
E
E
1
-
z
E
ZZ
^
^
E
—
E
E
—
E
=:
E
E
^
1
1
-t-
i
i
s^
E
E
E
E
CE
<
0
O
— t —
1
t-' c
! I
-t
3
c
(
[=
E
c
I
ft
a
c
->
T
\
r
-1
1
r
1
— i—
1 C
-t
1
5*
E
E
1
r
^
—
e.
r
I"
■^
c
>
3
1 '
9
3
9
1 —
1
^
23
3
1'
a
a
1
n
1^
i
p
Ei
it
— ' — 1— o
i-> <!l
^ a
•s
§
E
1
UJ
H
o
u
•3
Si
I
2
G
>,
'-'
o
^
«n
•n
>
^__
"C
_
o
tx
■-5
_c
n
rt
5i
-a
c
ft
CO
_-
«
■^
t^
u
-=
(^
<2
c
u
S
00
CO
H
^
i
■7
■3
T3
ti
rt
«
o
y
-«
ca
o
»i
00
"
■3
§
C
^
5
g S 2 i
C y
i t%
"I
rt u o ^ _H
c r H — -o
t: rt t; rt
s. 1 ■= b o
-= o S -3 s
.1 -S = "= S
ts s s? J ■=
E S s 2 -g
^ £■•= ^ 3
5 « I ^ i
£ 2 f. -I ^3
^. u c -^ a
&a . 5 ^ H
C a; > i*
•a c tn yJ P-
;s c o tA
C L>
rt c
=^ > t* y **
« >^;= o ;^
Ji ta C u 3
., ^ r* c rt
I " § I ^
•i -a "^6 -^
C 4J ft) .^
^ = - * s
S3 S _ -3 2
•? H ° « S
. «
tS
S -S K
5 rt
5
&;2 11
31
So
at
ai
s
s
EXPLANATION OP OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 15.
BLOCK ISLAND SOUTHEAST LIGHT-HOUSE, KHODE ISLAND.
Observer: H. W. Clahk.
Location of slat ion. — This ligbt-hoiise is located on tbo liigli bliifl' at the smillieasteru extremity of Block Islaud,
and is distant 82 miles northeasterly from Firo Island Light-house, and 78J miles W. by N. J N. from Nantucket New
South Shoal light- ship. The water is very shallow oti' the southeni eudof the island, the depths increasing gnidually
seaward. The 20-fathom curve is distant about 5 miles; the 100-fathom curve, about 70 miles.
Geograi)hicalposilion.—'La.t\im\e, 41° 09' 10" N., longitude, 71° 33' 09" W.
Depth of !c«(fr.^The observations were taken at the edge of the beach, below the light-house, facing the open sea
to the south.
Range of temperature (March 1 to Jannary 1). — Air, 57° (22° to 79°); surface, 41° (29°. 5 to 70°..5).
Although tho observations wore taken from the beach, the snrAice curves show little direct inlluence of the air
temperature upon the water, and are comparatively regular. The maximum air temperature is about the same as at
Absocon, N. .J., but the maximum for the surface is four degrees lower than at any of the stations 1o the west and
south.
Table showing the direction of the winds, Jty quadrants, for cc^ih month of the year, being the means of five years' observations.
Qaadrant.
Jannary.
Febrn-
ary.
M.-irch.
April.
May.
June.
JiLly.
Angnst.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Dprem-
bcT.
Northeast
Sontheast
Southwest
Northwest
6.7
4.3
7.5
12.5
4.8
4.2
6.2
8.8
8.1
2.2
8.2
11.7
8.7
3.5
11
6.8
8.9
5.6
10.7
4.6
5.2
4
16.9
3.7
4.1
3.8
16.7
4.2
6
4
17.0
3.2
9.8
■5
11.3
3.9
10.9
4.1
12.1
3.0
5.4
2.7
9.9
9.8
7
2.2
9.7
9 9
204
10
c
rt
•n
c
'T3
O
J2
*^
V)
a P
§ O
IX
§ bb
S '^
c
O
11
a,
-* ■£
^ t
a
_o
'•Cj
-M
C/2
o
c
E
!»,
I
Ji I
,
u
-r-
■u
o
■5
n
o
s
00
CO
^
•€
^
_!=
"
CO
00
?
•s
-S
o
-d
2
n
rt
n,
IP.
(.4
>=
K
o
1'
M
i
^
f>n
t
^
1
CU
2
'O
t
T1
■>
u
ii
F=
rt
to
*>
'rt
TD
^
§
?i
■a°
ti
^
S
^
•n
ID
t;
1
^
'?
rt
1>
0*
rt
■ni
o
r
i
1
s
1
■a
c
.5
1
f3
.t;- 2 E S g
OJ U L. --, u
s I = ^ ,_
"S " 3 "g to
oj Qj *; u
O .«
;•?,!«
■_= r" e rt
g ^j 1! ::
I -a =--3 ■a
:; c -s s a
•s S o Si §
T, S fli t:? »-
.2! -a s; g
w S " "
t)
2 S
B S
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 16.
BRENTON'S KEEF LIGHT-SHIP, RHODE ISLAND.
Observer : Charles D. Marsh.
Location of station.— This ligbt-sliip is located iu the middle of the entrance to Narragausett Bay, about Ij milca
SW. of the southern point of the Island of Rhode Island, and a little over a mile ofi' Brenton's Reef, the depths
between ranging from 4| to l-lf fathoms. It is 17f miles NE. | N. of Block Island southeast light, and faces the
open sea to the south, the depths increasing gradually seaward. The 20-fathom curve is distant about 8| miles ; the
100-fathom curve, about 85 miles.
GeograpUcalposilion.—l^s.i\to.Ae,, 41° 25' (52") N. ; longitude, 71° 22' (3G") W.
Depth of xnater. — Fourteen and one-half fathoms.
lianije of temperature (March 1 to January 1). — Air, 45<^.5 (29° to 74°. 5); surface, 35° (34° to G9°).
The minimum temperatures are higher, the maximum lower at this station than at Block Island. The maximum
surface temperatures, however, show a difference of only 1^° for the two stations. It is probJible that the surtace
observations for Brenton's Reef are the more reliable, having been t.aken where the water is 14^ fathoms deep.
Table showing the direction of the loinds, bij quadrants, for each month of the year, being the means of five years' observations.
Qnadrant.
January.
Febru-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem- | Decem-
ber, ber.
Northe-ist
Southeaat
Southwest
Northwest
4
3
8.7
14
5
3.3
C.3
13.1
5.5
4.4
0.4
13.2
6.2
4.6
9.6
8.5
7.1
7.6
10.8
2.7
6.2
15
3.8
2.8
6
15.5
4
4.6
4.8
13.9
4.1
6
6.3
10.9
4.7
8.1
4.8
9.7
7.1
4.7
2
11
11.6
4.9
2.9
9.4
13.2
206
o
in
4
ao
00
o
o
ITS
-
E
E
-
4
=
J —
E
P
rz
—
zz
p
zz
lE
E
E
—
—
1
=
rz:
—
zz
=
zz
1
z:
V
-.T<
I
^
T— ■
n
E
zz
^
:2!
z>
ZZ
Tf;
EJE
Ti;
=£Sl
5^
EE
1
5=
=
^
mi
—
E
--JN;
■^>^
zzt<U
— i —
-A-
MS
CO
CO
_ «5
H
U
o
ir
LU
Q.
H
o
to
CO
o
U-3
E
13
E
E
—
E
Hiz
3E
E
^
E
rz
E
i
E
^
E
5S^
1
^
-^
P
^^
^
^*.
-
^
1
-
i
—
E
/
—
— 1 —
i
3s
iai7
1
z^zz
5
ziii
1
^^=^
5
—
—
—
—
—
=
zz
E
— -=^s
1
1
I t£5
- ■*
: °o
- ^
z °^^
z °«
_ »
^
—
E
E
—
—
=
zztzz
E
E
E
E
E
E
^
E
^
=
f5
A
-f-
ZZ
E
zz
E
=
zz
zz
E
z:
zz
^
E
r-
is
^
'^
—
^
E
zz
d
z^
Z o
_ w
—
1
— 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
t-
t.
—
—
—
—
—
— 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
_^
^
—
^^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
- Q
—
— 1 —
—
—
—
—
—
— 1
—
—
?^
— '
[ —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
-="1;
.. i >^^
—
—
—
—
- to
—
—
zz,
—
_
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
' — ■
—
>
—
1
—
1
—
—
— '
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
=^^
^:z
^
»»^
—
—
—
—
0
zz
ZZ
=
=f=
—
=
=
— —
=
—
—
—
=
^
^fzz
—
1 1
— 1
z:
zz
—
ZZ
—
7~
E^
^z
=
zz
—
zz
zz
—
zz
—
ZZZ
—
—
—
=
~
—
—
=
=
•^
M^
^
s^
—
Z ^5
O
E
—
~"
E
— f—
E
zz
zz
E
E
zz
~
i^
f—
~
^
-
~
zz
^I
zz
ZZ
^
ZZ
zz
—
—
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
—
~
IZ
IZ
zz
zz
ZZ
zz
zz
~
zz
E
zz
~
p4^
==-
Z °<n
—
;
,
-^•^
1
1
—
1
!
^V^i
—
— 1 —
H
—I—
—
—
—
1 —
— \
1
^z
—
—
— 1
—
— 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
K:
- —
!
— .
i^ii-
*«=iC:
■V^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
>
>4f
1
— ! —
— ] —
=H
iiSi
„-^i.J
^
—, —
h-
—
—
zz
ZZ
zz
::z
zz
^:
ZZ
zz
ZZZ
— f—
z:
::z
zz
zz
—
zz
—
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
z:
ZZ
zz
—
zz
IZ
—
ZI
zz
zz
--^
1
- —
—i<M
^
Z^
F
1
L_
=
E
—
:^
—
—
—
zzz
:=
Izz
' 1
—
zz
zz
zz
—
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
ZZZ
1 —
—
zz
zz
—
zz
—
zz
—
Z *tc
3^
^
^
zzrn
_^
—
—
_-^
—
~
E
E
~n
—
=
=
=
=
=
=
-?
-p
•ST
%K
^
=
^
^
=
^
=
=
=
E
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
^
=
=
E
■
CO
_t_
oo
oo
u
o:
u
CL
to
dE
—
=
1
—
—
—
zz
ZI
—
—
E
E
—
zz
E
E
E
z
=?
%
t
^
E
^
p=^
fi^
E
E
E
—
E
E
—
~
_
—
E
O
_l
fF
1 1 (
\
to
ZZ
^
=
~
— 1—
-\-
zz
zz
^
zz
—
—
—
—
—
^
R
^
m
—
—
—
1
t
3=
:dzz
ZZZ
ZZ
zz
3
E
E
—
—
—
i
s-
—
E
=
=
E
=
E
E
E
—
—
= °o
CO
o
in
=1=
E
E
E
E
r:
1
iz
zz
zz
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
-
^
^
p
2
1
E
S:
>
^
?
^
1
^
zz
E
E
zz
E
E
E
E
E
=
E
zz
zz
:
E
zz
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
T
j
E
E
E
E
Z to
— 0
— tft
_ l^
— 6
~ O
Z u^
"~ 0
H
<
1
t-3
■
15
<
^
c
i
E
H
<
1
E
->
r
c
z:
E
n
i
r
X
2
1
1
c
1
■i 1
4
E
c
E
E
'<
r
I-
It
3
3
r
c
I
■3
■
1
1
00
13
•*-
a ■
CI.
5
i
o
i
>
1— -V
CD
i
Z O
- *41
= "^
_ CO
Si -o
c, J "
c- - c 1>
5 ■»
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 17.
VINEYARD SOUND LIGHT-SHIP, MASSACHUSETTS.
Observers: Willi.\.m H. Doajje, A. H. Br.\y.
Location of atalion. — The Vineyard Sound, or " Sow and Pigs" ligbt-sbij), a.s it was formerly called, is anchored 1
mile to the south westward of Sow and Pigs Reef, and 2i miles S\V. by W. of the light on Cuttyhuuk Island, the sonth-
ernmost of the Elizabeth Group. It is situated 1"| miles E. by S. J S. of Brenton's Reef light-ship, and on the western
side of the southern entrance to Vineyard Sound. Within a radius of a mile the depths range from 4^ to RU fathoms.
The 20-fathom curve is distant about C miles; the 100-fathom curve, about 80 miles.
GeoaraphicalposUion.—ljAiW-aaQ, 41° 23' (02") N. ; longitude, 70° 59' (01") W.
Depth of water.— Fii'teeu fathoms.
Emige of temperature (March 1 to January 1).— Air, 43° (28°. 5 to 71°. 5) ; surface, 37° (31° to 08°).
The temperatures for the colder mouths were evidently more carefully road here than at most of the northern
stations, and the curves have been plotted on the chart for the entire year. In reckoning the ranges of temperature,
however, January and February have been omitted to facilitate comparisons with the neighboring stations. Com-
pared with Brenton's Eeef, the maximum air record is 3° lower, the maximum surface only 1° lower, indicating
closely corresponding conditions.
Tahle showing the direction, of the winils, hi/ quadrants, for each month of the year, being the means of fire years' obscrrationK.
Qaadrant.
Jauaary.
Febrn-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
Angnst.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Northeast
Southeast
Sonthwe.st
Northwest
5.8
2.4
8.6
13.8
6.5
4.5
5.3
10.2
6.3
4.3
7.8
11.7
6.9
3.6
10.7
6.8
8.6
5.8
12.3
3
4.3
5.5
16.3
2.9
4.4
5.3
16
3.6
6.3
5.4
14.8
2.1
n.3
4.5
11.3
4.1
10.2
4.1
9.4
6.5
6
1.9
11.1
10.2
5.5
2.2
9.3
13.8
208
o
<
U
Oh
S
o
OJ
m
CJ
>,
=1
•n
p
J3
P
H
C3
in
00
00
0
S
n
6
2
*-«
ri
3 *r
M
00
o
00
2 LO
3
1
1
Q
o
-a
?4=
t
1
K bO
rt
>
^J
-S
3
1
u
13
Uri
C
in
3
IH
00
O
*^
CA)
u
0
r/i
-a
R
u
O
rt
-s
c
en"
O
>
C
3
o
• «
Vm
c
0
o
c
2 6
o
2:
o
P
<
2;
<
.J
c
rS a
■s ^ a
= * 3 §
= c a -a "
c rf C Ji -
^ 2. >_ " 2
■5 ° -g «
o c rt '^
c- a I ^.
= ,2
"^ 5!
III
u c ^ c
S 'Z 2 ^ S
c S B s e
tf
'J ,, ^
■ ^ w
M '— -^
■s 4) o a
-S5
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 18.
NANTUCKET NEW SOUTH SHOAL LIGHT-SHIP.
Ohseivcrs: T. S. James, A. .J. Sandsbuhg, Isaac Hamulkx.
Location of station. — Nantucket (or Davis') Now South Shoal liglit-ship is placed at the southern oud of Nao tucket
Shoals, about 3 miles SSE. of the shoalest part of Davis' New South Shoal, and 21 miles SE. of Nautucket Island, the
nearest land. It is distant from Vineyard Sound light-ship about 58 miles in a southeasterly direction. In the im-
mediate vicinity the depths range from 11 to 18 fathoms. The water deepens gradually seaward, attaining a depth of
10 fathoms at distances of 22 to 25 miles ; the 100-fathoui curve is distant about 60 miles.
Geo'jrapliical position.— hatilmh; 40° 54' (51") N. ; longitude, (iOo 40' (26") W.
Dcptli o/ i(ia(tr.— Sixteen to IS fathoms.
liange of temperature (12 months).— Air, 4:!'=' (^2iP to 69^) ; surface, 28°. 5 (:W.5 to 62°).
Tlie position of this light-ship, over 20 miles from the uearest land, and in the course of those schools of surface
lish that pass around or through the Nantucket Shoals In their migrations, especially fits it as a permanent station
tor teuipei-ature and otlur observations bearing upon the coast fisheries. The temperature of the surface water is
more equable here than at any of the preceding stations north of the Florida Reefs, but the maximum surface tem-
perature at Nantucket New South Shoal is 8° lower than the minimum at Fowcy Rocks. The comparatively slight
range of temperature throughout the year has made it possFldc to utilize tlie winter temperatures, all of which have
been i>lot(ed on the chart.
The range of air temperature from Mari'h 1 to .January I is 40° (29° to 09°), nearly the same as at Vineyard Sound
lightship, the maximum being 21° lower at New South Shoal than at Vineyard Sound. The lowest air records for
the winter months also differ only 2° at these two stations. The maximum surface temperature at New South Shoal
is, however, G° lower tliaii at Vineyard Sound, and the miuimum between JIarch and .January, about 3° higher. The
r.iuge of surface temperature is, therefore, considerably less at New South Shoal.
Tdlile .fli0!vi"ij the direction of the wind, hij quadrants, for each month of the year, being the ntrans of five years' ohsenalions.
Quadrant.
January.
Febra.
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novom.
btr.
Decem-
ber.
NiiitbeaBt
4.R
4.1
5
7.3
9.4
5.2
4 1
8.1
10.1
9.3
6.1
4.7
.^oQtbeast
4.4
4.2
4.5
3.6
5.1
3.0
5.4
4.6
5.3
5.2
2.9
4.6
Suatbwest
7.1
6.7
5.8
8.2
i).9
14.8
13
10.5
11.3
9.4
7.2
7.2
.N'orthwest
13.7
12.6
13.8
8.8
4
2.2
2.1
3.9
3.5
7.6
11.9
13.8
210
o
00
o
•H
<
D
<
w
h
<
w
u
o
4-1
OJO
O en ^^
J- CO T3
3
O
z
o
3
*->
C
a
o
CI,
H <
u
■5
I :
z
o
5
I
bO
•a
d
u
I
•S S t 8
a ° s S
" H 5 j; ■
i ■; -3'S ;
c. " c o
_u ^ ^^
O -g rt
n *j ci. ^o H
a -o
rt 15 .S t
,^ ^ S 2 -5
° ^ .H -a -a
a ^ S a S
S - S 3 "
S- s -= S b-
' -u t; ^
rt " y "aj fcfl
t^ i .= - .=
s P i; j= I
to . Sj I,
^ c m lA O.
01 = = u i»
c t- 2 = a
U5 > ^ « .
I P--S
U 3 "T;. n.
,2 ^
w g
5 « ,, \-
II i i
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 19.
POLLOCK Rir LIGHT-SHIP, MASSACHUSETTS.
Ot.s(iros : William Haik.akd.s, J.vmks I'. Kklly, Joseph Allkx, .In.
Localioii o/nlalioii. — This lightsbip i-s iDciited in tliu luii'thcastcni cutraucc to Nantucket or Viueyanl Sound, and
3J miles SE. bj^ E. i K. from Jlonomoy Point lislit-bouse, at the southeastern extremity of Capo Cod. It is IJ miles
distant from Pollock Riii Shoal proper, which lies between it and Monomoy Island, and is surrounded on nearly all
sides, at dilii-rent distances, by small shoals or groups of shoals. There is, however, no land to the northeast, east, or
southeast of it. It is anchored in a depth of 5 fathoms, and the deptbs about it range from 4 to 7 fathoms. The bot-
tom in this region consists of sand and gravel. Nantucket New South Shoal light-ship is about 3G miles nearly sonth.
Geographical position.— LiitiUule, 41° 32' (27") N. ; longitude, €9° ^r,' (15") W.
Depth of iiatci: — Five to 7 fathoms.
Hange of temperature (March 1 to January 1).— Air, 3U° (21° to Gti°) ; surface, 30°.0 (3-2° to G2-.5).
The curves of surface temperature are more irregular and less uniform than at the three or four preceding stations,
and in many cases the variations do not appear to be due to the influence of the air. They may be caused in part by
the currents flowing through the numerous passageways between the surrounding shoals. The ranges of teuiperat me
correspond closely with the same at Nantucket New South Shoal, the maximum air temperature being 3° lower at this
station, but the raaximuui and minimum for the surface are almost precisely alike at both. The nuiximum surTaee
temperature at Pollock Rij), located at the eastern entrance to Vineyard Souud, is .'JJ'^ lower than at Viney.ird Sound
light-ship, at the southwestern entrance to the same limly of water.
Table showing the direction of the icinds, iy quadrants, fur each )nonlh of the ijear, being the nuans of fee gears' obscrrations.
Qaadrant.
Jana-
ary.
Febru-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July. August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Xovem-
bcr.
Decem-
ber.
Kortheast
Sontheaat
Sontliwest
Sorthwcst
4.5
C.Z
7.7
13.4
5.4
3.9
8
10.7
5.7
4.1
10
10.7
6 6
4.1
10.5
7. C
0.9
3.1
9.9
4.2
4.3
5.9
U.6
4
4
0
15.8
3.3
6.7
5. 7
12.2
3.5
9.4
0.2
8.5
4.5
10.8
4.7
8.3
5.9
6.8
3.1
9.1
10
5.1
4.4
10
10.!
212
s
o
O'
<
u
<
h
<
w
u
o
•-^
o
t)
d
rt
•
u
(/)
CO
4->
-r)
4-*
<u
•u
VI
!3
^
U-,
j=:
fn
f;
OD
C
rJ
M
10
0
6
r1
>A
0
S
OO
00
■;^
#s
u
3
CI.
-13
'a
C/)
rt
t.
a, 2
0^ ^
^
o
U
o
j:3
z
U
• «
^—
c
o
o
c
• »— <
cd
■l-l
<u
rt
e
4-1
C/5
^
•0
a
u
3 M
o
to
■4-
OO
OO
ui
o
;5
00
CO
LCI
o
0
°^
-
"
-
—
-
;=
r:
-—
_
': —
-
—
—
—
=
~
-
=
—
=
-
iz
z:
z:
z:
; —
z
1
^irr
—
—
2
-z
~
=r=^■
E
=
^
^^4;
-i-
^
1
^.
^2
f^
g7.j ■
zz
—
=
—
z:-
zz
-
z:-
--
zz
__
O
g
"t,
<ri
o
—
—
E
t:
E
=
^
^
~
^
E
E
E
E
^
E
E
^
E
=
&eH
3.
-^■^
^
—
—
—
—
—
E
E
E
—
E
—
—
E
—
IZ
—
~
—
z^
E
zz
^^
^
^=}
^
~
—
5
=
E
=f
—
—
=
=
=
=
~
=
— !—
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
rz
=
=
~
=
—
—
E
—
—
=
:^
zz
—
—
—
zz
—
—
—
zz
—
—
—
z:
—
zz
—
zz
—
—
^
^d
-Ef
=
— "
E
E
=
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
zz
=
E
E
E
IZ
~
'_^
-zt:
^
E
E
iz
zz
zz
E
E
E
E
zz
:^
i^
—
—
—
I^
zz
13
^^
zz
z:z
ZZ
ZE
^
ZE
~
—
;^
zz
E
E
E
ZZ
—
E
-^
^
i
E
—
^
~
;^
m
ZZ
ZZ
IZ
—
^^
—
^^
^
—
^
—
—z^
¥
^
*—
~
z;
—
—
—
—
;=
—
^
^^
=
—
—
=
—
—
=^
____
~~
ZZ
—
- —
^:
^
—
—
—
—
—
—
ZZ
zz
V'
1 !/■
iTs-
"ffi
1
—
—
—
—
—
L_
1 —
1 —
—
—
—
U—
_
__
—
—
—
—
—
— 1
—
—
—
—
^
—
1 —
—
—
^
—
OO
J.
OO
CO
u
cc
o
UJ
Q.
LJ
1-
UJ
o
cc
■=)
(/)
«
—
—
—
—
.^_
—
—
—
—
—
—
_-.
—
—
—
—
—
— -
—
—
—
—
—
. —
_
—
—
—
—
__
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
' —
—
- —
—
— 1- —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
o
■^
zz
—
zi:
—
:=
'ZZ.
^
^
-rr
^
7^
—
zz
—
—
ZZ
zz
z:
zz
—
:=
zr
^
^
zz
-r
^
zz
zz
zz
zz
zz
~
ZZl.
zz
zz
zz
: —
=
—
zz
—
—
zz
zz
ZZ
ZZ
^
zz
^
—
E
E
—
E
—
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
—
^
E
^:
z:
E
=
?
—
—
—
i=^
E
3
— ^
^^
^
^
^
■L-
—
:^^
^•^
~
-^a
E
E
E
E
—
zz
E
E
—
E
in
—
—
—
—
■ — (
—
—
—
—
— '
—
1 —
1 —
—
1 —
—
/—
;
-•--
—
^ij
.—
4^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
i;-^
j^
^
—
-—
—
-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
' —
—
—
—
—
—
---^
—j>
-^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— '
—
—
zz
— ,
—
—-
— 1
—
—
—
—
^t
—
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
^
tz
—
^
zz
~
zz
z^
=
VM
__
^
—
— '
—
—
zz
zz
'^Z
ZZ
^zz
;^
—
—
—
—
— -
ET
zz
--
zz
^
^
—
^^
=^
iZ
^^
=;
=
—
—
to
O
CO
1 >
,-'
,
'j:^
L
—
—
—
—
—
—
— -
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—/^
_„
—
— 1
—
1 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
^^—
—
—
—
—
'^^
—
—
—
—
—
^Nr-
—
■^
■Z"
VI
zriz
>N
\
—
—
— ^1
.— .1
-
^.'
'^
\ ^
'
___
_—
1
^^f-=
=^'^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
- — -
—
—
—
— ■
'
— iB]
" -V
-^
—
—
— —
- —
—
—
—
—
—
-: —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
- —
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
„__
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
- —
—
—
— ^
■^^—
—^
r
—
—
1
—
—
__
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
~
^
^
~
^^
—
izz
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
! —
—
—
-^
li^
—
—
—l--^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— i—
—
—
^ —
—
—
—
zz
"^Z.
^^
—
—
—
to
00
OO
LJ
Q:
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
—
E
—
E
E
E
E
E
^
^
^
^
E
1
— ^ i-*
sir _^
E
g
nT
±^
—
E
E
E
—
E
E
E
;i:w-
Z_X
iE
i
s
E
-
E
E
?
E
E
E
E
0
O
CO
o
in
o
in
UI
Q.
Z
UI
t-
QC
<
ui
1-
O
t
C
\
M
•3
c
r
5
§
E
c
%
<
\
c
—
r
<
1^
^
^
1
i
E
""^
El
t
<
^
^
O
^
o
CO
=1
c
I
4
3
1
-3
*
■5
O
3
P.
CI
00
CO
00
CI
i
1
■H
1^
1.-
O
t
izi
"1 —
rz
1
jZZ
H
(71
— to
K
W
O
?5
— A
? - to
'■4
1
to
3
zz "o
— J<
E S
— O
CO
° s
■V 2
s -o
-3 -S
s #=
Si
= ■5
^ s ■s -*
n3 ,2i
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 20.
THATCHER'S ISLAND LIGHTS, MASSACHUSETTS.
Obseri-ers: E. C. Goss, O. B. Colk, 6. L.\kbmann, oft lie U. S. Signal Service.
Location of station. — Tlie Cape Ann lights are located on Thatcher's Island, about three-fourths of a mile off the
eastern extremity of Cape Ann, both being on the outer side of the island. There are several rocky ledges in front of
the island, but otherwise depths of SJ to 24 fathoms occur within a di.stauccof 1 mile. A depth of GO fathoms is reached
5J mi^s to the eastward. Thatcher's Island is about 73 miles northwesterly from Pollock Rip light-ship.
Geographical position. — The northern light is located in latitude 42° 38' ai" N. ; longitude, 70° 34 31" W.
Depth of water. — Seven feet.
liangc of temperature (twelve months).— Air, 480.5 (30° to 78°.5) ; surface, 32° (35° to C7°).
The observations at this station were taken by trained observers of the Signal Service, and the winter records,
although covering only two years, are presumably accurate, and have been plotted. Observations were continued
through only three years, and there are many gaps within that period, which is very unfortunate, considering the
important geographical position of the station. Only one observation was taken daily, at 2 p. m. The surface curves
are very irregular, and in many cases, especially during the warmer months, indicate direct atmospheric influence,
from the similarity of the variations in bolh the air and surface curves. There is not always, however, a strict
correspondence in the relative positions of the curves in different years, the air curve from May to July, 1883,
being from 2° to 10° higher than the air curve for (lie same months in 18S1, while the surface curve for a part of the
same period, in 1S8.^, is from 2° to G° lower than in 1381. During the colder months the surface curves are very
regular.
The maximum air temperature is higher at Thatcher's Island than at any of the preceding stations as far soul h as
Block Island, with which latter this station corresponds approximately. In surface temperatures Thatcher's Island
agrees most closely with Vineyard Sound and Brentou's Reef light-ships, but it is probable that the higher surface
^.emperatnres of Thatcher's Island are due to the observations having been taken in a sheltered place.
214
o
CM
«
o
<
o
w
H
<
w
Oh
<
u
o
(U
3
T3
£>
</3
P
c
C
!■
■*
-C
^
>— .
^
oo
c
to
1-1
rt
z ^
2
E
RATHBU
ts, M
CO
CO
0
i
1
F
o
3
1
1
DO
^ j=
o
-T3
1
2 J
o
^
s
a TS
■5
"w
C
U-
c:
rt
c
o
B 6
c/5 ^
g
u
u
s
H
o
z
o
h
<
Z
<
>-)
a,
X
H
•*3
^
"O
' QO
^ •- C L.
■s 5 i 3
S "^ j; o
> *^ £
its.!
•c -a "3
^ 2 -^ "5 :s
o 3 S J) -o
I 's - '^ s
" j: 2 -S I;
•S u - - (S
:2 4i = -a
o.
a
E
E
rt
o
yO
>N
-fi
"
w.
s
:i
c
w
w
n>
V
•3
rt
r
«
2
fc:
C
rd
?
■s
>
!>
la
a
P
•n
n
iJ
c
^
?^
.a
to
>
rt
rt
•^1
•13
-G
u
-fi
•=
^ -5
.a Tj -^
^ I -^
_ c y -•
rt S
c ,5 .- rt
.- _, - a.
S K " e
; H u J •;
gfS'i
K ^= o
? j; ;
I «
ei
tl
5;
a
tl
ii
a
fi
c<
y.
8
r.
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 21.
BOON ISLAND LIGHT-HOUSE, MAINE.
Ohserver: Alfkeu J. Le.witt.
Location of station. — Boou IsUiuit is ;i .sin;in, low, rockj' islaud, ofl' York Harbor, Maine, and 5i miles (Vom Cajje
Neddick, tLe nearest part of the maiulaud. From Thatcher's Island it is distaut about 35 miles, in a northerly direc-
tion. Within a radius of 1 mile depths of 5^ to 25 fathoms occur, and a depth of 60 fathoms is reached at a distance
of about 6i miles to the eastward and southeastward.
Geographical position of the lighthouse. — L.atitude, 43° 07' 17" N. ; lon<;itudo, 70° 28' 37" W.
Depth of water. — Nine fathoms.
Hange of temperature (March 1 to ,J,uiu:uy 1).— Air, 51° (Sio.S to 73°.5) ; surface, 29° (33° to C2°).
This staticm affords the highest maximum surface temperature of any of the stations located in the uorlhcrn part
of the Gulf of Maine. This maximum is 5° lower than at Thatcher's Island, hut agrees exactly wilhthe surface maxi-
nuims at Pollock Rip and Nantucket New South Shoal. The maximum for the air is, however, somewhat hij;her at
Boou Islaud than at the two light-ships mentioned. The surface curves are more irregular than at the other stations
in the Gulf of Maine. It is necessary to explain, however, that the surface observations were not taken with any regu-
larity at this station, omissions of several days, sometimes as many as five or sis days, occurring in a majority of the
ten-day periods. The omissions are much less frequent during the summer than the winter months. It is impossible
to calculate to what extent the results may bo vitiated by this fact.
Tul)le showing the direction of the winds, hij quadrants, for each mj«(A of the year, being the means of five i/ears' observations.
Quu'lr^ut.
Noriheast . . .
Southeast
SoQthwcst
Xorthwcat
.Jiinuarj'.
3.2
9
10.9
Febru-
ary.
3.0
7.2
6.4
March,
9.3
.1.0
5.5
10.5
April.
9.1
8.8
3.9
8
May.
9.9
13
4.5
3.2
Juno.
5.3
13.3
5.0
4.8
July.
5.8
I-.' 0
7.7
3.8
7.5
10
10.5
2.6
Septem-
Ik r.
10
10.1
0
3.1
October.
11.4
7.3
7.7
4.2
Novem-
ber.
9.7
4.3
9.1
6.8
Decem-
ber.
8.8
4
U.O
8.»
216
(N
0
<
a
<
w
u
0
o
3
e^ O
^ CO
S :
1/3
O
4-1
T3
03
E
to
l-H
*^
c
o
1
0
CQ
fc
3
(J
• ■
<*.
c
0
o
a
4-1
u
rt
F
4-1
VJ
.a
60
c
•d
B
(I.
o
z
o
H
«!
-f. 5i
^
ia *J
^
»f^
.« c
H
^
•^ s
o
1
«i -n
£ "^
3 "
(J
5
a rf
_^
">
CO
-3
0 g
«:5
5
«"
^
•a
(3
M
.5 S
"J
c
y
- v2
c c
"t^ "O w — tj
y o c oo 5
oj u ^ - o
C OJ ^^ O
T3 1) *- ^ *J
S « 2 " S
il
S -a
'S g
Si 5 H >- -^
." I ! i ■§
° :^ .a -a -a
.2 .s = ■: a
•S 5 2 -s I
"5 S .3 .y S
= — -a t: a-
". !{ " S S
- £ E > q
■2 *^
u
! H y ^ -g
V. u 2 -S 1
a> V- y .
^ rt a ^, --n
C D " 4; u
4j _r- ,= __ nJ
Si ^ ■-= = >^
*•■ t'P I 1
Si ^ — •- ^
.5 ij y •> ^
•3 5 ^ 2i ^
?• £^3 U a.
r* ^ I'* E
rT (/J _j aj =
« i I a §
N
ti
of
of
V
1
Ie
la
te
to
N
Si
S
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 22.
SEGUIN ISLAND LIGHT-HOUSE, MATNE.
Observer: Tiio.M.\.s Day.
Location of station. — Seguiu Island is a .small rocky is'aml with pieci|)itoiis sliorcs, located alioiit'J.l luiles oil" the
uearest part of theraaiulaad, oti tbo east side of the entrance to Kennebec Eiver, and abont 47 miles nordiiastcrly from
Boon Island. Between Segiiin Island and tbo sUo.als bordering the adjacent mainland depf bs of 3 j to 9 falboms occur,
and off Ibc island a depth of 40 fathoms is reached within a distance of 3i miles. The light is placcul on the western
side of the island where the water is from 0 to 8 fathoms deep close inshore.
Geooraphlcal position.— ha.lituile, 43° 42' 26" N. ; longitude, G9° 45' 32" W.
Depth of water. — Six fathoms.
Eanyv of tempi ratiire (March 1 to Januaiy 1).— Air, 4G^..') (24° to 70°.5); surf.ico, 2.j° (3:i° to .".6'^).
This station has a shorter range of temperature for both the air and surface than Boon Island. The niaxiunimair
temperature is 3°, the maximum surface temperature 4°,lower than at Boon I.sland. Both the air and surface curves
are more regular than at the preceding station, and more uuifonu for all the years.
Table showing the direction of the loinds, by qiadrants, fur each month of the year, being the tucans if lire years' observations.
Quadrant.
January.
Febru-
ary.
March.
April.
Ma.r.
Juno.
July.
Auguat.
Scptoni-
bor.
Oi:lob<r. ^^^
Decem-
ber.
Xortbi^ast
Suiitbcast
-South wost
Northwest
7.4
2.1
9.5
11.6
7.6
3.1
7.8
8.8
9
4.3
8
9.2
6.5
5.4
8.6
8.6
0.3
8.8
9.2
2.9
4.9
0.8
13.8
3.4
3.9
7.4
15.0
3.2
4.9
T. 5
11.2
3.4
7.9
4.7
11.8
4.4
8. 0 8. 4
4.5 18
M.4 in. 1
6.1 9
7
2.9
10.7
9.7
318
^
3
CM
^
1
CM
?
&>
t^
0
■£
^i
0
!
i
H
1
(^
•S -o
<
•
1 s
H
X
CO 0
00 to
U
CJ
00 fi
ti3
z
3
^
2 S
- 0
ffi
0:i
S
H
(U
f/1
1 SO
1 ^
0
s
3
0
,2 ^
Is
<
o
4-1
•3 *;
w
J
0 "
c
3 oo
w
IZI
g
H
C
j3
i
^
3
u
<
CT)
u.
lb
o
w
O
"^
^
u
d
^
0
4-1
e
1
C/)
pi
•= S E
u O O
tat
= ■3 3
" >, ''
■S t: "3
c
■g
O -73
■i ^ S
•5 s
2 -S
■3^ ~0
T3 ^
rt
00
3
3)
V
R
rt
Q.
jO
ii
O
4)
13
C
it
-n
■>
-n
f
a
F
rS
a
c
J^ s
i ^ ^
Si s
EXPLANATION OP OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 23.
MATINICUS ROCK LIGHT-HOUSE, MAINE.
Observer: William G. Grant.
Location of slalion — Maliiiicus Roik is a bare, rocky ialut, about 80 milis easterly from Scguiu Island, and about
14 mile.s snutb of Viiial Haven Island, at the moiitli of Penobscot Bay, the nearest large piece of land. It i.s about 2J
mile.i SE. of Ragged Islam!, which is close to Matinicus Island and between the latter and Matinicus Rock. Within
a radius of a mile the water deepens rapidly from 4 to 45 fathoms.
GeoijraphiQal /)(.si(ion.— Latitude, 43° 47' 01" N. ; longitude, 68° 51' 20" W.
Dt'ptli of uaUr. — Six to 12 fathoms.
r.antje of temperature (March 1 to January 1).— Air, 42° (2."?° to C5°); surface, 21°.5 (:i2°.5 to 54°).
Maiinicus Rock and Mount Desert Ruck present the shortest range of surface temperature of any of the stations
north of the Florida Reefs, being 7° sliortcr than at Nantucket New South Shoal light-ship. The surface and air
inaxiiniiiiis for Matinicus Rock are also the lowest of any reconlrd. The surface curves are very regular and
uiiiriuin frnni year to year. Unfortunately, there are nearly as many omissions m the surface records for this station
as for Boon Island, but they are seldom frequent except during the colder months.
Table shomiig the cliriClion of the winds, by quadrants, for each niotdh of the year, being the means of Jive years' obsirtations.
Quadrant.
January.
Febrn-
aiy.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
An^nat.
Septem*
bur.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Iforthi-ast
Soiitbi^a8t
Soiithwf^Ht
"Northwest
3.7
4.8
9.1
12.9
4.6
4.9
6.4
11.7
6.3
4.8
7.4
13.5
6.3
4.8
8
7.9
6.6
9.6
9.2
4.3
2.7
8.5
12.8
4.4
2.4
9.4
13.9
2.9
3.7
7.3
:2.9
3.4
5.7
6
10.2
5.1
6.1
5.8
10
8.6
6.1
3.7
10.3
9.7
4.5
5.5
8.2
12.3
220
CO
CM
c
<
ffi
U
12;
<
u
o
c
g
O CO
a bJO
U
o
CO
o
rt
2 e
■S CO — ^
o s
c
(S
pa
s
g
o
<
<
; —
in
; —
=
;E
—
-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
iz;
—
—
—
—
~i —
—
—
—
z:
—
Z;
zz
zd
~
—
zz
^
zz
z;
—
Ej
—
zz
—
—
—
ZZ
_.
=\
—
—
-
^E
z:
rq:
1
^
— L
—
^
IE
i
zi
z
o
*©
1
E
1
~
E
E
E
1
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
^z
E
E
E
iz;
E
zi
E
^
E
E
E
+1
3
1
;:7^
_rr
-?^' — 1 [
1
—
^
s.^.
E
""
E
"7 '
^
1
^
^
-—
— ^^"ta- — ■ —^
!:=» .
1—
— (
zzr
1
~ 1
—
—
—
Ej
—
=
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E
—
—
—
'
—
• —
=
=
—
=
^
5
:.f- ■
—
—
=
=
Z=
—
—
- —
—
- —
=*
—
-—
E
—
E
=
—
—
ZZ
=
~ t
— • —
—
zz
— i —
'^
—
-^^
^I. —
*___ —
: 3
— -
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
'
t
~
7^
.<^
-i-
— ,
—
—
—
—
—
—
- —
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
- —
— ■
—
1
—
—
—
—
j
— 1 —
— ' —
1
— T
—
—
— j—
—
•ZZ-
n:
L=
=
zz
^
—
zz
— -
^
=«
k<-
rf^
^K
-__-
^
—
—
ZI
—
zz
zz
:^
—
—
z=
—
z^
ZZ
ZZ
zz
ZZ
ZZ
EZ
—
:z:
~ —
—
^zx
zz
x~
—
IZ
~~"
E
^IZ
^
—
—
—
ZZi
S!
^
—
—
■P
^
E
z=
—
E
E
—
E
E
zz
E
E
E
irrr
^Z
E
E
E
=^
ZZ
E
—
1^
E
E
■^
E
E
E
zz
E
E
zz
E
E
E
__
I r3
—
—
— 1 —
—
L—
—
—
— ■
—
—
— '
—
—
—
1
— -
— 1
—
—
i —
—
—
—
—
_
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— '
—
—
—
— 1
—
—
— 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
-
1 ^
o
o
1
—
— -
—
—
1
— \~
,
1
.
CM
—
—
^-
mmm
—
—
^
—
-*<
^
•a-
—
^
—
^
1—
««
— i
!.«
^
—
— ■
— <—
■^
^
^
—n
^
—
—
«j
=^
^
■■ ^^
1
1
,
.
t
i
i —
^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
' —
—
—
—
—
—
L_ ■■
1 —
H—
—
—
—
—
—
—
'
1 —
— '
' —
—
— 1
— -
— j —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
>
ZZ
1
...I
1
1
,
1
..
— 1 —
— 1 —
—
1
— 1 —
—
—
— 1
I
— \
—
~
—
—
—
—
—
P=
—
—
— '
___
—
—
'
—
' —
—
—
— '
—
=hz
—
^—
—
—
—
—
—
~"
'JZ
—
—
—
zz
zz
—
—
1
- ,
0O13
- —
-'
—
1
—
— 1
1
— 1
1 —
—
__
—
1
—
J
\
— \
— j —
—
— ■
—
—
'
' —
— 1 —
~ iTi
1
w-;^
1
=ll
1
= ';?
1
1
—
t
—
—
1
— j —
—
1
—
—
1
J —
—
-^
r^
=;;;
—
1
1
1
^
— "^ii.-:^
i^
e:^ —
—
;:^
—
—
S3
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
zd
—
1
^
~~'
■" '
—
—
^
L_
— 1 —
—
—
— 1—
— 1
^^■-^
ssfe^
; 1
---v
1
(
1
_x
Z \c
—
—
—
•
—
—
1 —
— f—
—
1
^
Li
' .-■
—
—
—
—
—
— i —
_1
—
—
—
—
—
--M-
f—
tc
=3
tf.
8
oo
1
— 1 — "
—
— 1
—
— '
—
—
—
r-
L--
,^
-=
;s
i^
L_
~^\
_^
—
—
— 1
—
-
^1 ~
—
—
—
—
] —
— 1
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
^>^
- '3
!?^„
'o
^-T^
-^■■"'1
1
*J^s^
•^ L
1
1
'-J
L
—
,
,
^^
^^^
*r..':y'
1
—
—
t
— '
^~
^
__
'^.
ii^ s^-?
"^
1
—
—
—
—
"
— '
—
—
_ — -
—
—
—
— 1—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— E-
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1—
—
1
-UtiUL-
-•■■ 1
1
1
trj
«
— '
—
— 1
—
—
—
■rfisa:
J
- —
1
—
— 1
—
—
—
I
- —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
, —
—
—
—
—
—
, —
— ; —
—
—
—
—
— \ —
—
—
—
-^
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
-
—
1 —
— 1
1
J —
—
—
—
L_
1 —
1 —
—
—
—
, —
i —
-
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 —
—
—
—
1
~ s
1
1
1
~ O
_ CO
1
—
=
1
E
zz
E
—
=
—
=
E
=
E
=
E
E
E
^
E
zz
I^
E
-~ —
/^
2r
=:
^
i
r
1
-r
^
"
-4-
«^
ZZ
^
E
S
g
s
V
1,—
>^
E
^
E
E^
1
V
S
E
E
=
E
E
E
1
c
to
° I
-3
c
=
c
E
c
—
>
1
^
CT
zz
3:
s
g
2
zz
1
1
EC
1
c:
5
C
c
o
CO
P
7^
c
>
■4
3
c
c
4i=
g
\
1
1
-3
?i
00
i
00
s
5
J
::
E
i
ZI
-
i
E —
-=» —
to
JEfYlt
- <<
Z 'u^
- CO
is
CO
;§■§
E -
" s-
■s "3
_ a -^ =3 -■£
° 5 S i 1
3 - S~ •=
~ -a -
00
■3 t
-a -S - ■ o!
•§ -I"; 1 i
3 = 5 « &
G. 3 ;i f, g
tn Cms,
i ° ^ - H
X C fj » ^
d y yj - u
'i Z !^ 3 "3
■p ij
3 ,2
:^ S ^ =
— — til
5*
kJ ^, u
n u o ; H
■T^-S !- - ■=
° " -p •a
«
"^ c
c —
- i I §
y. o 5 -n
- D
^ C
r -a ^
.5 .y rt
^ t £•
w u E
.= u S > o
ij U I. _- O
•5 S 2 ^ rt
I 2 J -5 ^
rt " 4d "o W
of 6 ^ u
•^ C S c/ c-
C U 2 ■= 3
o 4J *3 :— jr
'^ '> ^- H "
4J -
c ti 'J ** o
K ^ O «
S « sj u S
w. J3 *S ^- u.
C y y .t:
S K w -3 5
S " f, ^ S
=■ S ^ "S. a.
■S .2 TT E i
" S ' "
^a
^1 ^ I
EXPLANATION OP OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 24. .
MOUNT DESERT KOCK LIGHT-HOUSE, MAINE.
Observers : Amos B. Newman, James A. Morris, Thomas Milan.
Location of station. — Mount Desert Eock is a small, barren islet, 34 miles E. f N. from Matiuicus Eock, and
abont 18 miles off Mount Desert Island. The rock is surrounded with deep water, the depths ranging from 50 to 95
fathoms within a radius of 5 miles.
Geographical ;)os»ion.— Latitude, 43° 58' Oy N. ; longitude, G8° 07' 44" AV.
Depth of neater. — Two to 10 fathoms.
Range of temperature (March 1 to January 1). — Air, 50° (25°. r> to 75°. 5) ; surface, 21°.5 (^3° to 54°. 5).
This station presents the same surface range as Matinicus Eock, with practically the same maximum and mini-
mum temperatures, but the surface curves are less regular and not uniform for all the years (especi.ally from 1881 to
l^iSS, inclusive), sometimes showing differences of 10° to 12° in corresponding periods. The maximum air tempera-
(■xire is 2° higher than at any other station in the Gulf of Maiue, excepting Thatcher's Island, Brenton's Eeef light-
shii) being the first st.ition to the south with which it corresponds closely in this respect. The maximum air tem-
perature at Matinicus Eock, the nearest station to the west, is 10° loarer than at Mount Desert Eock. Excluding,
however, the year 1883, in which the summer temperature was far above those of the two previous years, the maxi-
mum air temperature of this station would be only 68°. 5.
Table showing the direction of the winds, hy quadrants, for each mouth of the year, being tht means of five years' observations.
Quadrant
January.
Febru-
ary.
Match.
April
May.
June.
July.
August
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Northeast
Southeast
Southwest
Northwest
4.9
4.5
8.5
12.9
5.6
4.9
8
9.4
7.2
6.8
7.1
9.6
5.4
5.3
10.1
7
7.1
8.3
10.9
3
2.5
8.9
13.3
3
1.7
9.9
14.3
2
3
7.3
14
3.1
5.5
6.9
10.6
4.1
5.7
7.1
9.8
6.6
6.8
5.7
9.7
7.5
5.3
7.1
8.7
9.e
322
u
o
CM
d
h
i
13
d
rt
It
^ <^
r*j O
CO M
S 6
X -u
5
J3
s u
ID
CO
QJ
<2 T?
a
•& if «-
= .
4^
o
o
a,
S
a
» 5
2 g
2 B
2
C/5
z
o
t-f
I
<
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 25.
PETIT MANAN LIGHT-HOUSE, MAINE.
Observer: George L. Upton.
Location of station.— rotit Maaau light-houso is located ou the soathernmost of a group of low, rocky islets, known,
collectively, as Petit Manan Island. These islets arc situated off the western entrance to Pigeon Hill Bay, near
Gouldsborough, Mc., and are distant about 2 miles from the nearest point of the mainland. They are immediately
surrounded by lodges and shoals, but within a distance of 8 miles to the southward deiiths of (W fathoms occur. The
light is 27 miles NE. J N. from Mount Desert Ruck light-house.
Geographical })08ition.—hatUude, 44° 22' O:?" N. ; longitude, 67° 51' 51" \V.
Depth of water. — Eight to 15 fathoms.
Bange of temperature (March 1 to January 1).— Air, 50" (20° to 70°) ; surface, 27°.5 (31° to 5a°.5).
The range of air temperature is the same as at Mount Desert Rock, but with the maximum and minimum temper-
atures each 5J degrees lower. Excluding the year 1^83, the maximums of air temperature would be nearly the same
at both places. The surface maximum is 4 degrees higher at this station. The surface curves for 1881 to I'-'SS, inclii
sive, are fully as irregular as at Mount Desert Rock, and there is the same lack of uniformity between the different
years, but the variations do not in any way correspond at the two stations, and the conditions by which they were
produced were evidently not common to both. There is much greater correspondence between the years XSf^A and
1885.
Table showing tiie direction of the winds, liy ijnadrants, for each muntli of the ijvtir, being the vieans office y<ara' observations.
Qaadrant.
January.
Febru-
ary.
March.
April.
May.
June.
July.
August.
Septem-
ber.
October.
Novem-
ber.
Decem-
ber.
Nortboast
Soutlieast
.Southwest
Northwest
5.5
3.6
9.5
12.4
5
C
7.3
9.9
8 0
6
9.2
7.2
0.8
5.7
10.7
6.6
s.r<
10.5
8.4
3.0
3 7
11.1
11.8
3.4
3
14.3
11.4
1.8
3 8
13.0
11.3
2.3
.■5.5
9 2
10.9
4.3
5.0
8 »
7.4
». 1
0 4
0.3
9 0
7.7
4.3
T.8
11.6
2d4
10
CM
«
0
o
u
o
CO -(J
C5
Q ^ 0
« O -i
O HH rt
" 4-1 "
ton ■—
^ u
d
o
2
C/2
c
•O
a
D
U
M
X
H
b.
O
Z
o
H
<
a,
X
(I)
3 5
•a .S
6 JJ
_ -S u 2
Si ^
^.3 5
LoC'
collect!"
Goulds!
surroun
light is
Geo
Dtp
Ran
The
atures e
at hoth
sive, an
years, b
produce
188."..
Table sh
Quad
Noithoas
Southeasi
Soutbwcs
Northwei
EXPLANATION OP OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 26.
Isothermal lines conuecting the series of light-house stations on the eastern coast of the United States, represented
on Chart No. 1, constructed for every 5° of temperature, Fahrenheit, from 40° to 80°, inclusive, for the year 1881.
A temperature of 55° was reached at Mount Desert Rock between June 24 and 30, but otherwise the isotherms of
55° extend north only to Seguin Island. At Nantucket New South Shoal, 60° was recorded continuously for eight
days only, or from August 7 to 14. Two very short periods of higher temperature than 75° occurred at Absecon Inlet
(July 14 to 20, September 30 to October 24), but the isotherms of 75° begin regularly at Winter Quarter Shoal, where the
interval between the two lines is only eight days (July 13-20). During the period of falling temperature, the isotherm
of 40° extends south continuously within the year to Fire Island, although at Pollock Kip, Nantucket New South
Shoal, and Vineyard Sound observations are lacking for that temperature. At Sandy Hook the isotherm of 40° was
not reached until February, 1882, while at Five Fathom Bank and Winter Quarter Shoal the temperature remained
above 40° during the entire winter of 1881 and 1882. The isotherm of 50° extends south only to Cape Lookout in the
same winter, but in the early part of 1881 it reached to Martin's Industry. At the Tortugas the temperature fell below
70° during a short period just prior to February 8, and again between March 20 and April 15.
236
CD
(N
d
a;
pa
<
X
u
Sf
H <
<l
&,
w
<
w
u
o
T! OS
" i:
c u
o J=
o «
z ^
^ .s
O (U
a Ml
o
00
Vi
ti
(LI
u
_ W)
o
C/5
3
O
o 5
S«
O M
(1)
D
♦-J
2
6r
Q.
c
Ui
c
O
QJ
aj
c
^
C
o
0
tn
u
OJ
<)>
.■^
hri
u
c;
'•^
T3
«_^
OJ
rt
>
fcl
y=
f^
J=.
o>
o
S
1^ .■■§.!
-* ^ w . r: t-
t- *-< D rt
•s-
c is u
o
E
OJ ^
c o
- pS
'^ •£ '-2
■^ E "S "
,p t. ui 5
a g
3; -a
O en
a.j=
o
OD
-S-5<
£; C rl -5
Ji ° " S "
^ ," -S '^ "
^ '"g rt E hu
■ ~ QJ "^ cj -C
o
n -= <
c ■-
J, ^ «
y. " -,
c
o
E
^
w u _ .fcj
= o
cd
c
■ ox
t! O i-
>-■ ^ r"
. ^3
■-.5 i " 2.S
" £i ^ :^ e g
'^ 'K'r O <!j ^ ^'
-C u::: e 1- y j-
H u « 5;-5 o
•£ £ S w "
^■■3 § -s -s
EXPLANATION OP OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 27.
Isothermal lines connecting the Beries of light-house stations on the eastern coast of the United States represented
on Chart No. 1, constructed for every 5° of temperature, Fahrenheit, from 40° to 80°, inclusive, for the year 18S2.
The isotherm of 40° extends south continuously in the spring only as far as Absecon Inlet ; during the period of
falling temperature, however, the isotherm of that value extends to Body's Islauil. Higher temperatures than .55^
were recorded at Petit Manan, from August 18 to November 8, hut the isotherms of 55° begin at Seguin Island. The
isotherm of 00° appeared at Boon Island and Thatcher's Island, but not elsewhere north of Vineyard Sound, although
the record is incomplete for Nantucket New South Shoal. The isotherms of 65° extend north continuously to Vineyard
Sound, and the same temperature was also recorded at Thatcher's Island. At the Tortngas, the temperature was
below 75° between May 9 and 21, and below 80° between October 8 and 14.
228
u
,0
,
tt-l
M
13
00
00
^-4
U
1^
0
c^
fe!
>>
s
<o
o
j:
(J
bJ
r>
^
n
0;
z
(U
>
^
3
CM
U
c:
r.
0
o
(U
%
-a
H
c
Pi
<
O
(U
a,
c
o
o
00
O
on
1»
Si
rt
3
O
o 2
sE
r^ 1
ffi
^,
0^
-&)
4^^
'5
^
x:
c
H
O
h
[2
y,
1-1
<
lU
x:
2
u
^
0
u
h
c;
4-«
C
!--(
C
o
o
u
c
u
<u
-^
-a
•a
<L>
E
u=
>.
u
o
CO
>
" r
(1
ifl
U
-□
.c
H
<S
^
-a
4)
,c
_o
1
c
S-, s
j:
^
"
a
C
1
j:
c
OJ
&'3
c
OJ
o
*-^
(4
E
o ^
rt
I/:
rt
;>^ «
a
r:
c
UJ
J=
i2
r
o
c
R
c
HD
o
f^-u
h
Q.J=
?^?1
4)
0
%'
'S
e
•£
C
Uh
5
a;
O
F
?
u
&
r3
j:
-n
3)
^
0
^J
g
c
o
•c
'>
-a
11
c
0
^
c
^
c
b
^
^
M
c
<
c
0
£
r^
oc
,
>v
4>
o
l-t
u
u
,r
T3
c
^
(S
E
n
c
0
C3
U'
j=^-
u
<:
T7
■2
1
-d
§
r
C
C
^
jU
CA
n
j:
C
s
h
&^^
i^.
cd
-If J
^
-^
fci
n
C.2
0 t« ^
■"
L<)
*-*
~ 0
w .
0 J=
rt
0
u
>
;>.£
3 qj -^ ._
00
r'N OJ viNioaiA vNinoavo hihoni pub Hinos
sj33a vaiaou
■^ ."^ >. a. 3
cfl 1> S CJ C
•" c 2 >- ra ,
111 J 11
^■i"g S2 u 2
H i; u S;-£ S
^ j:: to u
>^ul rt ^ ^
EXPLANATION OF OCXIAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 28.
Isothermal lines connecting the series of light-hoase stations on the eastern coast of the United States, repre-
sented on Chart No. 1, constructed for every 5° of temperature, Fahrenheit, from 40° to 80°, inclusive, for the year
1883.
The two isotherms of 55° follow one another closely at Petit Manan and Mount Desert Rock ; at MatinicuB Rock
the same temperature was recorded for two or three days, beginning August 9, and this point has been included in
the first isotherm of 55°. At Boon Island the isotherm of 60° was reached July 17 (that temperature, however,
continuing only until July 31), and at Thatcher's Island July 21, with no corresponding observations during the
period of falling temperature ; at Pollock Rip temperatures of 60° were occasionally recorded, but only for a day or
two at a time. At Fowey Rocks the temperature was above 75° from February 3 to March 3, after which there was
a period of lower temperature, continuing until April 1. At the Tortngas the temperatures of 75° and 80° were not
continuous between the dates on which the isotherms of 75° and 80° are plotted.
S30
<2 .^
4-»
U u,
3 S^
u V
t^ !^
C w
O J=
U iJ
« i:
n^
Z ^"
-*-" *R
cJ D
00
fM
61
C '
0
O 1)
Z
T3 ^
H
<
X
u
U O
0 ^
P
cm i
: House Stati
from 40 deg
0^
-G .if
bJ3 (u
S •
dl
y
° f:
h
|;S
?;
^ ^'
<
u
ng the
peratu
0
0 fli
s ^
Pi «
« Si
n ^
^ -a
•« ?^
E tc
S3 >,
-£ lu
^^fir
^^
^^F
c
r
1
^^ 1
sZ
■4
..J* e *u ^ t'
1
1
y
\,
r- ^
s
/
\
/
s •
IS
■> > - C
u .
_^^
_,
'— .-^
/
s
y
/
J
K
t- t; '" r rt
3 — "i-
_ ^^'"'''^
1 ^
■■^"-
y /
^ ^
/
/
/
>
.^
i
/
s
/
/
^ «-S:g^fe
__^
— --^
"""--^
A
s S
/■ y
g /
I g t °0'^
^
-•^
^--
/y
^. "^^
^ y
/
^^^
" — ^^
^'
/
s.
'"-^
//
\^
y ■'
"
1
/
-X—
= 1
^
J^^
^•-''
\
/y \
/ y
^ •
1
/
^\
LC
^^.."^
'"^'.s^
_^-'
l.^
yL^
' /
,^_.
-
^/
/
\
c s oj 0 u
0 ^c-a a
'
-^
/
^
-
^^^^-^.K^
^^ Xh^
/ )
/
2
y
^V-s^.^^X"^
N
^ y
/
■fe.
1
/
0:
/
-y
/
~~.^
J*
/
^^,,*-*^
i
r
_ 1-
: 0
- 0
_— —
y
****>«,,.^^
y-
y
/
' /
W
V
y
/
"s,^
/
"^
/^
/ jf^
^^^00-
' /
y j: ,« ra 0
V-
— /
^^
-y-
^\s
/
L_^
/ /
— ^
-^"^
-4-
CO -
-V"
-t-
^^ —
7^
"
""^"^
U-^ —
— ^ "
-^
"^
-7^
-t-
. Q.
_ UJ
- CO
\
y
1
_^^
/
/
<r
/
? 0 «> ° J
1 E- =:^
y
— ^^
-^"^
-^
/—
/—
— ^
f"
^
^"<^ ■
y—
/
-y
< ;
^
0 ^
^^
V
y
"ta
/
= d
„ <
0 g U; — b
"i?
r
<:&
K
V
/
/
\
/
"O 1. m M 'till
/
^
/
/
\
/
/>
/
/
\
/
^^^1-3
yy
\
/
— ■?
_i -
/y
-^^^^^
/
!9 3
•£ > -a (u flj
-4g
y —
%
7
s. — °^
r-r
^r*
\
-y
\ "0
L;:^^
— y
C rt C X C
0 -C P3 -w -jg
\ \
y
\
\
/^
y-^
^
V
J 1 ^^ .
■£ " 1 -^ ^,
z =
-
,''
^
y—
-Aj
— \r — '
y
^
/^
\°s
—^^^
^^
^
—
-u
^
.^-
—yA
v^
,
— ^
^^><—
^^ 1
~^
sSs
_ —
^-^
io
^
z
> z
< "
y
-^
-7^
^^r^
^
— -^
■~-.^
/
vV^
=^ —
V\~^
V
».
r--^
- <
3 - ^ a."
s
/
s
N.V
-
n\\
\,
y
s
0
\
■--*^
.f
—■ »,
^ _ ^^"**-T^
Nr
1- —
^^
\\\
\.
y
\,
\
~~--o
2 S£<-3
■in
^^
^^^01^
-^
s
"
^^
Vi
^^^^0-"'''^
tVA
, >
\
in!
\
^**^„^^
^x""*^
V Vv \
y
\
\
Q. -
< "
y
-s,
\%
—7^
-X-
\
- <
r/^-^
= i
^^
^
—
-u^
/
N
" — —
<e V-
«3 0 ^ a
"H-S J-TJ 3
0 ''i c S
<z
s :
"-^V
W
\_
^
""tffi
- DC
„ <
c = " S 2
- „ u X "•
''^Sw^
\ \
x;
-E a ^ >-i
^'v^^
\ \
s ^ -^
-v;—
\— V
v^
"^
^ ^' ^^ !
^"^
^r^
^"^
DO I
u. -
\ \
V
X^
0"° "■£ "
\ \
\
Xs,^
\\
\,
^
^
\\
;, \
\
3 \
,
\ 1
N
: ^
s
1
'■=2
s
=5 z'
^ <
to
S . . I. — u
z -
S
\^
y\
- tfl c *'^
<-
\
y^
:= 0 > c u
3 » <J= 2 u
1
1
CO
z
0
CO
w ««■ _i
^ « - " CO 1
CO
z
0
<
1; 0 « c r2 0
.^ g 1' Si a ^
t« -tTr 0 d> iti J3
IE ;£'' g g „ g
H u «j > -5 0
^ J= i« ^ CJ
Kill
3NIV1AI JO Jino
aOO 3dV0 0) MdOA M3N
■fNOlVINIOaiA
vwnoavo HiaoN p"e Hinos
sJ33b vaiaou
I
sente
1883.
'J
the e
the •
conti
perio
two
a per
conti
EXPLANATION OP OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 29. ^
Isothermal lines connecting the series of light-house stations on the eastern coast of the United States, repre-
sented on Chart No. 1, constructed for every 5° of temperature, Fahrenheit, from 40° to 80°, inclusive, for the year
1884.
Higher temperatures than ."iS^ were recorded at Petit Manan, but not at Mount Desert Rock and Matinicns Rock.
The isotherm of 60° extends north continuously only to Nantucket New South Shoal, but the same temperature was
recorded at Boon Island. Breaks of a similar character also occur in the isotherms of 75° and 80° at the southern
stations. The temperature fell below 75° at the Tortngas several times during the year and reached 80° only between
October 24 and 29,
^ 4
-a °°
1^
U u
3 «
t^ >^
C u
O J
n 3
o.i
C ,/■
0
o SC
Z
1.^
H
csi
£ S
<
0
|2
HI
"CM)"
K «
U
•^.■^'
Cu
bC oj
S
W
o ^
h
ing the se
iperature,
0
w a
(U «
d I*-
a 0
P, «
o (u
-S iJ
— -a
rt ^
E'^
1
1
Pn 5S
-;
c
CA
a
CO
E
i= s
3NIVW JO Jino
aOO 3dV0 oJMaOA M3N
TNOi VINIoaiA
VNnoavo HiaoN pub Hinos
sj33a vaiaoij
^ 1 =
-£ — =
« *-■ CJ .■
e o
O
tJ X ,_«
•• .'^ -C .
^ rt ' c
O T3 O
s " .
O u U- -
= 00.
•^ s |.
■E J"?,
'o m|
§.S i-
■B ^^
o O ""
3 *-^ j:
c »•,
4j "a
o J§ ^'
O i'
2 u
— f J '■■J
^ ^ C
.b » u
.c >-* >
«-> C3 (U
*-> s- U
c .i o
rt
0 >
t: o tT
> u ^O
U O M
« u- r-
•5 -£
c
-ri.g
sr-s
-.-ie
.r: '-'
s j=
B o
!•-
" ■£
c *"^
O J=
2 g
i s
' £i w *2
Cm T ''^
*" 2 c
1= E o
OJ *- «
2 o 5;
ti ■tl'ti
Isot
seuted o
1884.
Hig'
The isot
reconlec
stations.
October
EXPLANATION OP OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 30.
Isotbermal lines connecting the series of light-house stations on the eastern coast of the United States, represented
on Chart No. 1, constructed for every 5° of temperature, Fahrenheit, from 40° to 80°, inclusive, for the year 1885.
At the time this chart was prepared, the temperature records for 1886 were not available, and it was, therefore,
impossible to plot the isotherm of 40° during the period of falUug temperature, excepting for those stations at which
that temperature was reached in December. As iu most previous years, higher temperatures than 55° were recorded
at Petit Manan, although the isotherms of 55° extended north continuously only as far as Segnin Island.
334
r
Isothermal lines connecting the series of Light House Stations represented on Chart No. i, constructed fqr
every five degrees of temperature, Fahrenheit, from 40 degrees to 80 degrees, inclusive, for the year 1885
lISSUED IK ISBS.l
Z »
^^^M^
. -
L
^=
—
' z
= <
divided,
division
s. The
indicates
tions foi
OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No.30
By RICHARD RATHBUM.
-
— °«
"e*
^
— ^
—
— - —
1 >
i=
^..^
f^
--— ^
— , .
k
z! 1
i
1
^
_-•
n
"s
th is further
hen the last
vertical line
n generally
k of ohserva
z -
N;
'^■^
ZZ^
- — '
^— $>^
"•^*^^__^^
V-
^""^"^
^— --^
^
"V
^^
^
^ z
^^
••""
^
b
\^
y /
s.
. ^^'"
/
5§^
c ; u 0 u
0 „J= c a
E 0 ". 2 -~
„ <n c lA rt
— --
^"^
^
''
^^=k
- >
y^ A —
/
K^
'^'^
.•^
^'
A-
i;
- ■ «ft
-— — "
i
>s/
~y
>«v
^ — — --
^\^
^
7^
^^
V—
!t3
; 0
^^<.^
'1
/
y''^^
A^^
• —
^V
ar. Ea
ays tha
nth fall
osite an
> denot
-^J*
--*
>, ~
^ ,
— '^-
£-*.-*—-—
— — -—
^/
;;=— ^
^
— -N,
s-
(L Z
M -
y
~-/^
/* y
f-
»u=
a;
_ Q.
„ UJ
I *
X '
t v^>
v
^■^
-
^^^•"^"^'^
/
wing ye
more c
the mc
ne opp
' dasb'e
^^.."^
_^^
5is.J^--/
\^
,^'
/
°.n
/
^
y^
^
^^'^
/
s
^''
/
/
-^'
^....-"^
■A
>^
^^•^
/
0 !
/ "^
— ^
■
^^^-^
s
^
<"''
— -.-^
■*
^ 0
I <
-2 S "^ Z =■
"fS
—p^
t>
^K
^
.>-•
0 L_ Lo rt OJD
^ S3 -^E.S
\ "^
N
,-^
"o
U -^ 1 -1
s
i =
3 »
— ;;;r~]g
X
c._.
■
V
1 >
= Z>
•0 ^S3 0 §
y
^
,
\^
L — °S,
■~^^~]
— -.._
N
— s
'^'--i.^^
A»—
c « c _c c
0 ^ a w ■-
/
^^^
^.
°o
^*»''
_— »^.
-^-
_N
^v. Tv,
\
>
/
S »
■ — i— — r- 1 \
x
-
y
->
"v
S,
E ;i -c c ^
z =
3 =
/
\
l\
^
\v
^^
\
" 5
/
N
•>ii: —
r->^
^y^
^^V
-v^
^-<.
\,
'~~- — ^
-^
"— y
^?~..^
V
-H
— »..
Nr-
^
\
^^
^^
^^^
V
St
— /
5^~
^ E^'i S
/-
N
1 1
>s^
\,
—
X
v^ ^
>.
\^,
\
_*.
^_
\
/
" S ^ u >■
< =
-/—
^^
^^ \
_,^ -!
^
1
^^
^-^NA
v-^. ^
"
"'^-v
\~
/
- <
nclude
of tho
ith, 1
ampler
ng the
^
/—
!\
^
.^.*_-- —
^^^^r
'
"^^
N-^
V
=^
3;=^^^
^s.
"
°S
\ \
y
—y
-^J
/
■^■^^
1
At
vX
/—
V \
L
A
r to i
case
th,
A c
duri
of I
Q. ~
< -
X
/
■^
\
tA-\
/ J
lA
V\
r
i<A_
"«
/
1
_
\
A \ ^
V
^
** \
U u "C c
***■
— >
0-v\
/J
\,
^"Ssi^,^^
\
^•£ s'TJ.2
^^"^.^
^x\
/x
N.
^^
— 1
'•-, \
fe-
c = - 5 «
• - ■" u 5 '■
X\
^'^
S
s \
,„,---*'^^
of -
< :
E :
N
/
-■
-^.^,^_^
~ of
_ <
„ 2
>
*"■■*•
^
0 thirteen month
days each, exce
seven days. T
"rom which they
s isotherm at tha
\
s.
\
CO Z
Ul ^
u. -
"»
<
z =
—1
= z
a <
c:i 0 ^s
2^4; «J".2 J=
This chart is divided yertica
by the lignter lines, into periods
of the month may equal four, fi
transverse lines represent the sta
that the temperature did notrea
the corresponding station.
1
'
CO
z
0
CO
1
«
cd
Z
1
1
1
c
Z
t
a
«
1
3
1 1
1 ii
i <
r <
= </
Boon Island
Thatcher's Island
DollnKb Pin 1 e
09
1
> w
i _•
1 I
! 1
1
■E
1
5
-I
1
Block island
Fire Island
Absecon Inlet
Five Fathom Bank L. S.
Winter Quarter Shoal L. S.
Body's Island
Cape Lookout
Frying Pan Shoals L. S.
Rattlesnake Shoal L. S.
Martin's Industry Shoal L. S.
Fowey Rocks
Carysfort Reef
Dry Tortugas
CO
z
0
1-
<
1-
3NIVW
J JO J
ino
aOO 3dVO 01 ^laOA M3N
■f
A' 04 VINIOaiA
VNinoavo HiaoNPut
Hinos
sj33y vaiaoij
EXPLANATION OF OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 31.
Isothermal lines connecting the series of light-house stations on the eastern coast of the United States, represented
on Chart No. 1, constructed for every 5° of temperature, Fahrenheit, from 40° to 80°, inclusive, being the means of
five years' observations, from 1881 to 1885, inclusive.
Most of the plottings on this chart are reductions of the observations of five years, bnt in some cases they rep.
resent a shorter period, though seldom less than four years, and never less than three years. The exact number of
observations in each case.may be determined by reference to the five preceding charts (Nos. 26-30) on which the iso-
therms for each year are separately shown. At Thatcher's Island, Massachnsetts, no records were kept after the sum-
mer of 1883, and at Body's Island, Virginia, observations ceased to be taken after October of the same year. At none
of the other stations, however, do serious breaks in the records occur, and there are seldom more than one or two
omissions at any station.
S3C
CO
d
<
X
u
r ' a
w
H
<
o
o
.3
U
E (D
o c
o ^
ZV)
t: c 4J
J ^-^
IS-
ttJ o CO
(/J ^ M
So
S 6 .
o *
CD
U 'Sj
s -^
C B
.2 "
^ i:
bJD J2
J Si' °
u c >
-C !j« c
•^ o
«> o) C
.S <U £«
u U U
i) feb S
<1J
O
—1 o
P'
^^p-
^^^
< =
1
1
i
T.
■z
— *
1
/
Nfc.
— X
\
»
~
1
■^
'^
/^
\
.^
s r
2 =
D '
~-...^_^^[ \
_^ —
^
, "^
1
/
^
•-.^.^^^^^
= — /■
S^-
\
,^^ta — L
-v^
■ d
■ — °c
^
'^~~->^
z:^
^^
^^^^=*^
"^Z-,
^ —
^*
/
— 1°
ft—
j^.
y^
-^
. J
'^ ^
—y
"^-^^
_^^:g_/i
. 3
> .
o;
yL
^«^
L,..^^'
' — ^
V^
y-
^
- z
?^
^^'-'^
Ly- —
J >sa
_
^~""*~
w^^
— -^----f
?^>^^
^''Vf
"k.l
^— 1
U^"^
/
y^
/*■*— ^ 1
^
1
^*^^.
\r-^
■"'^''''^ _. " ,^
/^
^
/
~
§;
— ^v
^
1 .
r^„-
5
^
.-^
^^
j
/— ,
y^
:§
=x
1=;^
^~~^
■
^
-- — "
— y
/^ — 4
' y
"
/'
y
^^^■^
^-1
""P^^
^ :
/—
CO =
/
/
J
^-"
_^
_ Q.
- UI
°s-
°g
»o
^^-n
-^--v-
i^— -—
y^-°iA
-^
1
©
y
^^^
y^
— Tv^
V—
y
/
\
/
■
y^
. — '
<:
/
/
"<=
^
e©
r
/
tA
t^
o
■
av -
■-
i
2 "
o
■
^ sa
'?( — k
1
„
\ '^
■ ^ 1
■V . jii
■
'
S3
k
\'^'
i\ 1
V
/
^-~— -^^
's.
N
y
^■^ _
\
N.l>^
\
/
N,
z =
3 =
<5
^..-^^
\
-^
^-^
-— X
h-f^ -
k\^
y
^^
~ U
y
r^
Y"^
???^"
V
t^
=■ z
= 3
> z
< -
=^
:^
^^s~
-^
^
"V
Wv
vi:^
.
CT-
- <
-/
— N
-_,^-^
^v,^^
!:r^~.~
]
N^
UI"!
i=^^=-
L-
vw
{^^^-"-"^
^^ °S\—
'^
/
"^"-^^
■^^^^.^^
;-— ^
^^
\^-^
^-.
/
r\A^
y^
— ^^
=^
_,^
-^. ^
rX-
^^^
Y—
WN
^^
^
i CC
„ Q.
^ <
.^
--^
--~^^
— H
r^
N^h^-'
KV
"A
V
1\ \ \
^
\
1
N^
^T\ T >
V.
V V \
^^.^
\
^
>j
* 1 V
y
\^
\ \
V
's
I
ii'—
= 5
° E
1;
\
.yr
\
\ \
\
\
/
VVt
\
\
/
V\'\
N
\,
/
N \ ^
V
\,
/
as:
u. -
\\
^Sv
sf
. CO
u
=* u.
\\
\
.■«>
M
s
\\
0 N
o
— \
ttS
= z
z =
.3*
05
Z
o
CO
C
n
c
R
s
1
I
1
1
c
' c
1 1
1
c
1 -.c
> (1
i a
: c
i 1
i c
E v
1
o
> oa
1 -
u _J
."■ .s
Ss "=
•g -g
13 &
_
1
Ui
</l
z
=
z
M
mJ
C
a
a
M
■s
i
E
5
«3
-1
Cfl
1
C
c
s
1
U.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
CO
M _i
CO d W CO g
^ 1 ^ lit
1 1 1 I 1 i 1 1 i J 1 =^
CO
z
o
1-
<
1-
w
3NIV1M JO Jino
aoo 3dvoo»»aoA M3N
■f'NOiviNIOaiA
VNinoavo HiaoN p"e Hinos
sj33a VQiaoiJ
e 4» « »-•
Tl 0 j: S ._2
■1 ;2 i' S »
-5 "^ >/! ,1 3
u s: c ^ >
flirt
the
cal
nera
obsc
ijire
0 ^ -z, n
2 0 " E~
S s- &-§
'Si SX-. r. c
>«^ H S
^: >.-t: -^j -T3
S'TS J C. S
■5 = ".5^
o ■- >- o
,o . ^, 2 2P
■E^-^.^-^
"o 5^S = 0
C « C r- c
0 -c c; - :;:
^^■£.S<3
le first
mont
th, 24
break
ear.
- S« =<= u -
-S i "..i Si
3 " a; CL.f
^"^. H i^
■- u u -c
2 g-£<-3
U »J "^ C
^■S s'-^-2
c.= •" a 2
n months i
ch, except
ay.s. The
ch they ex
m at that s
". a^ X. 'r.
JJ «J ^ ^ _g
'^ >^> ^ 0
into t
six da
or se
ns fro
the is
>»u_ u 0 J=
=: 0 > c y
S " "= 2 S
ed vert
0 perio
al four
nt the
id not
c
0
-3 ^ 3 W -T3
chart is:divi
Iter lines, in
nth may eq
lines repres
emperature
fin
a
.2 m2 J! -
-C -.JS G 1I: <u
H 0. 0 g-5
0
j= .c 5
byt
oft
tran
that
on C
five
rese
obsf
thei
mer
of t
omi.
EXPLANATION OP OCEAN TEMPERATURE CHART No. 38.
The air and surface isotherms of 40°, 45", and 50°, Fahrenheit, at the light-house Btations of the eastern coast of
the United States, during the years laSl and 1883.
This chart has heen prepared to permit of a compsirison of the surface with the air isotherms at the several light-
houses and light-ships now under consideration. It has been noticed by previous observers that, in certain locali-
ties, the rise and fall in the surface temperatures maintain a nearly constant relation to the rise and fall in the air
temperatures at the same place. For example, the surface temperatures of 40°, 45°, and 50° may follow the air tem-
peratures of the same value at more or less regular intervals, and the length of these intervals may bo sntBciently
uniform to permit of a prediction of the surface temperature several days in advance, with approximate accuracy.
Such predictions would he of great practical value in determining the time when schools of those fishes that regulate
their migrations by the surface temperature of the water might he expected at certain fishing grounds. It is very
probable, for example, that the spring migrations of mackerel and menhaden are regulated mainly, if not entirely, by
changes of eorface temperature.
The writer has made many plottings of the air and Burface ieotherms conjointly, without discovering a constant
ratio at any of the stations. The two sets of isotherms shown on the accompanying chart are presented as illnstra-
tions of the variations that occur.
238
(N
CO
d
<
U
CjJ i
^ CO
h <
<l
M
h
<
w
u
o
a
o
O
r<-i
00
00
•^ C
•£ CO
n u
tT "^
' 1) ^
^ OJ
C j=
i be
rt C
to -c
- 3 ;
in -a <
OJ •
Ji « i
Ji ^ i
o — ^
IT) ~
c c
^ D
to
^ J2
o '^
o »-.
O
u
6
<u
*~* u
o u
"tl
D
CO
c
la
x:
h
CO
CO
UJ -
z-
3 -
■ \ -p^
"V
1
1
""
1 — r
' z
' 3
- .1<
1
'
tJ^^
\
1
- g>-^ ^. ^
_i,
.^
y^>^
y
iX
yi^^--
^
"•--J
,
s =
.•>y •^ ~^N
,'
1 V ^
'"^^^^^
■ X'\
i
%
"S
^^<!r'' y-? -^J-^--- ';\ X
■'
■ — -■
'
■■^^^
^
< v
<>
^^^
^^^=^
-^-.
5;;—
^^^
^■-'
'^■*
^
d: -
Q. .
< '
-3"
tuvTii' y
^r^
^^
f A
\
^
^^
_-
-.
1
\
3
>-#
/;»
\
N
^
J^%^^
.'"' —
\\
1
-^
♦'■'
\,
Ne^
7^
•
:^^
*=>«.
^^VN^
1 •'
—^^
^*
—
< --
r
^^^--^
^^
-^ .._
-At
F^^
fe^
IS.
1 ..'-
\.
\
\
^^ -v
\
/
\
V
\\ ^
V.^
. \i \\
N>^
^ \
=>
cd s
V
M
W
i4
- LlI
\
Ai
»S.'\'
^\>
^\i-
z =
'
\N
= z
\
'<S
CO
00
—
1
1
= 3
■
— —
^
*V
z -
>\
/
"■^.^
= Z
= 3
-SA
'•N,
""A
/
y
\.
'
A
' y
\
^
t^
V.
y ^ 1
\ /-^
'^
V
-■^
•^
y ^■
V \
Q. ^
V';!-— '
:
^~~'
.Aj^^ X
X
= .-
\^
/
\ >^
— _
o
^^A-', xs
\
\>v
/
^'■•»-^\
*»-»
^^•■•^'^
\.
— —
.6^ i^'i^
\v
/
y^
\
^^— -
Cv—
— —
^-^
Lft
7-
\
^
^^.
-^
t5^
-—^^^
^
< ^
^
/
y^
— ^
-^
^
^
e^
^S*-8Ht
w
I <
' cd
^ <
-^
V-
— ^
^
-Xl^
^P^.
•^\
/
—
^^^-^
sV|^
CQ ,
u. =
—
\v
- CQ
_ UJ
—
-^
z =
.^
= z
K <
—
—
CO
z
o
<
03
Petit Manan Island
Mount Desert Rock
Matinic'js Rock
Seguin Island
Boon Island
Thatcher's Island
Pollock Rip L. S.
Nantucket N. S. Shoal L. S.
Vineyard Sound L. S.
Block Island
Fire Island
Sandy Hook L. S.
Absecon Inlet
Five Fathom Bank L. S.
Winter Quarter Shoal L. S.
Body's Island
Cape Lookout
Frying Pan Shoals L. S
Rattlesnake Shoal L. S.
Martin's Industry Shoal L. S.
Fowey Rocks
Carysfort Reef
Dry Tortugas
z
g
<
3NIVIAI JO jino
aOO 3dV3<l >ldOA M3N
•fNo»VINIOaiA
VNHoavo HiaoN piiE Hinos
sj33a vaiaonj
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11